Catalog Prisma P 2012 (En)

Catalogue
2012
Low Voltage electric distribution
Prisma Plus
System P
Cubicles up to 4000 A
100E00000_P.indd 1 18/10/2011 13:30:40
Illustrated table of contents Prisma Plus System P
Masterpact NW Masterpact NT Compact NS630b
to 3200 A
Accessories
Fupact ISFL
Frameworks
Horizontal Linergy
Evolution busbars
Power factor correction
Connection by insulated
exible bars
IP55 cover panels
Lateral Linergy
Evolution busbars
Human-switchboard
interface
Fupact INF Fupact ISFT
IP30/IP31 cover panels
Distribution blocks
Lateral Linergy busbars
Industrial control devices
Masterpact source
changeover systems
Compact source
changeover systems
Interpact source
changeover systems
Alphabetical index
Catalogue number index
2
14
Range presentation
Determining
catalogue numbers
and conguration
assistance
20
46
Standards and
Prisma Plus tested
switchboards
36
Metering
A-4
A-50
A-56
A-9
A-52
A-60
A-13
A-54
A-66
A-45
A-39 A-40
B-14 B-18
B-45
B-20
B-54 B-55
C-12 C-14 C-16
Spare parts D-4
Energy efciency with Prisma Plus D-8
A-62
400E00010.indd 2 21/10/2011 15:09:10
1
Illustrated table of contents Prisma Plus System P
Circuit
breakers
Switch-
disconnectors
Others
D
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n
Main
distribution
Secondary
distribution
Enclosures
F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
a
l

u
n
i
t
s
E
n
c
l
o
s
u
r
e
s
Compact NSX100
to 630 A
Dimensions
Equipements
Rear busbars
Reserve
space
Easypact
EZC100/250/400
Multi 9 modular devices
Supports and xing
accessories
Partitioning
Protective earthing
A
C D
B
E
Fusegear
Interpact INS-INV630b/2500 A Interpact INS-INV250/630 A
I
n
d
e
x

a
n
d

p
r
e
s
e
n
t
a
t
i
o
n
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

i
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
Lighting
Designing electrical
circuits
Thermal management
of switchboards
Practical information Enclosure
characteristics
A-20
A-74
A-30
A-76
A-32
A-47 A-48
B-70
B-23 B-25
C-21 C-30
A-82
D-20 D-82
D-90 D-71
400E00010.indd 1 21/10/2011 15:10:04
Designation Cat. no. Pages
2
Index Alphabetical index
A
Accessories for door or rear panel (IP55) 01101 D-5
Accessories for IP55 roof, System P 01103 D-6
Accessories for IP55 side panel, System P 01102 D-6
Adaptable support for horizontal trunking (10) 04256 A-40, B-78
Additional 35mm block, 3P 04155 B-51, B-58
Additional 35mm block, 4P 04156 B-51, B-58
Additional cover for connection, W=650mm, D=600mm 04927 A-5, A-21, B-34
Adhesive drawing holder 08963 C-26
Adhesive label holders (12), H=24mm, W=180mm 08905 C-24
Adjustable modular device rail 03402 A-36, A-62, A-63, A-83, B-74
Adjustable modular device rail, W=400mm 03404 A-37
Angle brackets (4) + screws 03580 A-78
ASSA/ABLOY handle without insert 08933 C-25
Auxiliary bus duct, 4P 04203 A-75
B
Barrel lock no. 1242E 08942 C-25
Barrel lock no. 2432E 08956 C-25
Barrel lock no. 2433A 08944 C-25
Barrel lock no. 3113A 08943 C-25
Barrel lock no. 405 08940 C-25
Barrel lock no. 455 08941 C-25
Bars with threaded holes (4), 160A, W=1000mm 04161 B-54
Blanking plate for ISFL160 03740 A-53
Blanking plate for ISFL630 03741 A-53
Blanking plate for vertical NSX-INS250 03249 A-32, C-23
Blanking plate, 72x72mm, opening 03907 A-69, A-71
Blanking plate, 96x96mm, opening 03908 A-70, D-10
Blanking strip, W=1000mm 03220 A-40, C-23
Blue end plate - 4 mm AB1 RRNAC442BL B-69
Blue end plate - 4 mm AB1 RRNAC443BL B-69
Bolts for 5mm bars, 20 M6x20mm 04194 B-54
Bolts for bar connection to Linergy busbars (20) 04767 B-25
Bolts for bars (20), M8x20mm 04782 B-67
Bolts for lug connection to Linergy busbars (20) 04766 B-25, B-82
Bottom support for lateral vertical 5/10mm busbars 04663 B-21, B-28, B-30
Bottom support for lateral vertical 5/10mm busbars W=300 mm 04666 B-31
Busbar assembly for mounting ISFT100N/160 03555 A-54
Busbar cover for NW or ISFL, W=650mm 04860 A-8, A-52
Busbar mounting assembly for ISFL160, 100mm between centres 03545 A-52
Busbar mounting assembly for ISFL630, 185mm between centres 03546 A-52
Busbar/modular device connection, 160A 04147 A-38
Busbar/Vigi modular device connection, 160A 04148 A-38
C
Cable connectors (4) 250A, 185mm 07052 B-75
Cable connectors (4) 400A, 300mm 07053 B-75
Cable connectors (4), 160A, 70mm 07051 B-75
Cable tie supports (4), D=400mm 08794 A-13, A-19, B-65
Cable tie supports (4), D=600mm 08796 A-13, A-19, B-65
Cable tie supports (4), W=300mm 08773 B-65
Cable tie supports (4), W=400mm 08774 A-13, A-19, B-65
Canalis connection for front-connected NS-NT, 3P 04711 A-9, A-14
Canalis connection for front-connected NS-NT, 4P 04712 A-9, A-14
Canalis connection for rear-connected NS-NT, 3P 04713 A-9, A-14
Canalis connection for rear-connected NS-NT, 4P 04714 A-9, A-14
Canalis connection, 1600A, NW, 3P 04715 A-4
400E00017.indd 2 23/03/2012 09:48:24
3
Canalis cover 04871 A-4, A-9, A-14, B-35
Canalis interface, 1600A, 3P 04703 A-9, A-14
Canalis interface, 1600A, 4P 04704 A-9, A-14
Canalis support 03561 A-4, A-9, A-14
Captive nuts for M6 hexagonal spacers (20) 03194 A-77
Chocks (12) for Linergy Evolution 1600A vertical 04658 B-21
Chocks (12) for Linergy Evolution 4000A vertical 04659 B-21
Chocks for Linergy busbars (12) 01109 B-19, D-4
Clip-nuts for DIN rails, 20 M4 03164 A-77
Clip-nuts for slotted mounting plates, 20 M4 03180 A-77
Clip-on labels (12), 18x35mm 08913 C-24
Clip-on labels (12), 18x72mm 08915 C-24
Clip-on labels, 25x85mm 08917 C-24
Closing accessories, System P 01105 D-7
Comb busbar (W = 430 mm, 16 poles) 1P 14811 A-40
Comb busbar, 24-module (9 mm modules) 1P 14881 A-40
Comb busbars, 2 48-module (9 mm modules) 1P 14891 A-40
Compact NSX electronic trip unit divisible blanking plate 03222 C-23
Connection between vertical NSX-INS250 and universal power supply block 04062 B-51
Connection between vertical NSX-INS250 in duct and universal power supply
block
04064 B-51
Connection between vertical NSX-INS400-630 in duct and universal power
supply block
04073 B-51
Connection cover for horizontal fxed NS1600 04842 A-16
Connection for horizontal fxed NS with toggle or rotary handle, 3P, 1000A 04473 A-16
Connection for horizontal fxed NS with toggle or rotary handle, 4P, 1000A 04474 A-16
Connection for horizontal fxed NSX250 with toggle, 3P, 250A 04423 A-24
Connection for horizontal NSX-INS250, 3P, 250A 04427 A-28, A-30, A-50
Connection for horizontal NSX-INS250, 4P, 250A 04428 A-28, A-30, A-50
Connection for horizontal plug-in NSX250 with toggle, 3P, 250A 04431 A-26, A-30
Connection for vertical fxed NS1600, 3P, 1250A 04485 A-15
Connection for vertical fxed NT, 3P, 1250A 04475 A-10
Connection for vertical withdrawable NS1600-NT, 4P, 1600A 04492 A-10, A-15
Connection PAD, 4000A 04644 A-4
Connection plate for 10mm horizontal bar to vertical busbar, 1600A 04636 A-12, A-18, B-19, B-24, B-30, B-32, B-33, B-83
Connection plate for 10mm horizontal bars to vertical fat bar, 3200A 04637 A-8, B-30
Connection plate for 5mm horizontal bar to lateral Linergy busbar, 1000A 04634 B-19, B-29
Connection plate for 5mm horizontal bar to lateral Linergy busbar, 1600A 04635 B-19, B-24, B-29, B-32
Connection plates for horizontal/vertical PE bars (2) 04672 B-82
Connection support, 115mm between centres 04694 A-4, A-7, A-20, A-49
Connection support, 70mm between centres 04693 A-9, A-14
Connection transfer assembly for fxed NSX250 with toggle, 3P 04425 A-24
400E00017.indd 3 23/03/2012 09:48:24
4
Connection transfer assembly for horizontal NS1600, 3P 04483 A-16
Connection transfer assembly for horizontal NS1600, 4P 04484 A-16
Connection transfer assembly, 250A, 3P 04429 A-24, A-26, A-28, A-30
Connections 160 A (4) 04146 B-51, B-54
Connections for Distribloc, 4 NG-INS125 04047 B-56
Connections, 125A (4) 04145 B-50, B-54
Copper angle brackets (4), 250A 04190 B-54
Cover for connection to vertical device > 800A, W=650mm 04926 A-5, A-10, A-15, A-21, A-49, B-34
Cover for vertical NS1600-NT, 3P, W=400mm 04855 A-12, A-18
Covers for horizontal cable straps (4) 04243 A-40, B-77
Covers for Powerclip busbars, 8 IPxxB 04150 B-52
Covers for vertical cable straps (2), W=1000mm 04263 A-40, B-76
CS frame bottom cross-member W150+650 01117 D-7
CS frame bottom cross-member W400 01115 D-7
CS frame bottom cross-member W650 01116 D-7
CS frame bottom cross-member W650+150 01118 D-7
Cubicle handling base end-pieces (2), D=400mm 08714 C-19, D-105
Cubicle handling base end-pieces (2), D=600mm 08716 C-19, D-105
D
Diagram earth symbols, 10 black mimic 01009 C-23
Diagram incoming arrows, 10 black mimic 01007 C-23
Diagram lines, 10 black mimic, W=900mm 01005 C-23
Diagram outgoing arrows, 10 black mimic 01006 C-23
Diagram transformers, 10 black mimic 01008 C-23
DIN double bar insert 08945 C-25
Distribloc 125 04045 A-40, B-55
Distribloc 160+connections 04046 A-40, B-55
Distribloc 63 (bottom connection) 04041 B-55
Distribloc 63 (top connection) 04040 B-55
Divisible blanking plates (4), W=90mm 03221 A-40, C-23
Door with cut-outs for power factor correction equipment, W=650mm 03970 A-61
Double depth combination kit 08719 C-13
Duct busbar connection for 200A Multiclip distribution block 04024 B-61
E
Earth bar for direct earth blocks, 12x3mm 04201 B-80
Earth bar, 24 modules 04200 B-80
Earth bars (2), 12 modules 04202 B-80
Earth blocks with 12x4mm spring terminals (4) 04214 B-80
Earth blocks with 3x16mm spring terminals (4) 04215 B-80
Earthing braid, 6mm 08910 C-26
Earthing wire, 6mm 08911 C-26
Engraving plates (12), 18x35mm 08914 C-24
EURO handle without insert 08932 C-25
F
False foor fxing kit 08703 C-22
Fan 08987 C-27
Filters, 5 fne 08990 C-27
Filters, 5 standard 08989 C-27
Fixed support for lateral vertical 5/10mm busbars 04661 B-21, B-28, B-30, B-31
Flange for fat bars, W=400mm 04692 A-12, A-18
Flexible trunking for wiring to door 04235 A-75, B-79
Floor/wall fxing kit 08704 C-22
Form 2 cover for horizontal busbars, W=300mm, D=400mm 04973 B-38
Form 2 cover for horizontal busbars, W=300mm, D=600mm, 4000 A 04963 B-38
Form 2 front barrier for lateral vertical busbars 04921 B-37
Form 2 front barrier for lateral vertical busbars W = 300 mm 04920 B-37
400E00017.indd 4 23/03/2012 09:48:25
5
Form 2 restoration kit for side barrier cut-out 04924 B-37
Form 2 side barrier for lateral vertical busbars 04922 B-37
Form 3 horizontal partition 04901 B-41
Form 3 vertical partition for rear connection, 3 or 4 modules 04955 B-41
Form 3 vertical partition for rear connection, 5 or 6 modules 04956 B-41
Form 4 backplate for front connection, D=600mm 04946 B-44
Form 4 cover for connection transfer assembly, 3 to 5 modules 04953 B-44, B-45
Form 4 cover for connection transfer assembly, 4 to 6 modules 04954 B-44, B-45
Form 4 gland plate, 3 or 4 modules 04951 B-44, B-45
Form 4 gland plate, 5 or 6 modules 04952 B-44, B-45
Form C cable-tie support W1600 08783 B-66
Frame bottom cross-member W150+650 01121 D-7
Frame bottom cross-member W400 01119 D-7
Frame bottom cross-member W650 01120 D-7
Frame bottom cross-member W650+150 01122 D-7
Framework accessories, System P 01104 D-4
Framework, W=300mm, D=400mm 08403 C-12
Framework, W=650+150mm, D=400mm 08407 C-12
Framework, W=650+150mm, D=600mm 08607 C-12
Free support for 5/10mm busbars 04662 A-5, A-7, A-10, A-12, A-15, A-18, A-21, A-49, B-15, B-16,
B-21, B-26, B-27, B-28, B-30, B-31, B-32, B-33
Front connection cover for NW 04861 A-4, A-7, B-35
Front connection cover for vertical fxed NS1600 04851 A-14, B-35
Front connection cover for vertical NS1600-NT 04852 A-9, A-14, B-35
Front plate 96x96 for 1 device 03913 A-70, D-10
Front plate for 1 3-phase meter in duct 03154 A-66, A-67
Front plate for 2 vertical Vigi NSX630 devices 03666 A-25, A-27, A-29, A-31
Front plate for 3-4 vertical INS250 devices 03620 A-51
Front plate for 3-4 vertical NSX250 devices 03243 A-25, A-27, A-29, A-31
Front plate for 3-4 vertical Vigi NSX250 devices with toggles 03241 A-25, A-27
Front plate for 3-4 vertical Vigi NSX250 with rotary handles or motor
mechanisms
03244 A-29, A-31
Front plate for DMB 300 03916 A-72
Front plate for DMC 300 03917 A-72
Front plate for fan or grill 03890 C-27
Front plate for fxed NW 03711 A-5, A-6
Front plate for horiz. NSX-INS630 source changeover system with rotary
handles
03659 A-43, A-47
Front plate for horizontal EZC250/EZCV250 03304 A-33
Front plate for horizontal EZC400 03306 A-33
Front plate for horizontal fxed NS1600 with toggle or rotary handle, 4P 03687 A-16
Front plate for horizontal INF200-250 03727 A-56
Front plate for horizontal INF400 03729 A-56
Front plate for horizontal INF630/800 03730 A-56
Front plate for horizontal INS250 03617 A-50
Front plate for horizontal INS630 03658 A-50
Front plate for horizontal NS1600 source changeover system with rotary
handles
03695 A-43
Front plate for horizontal NSX250 source changeover system with motor
mechanism
03616 A-45
Front plate for horizontal NSX250, 3P 03604 A-24, A-26, A-28
Front plate for horizontal NSX630 source changeover system with motor
mechanism
03656 A-45
Front plate for horizontal NSX-INS630 complete source changeover assembly 03661 A-48
Front plate for horizontal withdrawable NSX250 03618 A-30
Front plate for horizontal withdrawable NSX630 03657 A-30
Front plate for INF32/40, 4P and horizontal 3P 03313 A-56, A-57
Front plate for INF63-160, 3P and vertical INF63, 3P 03314 A-56, A-57
Front plate for INS1600, 3P 03713 A-49
Front plate for INS1600, 4P 03714 A-49
Front plate for INS250 complete source changeover assembly 03247 A-48
Front plate for INS250 source changeover system with rotary handles 03235 A-47
Front plate for INS2500, 3P or 4P 03715 A-49
Front plate for ISFL160, 185mm between centres, W=650mm 03736 A-52
Front plate for NS3200 03716 A-20
Front plate for Powerlogic CM3000-4000 03918 A-72, D-14
400E00017.indd 5 23/03/2012 09:48:25
6
Front plate for UA or BA 03671 A-46
Front plate for vertical 2 NSX630 03663 A-25, A-27, A-29, A-31
Front plate for vertical EZC100 03303 A-32
Front plate for vertical EZC250/EZCV250 03305 A-33
Front plate for vertical EZC400 03307 A-33
Front plate for vertical fxed NS1600 03690 A-15
Front plate for vertical fxed NS1600, 3P-4P, W=400mm 03697 A-17
Front plate for vertical fxed NS1600, with motor mechanism 03701 A-15
Front plate for vertical fxed NT 03692 A-10
Front plate for vertical fxed NT, 3P, W=400mm 03698 A-11
Front plate for vertical INF200-800 03728 A-57
Front plate for vertical INF32/40, 3P 03312 A-57
Front plate for vertical INF63, 4P and vertical INF160 03315 A-57
Front plate for vertical INS250 03248 A-51
Front plate for vertical INS630 03274 A-51
Front plate for vertical ISFT100 03320 A-54
Front plate for vertical ISFT100N 03325 A-54
Front plate for vertical NSX250 source changeover system with rotary handles 03245 A-43
Front plate for vertical NSX630 with rotary handle or motor mechanism 03275 A-25, A-27, A-29, A-31
Front plate for vertical Vigi NSX630 03297 A-25, A-27, A-29, A-31
Front plate for Vigilohm TR22A + 6 72x72mm meters 03934 A-73
Front plate for Vigilohm XM200-300C 03932 A-73
Front plate for Vigilohm XML308-316 03933 A-73
Front plate for withdrawable NS1600-NT 03691 A-10, A-15
Front plate for withdrawable NS1600-NT, 3P, W=400mm 03699 A-11, A-17
Front plate for withdrawable NW 03710 A-5, A-6
Front plate hinge kit 08585 C-23
Front plate support frame, W=400mm 08564 C-12
Front plate support frame, W=650mm 08566 C-12
Front plate support striker kit for 08564 - 08566 01123 D-6
Front plate with cut-outs for 144x144mm + 4 72x72mm meters 03912 A-71
Front plate with cut-outs for 72x72mm meters 03910 A-69
Front plate with cut-outs for 96x96mm meters 03911 A-70, A-72, D-10
Front plate with cut-outs for meter mounting plates 03904 A-69
Front plate with holes for 22mm dia. pushbuttons and lamps 03914 A-71
G
Grey end plate - 4 mm AB1 RRNAC442GR B-69
Grey end plate - 4 mm AB1 RRNAC443GR B-69
Grill with flter 08988 C-27
Grommets for wiring through front (10) 04234 A-75, B-79
H
Handle padlocking kit 08938 C-25
Handling base, W = 1200->1900mm 08705 C-19, D-105
Hexagonal spacers, H=23mm, 4 M5 03186 A-78
Hexagonal spacers, H=40+10mm, 4 M8 03199 A-78
Hinged front plate for human/switchboard interface (HSI), 13 modules,
W=400mm
03723 A-11, A-17
Hinged front plate, 13 modules, W=400mm 03722 A-11, A-17
Horizontal busbar without holes, 100x10mm 04550 B-27
Horizontal cable straps (12) 04239 A-40, B-77
Horizontal PE supports (2) 04667 B-82
Horizontal trunking sections (4), W=450mm, + supports 04257 A-40, B-79
Horizontal trunking supports (12) 04255 A-40, B-78
I
INS1600 3P connection, 1600A 04481 A-49
INS1600 4P connection, 1600A 04482 A-49
Insulated fexible bar 20x2mm, W=1800mm 04742 B-64
400E00017.indd 6 23/03/2012 09:48:25
7
Inter-cubicle partition, D=400mm 04911 A-61, B-46, B-47
Inter-cubicle partition, D=600mm 04931 A-61, B-46, B-47
IP20 front plate for ISFL, 185mm between centres, W=650mm 03735 A-52
IP30 2-part gland plate, W=300mm, D=400mm 08493 C-18
IP30 2-part gland plate, W=650+150mm, D=400mm 08497 C-18
IP30 2-part gland plate, W=650+150mm, D=600mm 08697 C-18
IP30 cover frame, W=400mm 08574 C-14
IP30 door with cut-out for human/switchboard interface (HSI), W=300mm 08593 C-14
IP30 door with cut-out for human/switchboard interface (HSI), W=400mm 08594 C-14
IP30 plain door, W=300mm 08513 C-14, C-15
IP30 plain roof, W=300mm, D=400mm 08433 C-15
IP30 rear panel, W=300mm 08733 C-15
IP30 right-angle kit 08713 C-20
IP30 side panels (2), W=400mm 08750 C-15
IP30 transparent door, W=400mm 08534 C-14
IP30 ventilated front plate, 1 module 03891 C-28
IP30 ventilated front plate, 3 modules 03895 A-6, C-28
IP30 ventilated roof, W=650mm, D=400mm 08476 A-61, C-28
IP30 ventilated roof, W=650mm, D=600mm 08676 A-61, C-28
IP31 sealing kit 08711 C-15
IP55 combination side panels (2), W=400mm 08756 C-15, C-17
IP55 plain gland plate, W=300mm, D=400mm 08483 C-18
IP55 plain gland plate, W=650+150mm, D=400mm 08487 C-18
IP55 plain gland plate, W=650+150mm, D=600mm 08687 C-18
400E00017.indd 7 23/03/2012 09:48:25
8
IP55 sealing kit for side-by-side combinations 08717 C-13
IPxxB clipon covers for Powerclip (2) 01201 D-4
Isolating screen neutral Linergy Evolution 04624 B-15, B-17
J
Joint for 50/60mm horizontal busbars 04640 B-26, B-27
Joint for 80/100mm horizontal busbars 04641 B-26, B-27
K
Kit for neutral bar 04210 B-81
L
Lateral cross-members (2), W=200mm, for D=600mm 03586 A-80, B-66
Lateral cross-members (2), W=400mm, for D=400mm 03584 A-80, B-66, B-74
Levelling kit 08702 C-21
Lifting reinforcement kit 08722 C-19, D-105
Lifting rings (4) 08700 C-21
Linergy Evolution connection screw plate kit 01130 B-25, D-5
Linergy Evolution horizontal busbar 1000A 04562 B-14, B-20
Linergy Evolution horizontal connection 1600A 04620 B-15
Linergy Evolution shift vertical connection 1600A 04603 B-19
Linergy Evolution vertical connection 1600A 04602 A-8, A-12, A-18, B-19, B-24, B-83
Linergy Evolution vertical connection 4000A 04607 A-8, B-22
Linergy Evolution vertical long connection 2500A 04605 A-8, B-22
Linergy Evolution vertical short connection 2500A 04604 A-8, B-22
Linergy markers (12) 04794 B-25
Linergy vertical busbar, 1000A 04504 B-18, B-23
Linergy vertical busbar, 630A 04502 B-18, B-23, B-82
Linergy vertical busbar, 800A 04503 B-18, B-23, B-82
Linergy vertical PE supports (3) 04657 B-82
Linergy vertical PEN kit 04656 B-83
Longitudinal cross-members (2), W=650mm 03587 A-80, B-66
M
Modular device rail 03401 A-35, A-36, A-62, A-73, A-74, A-83, D-13
Modular device rail, W=1600mm 04226 A-83, B-74
Modular front plate, 2 modules 03202 A-74
Modular front plate, 3 modules 03203 A-35, A-62, A-73, A-74
Modular front plate, 3 modules, W=250mm 03213 A-37
Modular front plate, 3 rows 03223 A-35
Modular front plate, 4 modules 03204 A-35, A-36
Modular front plate, 4 modules, W=250mm 03214 A-37
Modular front plate, 5 modules 03205 A-36, A-62
Mounting chocks (100) for 5mm busbars 04669 B-32, B-33, B-68
Mounting hardware for joint > 80mm 04642 A-8, B-19, B-24, B-30, B-32, B-33
Mounting hardware for System P D=400mm or D=600mm framework 01108 D-4
Mounting plate for 2 vertical NSX630 or 1 vertical INS630 03461 A-25, A-27, A-29, A-31, A-51
Mounting plate for 2 x 3PH meters 6 modules System P 03508 A-64, A-65
Mounting plate for 2-meter service connection 03152 A-67
Mounting plate for 3 1-phase meters 03157 A-66
Mounting plate for 3-4 vertical fxed NSX250 devices 03422 A-29
Mounting plate for 3-4 vertical fxed NSX-INS250 devices with toggles 03420 A-25, A-51
Mounting plate for 3-4 vertical withdrawable NSX250 devices 03421 A-27, A-29, A-31
Mounting plate for 3-4 vertical withdrawable NSX250 devices with Polypact 03423 A-27
Mounting plate for EZC250/EZCV250 03504 A-33
Mounting plate for EZC400 03505 A-33
Mounting plate for horiz. fxed/plug-in NSX250 rot. handle/mot. mechanism, 3P 03413 A-26, A-28
Mounting plate for horiz. fxed/plug-in NSX250 rot. handle/mot. mechanism, 4P 03414 A-26, A-28
400E00017.indd 8 23/03/2012 09:48:26
9
Mounting plate for horiz. NS1600 source changeover system with rotary
handles
03491 A-43
Mounting plate for horiz. NSX250 source changeover system with motor
mechanism
03417 A-45, A-46
Mounting plate for horiz. NSX630 source changeover system with motor
mechanism
03457 A-45
Mounting plate for horiz. NSX-INS630 source changeover system with rot.
handles
03458 A-43, A-47, A-48
Mounting plate for horizontal fxed NS1600 with toggle or rotary handle, 4P 03480 A-16
Mounting plate for horizontal fxed NSX250 with toggle, 3P 03411 A-24
Mounting plate for horizontal fxed NSX630 with toggle, 3P 03451 A-24
Mounting plate for horizontal fxed NSX-INS250 with toggle, 4P 03412 A-24, A-50
Mounting plate for horizontal fxed NSX-INS630 with toggle, 4P 03452 A-24, A-50
Mounting plate for horizontal INF200-250 03534 A-56
Mounting plate for horizontal INF400 03535 A-56
Mounting plate for horizontal INF630/800 03536 A-56
Mounting plate for horizontal NSX630, 3P 03453 A-26, A-28
Mounting plate for horizontal NSX630, 4P 03454 A-26, A-28
Mounting plate for horizontal withdrawable NSX250, 3P or 4P 03415 A-30
Mounting plate for horizontal withdrawable NSX630, 3P or 4P 03462 A-30
Mounting plate for INF32/40 03540 A-56, A-57
Mounting plate for INF63-160 03541 A-56, A-57
Mounting plate for ISFT100 03554 A-54
Mounting plate for ISFT100N 03553 A-54
Mounting plate for NS3200-INS2500 03501 A-20, A-49
Mounting plate for NW 03500 A-5, A-6
Mounting plate for Tego Power 03576 A-63
Mounting plate for vertical EZC100, 1P 03502 A-32
Mounting plate for vertical fxed NS1600 03482 A-15
Mounting plate for vertical fxed NS1600, 3P or 4P, W=400mm 03487 A-17
Mounting plate for vertical fxed NT 03484 A-10
Mounting plate for vertical fxed NT, 3P, W=400mm 03489 A-11
Mounting plate for vertical INF200-800 03537 A-57
Mounting plate for vertical NSX-INS250 source changeover system with rotary
handles
03428 A-43, A-47, A-48
Mounting plate for Vigilohm XM200-300C 03930 A-73
Mounting plate for Vigilohm XML308-316 03931 A-73
Mounting plate for withdrawable NS1600-NT 03483 A-10, A-15
Mounting plate for withdrawable NS1600-NT, 3P, W=400mm 03488 A-11, A-17
Mounting plate Varplus vertical 03975 A-60
Mounting plate Varplus horizontal 03978 A-60
Mounting plate with cut-out for 72x72mm meter 03902 A-11, A-17, A-69
Mounting plate with cut-out for 96x96mm meter 03903 A-11, A-17, A-69
Multiclip distribution block, 2P, 200A, 1 row 04012 A-40, B-61
Multiclip distribution block, 4P, 160A, 1/2 row 04018 A-40, B-61
Multiclip distribution block, 4P, 63A, 1/2 row 04008 A-40, B-60
Multiclip distribution block, 4P, 80A 04000 A-40, B-60
Multiclip/NG160 connection, 200 A 04030 A-40
Multi-stage distribution block, 4P, 160A 04052 B-59
P
PE bar with holes, 25x5mm 04512 B-82
PE bar with holes, 50x5mm 04515 B-82
Plain backplate, 36 modules 510 mm wide 03570 A-81
Plain backplate, 36 modules 660 mm wide 03569 A-81
Plain barrier for horizontal busbars W400 D400 04915 B-38
Plain barrier for horizontal busbars W800 D400 04919 B-38
Plain front plate, 1 module 03801 A-10, A-25, A-27, A-29, A-31, A-51, A-57, A-62, A-63, A-76
Plain front plate, 1 module, W=250mm 03811 A-37, A-76
Plain front plate, 12 modules 03808 A-6, A-76
Plain front plate, 2 modules 03802 A-6, A-10, A-15, A-20, A-25, A-27, A-29, A-31, A-43, A-47,
A-48, A-54, A-57, A-76
Plain front plate, 2 modules, W=250mm 03812 A-76
A-57, A-62, A-76, B-74
D-14
400E00017.indd 9 23/03/2012 09:48:26
10
Plain front plate, 5 modules 03805 A-5, A-10, A-15, A-63, A-76, B-74, D-13
Plain front plate, 6 modules 03806 A-10, A-15, A-63, A-64, A-65, A-66, A-72, A-76, B-74, D-14
Plain front plate, 9 modules 03807 A-67, A-76, D-13
Plain mounting plate for 72x72mm meter 03900 A-11, A-17, A-69
Plain mounting plate for 96x96mm meter 03901 A-11, A-17, A-69
Plain wicket door, W=150mm 01110 D-5
Plinth, H=100mm, W=300mm, D=400mm 08723 C-18
Polybloc distribution block, 1P, 160A 04031 B-58
Polypact for fxed devices with toggles, 3P 04403 A-25, B-62
Polypact for fxed devices with toggles, 4P 04404 A-25, A-51, B-62
Polypact for fxed or plug-in devices with fexible connection, 3P 04405 A-27, A-29, B-62
Polypact for fxed or plug-in devices with fexible connection, 4P 04406 A-27, A-29, B-62
Polypact for fxed or plug-in devices without connection, 3P 04407 A-25, A-27, A-29, B-62
Polypact for fxed or plug-in devices without connection, 4P 04408 A-25, A-27, A-29, A-51, B-62
Polypact tooth-caps 04809 A-25, A-27, A-29, A-51, B-63
Power supply block for horizontal NSX250 04060 B-51
Powerclip busbar accessories, 160 to 400A 01210 D-4
Powerclip busbar accessories, 630A 01211 D-4
Powerclip busbar connection for 200A Multiclip distribution block 04021 A-40, B-51, B-61
Powerclip busbars, 125A, 3P, W=450mm 04103 B-50
Powerclip tap-off blocks with 16mm terminals (12) 04152 B-52
Powerclip tap-off blocks with 6mm + 10mm terminals (12) 04151 B-52
Prisma Plus IP55/Prisma PH combination kit 01198 C-22
Prisma/Prisma Plus side-by-side combination kit 01199 C-22
R
Rail and raisers modular 04227 A-36
Raisers, 5 Practic 04224 A-77
Rear busbar barrier 04198 B-54
Rear busbar connection for 200A Multiclip distribution block 04029 B-54, B-61
Rear busbar support 04191 B-54
Rear connection cover for horizontal fxed NS1600 04844 A-16
Rear connection cover for NW 04863 A-4, B-35
Rear connection cover for vertical fxed NS1600 04853 A-14, B-35
Rear connection cover for vertical NS1600-NT 04854 A-9, A-14, B-35
Rear modular device rail, W=650mm 03590 A-83
Rear panel accessories 01106 D-5
Rear support for Form 3 partition 04943 B-41
Resistor, 250W 08994 C-29
Retroft handle, System P 01221 D-7
Roof accessories 01112 D-6
Roof fan 08986 A-61, C-28
S
Screw terminal block blue 150 mm AB1 VVN15035UBL B-70
400E00017.indd 10 23/03/2012 09:48:26
11
Screw terminal block grey 150 mm AB1 VVN15035U B-70
Screwdriver slot insert 08946 C-25
Screws (20) + wing nuts for framework 08921 A-59, C-13
Screws for bars with threaded holes, less than 630A , 40 M6x16mm 04195 B-54
Screws for Powerclip busbars (20) 04158 B-52
Screws for vertical/horizontal busbars connections (20) 04645 B-68
Self adhesive front plate grips (20) 01093 D-5
Self-adhesive label sheets for common symbols (10) 013735 C-24
Self-adhesive label sheets for special symbols (10) 013736 C-24
Separation partition - 4 mm AB1 RRNTPAC442 B-69
Separation partition - 4 mm AB1 RRNTPAC443 B-69
Set of 10 screws + combination accessories 08718 C-13
Sets of 2 grips quarter turn (10) 01094 D-5
Side panel accessories, System P 01100 D-6
Side plates for plinth (2), D=400mm 08720 C-18
Side plates for plinth (2), D=600mm 08721 C-18
Slide rails (2) + angle brackets 03593 A-81
Slotted mounting plate, 12 modules 03574 A-82
Slotted mounting plate, 4 modules 03571 A-63, A-72, A-82, D-14
Slotted mounting plate, 6 modules 03572 A-63, A-72, A-82, D-14
Spacers (12) 150mm Linergy Evolution 4000A 04646 B-16, B-21
Spacing rods for edgewise bars 04691 A-9, A-13, A-14, A-19
Spacing rods for fat bars 04690 A-8
Splitter block kit PRA90048 B-72
Square insert, 6mm female 08955 C-25
Square insert, 6mm male 08951 C-25
Stabiliser kit 08701 C-21
Stop plate for markers AB1 AB8P35 B-71
Support for 5/10mm horizontal busbars 04664 A-7, B-15, B-16, B-26, B-27
Support for lateral vertical Linergy busbars 04651 B-19
Support for rear vertical 5/10mm busbars 04653 B-32, B-33
Support for rear vertical Linergy busbars 04652 B-23
Support mounting hardware for bars > 80mm 04671 A-7, B-16, B-21, B-27, B-31
Supports for earth bar on DIN rail (2) 04205 B-80
Switchboard identifcation plate 08900 C-24
Switchboard lighting 08964 A-84
Switchboard portable lamp 08965 A-84
System G adapter, W=250mm 03596 A-79
System G adapter, W=500mm 03595 A-66, A-67, A-79, B-51
System P Ral 7016 standard handle 08931 C-25
T
Terminal block 1in/1out-blue-10 mm AB1 RRN1035U2BL B-69
Terminal block 1in/1out-green/yellow-10 mm AB1 RRNTP1035U2 B-69
Terminal block 1in/1out-grey-10 mm AB1 RRN1035U2GR B-69
Terminal block for auxiliaries 04228 A-75, B-79
Terminal block kit, 25 mm PRA90046 B-72
Terminal block kit, 4 x 6 mm PRA90047 B-72
Terminal block kit, 50 mm PRA90045 B-72
Terminal block support kit PRA90051 B-72
Terminal covers for 200A Multiclip (4) 01202 D-4
Thermostat 08998 C-29
Tooth caps (set of 20) 014818 A-40
Torque nuts, 20 M8 04759 B-68
Touch-up paint brush 08961 C-26
Touch-up spray paint 08962 C-26
Transparent front plate, 12 modules 03345 A-74, A-76
400E00017.indd 11 23/03/2012 09:48:26
12
Transparent front plate, 4 modules 03342 A-62, A-74, A-76
Transparent front plate, 4 modules, W=250mm 03352 A-76
Transparent front plate, 6 modules 03343 A-63, A-64, A-65, A-66, A-74, A-76
Transparent front plate, 9 modules 03344 A-67, A-74, A-76
Triangle insert, 6.5mm male 08947 C-25
Triangle insert, 7mm male 08948 C-25
Trunking for door, W=2000mm 04233 A-75, B-79
Two-pole commoning link for 150 mm screw term.block AB1 ALN1502 B-70
Two-pole insulated commoning link - 10 mm AB1 RRAL102 B-69
Two-pole insulated commoning link - 6 mm AB1 RRNAL62 B-69
U
Universal angle brackets (2) 03581 A-78, A-82, B-74
Universal angle brackets (6) 03583 A-78, B-41
Universal inserts System P (6) 03582 A-78
Universal power supply block, 250A 04061 B-51
Universal power supply block, 400-630A 04074 B-51
V
Vertical busbar with holes, 50x10mm 04525 B-30, B-33
Vertical cable straps (12) 04262 A-40, B-76
Vertical modular front plate 12 modules 03229 A-76
Vertical modular front plate 9 modules 03228 A-76
Vertical trunking, W=2000mm 04267 A-40, B-79
Visor for human/switchboard interface (HSI) 03928 A-70
Voltage tap-offs for tab connectors, M10 (20) 04229 B-68
W
Washers for insulated fexible bars (20), diameter=20mm 04772 B-25, B-67
Washers for lugs L25 (20) 04775 B-25
400E00017.indd 12 23/03/2012 09:48:26
Cat. no. Designation Pages Cat. no. Designation Pages
13
Index Catalogue number index
01000
01005 Diagram lines, 10 black mimic, W=900mm C-23
01006 Diagram outgoing arrows, 10 black mimic C-23
01007 Diagram incoming arrows, 10 black mimic C-23
01008 Diagram transformers, 10 black mimic C-23
01009 Diagram earth symbols, 10 black mimic C-23
01093 Self adhesive front plate grips (20) D-5
01094 Sets of 2 grips quarter turn (10) D-5
01100 Side panel accessories, System P D-6
01101 Accessories for door or rear panel (IP55) D-5
01102 Accessories for IP55 side panel, System P D-6
01103 Accessories for IP55 roof, System P D-6
01104 Framework accessories, System P D-4
01105 Closing accessories, System P D-7
01106 Rear panel accessories D-5
01108 Mounting hardware for System P D=400mm
or D=600mm framework
D-4
01109 Chocks for Linergy busbars (12) B-19, D-4
01110 Plain wicket door, W=150mm D-5
01112 Roof accessories D-6
01115 CS frame bottom cross-member W400 D-7
01116 CS frame bottom cross-member W650 D-7
01117 CS frame bottom cross-member W150+650 D-7
01118 CS frame bottom cross-member W650+150 D-7
01119 Frame bottom cross-member W400 D-7
01120 Frame bottom cross-member W650 D-7
01121 Frame bottom cross-member W150+650 D-7
01122 Frame bottom cross-member W650+150 D-7
01123 Front plate support striker kit for 08564 -
08566
D-6
01130 Linergy Evolution connection screw plate kit B-25, D-5
01198 Prisma Plus IP55/Prisma PH combination kit C-22
01199 Prisma/Prisma Plus side-by-side combination
kit
C-22
01201 IPxxB clipon covers for Powerclip (2) D-4
01202 Terminal covers for 200A Multiclip (4) D-4
01210 Powerclip busbar accessories, 160 to 400A D-4
01211 Powerclip busbar accessories, 630A D-4
01221 Retroft handle, System P D-7
03000
03152 Mounting plate for 2-meter service connection A-67
03154 Front plate for 1 3-phase meter in duct A-66, A-67
03157 Mounting plate for 3 1-phase meters A-66
03164 Clip-nuts for DIN rails, 20 M4 A-77
03180 Clip-nuts for slotted mounting plates, 20 M4 A-77
03185 Hexagonal spacers, H=9mm, 4 M5 A-78
03194 Captive nuts for M6 hexagonal spacers (20) A-77
03199 Hexagonal spacers, H=40+10mm, 4 M8 A-78
03202 Modular front plate, 2 modules A-74
03203 Modular front plate, 3 modules A-35, A-62,
A-73, A-74
03204 Modular front plate, 4 modules A-35, A-36
03205 Modular front plate, 5 modules A-36, A-62
03213 Modular front plate, 3 modules, W=250mm A-37
03214 Modular front plate, 4 modules, W=250mm A-37
03220 Blanking strip, W=1000mm A-40, C-23
03221 Divisible blanking plates (4), W=90mm A-40, C-23
03222 Compact NSX electronic trip unit divisible
blanking plate
C-23
03223 Modular front plate, 3 rows A-35
03228 Vertical modular front plate 9 modules A-76
03229 Vertical modular front plate 12 modules A-76
03235 Front plate for INS250 source changeover
system with rotary handles
A-47
03241 Front plate for 3-4 vertical Vigi NSX250
devices with toggles
A-25, A-27
03243 Front plate for 3-4 vertical NSX250 devices A-25, A-27,
A-29, A-31
03244 Front plate for 3-4 vertical Vigi NSX250 with
rotary handles or motor mechanisms
A-29, A-31
03245 Front plate for vertical NSX250 source
changeover system with rotary handles
A-43
03247 Front plate for INS250 complete source
changeover assembly
A-48
03248 Front plate for vertical INS250 A-51
03249 Blanking plate for vertical NSX-INS250 A-32, C-23
03274 Front plate for vertical INS630 A-51
03275 Front plate for vertical NSX630 with rotary
handle or motor mechanism
A-25, A-27,
A-29, A-31
03297 Front plate for vertical Vigi NSX630 A-25, A-27,
A-29, A-31
03303 Front plate for vertical EZC100 A-32
03304 Front plate for horizontal EZC250/EZCV250 A-33
03305 Front plate for vertical EZC250/EZCV250 A-33
03306 Front plate for horizontal EZC400 A-33
03307 Front plate for vertical EZC400 A-33
03312 Front plate for vertical INF32/40, 3P A-57
03313 Front plate for INF32/40, 4P and horizontal 3P A-56, A-57
03314 Front plate for INF63-160, 3P and vertical
INF63, 3P
A-56, A-57
03315 Front plate for vertical INF63, 4P and vertical
INF160
A-57
03320 Front plate for vertical ISFT100 A-54
03325 Front plate for vertical ISFT100N A-54
03342 Transparent front plate, 4 modules A-62, A-74,
A-76
A-65, A-66,
A-74, A-76
A-76
03345 Transparent front plate, 12 modules A-74, A-76
03352 Transparent front plate, 4 modules,
W=250mm
A-76
W=250mm
A-76
W=250mm
A-76
03401 Modular device rail A-35, A-36,
A-62, A-73,
A-74, A-83,
D-13
03402 Adjustable modular device rail A-36, A-62,
A-63, A-83,
B-74
03404 Adjustable modular device rail, W=400mm A-37
03411 Mounting plate for horizontal fxed NSX250
with toggle, 3P
A-24
400E00015.indd 13 23/03/2012 09:43:50
14
03412 Mounting plate for horizontal fxed NSX-
INS250 with toggle, 4P
A-24, A-50
03413 Mounting plate for horiz. fxed/plug-in
NSX250 rot. handle/mot. mechanism, 3P
A-26, A-28
03414 Mounting plate for horiz. fxed/plug-in
NSX250 rot. handle/mot. mechanism, 4P
A-26, A-28
03415 Mounting plate for horizontal withdrawable
NSX250, 3P or 4P
A-30
03417 Mounting plate for horiz. NSX250 source
changeover system with motor mechanism
A-45, A-46
03420 Mounting plate for 3-4 vertical fxed
NSX-INS250 devices with toggles
A-25, A-51
03421 Mounting plate for 3-4 vertical withdrawable
NSX250 devices
A-27, A-29,
A-31
03422 Mounting plate for 3-4 vertical fxed NSX250
devices
A-29
03423 Mounting plate for 3-4 vertical withdrawable
NSX250 devices with Polypact
A-27
03428 Mounting plate for vertical NSX-INS250
source changeover system with rotary
handles
A-43, A-47,
A-48
03451 Mounting plate for horizontal fxed NSX630
with toggle, 3P
A-24
03452 Mounting plate for horizontal fxed NSX-
INS630 with toggle, 4P
A-24, A-50
03453 Mounting plate for horizontal NSX630, 3P A-26, A-28
03454 Mounting plate for horizontal NSX630, 4P A-26, A-28
03457 Mounting plate for horiz. NSX630 source
A-45
03458 Mounting plate for horiz. NSX-INS630 source
changeover system with rot. handles
A-43, A-47,
A-48
03461 Mounting plate for 2 vertical NSX630 or 1
vertical INS630
A-25, A-27,
A-29, A-31,
A-51
03462 Mounting plate for horizontal withdrawable
NSX630, 3P or 4P
A-30
03480 Mounting plate for horizontal fxed NS1600
with toggle or rotary handle, 4P
A-16
03482 Mounting plate for vertical fxed NS1600 A-15
03483 Mounting plate for withdrawable NS1600-NT A-10, A-15
03484 Mounting plate for vertical fxed NT A-10
03487 Mounting plate for vertical fxed NS1600, 3P
or 4P, W=400mm
A-17
03488 Mounting plate for withdrawable NS1600-NT,
3P, W=400mm
A-11, A-17
03489 Mounting plate for vertical fxed NT, 3P,
W=400mm
A-11
03491 Mounting plate for horiz. NS1600 source
A-43
03500 Mounting plate for NW A-5, A-6
03501 Mounting plate for NS3200-INS2500 A-20, A-49
03502 Mounting plate for vertical EZC100, 1P A-32
03504 Mounting plate for EZC250/EZCV250 A-33
03505 Mounting plate for EZC400 A-33
03508 Mounting plate for 2 x 3PH meters 6 modules
System P
A-64, A-65
03534 Mounting plate for horizontal INF200-250 A-56
03535 Mounting plate for horizontal INF400 A-56
03536 Mounting plate for horizontal INF630/800 A-56
03537 Mounting plate for vertical INF200-800 A-57
03540 Mounting plate for INF32/40 A-56, A-57
03541 Mounting plate for INF63-160 A-56, A-57
03545 Busbar mounting assembly for ISFL160,
100mm between centres
A-52
03546 Busbar mounting assembly for ISFL630,
185mm between centres
A-52
03553 Mounting plate for ISFT100N A-54
03554 Mounting plate for ISFT100 A-54
03555 Busbar assembly for mounting ISFT100N/160 A-54
03561 Canalis support A-4, A-9,
A-14
03569 Plain backplate, 36 modules 660 mm wide A-81
03570 Plain backplate, 36 modules 510 mm wide A-81
03571 Slotted mounting plate, 4 modules A-63, A-72,
A-82, D-14
03572 Slotted mounting plate, 6 modules A-63, A-72,
A-82, D-14
03574 Slotted mounting plate, 12 modules A-82
03576 Mounting plate for Tego Power A-63
03580 Angle brackets (4) + screws A-78
03581 Universal angle brackets (2) A-78, A-82,
B-74
03582 Universal inserts System P (6) A-78
03583 Universal angle brackets (6) A-78, B-41
03584 Lateral cross-members (2), W=400mm, for
D=400mm
A-80, B-66,
B-74
03586 Lateral cross-members (2), W=200mm, for
D=600mm
A-80, B-66
03587 Longitudinal cross-members (2), W=650mm A-80, B-66
03590 Rear modular device rail, W=650mm A-83
03593 Slide rails (2) + angle brackets A-81
03595 System G adapter, W=500mm A-66, A-67,
A-79, B-51
03596 System G adapter, W=250mm A-79
03604 Front plate for horizontal NSX250, 3P A-24, A-26,
A-28
A-28
03616 Front plate for horizontal NSX250 source
A-45
03617 Front plate for horizontal INS250 A-50
03618 Front plate for horizontal withdrawable
NSX250
A-30
03620 Front plate for 3-4 vertical INS250 devices A-51
A-28
A-28
03656 Front plate for horizontal NSX630 source
A-45
03657 Front plate for horizontal withdrawable
NSX630
A-30
03658 Front plate for horizontal INS630 A-50
03659 Front plate for horiz. NSX-INS630 source
A-43, A-47
03661 Front plate for horizontal NSX-INS630
complete source changeover assembly
A-48
03663 Front plate for vertical 2 NSX630 A-25, A-27,
A-29, A-31
03666 Front plate for 2 vertical Vigi NSX630 devices A-25, A-27,
A-29, A-31
03671 Front plate for UA or BA A-46
03687 Front plate for horizontal fxed NS1600 with
toggle or rotary handle, 4P
A-16
03690 Front plate for vertical fxed NS1600 A-15
03691 Front plate for withdrawable NS1600-NT A-10, A-15
03692 Front plate for vertical fxed NT A-10
03695 Front plate for horizontal NS1600 source
A-43
03697 Front plate for vertical fxed NS1600, 3P-4P,
W=400mm
A-17
03698 Front plate for vertical fxed NT, 3P,
W=400mm
A-11
03699 Front plate for withdrawable NS1600-NT, 3P,
W=400mm
A-11, A-17
03701 Front plate for vertical fxed NS1600, with
motor mechanism
A-15
400E00015.indd 14 23/03/2012 09:43:50
15
03710 Front plate for withdrawable NW A-5, A-6
03711 Front plate for fxed NW A-5, A-6
03713 Front plate for INS1600, 3P A-49
03714 Front plate for INS1600, 4P A-49
03715 Front plate for INS2500, 3P or 4P A-49
03716 Front plate for NS3200 A-20
03722 Hinged front plate, 13 modules, W=400mm A-11, A-17
03723 Hinged front plate for human/switchboard
interface (HSI), 13 modules, W=400mm
A-11, A-17
03727 Front plate for horizontal INF200-250 A-56
03728 Front plate for vertical INF200-800 A-57
03729 Front plate for horizontal INF400 A-56
03730 Front plate for horizontal INF630/800 A-56
03735 IP20 front plate for ISFL, 185mm between
centres, W=650mm
A-52
03736 Front plate for ISFL160, 185mm between
centres, W=650mm
A-52
03740 Blanking plate for ISFL160 A-53
03741 Blanking plate for ISFL630 A-53
03801 Plain front plate, 1 module A-10, A-25,
A-27, A-29,
A-31, A-51,
A-57, A-62,
A-63, A-76
03802 Plain front plate, 2 modules A-6, A-10,
A-15, A-20,
A-25, A-27,
A-29, A-31,
A-43, A-47,
A-48, A-54,
A-57, A-76
A-10, A-15,
A-25, A-27,
A-29, A-31,
A-43, A-49,
A-57, A-62,
A-76, B-74
A-10, A-15,
A-20, A-49,
A-62, A-63,
A-72, A-76,
D-14
A-15, A-63,
A-76, B-74,
D-13
A-63, A-64,
A-65, A-66,
A-72, A-76,
B-74, D-14
D-13
03808 Plain front plate, 12 modules A-6, A-76
03811 Plain front plate, 1 module, W=250mm A-37, A-76
03812 Plain front plate, 2 modules, W=250mm A-76
03890 Front plate for fan or grill C-27
03891 IP30 ventilated front plate, 1 module C-28
03895 IP30 ventilated front plate, 3 modules A-6, C-28
03900 Plain mounting plate for 72x72mm meter A-11, A-17,
A-69
03901 Plain mounting plate for 96x96mm meter A-11, A-17,
A-69
03902 Mounting plate with cut-out for 72x72mm
meter
A-11, A-17,
A-69
03903 Mounting plate with cut-out for 96x96mm
meter
A-11, A-17,
A-69
03904 Front plate with cut-outs for meter mounting
plates
A-69
03907 Blanking plate, 72x72mm, opening A-69, A-71
03908 Blanking plate, 96x96mm, opening A-70, D-10
03910 Front plate with cut-outs for 72x72mm meters A-69
03911 Front plate with cut-outs for 96x96mm meters A-70, A-72,
D-10
03912 Front plate with cut-outs for 144x144mm + 4
72x72mm meters
A-71
03913 Front plate 96x96 for 1 device A-70, D-10
03914 Front plate with holes for 22mm dia.
pushbuttons and lamps
A-71
03916 Front plate for DMB 300 A-72
03917 Front plate for DMC 300 A-72
03918 Front plate for Powerlogic CM3000-4000 A-72, D-14
03928 Visor for human/switchboard interface (HSI) A-70
03930 Mounting plate for Vigilohm XM200-300C A-73
03931 Mounting plate for Vigilohm XML308-316 A-73
03932 Front plate for Vigilohm XM200-300C A-73
03933 Front plate for Vigilohm XML308-316 A-73
03934 Front plate for Vigilohm TR22A + 6 72x72mm
meters
A-73
03970 Door with cut-outs for power factor correction
equipment, W=650mm
A-61
03975 Mounting plate Varplus vertical A-60
03978 Mounting plate Varplus horizontal A-60
04000
04000 Multiclip distribution block, 4P, 80A A-40, B-60
04004 Multiclip distribution block, 4P, 80A, 1 row A-40, B-60
04008 Multiclip distribution block, 4P, 63A, 1/2 row A-40, B-60
04018 Multiclip distribution block, 4P, 160A, 1/2 row A-40, B-61
04021 Powerclip busbar connection for 200A
Multiclip distribution block
A-40, B-51,
B-61
04024 Duct busbar connection for 200A Multiclip
distribution block
B-61
04029 Rear busbar connection for 200A Multiclip
distribution block
B-54, B-61
04030 Multiclip/NG160 connection, 200 A A-40
04031 Polybloc distribution block, 1P, 160A B-58
04040 Distribloc 63 (top connection) B-55
04041 Distribloc 63 (bottom connection) B-55
04045 Distribloc 125 A-40, B-55
04046 Distribloc 160+connections A-40, B-55
04047 Connections for Distribloc, 4 NG-INS125 B-56
04052 Multi-stage distribution block, 4P, 160A B-59
04060 Power supply block for horizontal NSX250 B-51
04061 Universal power supply block, 250A B-51
04062 Connection between vertical NSX-INS250
and universal power supply block
B-51
04064 Connection between vertical NSX-INS250 in
duct and universal power supply block
B-51
04073 Connection between vertical NSX-
INS400-630 in duct and universal power
supply block
B-51
400E00015.indd 15 23/03/2012 09:43:50
16
04074 Universal power supply block, 400-630A B-51
04103 Powerclip busbars, 125A, 3P, W=450mm B-50
04145 Connections, 125A (4) B-50, B-54
04146 Connections 160 A (4) B-51, B-54
04147 Busbar/modular device connection, 160A A-38
04148 Busbar/Vigi modular device connection, 160A A-38
04150 Covers for Powerclip busbars, 8 IPxxB B-52
04151 Powerclip tap-off blocks with 6mm + 10mm
terminals (12)
B-52
04152 Powerclip tap-off blocks with 16mm terminals
(12)
B-52
04155 Additional 35mm block, 3P B-51, B-58
04156 Additional 35mm block, 4P B-51, B-58
04158 Screws for Powerclip busbars (20) B-52
04161 Bars with threaded holes (4), 160A,
W=1000mm
B-54
W=1000mm
B-54
W=1000mm
B-54
W=1400mm
B-54
W=1400mm
B-54
W=1400mm
B-54
04190 Copper angle brackets (4), 250A B-54
04191 Rear busbar support B-54
04194 Bolts for 5mm bars, 20 M6x20mm B-54
04195 Screws for bars with threaded holes, less than
630A , 40 M6x16mm
B-54
04198 Rear busbar barrier B-54
04200 Earth bar, 24 modules B-80
04201 Earth bar for direct earth blocks, 12x3mm B-80
04202 Earth bars (2), 12 modules B-80
04203 Auxiliary bus duct, 4P A-75
04205 Supports for earth bar on DIN rail (2) B-80
04210 Kit for neutral bar B-81
04214 Earth blocks with 12x4mm spring terminals
(4)
B-80
04215 Earth blocks with 3x16mm spring terminals
(4)
B-80
04224 Raisers, 5 Practic A-77
04226 Modular device rail, W=1600mm A-83, B-74
04227 Rail and raisers modular A-36
04228 Terminal block for auxiliaries A-75, B-79
04229 Voltage tap-offs for tab connectors, M10 (20) B-68
04233 Trunking for door, W=2000mm A-75, B-79
04234 Grommets for wiring through front (10) A-75, B-79
04235 Flexible trunking for wiring to door A-75, B-79
04239 Horizontal cable straps (12) A-40, B-77
04243 Covers for horizontal cable straps (4) A-40, B-77
04255 Horizontal trunking supports (12) A-40, B-78
04256 Adaptable support for horizontal trunking (10) A-40, B-78
04257 Horizontal trunking sections (4), W=450mm,
+ supports
A-40, B-79
04262 Vertical cable straps (12) A-40, B-76
04263 Covers for vertical cable straps (2),
W=1000mm
A-40, B-76
04267 Vertical trunking, W=2000mm A-40, B-79
04403 Polypact for fxed devices with toggles, 3P A-25, B-62
04404 Polypact for fxed devices with toggles, 4P A-25, A-51,
B-62
04405 Polypact for fxed or plug-in devices with
fexible connection, 3P
A-27, A-29,
B-62
04406 Polypact for fxed or plug-in devices with
fexible connection, 4P
A-27, A-29,
B-62
04407 Polypact for fxed or plug-in devices without
connection, 3P
A-25, A-27,
A-29, B-62
04408 Polypact for fxed or plug-in devices without
connection, 4P
A-25, A-27,
A-29, A-51,
B-62
04423 Connection for horizontal fxed NSX250 with
toggle, 3P, 250A
A-24
toggle, 4P, 250A
A-24
04425 Connection transfer assembly for fxed
NSX250 with toggle, 3P
A-24
A-24
04427 Connection for horizontal NSX-INS250, 3P,
250A
A-28, A-30,
A-50
04428 Connection for horizontal NSX-INS250, 4P,
250A
A-28, A-30,
A-50
04429 Connection transfer assembly, 250A, 3P A-24, A-26,
A-28, A-30
A-28, A-30
04431 Connection for horizontal plug-in NSX250
with toggle, 3P, 250A
A-26, A-30
A-26, A-30
toggle, 3P, 630A
A-24
toggle, 4P, 630A
A-24
A-24
A-24
A-28, A-30
A-28, A-30
A-26, A-30
A-26, A-30
04473 Connection for horizontal fxed NS with toggle
or rotary handle, 3P, 1000A
A-16
04474 Connection for horizontal fxed NS with toggle
or rotary handle, 4P, 1000A
A-16
04475 Connection for vertical fxed NT, 3P, 1250A A-10
04477 Connection for vertical withdrawable NS1600-
NT, 3P, 1250A
A-10, A-15
NT, 4P, 1250A
A-10, A-15
400E00015.indd 16 23/03/2012 09:43:51
17
04481 INS1600 3P connection, 1600A A-49
04482 INS1600 4P connection, 1600A A-49
04483 Connection transfer assembly for horizontal
NS1600, 3P
A-16
04484 Connection transfer assembly for horizontal
NS1600, 4P
A-16
04485 Connection for vertical fxed NS1600, 3P,
1250A
A-15
1250A
A-15
1600A
A-15
1600A
A-15
NT, 3P, 1600A
A-10, A-15
04492 Connection for vertical withdrawable
NS1600-NT, 4P, 1600A
A-10, A-15
04502 Linergy vertical busbar, 630A B-18, B-23,
B-82
04503 Linergy vertical busbar, 800A B-18, B-23,
B-82
04504 Linergy vertical busbar, 1000A B-18, B-23
04512 PE bar with holes, 25x5mm B-82
04515 PE bar with holes, 50x5mm B-82
04516 Vertical busbar with holes, 60x5mm B-28, B-32
04536 Horizontal busbar without holes, 60x5mm B-26
04560 Linergy Evolution horizontal busbar 630A B-14, B-20
04602 Linergy Evolution vertical connection 1600A A-8, A-12,
A-18, B-19,
B-24, B-83
04603 Linergy Evolution shift vertical connection
1600A
B-19
04604 Linergy Evolution vertical short connection
2500A
A-8, B-22
04605 Linergy Evolution vertical long connection
2500A
A-8, B-22
04607 Linergy Evolution vertical connection 4000A A-8, B-22
04620 Linergy Evolution horizontal connection
1600A
B-15
2500A
B-17
4000A
B-17
04624 Isolating screen neutral Linergy Evolution B-15, B-17
04634 Connection plate for 5mm horizontal bar to
lateral Linergy busbar, 1000A
B-19, B-29
lateral Linergy busbar, 1600A
B-19, B-24,
B-29, B-32
vertical busbar, 1600A
A-12, A-18,
B-19, B-24,
B-30, B-32,
B-33, B-83
04637 Connection plate for 10mm horizontal bars to
vertical fat bar, 3200A
A-8, B-30
04640 Joint for 50/60mm horizontal busbars B-26, B-27
04641 Joint for 80/100mm horizontal busbars B-26, B-27
04642 Mounting hardware for joint > 80mm A-8, B-19,
B-24, B-30,
B-32, B-33
04644 4000A conn. PAD A-4
04645 Screws for vertical/horizontal busbars
connections (20)
B-68
04646 Spacers (12) 150mm Linergy Evolution
4000A
B-16, B-21
04651 Support for lateral vertical Linergy busbars B-19
04652 Support for rear vertical Linergy busbars B-23
04653 Support for rear vertical 5/10mm busbars B-32, B-33
04656 Linergy vertical PEN kit B-83
04657 Linergy vertical PE supports (3) B-82
04658 Chocks (12) for Linergy Evolution 1600A
vertical
B-21
04659 Chocks (12) for Linergy Evolution 4000A
vertical
B-21
04661 Fixed support for lateral vertical 5/10mm
busbars
B-21, B-28,
B-30, B-31
04662 Free support for 5/10mm busbars A-5, A-7,
A-10, A-12,
A-15, A-18,
A-21, A-49,
B-15, B-16,
B-21, B-26,
B-27, B-28,
B-30, B-31,
B-32, B-33
04663 Bottom support for lateral vertical 5/10mm
busbars
B-21, B-28,
B-30
04664 Support for 5/10mm horizontal busbars A-7, B-15,
B-16, B-26,
B-27
04666 Bottom support for lateral vertical 5/10mm
busbars W=300 mm
B-31
04667 Horizontal PE supports (2) B-82
04669 Mounting chocks (100) for 5mm busbars B-32, B-33,
B-68
04671 Support mounting hardware for bars > 80mm A-7, B-16,
B-21, B-27,
B-31
04672 Connection plates for horizontal/vertical PE
bars (2)
B-82
04690 Spacing rods for fat bars A-8
04691 Spacing rods for edgewise bars A-9, A-13,
A-14, A-19
04692 Flange for fat bars, W=400mm A-12, A-18
04693 Connection support, 70mm between centres A-9, A-14
04694 Connection support, 115mm between centres A-4, A-7,
A-20, A-49
04703 Canalis interface, 1600A, 3P A-9, A-14
04704 Canalis interface, 1600A, 4P A-9, A-14
04711 Canalis connection for front-connected
NS-NT, 3P
A-9, A-14
04712 Canalis connection for front-connected
NS-NT, 4P
A-9, A-14
04713 Canalis connection for rear-connected
NS-NT, 3P
A-9, A-14
04714 Canalis connection for rear-connected
NS-NT, 4P
A-9, A-14
04715 Canalis connection, 1600A, NW, 3P A-4
400E00015.indd 17 23/03/2012 09:43:51
18
04742 Insulated fexible bar 20x2mm, W=1800mm B-64
04759 Torque nuts, 20 M8 B-68
04766 Bolts for lug connection to Linergy busbars
(20)
B-25, B-82
04767 Bolts for bar connection to Linergy busbars
(20)
B-25
04772 Washers for insulated fexible bars (20),
diameter=20mm
B-25, B-67
diameter=24mm
B-25, B-67
diameter=28mm
B-25, B-67
04775 Washers for lugs L25 (20) B-25
04782 Bolts for bars (20), M8x20mm B-67
04794 Linergy markers (12) B-25
04809 Polypact tooth-caps A-25, A-27,
A-29, A-51,
B-63
04842 Connection cover for horizontal fxed NS1600 A-16
04844 Rear connection cover for horizontal fxed
NS1600
A-16
04851 Front connection cover for vertical fxed
NS1600
A-14, B-35
04852 Front connection cover for vertical NS1600-
NT
A-9, A-14,
B-35
04853 Rear connection cover for vertical fxed
NS1600
A-14, B-35
04854 Rear connection cover for vertical NS1600-
NT
A-9, A-14,
B-35
04855 Cover for vertical NS1600-NT, 3P, W=400mm A-12, A-18
04860 Busbar cover for NW or ISFL, W=650mm A-8, A-52
04861 Front connection cover for NW A-4, A-7,
B-35
04863 Rear connection cover for NW A-4, B-35
04871 Canalis cover A-4, A-9,
A-14, B-35
04901 Form 3 horizontal partition B-41
04911 Inter-cubicle partition, D=400mm A-61, B-46,
B-47
04915 Plain barrier for horizontal busbars W400
D400
B-38
04919 Plain barrier for horizontal busbars W800
D400
B-38
04920 Form 2 front barrier for lateral vertical busbars
W = 300 mm
B-37
04921 Form 2 front barrier for lateral vertical busbars B-37
04922 Form 2 side barrier for lateral vertical busbars B-37
04924 Form 2 restoration kit for side barrier cut-out B-37
04926 Cover for connection to vertical device >
800A, W=650mm
A-5, A-10,
A-15, A-21,
A-49, B-34
04927 Additional cover for connection, W=650mm,
D=600mm
A-5, A-21,
B-34
04931 Inter-cubicle partition, D=600mm A-61, B-46,
B-47
04943 Rear support for Form 3 partition B-41
04946 Form 4 backplate for front connection,
D=600mm
B-44
04951 Form 4 gland plate, 3 or 4 modules B-44, B-45
04952 Form 4 gland plate, 5 or 6 modules B-44, B-45
04953 Form 4 cover for connection transfer
assembly, 3 to 5 modules
B-44, B-45
04954 Form 4 cover for connection transfer
assembly, 4 to 6 modules
B-44, B-45
04955 Form 3 vertical partition for rear connection, 3
or 4 modules
B-41
04956 Form 3 vertical partition for rear connection, 5
or 6 modules
B-41
04963 Form 2 cover for horizontal busbars,
W=300mm, D=600mm, 4000 A
B-38
W=400mm, D=600mm, 4000 A
B-38
W=650mm, D=600mm, 4000 A
B-38
W=800mm, D=600mm, 4000 A
B-38
W=300mm, D=400mm
B-38
W=400mm, D=400mm
B-38
W=650mm, D=400mm
B-38
W=800mm, D=400mm
B-38
W=300mm, D=600mm
B-38
W=400mm, D=600mm
B-38
W=650mm, D=600mm
B-38
W=800mm, D=600mm
B-38
07000
07051 Cable connectors (4), 160A, 70mm B-75
07052 Cable connectors (4) 250A, 185mm B-75
07053 Cable connectors (4) 400A, 300mm B-75
08000
08403 Framework, W=300mm, D=400mm C-12
08407 Framework, W=650+150mm, D=400mm C-12
08433 IP30 plain roof, W=300mm, D=400mm C-15
08476 IP30 ventilated roof, W=650mm, D=400mm A-61, C-28
08483 IP55 plain gland plate, W=300mm, D=400mm C-18
08487 IP55 plain gland plate, W=650+150mm,
D=400mm
C-18
08493 IP30 2-part gland plate, W=300mm,
D=400mm
C-18
400E00015.indd 18 23/03/2012 09:43:51
19
D=400mm
C-18
D=400mm
C-18
08497 IP30 2-part gland plate, W=650+150mm,
D=400mm
C-18
D=400mm
C-18
08513 IP30 plain door, W=300mm C-14, C-15
08534 IP30 transparent door, W=400mm C-14
08564 Front plate support frame, W=400mm C-12
08566 Front plate support frame, W=650mm C-12
08574 IP30 cover frame, W=400mm C-14
08585 Front plate hinge kit C-23
08593 IP30 door with cut-out for human/switchboard
interface (HSI), W=300mm
C-14
08594 IP30 door with cut-out for human/switchboard
interface (HSI), W=400mm
C-14
08607 Framework, W=650+150mm, D=600mm C-12
08676 IP30 ventilated roof, W=650mm, D=600mm A-61, C-28
08687 IP55 plain gland plate, W=650+150mm,
D=600mm
C-18
D=600mm
C-18
D=600mm
C-18
D=600mm
C-18
08697 IP30 2-part gland plate, W=650+150mm,
D=600mm
C-18
D=600mm
C-18
08700 Lifting rings (4) C-21
08701 Stabiliser kit C-21
08702 Levelling kit C-21
08703 False foor fxing kit C-22
08704 Floor/wall fxing kit C-22
08705 Handling base, W = 1200->1900mm C-19,
D-105
D-105
D-105
08711 IP31 sealing kit C-15
08713 IP30 right-angle kit C-20
08714 Cubicle handling base end-pieces (2),
D=400mm
C-19,
D-105
08716 Cubicle handling base end-pieces (2),
D=600mm
C-19,
D-105
08717 IP55 sealing kit for side-by-side combinations C-13
08718 Set of 10 screws + combination accessories C-13
08719 Double depth combination kit C-13
08720 Side plates for plinth (2), D=400mm C-18
08721 Side plates for plinth (2), D=600mm C-18
08722 Lifting reinforcement kit C-19,
D-105
08723 Plinth, H=100mm, W=300mm, D=400mm C-18
08733 IP30 rear panel, W=300mm C-15
08750 IP30 side panels (2), W=400mm C-15
08756 IP55 combination side panels (2), W=400mm C-15, C-17
08773 Cable tie supports (4), W=300mm B-65
08774 Cable tie supports (4), W=400mm A-13, A-19,
B-65
08783 Form C cable-tie support W1600 B-66
08794 Cable tie supports (4), D=400mm A-13, A-19,
B-65
08796 Cable tie supports (4), D=600mm A-13, A-19,
B-65
08900 Switchboard identifcation plate C-24
08903 Adhesive label holders (12), H=24mm,
W=432mm
C-24
W=432mm
C-24
W=180mm
C-24
W=180mm
C-24
08910 Earthing braid, 6mm C-26
08911 Earthing wire, 6mm C-26
08913 Clip-on labels (12), 18x35mm C-24
08914 Engraving plates (12), 18x35mm C-24
08915 Clip-on labels (12), 18x72mm C-24
08917 Clip-on labels, 25x85mm C-24
08921 Screws (20) + wing nuts for framework A-59, C-13
08931 System P Ral 7016 standard handle C-25
400E00015.indd 19 23/03/2012 09:43:52
20
08932 EURO handle without insert C-25
08933 ASSA/ABLOY handle without insert C-25
08938 Handle padlocking kit C-25
08940 Barrel lock no. 405 C-25
08941 Barrel lock no. 455 C-25
08942 Barrel lock no. 1242E C-25
08943 Barrel lock no. 3113A C-25
08944 Barrel lock no. 2433A C-25
08945 DIN double bar insert C-25
08946 Screwdriver slot insert C-25
08947 Triangle insert, 6.5mm male C-25
08948 Triangle insert, 7mm male C-25
08951 Square insert, 6mm male C-25
08955 Square insert, 6mm female C-25
08956 Barrel lock no. 2432E C-25
08961 Touch-up paint brush C-26
08962 Touch-up spray paint C-26
08963 Adhesive drawing holder C-26
08964 Switchboard lighting A-84
08965 Switchboard portable lamp A-84
08986 Roof fan A-61, C-28
08987 Fan C-27
08988 Grill with flter C-27
08989 Filters, 5 standard C-27
08990 Filters, 5 fne C-27
08992 Resistor, 55W C-29
08998 Thermostat C-29
13000
13735 Self-adhesive label sheets for common
symbols (10)
C-24
13736 Self-adhesive label sheets for special
symbols (10)
C-24
14000
14811 Comb busbar (W = 430 mm, 16 poles) 1P A-40
14818 Tooth caps (set of 20) A-40
14881 Comb busbar, 24-module (9 mm modules) 1P A-40
14891 Comb busbars, 2 48-module (9 mm modules)
1P
A-40
2P
A-40
3P
A-40
4P
A-40
A
AB1 AB8P35 Stop plate for markers B-71
AB1 ALN352 2-pole commoning link for 35 mm screw
term.block
B-70
term.block
B-70
term.block
B-70
AB1 RRAL42 2-pole insulated commoning link - 4 mm B-69
AB1 RRN435U2BL Terminal block 1in/1out-blue-4 mm B-69
AB1 RRN435U2GR Terminal block 1in/1out-grey-4 mm B-69
AB1 RRNAC442BL Blue end plate - 4 mm B-69
AB1 RRNAC442GR Grey end plate - 4 mm B-69
AB1 RRNAC443BL Blue end plate - 4 mm B-69
AB1 RRNAC443GR Grey end plate - 4 mm B-69
AB1 RRNAL62 2-pole insulated commoning link - 6 mm B-69
AB1 RRNTP435U2 Terminal block 1in/1out-green/yellow-4 mm B-69
AB1 RRNTPAC442 Separation partition - 4 mm B-69
AB1 RRNTPAC443 Separation partition - 4 mm B-69
AB1 VVN3535U Screw terminal block grey 35 mm B-70
AB1 VVN3535UBL Screw terminal block blue 35 mm B-70
P
PRA90045 50 mm terminal block kit B-72
PRA90046 25 mm terminal block kit B-72
PRA90047 4 x 6 mm terminal block kit B-72
PRA90048 Splitter block kit B-72
PRA90051 Terminal block support kit B-72
400E00015.indd 20 23/03/2012 09:43:52
21
400E00015.indd 21 16/01/2012 10:26:18
22
System G
b Schools
b Hotels, etc.
b Shopping centres
b Supermarkets
b Malls, etc.
b Small
companies, etc. companies, etc. companies, etc.
b Buildings Buildings
b Offce Offce
b Residential, etc. Residential, etc.
b Laboratories Laboratories Laboratories
b Healthcare centres, etc. Healthcare centres, etc. Healthcare centres, etc.
Pack enclosures
Our
answers
to your
needs
630 A
160 A
BOOK EN.indb 22 19/10/2011 14:34:50
23
System P
b Hospitals
b Internet data
centres, etc.
b Food industry
b Deary, etc.
b Logistics Logistics
centres, etc. centres, etc.
b Bottling factories
b Packaging
factories
b Automobile
factories, etc.
4000 A
BOOK EN.indb 23 19/10/2011 14:34:52
24
Presentation
Prisma Plus
electrical switchboards
Prisma Plus - a comprehensive range of enclosures and cubicles
P
B
3
8
4
6
2
0
.
e
p
s
Prisma Plus - a tried and tested modular system
A dependable electrical installation
The total compatibility of Schneider Electric devices with the Prisma Plus system is
a key advantage in ensuring a high level of installation dependability.
System design has been validated by type tests as per standards IEC 61439-1 and
IEC 61439-2 and benefts from the combined experience of Schneider Electric
customers over many years.
An upgradeable electrical installation
Thanks to modular design, Prisma Plus switchboards can be modifed easily to
integrate new functions as needed.
Maintenance operations, carried out with the switchboard de-energised, are fast and
straight-forward due to easy access to devices.
Total safety for personnel
Work in a Prisma Plus switchboard is risk-free when carried out by qualifed persons
in compliance with all applicable safety regulations.
Devices are installed behind protective front plates and only the operating handles
are accessible.
Additional internal separations protect against direct contact with live parts.
Terminal shields are mandatory for installation of Compact NSX and Interpact INS/
INV devices in Prisma Plus enclosures.
BOOK EN.indb 24 19/10/2011 14:34:54
25
Presentation
IP30/31/55 cubicles
b Applications:
v indoor cubicles for main or subdistribution low-voltage switchboards for
commercial and industrial applications
v supplied in kit form, can be combined side-by-side and back-to-back
b In (A): 4000 A
b Degree of protection:
v IP30: with IP30 cover panels including a door or a cover frame
v IP31: with IP30 cover panels including a door + gasket
v IP55: with IP55 cover panels
b Degree of protection against mechanical impacts:
v IK07 with cover frame
v IK08 (with IP30 door)
v IK10 with IP55 door
b Framework dimensions:
v four widths:
- W = 300: cable compartment
- W = 400: cable compartment or device compartment
- W = 650: device compartment or cable compartment
- W = 800: device compartment with busbar compartment or cable compartment
v two depths: 400, 600 mm
v height: 2000 mm.
P
D
3
9
0
1
8
0
_
S
E
.
e
p
s

BOOK EN.indb 25 19/10/2011 14:34:55
26
Presentation
The Prisma Plus functional
system
The Prisma Plus functional system can be used for all types of low-voltage
distribution switchboards (main, subdistribution and fnal) up to 4000 A, in
commercial and industrial environments.
Switchboard design is very simple.
A metal structure
The switchboard is made up of one or more frameworks combined side-by-side or
back-to-back, on which a complete selection of cover panels and doors can be
mounted.
A distribution system
Horizontal busbars or vertical busbars positioned in a lateral compartment or at the
rear of the cubicle are used to distribute electricity throughout the switchboard.
Complete functional units
Each device is part of a functional unit comprising:
b a dedicated mounting plate for device installation
b a front plate to block direct access to live parts
b prefabricated busbar connections
b devices for on-site connections.
Each functional unit contributes to a function in the switchboard.
The functional units are modular and are arranged rationally, one on top of another,
within the enclosure.
The system includes everything required for functional unit mounting, supply and
onsite connection.
The components of the Prisma Plus system and those of the functional units in
particular have been designed and tested taking into account device characteristics.
This design approach ensures a high degree of reliability in system operation and
optimum safety for personnel.
P
D
3
9
1
2
9
8
.
e
p
s
P
D
3
9
0
1
5
0
_
S
E
_
R
.
e
p
s
Functional units are arranged rationally, one on top of another.
Electrical switchboards
up to 4000 A

BOOK EN.indb 26 19/10/2011 14:34:59
27
Presentation
Prisma Plus enclosures
b Steel sheet metal
b Electrophoresis treatment + hot-polymerised polyester epoxy powder, white
colour RAL 9001
b Can be dismantled
b Can be combined side-by-side and back-to-back
b Degree of protection:
v IP30: with IP30 cover panels including a door or a cover frame
v IP31: with IP30 cover panels including a door + gasket
v IP55: with IP55 cover panels
b Degree of protection against mechanical impacts:
v IK07: with cover frame
v IK08: with IP30 door
v IK10: with IP55 door
b Framework dimensions:
v four widths:
- W = 300: cable compartment
- W = 400: cable compartment or device compartment
- W = 650: device compartment or cable compartment
- W = 800: device compartment with busbar compartment or cable compartment
v two depths: 400, 600 mm
v height: 2000 mm
b Indoor cubicles.
P
D
3
9
0
3
8
1
_
S
E
.
e
p
s
Advantages of Prisma Plus
switchboards
A dependable electrical installation
The total compatibility of Schneider Electric devices with the Prisma Plus system is a
key advantage in ensuring a high level of installation dependability.
System design has been validated by type tests as per standards IEC 61439-1 and 2
and benefts from the combined experience of Schneider Electric customers over
many years.
An upgradeable electrical installation
Thanks to modular design, Prisma Plus switchboards can be modifed easily to
integrate new functional units as needed.
Maintenance operations, carried out with the switchboard de-energised, are fast and
straight-forward due to easy access to devices.
Total safety for personnel
Work in a switchboard must be carried out by authorised persons in compliance with
all applicable safety regulations.
To increase the safety of personnel, devices are installed behind protective front
plates; only the operating handles are accessible. Additional internal protection
(partitions, barriers) is available to create form 2, 3 or 4 separation to protect against
direct contacts with live parts.
Terminal shields are mandatory for installation of Compact NSX and INS/INV
devices in Prisma Plus enclosures.
Electrical switchboards built using the Prisma Plus functional system and
Schneider recommendations fully comply with international standards
IEC 61439-1 and 2.
Electrical characteristics
Use of the components in the Prisma Plus functional system ensures the creation of
switchboards complying with standards IEC 50298, EN 50298, IEC 61439-1 and 2,
EN 61439-1 and 2, as well as local versions with the following electrical
characteristics:
b rated insulation level of main busbars: 1000 V
b InA (A): 3520 A
b rated peak withstand current Ipk: 220 k
b rated short-time withstand current Icw: 100 kA rms / 1 second
b frequency: 50/60 Hz.

Electrical switchboards
up to 4000 A
BOOK EN.indb 27 19/10/2011 14:35:00
Incomer
P
D
3
9
1
2
9
8
_
S
E
_
R
.
e
p
s
Compact NS1000 4P
Fixed, front connection
Toggle
Supply via cables
Distribution
Linergy busbars
Outgoing devices
Compact NSX250
Horizontal
Toggle
Supply Prefabricated connection
Connection Transferred to cable
compartment,W = 300 mm
Compact NSX250
Vertical
Toggle
Supply Polypact distribution block
Connection Direct via cables
Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices
Supply 80 A Multiclip
200 A Multiclip
Comb busbars
Cable running Cable straps
Trunking
Connection Terminal block in the cable
compartment, W = 300 mm
Enclosure
Cubicle for devices W = 800 mm
D = 400 mm
Cable compartment W = 300 mm
D = 400 mm
P
D
3
9
1
1
7
2
_
S
E
_
R
.
e
p
s
P
D
3
9
0
3
8
2
_
S
E
_
R
.
e
p
s
Fixed Compact NS1000, front connected with
cables.
Prefabricated connection between an
incoming device and Linergy busbars.
P
D
3
9
0
3
8
3
.
e
p
s
P
D
3
9
5
0
9
7
.
e
p
s
Prefabricated connection between Linergy
busbars and an NSX250.
Connection transfer assembly for connection
in a cable compartment.
Examples of switchboard
configurations

Presentation
28
BOOK EN.indb 28 19/10/2011 14:35:01
P
D
3
9
0
3
8
5
_
S
E
_
R
.
e
p
s
P
D
3
9
1
2
9
9
.
e
p
s
P
D
3
9
1
3
0
0
_
S
E
_
R
.
e
p
s
Two vertically mounted Compact NSX250
devices supplied by a Polypact.
Supply of a row of Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices by
a 200 A Multiclip.
P
B
1
0
4
9
9
7
.
e
p
s
P
D
3
9
0
3
2
9
R
.
e
p
s
A device supplying a group of outgoers
via an 80 A Multiclip.
Terminal block for Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices in
the cable compartment.
configurations
Presentation
29
BOOK EN.indb 29 19/10/2011 14:35:03
Incomer
P
B
1
0
4
9
9
8
.
e
p
s
Compact NSX630 4P
Motor mechanism
Direct supply via cables
Distribution
Powerclip busbars
Outgoing devices
200 A Multiclip
Comb busbars
Trunking
Connection Connection Terminal block + earth
bar at bottom of the switchboard
Enclosure
Cubicle, W = 650 mm, D = 400 mm
P
B
1
0
4
9
9
9
.
e
p
s
P
D
3
9
0
5
6
3
_
S
E
_
R
.
e
p
s
configurations

Presentation
30
BOOK EN.indb 30 19/10/2011 14:35:04
P
D
3
9
0
3
9
4
_
S
E
_
R
.
e
p
s
configurations
Presentation
31
BOOK EN.indb 31 19/10/2011 14:35:05
Incomer
P
D
3
9
0
3
9
8
_
S
E
_
R
.
e
p
s
Compact NS1000 4P
Toggle
Supply via Canalis
Distribution
Linergy busbars
Outgoing devices
Compact NSX250
Horizontal
Toggle
Connection Transferred to cable compartment,
W = 300 mm
Compact NSX400
Horizontal
Toggle
W = 300 mm
Supply Comb busbars
Trunking
Connection Terminal block at bottom of cubicle
Motor protection devices
Supply Comb busbars
Trunking
Enclosure
Cubicle for devices W = 800/650 mm
D = 400 mm
P
D
3
9
0
3
9
9
.
e
p
s
D = 400 mm
configurations

Presentation
32
BOOK EN.indb 32 19/10/2011 14:35:07
Incomer
P
B
1
0
5
0
0
1
.
e
p
s
Masterpact NT1000 3P
Drawout, front connection
Supply via Canalis
Distribution
Linergy busbars
Outgoing devices
Compact NSX250
Vertical
Toggle
Compact NSX250
Horizontal
Toggle
W = 400 mm
Compact NSX400
Horizontal
Toggle
W = 400 mm
Comb busbars
Trunking
Supply
P
D
3
9
0
4
0
7
_
S
E
_
R
.
e
p
s
Trunking
Enclosure
Cubicle for devices W = 800/650 mm
D = 400 mm
Cable compartment W = 300/400 mm
D = 400 mm
configurations

Presentation
33
BOOK EN.indb 33 19/10/2011 14:35:09
Incomer
Masterpact NW20 4P
Drawout
Upstream terminals: vertical rear connection
Downstream terminals: front connection
Supply via Canalis from the top
Distribution
Vertical Linergy Evolution 2000 A busbars
Horizontal Linergy Evolution 2000 A busbars
Enclosure
Cubicle for devices W = 650+150/800 mm
D = 600 mm
D = 600 mm
Outgoing devices
Compact NSX
Horizontal
Toggle
Supply Flexible bars
Compact NSX250
Vertical
Toggle
Compact NSX400
Horizontal
Rotary handle
Supply Flexible bars
Connection Transferred to cable compartment, W = 300 mm
Cable running Trunking
Connection Terminal block in the cable compartment, W = 300 mm
Supply Comb busbars
configurations
Presentation
H
C
F
G
H
H
C
F
G
H
H
C
F
G
H
D
D
3
8
4
5
1
7
.
E
P
S
34
BOOK EN.indb 34 19/10/2011 14:35:14
Incomer
Masterpact NW32 4P
(1)
Fixed
Upstream terminals: front connection
Downstream terminals: vertical rear connection
Supply via cables from the bottom
Distribution
Vertical Linergy busbars
Horizontal Linergy Evolution busbars
Enclosure
Cubicle for devices W = 650+150/800 mm
D = 1000 mm
(1) For mounting a NW40, provide for a dedicated cubicle.
Outgoing devices
Compact NSX250
Vertical
Fixed, rear connection
Toggle
Compact NSX250
Horizontal
Toggle
Compact NSX400
Horizontal
Toggle
Cable running Trunking
Supply Comb busbars
Presentation
configurations

H
C
F
G
H
H
C
F
G
H
H
C
F
G
H
D
d
3
8
4
5
1
8
.
E
P
S
35
BOOK EN.indb 35 19/10/2011 14:35:22
36
Presentation
P
B
1
0
5
0
0
2
.
e
p
s
Incoming function
Connection via Canalis
See page A-9
Distribution function
Linergy busbars in busbar compartment,
W = 150 mm
See page B-12
Horizontal busbars Linergy Evolution See page B-14
Powerclip busbars See page B-50
Device compartment, W = 650 mm See page C-18
Connection compartment, W = 300 mm See page C-18
Connection compartment, W = 400 mm See page C-18
1
2
3
4
5
The functions of an electrical
switchboard
400E10050.indd 36 20/10/2011 08:44:16
37
Presentation
P
B
1
0
5
0
0
3
.
e
p
s
Hinged front plate support frame See page C-14
Roof See page C-15
Rear panels See page C-15
Front doors See page C-14
Gland plates See page C-18
Side panels See page C-15
1
2
3
4
5
6
The functions of an electrical
switchboard
400E10050.indd 37 20/10/2011 08:46:27
38
Standards
IEC international standards
The IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission) is a worldwide organisation for
standardisation comprising all national electrotechnical committees (IEC National
Committees).
The object of the IEC is to promote international cooperation on all questions
concerning standardisation in the electrical and electronic felds.
To that end, the IEC publishes International Standards.
Their preparation is entrusted to technical committees and any IEC National
Committee interested in the subject dealt with may participate in the preparatory
work.
IEC member countries
Argentina
Australia
Austria
Belarus
Belgium
Brazil
Bulgaria
Canada
China
Croatia
Czech Rep.
Denmark
Egypt
Finland
France
Germany
Greece
Hungary
India
Indonesia
Iran
Ireland
Israel
Italy
Japan
Korea (Rep. of)
Luxemburg
Malaysia
Mexico
Netherlands
New Zealand
Norway
Pakistan
Poland
Portugal
Rumania
Russia
Singapore
Slovakia
Slovenia
South Africa
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Thailand
Turkey
Ukraine
United Kingdom
United States
Yugoslavia
National standards
In Europe
The IEC documents are frst studied by CENELEC, which establishes:
b either a European standard (EN), often identical to the IEC standard, which then
becomes the applicable national standard in all the member countries
b or, in the event of differences, a harmonisation document (HD).
Other IEC member countries
Each country is autonomous and can accept the IEC standard as the national
standard, with or without modifcations.
Even though they are IEC members, countries such as Japan and the United States
continue to develop their own standardisation systems.
Countries without a standardisation system
It is possible to refer to an IEC standard in the framework of a project.
Worldwide
Countries
Other IEC
member
countries
D
D
3
8
3
9
7
2
.
e
p
s
CEI / IEC
Commission Electrotechnique Internationale
CENELEC
Comit Europen de Normalisation ELECtrotechnique
UTE
Union Technique de llectricit
VDE
Verband der Elektrotechnik, Elektronik und Informationstechnik
e.v. (German electrotechnical, electronics and computer
technology standardisation organisation)
BSI
British Standards Institution
Standards and
Prisma Plus tested
switchboards
BOOK EN.indb 38 19/10/2011 14:35:29
39
The different types of standards
There are different types of standards, including:
b management standards
b installation standards
b product standards.
D
D
3
8
1
7
7
5
D
D
3
8
1
7
7
6
Management standards
ISO 9004: Quality-management systems - guidelines for performance
improvements. Used in setting up a quality-management system.
ISO 9001: Quality management systems - requirements. Used for certifcation
audits.
ISO 14004: Environmental-management systems. General guidelines on the
principles, systems and supporting techniques.
ISO 14001: Environmental-management systems. Specifcation with guidance for
use
The majority of Schneider Electric development centres and factories are certifed
ISO 9001 and ISO 14001.
Installation standards
The set of IEC 60364-X standards defnes the main principles and rules on:
b determining general characteristics of installations
b protection
b selection and installation of equipment
b verifcation and maintenance of installations.
Product standards
They apply to devices or assemblies and are aimed at ensuring correct operation
and safety of the concerned products.
b standards on low-voltage switchgear and controlgear:
v IEC 60947-1 : general rules
v IEC 60947-2 : circuit breakers
v IEC 60947-3 : switches and disconnectors
v IEC 60947-4 : contactors
v IEC 62208 / EN 50298: empty enclosures.
b standards on low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies:
v IEC 61439-1: general rules
v IEC 61439-2: power switchgear and controlgear assemblies
v IEC 61439-3: distribution boards
v IEC 61439-4: assemblies for construction sites
v IEC 61439-5: assemblies for power distribution
v IEC 61439-6: busbar trunking systems.
Design and manufacture. Switchgear and controlgear
assemblies.
D
D
3
8
1
7
7
7
D
D
3
8
1
7
7
8
Switchgear and controlgear. Installation.
Regulations in a given country may make certain standards legally binding and may
also create additional safety requirements.
In addition to providing proof of the conformity of its quality-management system, a
product manufacturer can demonstrate the quality of products by providing proof that
the design and manufacture comply with the requirements in the applicable
standard.
Proof of conformity may be a declaration by the manufacturer or a certifcate
supplied by an independent organisation.
Standards
Standards and
Prisma Plus tested
switchboards
BOOK EN.indb 39 19/10/2011 14:35:29
40
e marking
e marking is a regulatory symbol attributed under the sole responsibility of the
manufacturer and intended for the verifcation authorities of the European countries
that enforce the European regulations.
It allows free circulation of a product in the European Union and certifes that it
complies with the basic requirements in all the applicable European directives.
e marking is not a quality symbol and does not indicate conformity with a standard.
The e declaration is intended exclusively for the authorities in charge of verifying
compliance with the applicable regulations and it is drafted, signed and held for
presentation to the authorities by the manufacturer.
For the Prisma Plus range, the declaration is the responsibility of the Schneider
Electric unit that has designed and developed the product.
For LV switchboards, the declaration is the responsibility of the panelbuilder.
The following products receive e marking:
b all products that are liable to endanger the safety of persons, animals and property
(LV directive)
b all products likely to emit electromagnetic disturbances above a standardised
threshold or to be disturbed during operation (EMC directive).
Consequences:
b the Prisma Plus range falls under the LV directive only
b LV switchboards are covered by the LV directive and may also fall under the EMC
directive, depending on the type of devices incorporated.
e
For the Prisma Plus range, e marking is applied:
b on the packing of mechanical components
b on the product itself for electrical components.
For the LV assemblies created by the panelbuilder, e marking is applied:
b on the packing
b on the rating plate (if applicable)
b on one of the documents accompanying the switchboard when it is shipped.
Standards
Standards and
Prisma Plus tested
switchboards
BOOK EN.indb 40 19/10/2011 14:35:29
41
Standards
Degree of protection
Standard IEC 60364-5-51 lists and codifes a large number of external infuences to
which electrical installations can be subjected, including the presence of water, solid
objects, shocks, vibrations, corrosive substances, etc.
IP code
Standard IEC 60529 (IP code, February 2001) indicates the degrees of protection
provided by an enclosure for electrical devices against access to hazardous parts,
against penetration of solid foreign objects and against penetration of water.
These standards do not apply for the protection against the risks of explosion or
conditions such a humidity, corrosive vapour, fungus or vermin.
The IP code is made up of two characteristic numerals and can include an additional
letter when the actual protection for persons against access to the hazardous parts is
better than that indicated by the frst numeral.
The frst numeral characterises the protection provided against the ingress of solid
foreign objects and the protection of persons.
The second numeral characterises the protection provided against the ingress of
water with harmful effects.
1
st
numeral 2
nd
numeral
Protection of persons Protection against ingress of solid
objects
Protection against ingress of water
1
Protected against
access with back of
hand
D
D
3
8
1
9
5
9Protection against
solid foreign objects
larger than 50 mm
D
D
3
8
1
9
5
9
1
Protected against
vertically dripping
water (condensation)
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
6
2
Protected against
access with a fnger
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
0Protection against
larger than 12.5 mm
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
3
2
Protected against
dripping water up to
15 from vertical
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
7
3
Protected against
access with a tool
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
1Protection against
larger than 2.5 mm
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
1
3
Protected against
spraying water up to
60 from vertical
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
8
4
Protected against
access with a wire
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
2Protection against
larger than 1 mm
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
2
4
Protected against
splashing water from
all directions
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
9
5
Protected against
access with a wire
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
2Protected against dust
(dust protected)
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
4
5
Protected against
water jets from all
directions
D
D
3
8
1
9
7
0
6
Protected against
access with a wire
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
2Dust tight
D
D
3
8
1
9
6
5
6
Protected against
powerful water jets
from all directions
D
D
3
8
1
9
7
1
7
Protected against the
effects of temporary
immersion in water
D
D
3
8
1
9
7
2
8
Protected against the
effects of continuous
immersion in water
D
D
3
8
1
9
7
3
Standards and
Prisma Plus tested
switchboards
BOOK EN.indb 41 19/10/2011 14:35:31
42
Standards
Additional letter
The additional letter is used only if the actual protection of persons is higher than that
indicated by the frst characteristic numeral of the IP code.
Additional letter Protection
A Protected against access with back of hand
B Protected against access with a 12 mm diameter fnger
C Protected against access with a 2.5 mm diameter tool
D Protected against access with a 1 mm diameter wire
If only the protection of persons is of interest, the two characteristic numerals are
replaced by the letter X, e.g. IPXXB.
Illustration of the above explanations:
Protection against solid foreign objects
larger than 2.5 mm
No protection
Protected against access
with a 1 mm diameter wire
Remarks
b The degree of protection IP must always be read and understood numeral by
numeral and not as a whole.
For example, an IP31 wall-mount enclosure is suitable for an environment that
requires a minimum degree of protection IP21. However an IP30 wall-mount
enclosure is not suitable.
b the degrees of protection indicated in this catalogue are valid for the enclosures as
presented. However, the indicated degree of protection is guaranteed only when
installation and device mounting are carried out in accordance with professional
standards that conserve the initial degree of protection.
IK code
Standard IEC 62262 defnes an IK code characterising the capacity of products to
resist mechanical impacts from all sides.
IK code Impact energy (joules)
01 0.14
02 0.2
03 0.35
04 0.5
05 0.7
06 1
07 2
08 5
09 10
10 20
IK codes can be selected according to the risks of impacts on a given site.
Site Recommended IK
No risk of major impact Technical premises 07
Signifcant risk of impact that
can damage devices
Hallways 08 (switchboard with door)
Maximum risk of impact that
can damage the switchboard
Workshops 10
IP30D
Standards and
Prisma Plus tested
switchboards
BOOK EN.indb 42 19/10/2011 14:35:31
43 19/10/2011
Presentation
IEC 61439 standard
The switchboard,
central to the electrical installation
Both the point of arrival of energy and a device for distribution
to the site applications, the LV switchboard is the intelligence of
the system, central to the electrical installation.
It plays an essential role in the availability of electric power, while meeting the needs of personal and property safety.
Its denition, design and installation are based on precise rules; there is no place for improvisation. The IEC 61439 standard
aims to better dene "low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies", ensuring that the specied performances are
reached. It species in particular:
> the responsibilities of each player, distinguishing those of the original equipment manufacturer; the organization
that performed the original design and associated verication of an assembly in accordance with the standard, and of
the assembly manufacturer - the organization taking responsibility for the nished assembly;
> the design and verication rules, constituting a benchmark for product certication.
All the component parts of the electrical switchboard are concerned by the IEC 61439-2 standard. Equipment produced
in accordance with the requirements of this switchboard standard ensures the safety and reliability of the installation.
The Schneider Electric solution
> Specify switchboards that comply with
standard IEC 61439-1 and 2.
> guarantee a level of safety that has been
100% tested, from the day the switchboard
is installed and throughout its service life.
> ensure a lasting investment through easy
upgrading of the installation in compliance with
the standard.
> guarantee that the switchboard complies
with the technical specications.
Prisma Plus tested switchboards
The conformity of the switchboard has been tested
and proven.
A Prisma Plus switchboard is:
> made up of Schneider Electric low-voltage devices and
components that all comply with the applicable standards;
> based on congurations in our catalogue;
> made up of Prisma Plus mechanical and electrical
components that have been subjected to the verication of
original equipment manufacturer;
> mounted and wired by a panelbuilder in compliance
with professional standards;
> subjected to the individual verication.
Schneider Electric makes available to the panelbuilder
everything required to create tested Prisma Plus
switchboards, including the basic congurations in
the low voltage distribution catalogue, all the documentation
for switchboard design and mounting, calculation and design
software, etc.
Panelbuilders can demonstrate conformity with standard
IEC 61439-1 and 2 by presenting the declarations or
certicates of conformity for type tests carried out by
independent laboratories (ASEFA, ASTA, KEMA, etc.)
and supplied by Schneider Electric. The panelbuilder
is responsible for the individual routine verication and
delivers the corresponding declarations of conformity.
A switchboard must comply with the
equirements of standard IEC 61439-1 and 2 to
guarantee the safety and reliability of the
installation. Managers of installations, fully
aware of the professional and legal liabilities
weighing on their company and on themselves,
demand a high level of safety for the electrical
installation.
What is more, the serious economic
consequences of prolonged halts in production
mean that the electrical switchboard must provide
excellent continuity of service, whatever the
operating conditions.
BOOK EN.indb 43 19/10/2011 14:35:31
44
Presentation
IEC 61439 standard
Both involved
in tested assemblies
A
s
s
e
m
b
l
y

S
y
s
t
e
m

T
e
s
t
e
d

A
s
s
e
m
b
l
y
Standard IEC 61439 clearly defines
the type of verifications that must be conducted
by both organisations involved in final conformity of
the solution: the Original Manufacturer, guaranteeing
assembly system design and the Assembly
Manufacturer, responsible for the final conformity
of the switchboard.
Original
Manufacturer
The organisation that has
carried out the original design
and the associated
verication of an assembly
system.
He is responsible for the
"Design verications" listed by
IEC 61439-2 including many
electrical tests.
Assembly
Manufacturer
(Panel builder)
The organisation (whether
or not the same as the OM)
responsible for the completed
assembly.
He is responsible for
"Routine verications"
on each panel produced,
according to the standard.
If he derivates from the
instructions of the original
manufacturer he has to carry
out again design verications.
End-User
Should ask for a certied
LV switchboard.
By systematically requesting
routine verications,
he ensures that the assembly
system used is compliant.
Specifier
> Species the needs and
constraints for design,
installation, operation and
upgrading of the complete
system.
> Checks that its
requirements have been fully
integrated by the Assembly
Manufacturer. Depending on
the application, the specier
could be the end-user or a
design ofce.
* Schneider Electric has developed
a specication guide.
P
r
o
j
e
c
t

s
p
e
c
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
*
Original Manufacturer and Assembly Manufacturer:
BOOK EN.indb 44 19/10/2011 14:35:32
45 19/10/2011
Presentation
IEC 61439 standard
The main 10 functions
of standard IEC 61439
For each of the following 10 functions, the standard IEC 61439 requires design
verifications from the system manufacturer - mainly through type-tests - and
routine verifications on each panel from the Panel Builder to achieve 3 basic goals:
safety, continuity of service and compliance with end-user requirements.
Compliance with end-user requirements
Capability to operate the electrical installation
To properly function, according to:
> The electrical diagram of the overall system and related information (voltages, coordination)
> The specied operating facilities (e.g. free or restricted access to Man Machine Interfaces, isolation of the outgoing circuits, ).
Capability to be installed on site
> To withstand handling, transport, storage and installation constraints
> Capability to be erected and connected (type of enclosure, type, material and cross sectional areas of external conductors).
Protection of the assembly against mechanical and atmospheric environmental conditions
> Presence of water or solid foreign bodies (IP according to IEC 60529)
> External mechanical impacts (optional IK according to IEC 62262)
> Indoor or outdoor installation (humidity, UV).
Safety
Voltage stresses withstand capability
To withstand long term voltages, and transient and temporary overvoltages according to the insulation coordination principles and
requirements.
Current-carrying capability
To protect against burns and to withstand temperature rise:
> when any circuit is continuously loaded, alone, to the specied current
> when the assembly is loaded to the specied current according to the specied load pattern (between circuits and/or as
a function of the time).
Short-circuit withstand capability
To withstand the stresses resulting from the prospective short-circuit current and from the associated data (High forces between
conductors, temp. rise in a very short time, air ionization, overpressure).
Protection against electric shock
> Hazardous-live-parts not to be accessible (basic protection)
> Accessible conductive parts not to become hazardous-live (fault protection).
Protection against risk of fire or explosion
> Resistance to internal glowing elements
> Note: Protection of persons, and optional protection of the assembly, against arcing due to internal fault can be specied through
a "special test" according to IEC 61641.
Maintenance and modification capability
Capability to preserve continuity of supply without impairing safety during assembly maintenance or modication
> Electrical condition of the assembly or various circuits
> Speed of exchange of the functional units
> Test facilities
Electro-Magnetic compatibility
To properly function (immunity) and not to generate EM disturbances (emission) in specied environmental conditions:
> Industrial networks or locations (Environment A)
> Domestic, commercial, and light industrial locations (Environment B).
Continuity of service
BOOK EN.indb 45 19/10/2011 14:35:32
46
Presentation
IEC 61439 standard
Standard individual
check sheet
in accordance with the IEC 61439-1
and 2 standard from the assembly
manufacturer (panelbuilder)
Job No.: .......................................................................................
Switchboard No.: ............................................................................
Drawing No./Rev. No.: .......................................................................
Chapter Verified
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures 11.2
Insulation clearances and creepage distances 11.3
Protection against electric shocks and integrity
of protection circuits
11.4
Integration of incorporated components 11.5
Internal electric circuits and connections 11.6
Terminals for external conductors 11.7
Mechanical operation 11.8
Dielectric properties 11.9
Wiring, operating performance and function 11.10
Date of verication:
............ / ............ /.............
Verications performed by:
..........................................................................
IEC 61439-1 paragraph 11.6
Internal electric circuits
and connections
Schneider Electric recommends marking
the nut with a tinted acrylic lacquer, indelible
and temperature-resistant.
This allows:
> not only self-checking to check effective
tightening to torque;
> but also identication of any loosening.
IEC 61439-1 paragraphe 11.9
Dielectric properties
The main circuits, and the auxiliary and
control circuits connected to the main circuit,
shall be subjected to the test voltage in
accordance.
Wiring, operating performance
and function
Verication of wiring and marking conformity
with the drawings, parts list and diagram.
Protection against electric shocks
and integrity of protection circuits
The following should be checked visually:
> Presence of protective shields against
direct and indirect contacts on live parts;
> Presence of the PE conductor.
The continuity of protection circuits is
ensured by compliance with the assembly
instructions delivered with each product.
Integration of incorporated
components
The assembly manufacturer must comply
with the instructions of the original equipment
manufacturer for installation
and wiring of the components used.
BOOK EN.indb 46 19/10/2011 14:35:32
47
BOOK EN.indb 47 19/10/2011 14:35:32
48
P
D
3
9
1
3
0
4
_
S
E
_
R
.
e
p
s
Typical configuration with
catalogue numbers

Determining cat. no. and
configuration assistance
Cat. no. selection
BOOK EN.indb 48 19/10/2011 14:35:35
49
Framework, W = 800, D = 400 08407 See page C-12 Front plate for vertical NS630b/
1600
03690 See page A-15
Framework, W = 300, D = 400 08403 See page C-12 Connection for fxed NS630b/
1250, 4P
04486 See page A-15
Side panel, D = 400 08750 See page C-15 Connection for horizontal
NSX250
04424 See page A-24
Rear panel, W = 800 08738 See page C-15 Connection transfer assembly
for NSX250
04426 See page A-24
Rear panel, W = 300 08733 See page C-15 Polypact for 4P fxed NSX250
devices with toggles
04404 See page A-25
Roof, W = 800, D = 400 08438 See page C-15 Powerclip busbars, 250 A, 4P,
W = 1000
04122 See page B-51
Roof, W = 300, D = 400 08433 See page C-15 200 A Multiclip, 4P 04014 See page B-61
IP30 gland plate, W = 800,
D = 400
08497 See page C-18 80 A Multiclip, 4P 04004 See page B-60
IP30 gland plate, W = 300,
D = 400
08493 See page C-18 12 horizontal cable straps 04239 See page B-77
Hinged front plate support
frame
08566 See page C-12 4 covers for horizontal cable
straps
04243 See page B-77
Transparent door, W = 800 08538 See page C-14 4 horizontal trunking sections,
60 x 30
04257 See page B-79
Plain door, W = 300 08513 See page C-14 1000 A Linergy busbars 04504 See page B-18
Mounting plate for vertical fxed
NS630b/1600
03482 See page A-15 Linergy busbar supports 04651 See page B-19

P
D
3
9
1
3
0
3
_
S
E
_
R
.
e
p
s
1 14
2 15
3 16
4 17
5 18
6 19
7 20
8 21
9 22
10 23
11 24
12 25
13 26
Typical configuration with
catalogue numbers
Cat. no. selection
400E20030.indd 49 21/10/2011 09:58:37
50
Starting with the electrical
diagram: IP30 switchboard NSX250 NSX250 NSX250
NS1000
INS
GV2 C60
or
IC60
C60
or
IC60
D
D
3
8
4
0
8
6
.
e
p
s
Install the incomer
Front conn. using cables
D
D
3
8
1
9
8
6
.
e
p
s
See page A-15
D
D
3
8
0
8
7
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
2
2
.
e
p
sOrder:
b connection
components
b mounting plates and
front plates
b busbar connections.
Device installation

Device No of
vert.
mod
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Fixed device
front conn.
D
D
3
8
1
9
8
7
.
e
p
s
H
HH
D
D
3
8
0
8
7
0
.
e
p
s
Linergy BB connection
Front
connectors
Prefabricated
connection
Capot for BB
connectors
Fixed device
D
D
3
8
1
9
8
8
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
8
7
1
.
e
p
s
Install the Compact devices
Installation

Device No of vertical
modules
Mounting plate Cut-out front plate
Fixed Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX
NSX100/250
D
D
3
8
3
9
6
4
.
e
p
s
See page A-24
D
D
3
8
3
8
6
7
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
2
3
.
e
p
sOrder:
front plates
b busbar connections
b connection
accessories.
Device

Prefabricated connection
NSX100/250
NSX400/630
D
D
3
8
3
9
6
5
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
8
7
3
.
e
p
s
Connection

Front connection Rear connection
or Short terminal shields
LV429515
LV429516
LV432591
LV429517
LV429518
LV432593
Fixed Compact NSX
NSX100/250
NSX400/630
D
D
3
8
3
9
6
6
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
8
7
4
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
2
4
.
e
p
s
Order:
front plates
b distribution block
b connection
accessories.
Installation
Fixed Compact NSX
NSX250
NSX100/160 D
D
3
8
3
9
6
7
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
8
7
5
.
e
p
s
NSX100/250
D
D
3
8
3
9
6
8
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
8
7
6
.
e
p
s
Connection
NSX100/250
NSX400/630
LV429515
LV429516
LV432591
LV432592
LV429517
LV429518
LV432593
LV432594
D
D
3
8
3
9
6
9
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
8
7
7
.
e
p
s
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
Determining catalogue numbers
Cat. no. selection
BOOK EN.indb 50 19/10/2011 14:35:41
51
Install the modular devices
Multi 9 or Acti 9
See page A-35
All Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices
Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices y 40 A
D
D
3
8
4
0
8
7
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
2
5
.
e
p
s
Order the mounting
plates and front plates
taking into account:
b supply to the rows
b cable running.
D
D
3
8
0
8
7
9
.
e
p
s
GV2 circuit breaker
D
D
3
8
1
9
9
6
.
e
p
s
See page A-62
D
d
3
8
1
9
1
9
.
e
p
s
b Multiclip distribution block, See page B-60
b cable running, See page B-76
Determine the size of the switchboard
b count the number
of modules occupied
b determine the number
of cubicles
b order the additional
plain front plate.
32 modules
The capacity of a cubicle is 36 modules.
1 cubicle
Plain front plate

D
D
3
8
1
9
9
7
.
e
p
s
See page A-76
Plan the distribution system
Linergy busbars

D
D
3
8
1
9
9
8
.
e
p
s
6mm2 10mm2
6mm2 10mm2
6mm2 10mm2
6mm2 10mm2
D
d
3
8
0
8
2
6
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
8
8
0
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
2
0
0
0
.
e
p
s
Powerclip busbars
D
D
3
8
2
0
0
1
.
e
p
s
See page B-51
D
D
3
8
0
8
8
1
.
e
p
s
Select the enclosures
Frameworks
D
D
3
8
2
0
0
2
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
2
7
.
e
p
s
Hinged front plate support
frame
D
D
3
8
3
9
7
3
.
e
p
s
Doors

D
D
3
8
2
0
0
4
.
e
p
s
Rear panels

D
D
3
8
2
0
0
5
.
e
p
s
Side panels

D
D
3
8
2
0
0
6
.
e
p
s
Rooves

D
D
3
8
2
0
0
7
.
e
p
s
Plinth, gland plates,
fnishing parts, etc.
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Determining catalogue numbers
Cat. no. selection
BOOK EN.indb 51 19/10/2011 14:35:45
52
BOOK EN.indb 52 19/10/2011 14:35:46
A-1
Functional units
Contents
Presentation 20
Circuit breakers A-4
Masterpact NW08 to NW40 A-4
Dedicated cubicle A-6
Masterpact NT06 to NT16 A-9
Toggle and motor mechanism A-9
Masterpact NT06 to NT16 W400 dedicated cubicle 3P A-11
Compact NS630b to NS1600 A-14
Vertical mounting A-14
Compact NS630b to NS1000 A-16
Horizontal mounting A-16
Compact NS630b/1600 W400 dedicated cubicle A-17
Toggle, rotary handle and motor mechanism A-17
Compact NS1600b to 3200 A-20
Presentation of Compact NSX circuit breakers for Prisma Plus A-22
Compact NSX100 to NSX630 A-24
Horizontal - Toggle - Fixed A-24
Vertical - Toggle - Fixed A-25
Horizontal - Toggle - Plug-in A-26
Vertical - Toggle - Plug-in A-27
Horizontal - Rotary handle, motor mechanism - Fixed, plug-in A-28
Vertical - Rotary handle, motor mechanism - Fixed, plug-in A-29
Horizontal - All controls - Withdrawable A-30
Vertical - All controls - Withdrawable A-31
Easypact EZC100 A-32
Vertical - Fixed - Toggle A-32
Easypact EZC250/EZCV250 - Easypact EZC400 A-33
Modular devices A-34
Multi 9 or Acti 9 A-34
Multi 9 or Acti 9 y 63A A-35
80/160A A-36
Modular devices NG125 circuit breaker -
NSA125/160 circuit breaker - INS40/160 switch-disconnector A-37
Powerclip busbars A-38
Rear busbars A-39
Distribution A-40
Switch-disconnectors A-41
Source-changeover systems Compact / Masterpact A-41
Possible combinations Compact NSX100/630, NS630b/1600 -
Masterpact NT06/16, NW08/32 A-42
Source-changeover systems A-43
Compact NSX100/630, NS630b/1000 A-43
Compact NS630b/1600 - Masterpact, NT06/16, NW08/32 A-44
Remote-operated source-changeover systems A-45
Compact NSX100/630, NS630b/1600 - Masterpact NW08/32, NT06/16 A-45
Manual source-changeover systems A-47
Interpact INS-INV250 to 630 - Front direct rotary handle A-47
Interpact INS250 to 630 A-48
Interpact INS-INV630b to 2500- INS-INV2000-2500 A-49
Interpact INS-INV250 to 630 A-50
Horizontal - Front handle A-50
Vertical - Front handle A-51
Fusegear A-52
Fupact ISFL A-52
Vertical 3P A-52
Fupact ISFT A-54
Vertical 3P A-54
Fupact INF A-56
Horizontal A-56
Vertical A-57
BOOK EN.indb 1 19/10/2011 14:35:46
A-2
Contents
Others A-58
Power factor correction equipment A-58
Varpact A-59
Varplus A-60
Industrial control devices A-62
Metering A-64
3-phase kilowatt-hour meters A-64
Single-phase kilowatt-hour meters - Class 2 A-66
3-phase kilowatt-hour meters - Class 2 A-67
Human-switchboard interface A-68
72 x 72 and 96 x 96 mm devices A-68
144 x 144 mm devices - 22.2 mm diameter lamps, pushbuttons A-71
Rserve A-76
Fixing accessories A-77
System G adapter A-79
Other devices A-80
Mounting on lateral and longitudinal cross-members A-80
Mounting on a plain backplate A-81
Mounting on a slotted plate A-82
Mounting on a modular rail A-83
Switchboard lighting A-84
Distribution B-1
Enclosures C-1
Additional information D-1
BOOK EN.indb 2 19/10/2011 14:35:46
A-3
BOOK EN.indb 3 19/10/2011 14:35:46
A-4
Masterpact NW08 to NW40
Functional units
Front connection
Cable connection
D
d
3
8
3
6
8
0
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
3
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
3
0
.
e
p
s
Devise Vertical rear
connectors
Terminal extension
bar support
Cable cover
Fixed/drawout device
NW08/32 b 04694 x 3 04861
D
d
3
8
3
6
8
1
.
e
p
s
Canalis connection
D
d
3
8
0
8
3
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
3
0
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
3
6
8
4
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
3
2
.
e
p
s
connectors
Terminal
extension
bar support
Canalis
support
Canalis/
device
interface +
connection
Canalis
cover
NW08/16 3P b 04694 x 3 03561 04715 04871 + 04861
4P b 04694 x 3 03561 04716 04871 + 04861
NW20/25 3P b 04694 x 3 03561 04725 04871 + 04861
4P b 04694 x 3 03561 04726 04871 + 04861
NW32 3P b 04694 x 3 03561 04735 04871 + 04861
4P b 04694 x 3 03561 04736 04871 + 04861
Rear connection
Cable connection
D
d
3
8
3
6
8
2
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
3
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
3
0
.
e
p
s
connectors
Terminal extension
bar support
Cable cover
NW08/32 b 04694 x 2 04863
D
D
3
8
2
7
9
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
3
0
.
e
p
s
Devise Connection adapters
4000 A (up and
downstream)
Busbar supports Connection plates
NW40 3P 04644 x 3 04694 x 2 must be made
4P 04644 x 4 04694 x 2 must be made
D
d
3
8
3
6
8
3
.
e
p
s
Canalis connection
D
d
3
8
0
8
3
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
3
0
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
3
6
8
4
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
3
2
.
e
p
s
connectors
Terminal
extension
bar support
Canalis
support
Canalis/
device
interface +
connection
Canalis
cover
NW08/16 3P b 04694 x 2 03561 04715 04871 + 04863
4P b 04694 x 2 03561 04716 04871 + 04863
NW20/25 3P b 04694 x 2 03561 04725 04871 + 04863
4P b 04694 x 2 03561 04726 04871 + 04863
NW32 3P b 04694 x 2 03561 04735 04871 + 04863
4P b 04694 x 2 03561 04736 04871 + 04863
NW40 3P b 04694 x 3 03561 04737 04871 + 04863
4P b 04694 x 3 03561 04738 04871 + 04863
Circuit breakers
400E21100.indd 4 21/10/2011 15:51:35
A-5
Functional units
Device installation
D
d
3
8
3
6
8
6
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
3
6
8
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
3
3
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
3
4
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
3
5
.
e
p
s
Devise No. of
vert.
mod.
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Fixed device
NW08/16
front conn.
cables 18 03500 03711 03804 03805
Canalis 27 03500 03711 03805 +
03804 x 2
03805
NW08/16
rear conn.
cables 14 03500 03711 03805
Canalis 16 03500 03711 03804 +
03803
NW20/32
front conn.
cables 19 03500 03711 03805 03805
Canalis 28 03500 03711 03804 +

03805 x 2
03805
NW20/32
rear conn.
cables 14 03500 03711 03805
Canalis 16 03500 03711 03804 +

03803
Drawout device
NW08/16
front conn.
cables 19 03500 03710 03804 03805
Canalis 27 03500 03710 03804 x 3 03805
NW08/16
rear conn.
cables 15 03500 03710 03805
Canalis 17 03500 03710 03804 +
03803
NW20/32
front conn.
cables 20 03500 03710 03805 03805
Canalis 28 03500 03710 03805 +
03804 x 2
03805
NW20/32
rear conn.
cables 15 03500 03710 03805
Canalis 17 03500 03710 03804 +
03803
Distribution
Linergy Evolution, Linergy or fat busbars
D
d
3
8
3
6
8
7
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
3
7
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
3
9
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
0
.
e
p
s
Devise Front
connectors
Connection Free support for
BB connection
Cover for BB
connection
NW08/16 3P b must be made
(2)
04662 x 2
(1)
04926 +
04927
4P b must be made
(2)
04662 x 2
(1)
04926 +
04927
NW20/32 3P b must be made
(2)
04662 x 2
(1)
04926 +
04927
4P b must be made
(2)
04662 x 2
(1)
04926 +
04927
(1) For an Icw u 75 kA rms, use three free supports (04662 x 3).
(2) For the connection to fat busbars > 1600 A, order one joint per phase:
b 1 joint for busbars, W = 50/60 mm (04640)
Note: To make measurements:
b install the CTs preferably upstream, on the supply terminal extension bars
b or install the CTs on the horizontal busbars (busbar connection). In this case, add one module
and a plain front plate (03801)
b or install a Micrologic control unit capable of displaying the values.
Selection of Linergy busbars: see page B-19.
Selection of fat busbars: see page B-28
D
D
3
8
3
8
0
8
.
e
p
s
Circuit breakers
BOOK EN.indb 5 19/10/2011 14:35:50
A-6
Dedicated cubicle
Functional units
Device installation
D
d
3
8
4
5
3
0
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
3
6
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
2
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
3
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
4
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting plate Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
(1)
Downstream
front plate
Fixed device
NW08/32 36 03500 03711 03808 03808 + 03803
NW40 36 03500 03711 03804 x 2 +
03895
(2)
x 2
03895 x 2 +
03804 + 03803
Drawout device
NW08/32 36 03500 03710 03808 03808 + 03802
NW40 36 03500 03710 03804 x 2 +
03895
(2)
x 2
03895 x 2 +
03803 x 2
(1) One or two 3-module front plates for 72 x 72 and 96 x 96 mm measurement devices can be
installed just above the cut-out front plate:
b 1 3-module front plate + 1 plain front plate 03807 (9 modules)
b 2 3-module front plates + 1 plain front plate 03806 (6 modules).
(2) Front plate 03895: ventilated front plate.
Human-switchboard interface, see page A-68.
D
d
3
8
4
5
3
1
.
e
p
s
Circuit breakers
BOOK EN.indb 6 19/10/2011 14:35:53
A-7
Dedicated cubicle
Functional units
Connection
Bottom connection using cables
D
d
3
8
4
5
2
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
3
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
9
4
1
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
3
0
.
e
p
s
Device Vertical rear
connection
Terminal
extension bars
for connection
Terminal
extension bar
supports
Cable
cover
(1)
NW08/32 b must be made 04694 x 2 04861
(1) Form 1 cable cover, see page B-35
Connection to horizontal busbars Device Connection adapters
4000 A
(up and downstream)
Busbar supports for
connection between
device / busbars
Connection between
device / busbars
NW40 3/4P b (04664 + 04671) x 2
(04662 + 04671) x 3
must be made
b Order with the necessary connection components.
D
D
3
8
4
4
7
0
Circuit breakers
401E21101.indd 7 20/10/2011 09:02:02
A-8
Dedicated cubicle
Functional units
Circuit breakers
Distribution
Connection to horizontal Linergy Evolution busbars
D
d
3
8
4
5
2
9
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
3
7
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
9
4
2
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
6
6
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
9
4
3
.
e
p
s
Device Front
connection
Spacing rods
for fat bars
Connection plates Busbar
cover
(1)
NW08/16 3P/4P b 04690 x 2 04602
(2)
+ 04605
(2)

+ must be made
04860
NW20/25 3P/4P b 04690 x 2 04604
(2)
+ 04605
(2)

+ must be made
04860
NW32/40 3P/4P b 04690 x 2 04607
(2)
+ 04642
+ must be made
04860
(1) The cover is compulsory behind front plates designed for measurement devices.
(2) Catalogue numbers 04604, 04605 and 04607 includes 1 connection only. Order 1 connection
per phase.
Connection to horizontal copper busbars
D
d
3
8
0
8
3
7
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
9
4
2
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
6
6
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
9
4
3
.
e
p
s
Device Front
connection
Spacing rods
for fat bars
Connection plates Busbar
cover
(1)
NW08/25 3P/4P b 04690 x 2 04637
(2)

+ must be made
04860
NW32 3P/4P b 04690 x 2 04637
(2)
+ 04642
+ must be made
04860
(1) The cover is compulsory behind front plates designed for measurement devices.
(2) Catalogue number 04637 includes 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per phase.
BOOK EN.indb 8 19/10/2011 14:35:57
A-9
Masterpact NT06 to NT16
Toggle and motor mechanism
Functional units
Front connection
Cable connection
D
d
3
8
0
7
9
4
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
1
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
2
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
3
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
4
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
5
.
e
p
s
Device Front
conn.
Arc-chute
cover
Vert. conn.
adapters
Cable-lug
adapters
Spacing
rods
Cable
cover
Fixed device
NT06/10 3P b 47335 33642 04852
4P b 47336 33643 04852
NT12/16 3P b 47335 33642 33644 04691 04852
4P b 47336 33643 33645 04691 04852
Drawout device
NT06/10 3P b 33642 04852
4P b 33643 04852
NT12/16 3P b 33642 33644 04691 04852
4P b 33643 33645 04691 04852
D
d
3
8
0
7
9
5
.
e
p
s
Canalis connection
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
1
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
2
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
3
6
8
4
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
7
.
e
p
s
Device Front
conn.
Arc-chute
cover
Canalis
support
Canalis
interfaces
Canalis/
device
connection
Canalis
cover
Fixed device
NT06/12 3P b 47335 03561 04703 04711 04871 +
04852
4P b 47336 03561 04704 04712 04871 +
04852
Drawout device
NT06/12 3P b 03561 04703 04711 04871 +
04852
4P b 03561 04704 04712 04871 +
04852
Rear connection
Cable connection
D
d
3
8
0
7
9
6
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
9
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
0
.
e
p
s
connectors
Terminal extension bar
support
Cable cover
NT06/16 b 04693 x 2 04854
D
d
3
8
0
7
9
7
.
e
p
s
Rear connection
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
9
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
0
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
3
6
8
4
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
7
.
e
p
s
Device Vertical
rear
conn.
Terminal
extension
bar
support
Canalis
support
Canalis
interfaces
Canalis/
device
connection
Canalis
cover
NT06/16 3P b 04693 x 2 03561 04703 04713 04871 +
04854
4P b 04693 x 2 03561 04704 04714 04871 +
04854
Circuit breakers
BOOK EN.indb 9 19/10/2011 14:36:00
A-10
Toggle and motor mechanism

Functional units
Device installation
D
D
3
8
0
6
4
7
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
3
6
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
2
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
3
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
4
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
vert.
mod.
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Fixed device
NT06/10
front conn.
cables 12 03484 03692 03802 03803
Canalis 17 03484 03692 03804 +
03803
03803
NT12
front conn.
cables 14 03484 03692 03804 03803
Canalis 17 03484 03692 03804 +
03803
03803
NT16
front conn.
cables 14 03484 03692 03804 03803
NT06/16
rear conn.
cables 11 03484 03692 03801 03803
Canalis 16 03484 03692 03806 03803
Drawout device
NT06/10
front conn.
cables 13 03483 03691 03802 03803
Canalis 18 03483 03691 03804 +
03803
03803
NT12
front conn.
cables 15 03483 03691 03804 03803
Canalis 18 03483 03691 03804 +
03803
03803
NT16
front conn.
cables 15 03483 03691 03804 03803
NT06/16
rear conn.
cables 11 03483 03691 03803
Canalis 16 03483 03691 03805 03803
Distribution
Linergy busbars
D
D
3
8
0
6
4
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
6
.
e
p
s
Device Front connectors Prefabricated
connection
Cover for BB
connection
Fixed device
NT06/12 3P b 04475 04926
4P b 04476 04926
NT16 3P b 04489 04926
4P b 04490 04926
Drawout device
NT06/12 3P b 04477 04926
4P b 04478 04926
NT16 3P b 04491 04926
4P b 04492 04926
Note: to make measurements:
b install the CTs on the horizontal busbars (busbar connection); in this case, an additional
module is required; add a plain front plate (03801)
D
D
3
8
0
6
4
9
.
e
p
s
Linergy Evolution or fat busbars
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
7
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
8
4
0
.
e
p
s
Device Front connectors Connection Free support for
BB connection
Cover for BB
connection
Fixed device
NT06/16 b must be made 04662 x 2 04926
Drawout device
NT06/16 b must be made 04662 x 2 04926
Selection of fat busbars: see page B-28.
Selection of Linergy Evolution busbars: see page B-14.
Circuit breakers
BOOK EN.indb 10 19/10/2011 14:36:03
Functional units
W = 400 mm
Installation
D
d
3
8
2
5
0
6
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream front plate
(1)
Downst.
front plate
(1)
plain
cut-out for
72 x 72 mm
or 96 x 96 mm
meters
or plain
Designation
Fixed Masterpact
NT
36 03489 03698 03723 03722 03722
Drawout
Masterpact NT
36 03488 03699 03723 03722 03722
(1) Hinged or reversible (left or right-hand opening) front plates connect directly to the
framework, without a front-plate support frame.
Measurement-device installation
Measurement devices are installed on a front plate (03723) using plastic mounting
plates with cut-outs. The front plate can hold:
b six 72 x 72 mm cases
b or four 96 x 96 mm cases + 2 switches.
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
D
d
3
8
2
6
7
0
.
e
p
s
Installation of three devices (72 x 72 mm cases) using plastic mounting plates (03902) and two
devices (96 x 96 mm cases) + a switch using plastic mounting plates (03903) on a hinged front
plate (03723).
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Plastic mounting plate with cut-outs for 72 x 72 mm devices 03902
for 96 x 96 mm devices 03903
Plain plastic mounting plate (blanking
plate)
for 72 x 72 mm holes 03900
D
d
3
8
2
6
3
3
.
e
p
s
The plain mounting plates have knock-outs for lamps, pushbuttons, switches or devices.
Knock-outs for 03900: 4 dia. 16 mm, 5 dia. 22 mm or one for a 45 x 45 mm device.
Knock-outs for 03901: 4 dia. 16 mm, 5 dia. 22 mm or one for a 45 x 45 or 72 x 72 mm device.
Circuit breakers
W400 dedicated cubicle 3P
A-11
401E21900.indd 11 20/10/2011 09:12:30
Distribution
Linergy Evolution horizontal-busbar connections
D
D
3
8
4
5
1
9
.
E
P
S
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
6
6
8
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
8
0
.
E
P
S
D
d
3
8
2
5
1
5
.
e
p
s
Device Front
connect.
Flat busbars
rods
Horizontal-busbar connections Barrier
(1)
NT06/16 b 04692 x 2 04602
(2)
04855
(1) A barrier must be installed behind front plate 03723 when measurement devices are installed.
Connection between device and horizontal busbars must be made by the customer.
Copper horizontal-busbar connections
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
6
6
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
5
2
6
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
5
1
5
.
e
p
s
Device Front
connect.
Flat busbars
rods
(1)
60/80,
5 mm thick
50/60/80,
10 mm thick
NT06/16 b 04692 x 2 must be made
10 mm thick
04636
(2)
+ connection must
be made 10 mm
thick
04855
Selection of copper bars for the connection: see page B-26.
Selection of horizontal busbars: see page B-26.
D
D
3
8
3
8
1
4
.
e
p
s
Connection to Linergy or fat busbars
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
0
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
7
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
5
1
5
.
e
p
s
Device Front
connect.
Free
support
Connection Barrier
(1)
NT06/16 b 04662 must be made 04855
Functional units
W = 400 mm
Circuit breakers
A-12
BOOK EN.indb 12 19/10/2011 14:36:06
Connection
Front connection using cables
D
d
3
8
2
6
7
2
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
6
6
9
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
2
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
3
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
4
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
5
.
e
p
s
Device Front
connectors
Arc-chute
cover
Vert. conn.
adapters
Cable-lug
adapters
Spacing rods
Designation
Fixed NT06/16 b 47335 33642 33644 04691
Drawout
NT06/16
b 33642 33644 04691
Accessories
D
d
3
8
2
5
1
3
.
e
p
s4 cable tie supports for a 400 mm wide
framework
08774
4 cable tie supports for a 400 mm deep
framework
08794
framework
08794 + 08796
08794
D
d
3
8
2
5
1
4
.
e
p
s
Functional units
W = 400 mm
Circuit breakers
08796
08774
A-13
BOOK EN.indb 13 19/10/2011 14:36:07
Functional units
Front connection
Cable connection
D
D
3
8
3
6
9
2
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
2
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
3
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
4
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
5
.
e
p
s
Device Front
conn.
Arc-chute
cover
Vert. conn.
adapters
Cable-lug
adapters
Spacing
rods
Cable
cover
Fixed device
NS630b/1000 3P b 33596 33642 04851
4P b 33597 33643 04851
NS1250/1600 3P b 33596 33642 33644 04691 04851
4P b 33597 33643 33645 04691 04851
Drawout device
NS630b/1000 3P b 33642 04852
4P b 33643 04852
NS1250/1600 3P b 33642 33644 04691 04852
4P b 33643 33645 04691 04852
D
D
3
8
3
6
9
3
.
e
p
s
Canalis connection
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
2
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
6
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
7
.
e
p
s
Device Front
conn.
Arc-chute
cover
Canalis
support
Canalis
interfaces
Canalis/
device
connection
Canalis
cover
Fixed device
NS630b/1250 3P b 33596 03561 04703 04711 04871 +
04851
4P b 33597 03561 04704 04712 04871 +
04851
Drawout device
NS630b/1250 3P b 03561 04703 04711 04871 +
04852
4P b 03561 04704 04712 04871 +
04852
Cable connection
D
D
3
8
3
6
9
4
.
e
p
s
connectors
Terminal extension bar
support
Cable cover
Fixed device
NS630b/1600 b 04693 x 2 04853
Drawout device
NS630b/1600 b 04693 x 2 04854
D
D
3
8
3
6
9
5
.
e
p
s
Canalis connection
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
9
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
0
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
6
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
7
.
e
p
s
Device Vert. rear
conn.
Terminal
extension
bar support
Canalis
support
Canalis
interfaces
Canalis/
device
connection
Canalis
cover
Fixed device
NS630b/1600 3P b 04693 x 2 03561 04703 04713 04871 +
04853
4P b 04693 x 2 03561 04704 04714 04871 +
04853
Drawout device
NS630b/1600 3P b 04693 x 2 03561 04703 04713 04871 +
04854
4P b 04693 x 2 03561 04704 04714 04871 +
04854
Circuit breakers
Compact NS630b to NS1600
Vertical mounting
Toggle, rotary handle and motor mechanism
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
9
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
0
.
e
p
s
A-14
BOOK EN.indb 14 19/10/2011 14:36:10
Functional units
Device installation
D
d
3
8
3
5
4
9
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
3
6
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
2
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
3
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
4
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
vert.
mod.
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Fixed device
NS630b/1000
front conn.
cables 12 03482 03690
(1)
/ 03701
(2)
03802 03803
Canalis 17 03482 03690
(1)
/ 03701
(2)
03804 +
03803
03803
NS1250 front
conn.
cables 14 03482 03690
(1)
/ 03701
(2)
03804 03803
Canalis 17 03482 03690
(1)
/ 03701
(2)
03804 +
03803
03803
Fixed Compact NS. NS1600 front
conn.
cables 14 03482 03690
(1)
/ 03701
(2)
03804 03803
D
d
3
8
3
7
0
0
.
e
p
s
NS630b/1600
rear conn.
cables 10 03482 03690
(1)
/ 03701
(2)
03803
Canalis 16 03482 03690
(1)
/ 03701
(2)
03806 03803
Drawout device
NS630b/1000
front conn.
cables 13 03483 03691 03802 03803
Canalis 18 03483 03691 03804 +
03803
03803
NS1250 front
conn.
cables 15 03483 03691 03804 03803
Canalis 18 03483 03691 03804 +
03803
03803
NS1600front
conn.
cables 15 03483 03691 03804 03803
NS630b/1600
rear conn.
cables 11 03483 03691 03803
Canalis 16 03483 03691 03805 03803
Withdrawable Compact NS. (1) For toggle and rotary handle (in this case, the front plate should be removed when handling
the plate supporting frame).
(2) For motor mechanism.
Distribution
Linergy busbars
D
d
3
8
3
7
0
1
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
6
.
e
p
s
Device Front
connectors
Prefabricated
connection
Cover for BB
connection
Fixed device
NS630b/1250 3P b 04485 04926
4P b 04486 04926
NS1600 3P b 04487 04926
4P b 04488 04926
Withdrawable device
NS630b/1250 3P b 04477 04926
4P b 04478 04926
NS1600 3P b 04491 04926
4P b 04492 04926
v install a Micrologic control unit capable of displaying the values
v or install the CTs on the horizontal busbars; in this case, an additional module is required; add
a plain front plate downstream (03801).
D
d
3
8
3
7
0
2
.
e
p
s
Linergy Evolution and fat busbars
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
7
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
0
.
e
p
s
Device Front
connectors
Connection Free support for
BB connection
Cover for BB
connection
NS630b/1600 b must be made 04662 x 2 04926
NS630b/1600 b must be made 04662 x 2 04926
v install a Micrologic control unit capable of displaying the values
v or install the CTs on the horizontal busbars; in this case, an additional module is required; add
a plain front plate downstream (03801).

Circuit breakers
Vertical mounting
Toggle, rotary handle and motor mechanism
A-15
400E21130.indd 15 20/10/2011 09:49:10
Functional units
Connection
Front connection in 400 mm deep framework
D
d
3
8
3
5
5
0
.
e
p
s
Device Connection transfer
assembly + cover
Fixed Compact NS
NS630b/1000 3P 04483
(1)
4P 04484
(1)
(1) Three 300 mm or six 185 mm cables can be connected per phase with lugs that are not of
the two-metal type.
Rear connection in 800 mm deep framework (2x400mm)
Device Rear connection cover
Fixed Compact NS
NS630b/1000 3P 04844
Connection transfer assembly. 4P 04844
Installation
D
d
3
8
3
5
5
1
.
e
p
s
Device No. of vertical modules Mounting plate Cut-out front plate
Fixed Compact NS
NS630b/1000 3P/4P 7 03480 03687
Distribution
Linergy busbars
D
d
3
8
3
5
5
2
.
e
p
s
Device Prefabricated connection Connection cover Arc-chute cover
Fixed Compact NS
NS630b/1000 3P 04473 04842 33596
4P 04474 04842 33597
Prefabricated connection + cover.
D
d
3
8
3
5
5
3
.
e
p
s
Linergy Evolution and fat busbars
Device Connection Connection cover Arc-chute cover
Fixed Compact NS, front connection
NS630b/1000 3P must be made 04842 33596
4P must be made 04842 33597
Circuit breakers
Horizontal mounting
Toggle and rotary handle
A-16
BOOK EN.indb 16 19/10/2011 14:36:14
A-17
Functional units
W = 400 mm
Installation
D
D
3
8
2
5
0
6
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream front plate
(1)
Downst.
front
plate
(1)

plain
cut-out for
72 x 72 mm or
96 x 96 mm
meters
or plain
Designation
Fixed
NS630b/1600
3/4P 36 03487 03697 03723 03722 03722
Withdrawable
NS630b/1600
3P 36 03488 03699 03723 03722 03722
(1) Hinged or reversible (left or right-hand opening) front plates connect directly
to the framework, without a front-plate support frame.

Measurement-device installation
Measurement devices are installed on a front plate (03723) using plastic mounting
plates with cut-outs. The front plate can hold:
b six 72 x 72 mm cases
b or four 96 x 96 mm cases + 2 switches.
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
D
d
3
8
2
6
7
0
.
e
p
s
Installation of three devices (72 x 72 mm cases) using plastic mounting plates (03902) and two
devices (96 x 96 mm cases) + a switch using plastic mounting plates (03903) on a hinged front
plate (03723).
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Plastic mounting plate with cut-outs for 72 x 72 mm devices 03902
for 96 x 96 mm devices 03903
Plain plastic mounting plate
(blanking plate)
D
d
3
8
2
6
3
3
.
e
p
s
The plain mounting plates have knock-outs for lamps, pushbuttons, switches or devices.
Knock-outs for 03900: 4 dia. 16 mm, 5 dia. 22 mm or one for a 45x45 mm device.
Knock-outs for 03901: 4 dia. 16 mm, 5 dia. 22 mm or one for a 45x45 or 72x72 mm device.
Circuit breakers
Compact NS630b/1600
W400 dedicated cubicle
Toggle, rotary handle and motor
mechanism
BOOK EN.indb 17 19/10/2011 14:36:15
A-18
Functional units
W = 400 mm
Circuit breakers
Distribution
Linergy Evolution horizontal-busbar connections
D
D
3
8
4
5
1
9
.
E
P
S
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
6
6
8
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
8
0
.
E
P
S
D
d
3
8
2
5
1
5
.
e
p
s
Device Front
connect.
Flat busbars
rods
(1)
Fixed/withdrawable device
Fixed
NS630b/1600
3P/4P b 04692 x 2 04602
(1)
04855
Withdrawable
NS630b/1600
3P b 04692 x 2 04602 04855
Flat horizontal-busbar connections
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
6
6
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
5
2
6
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
5
1
5
.
e
p
s
Device Front
connect.
Flat busbars
rods
(1)
60/80
5 mm thick
50/60/80
10 mm thick
Fixed/withdrawable device
Fixed
NS630b/1600
3P/4P b 04692 x 2 must be made
10 mm thick
04636
(1)

+ connection must
be made 10 mm
thick
04855
Withdrawable
NS630b/1600
3P b 04692 x 2 must be made
10 mm thick
04636
+ connection must
be made 10 mm
thick
04855
Connection to Linergy or fat busbars
D
D
3
8
3
8
1
4
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
0
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
7
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
5
1
5
.
e
p
s
Device Front
connect.
Free
support
Connection Barrier
(1)
Designation
Fixed
NS630b/1600
3P/4P b 04662 04855
Withdrawable
NS630b/1600
3P b 04662 04855
Compact NS630b/1600
mechanism
401E21910.indd 18 20/10/2011 09:50:24
A-19
Functional units
W = 400 mm
Circuit breakers
Connection
D
d
3
8
2
6
7
2
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
6
6
9
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
2
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
3
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
4
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
4
5
.
e
p
s
Device Front
connect.
Arc-chute
cover
Vert. conn.
adapters
Cable-lug
adapters
Spacing rods
Designation
Fixed
NS630b/1600
3P b 33596 33642 33644 04691
4P b 33597 33643 33645 04691
Withdrawable
NS630b/1600
3P b 33642 33644 04691
Accessories
D
d
3
8
2
5
1
3
.
e
p
s4 cable tie supports for a 400 mm wide
framework
08774
framework
08794
framework
08794 +
08796
Compact NS630b/1600
mechanism
08794
D
d
3
8
2
5
1
4
.
e
p
s
08774
08796
BOOK EN.indb 19 19/10/2011 14:36:18
A-20
Functional units
Connection
D
d
3
8
3
5
4
6
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
1
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
8
3
0
.
e
p
s
Device Front
connectors
Vertical-
connection
adapters
Terminal
extension bar
support
Cubicle depth
(mm)
Fixed device
NS1600b 3P b 33975 04694 400
4P b 33976 04694 400
NS2000/2500 3P b 33975 04694 600
4P b 33976 04694 600
NS3200 3P b 04694 600
4P b 04694 600
NS3200.
Device installation
D
d
3
8
3
5
4
7
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Fixed device
NS1600b/3200 14 03501 03716 03802 03804
NS1600b.
Compact NS1600b to 3200
Circuit breakers
BOOK EN.indb 20 19/10/2011 14:36:19
A-21
Functional units
Compact NS1600b to 3200
Circuit breakers
Distribution
D
d
3
8
3
5
4
8
.
e
p
s
Device Connection Free support for
BB connection
Cover for BB connection
Fixed device
NS1600b 3P must be
made
(1)
04662 x 2 04926
4P
NS2000/2500 3P must be
made
(1)
04662 x 2 04926 + 04927
4P
NS3200 3P must be
made
(1)
04662 x 2 04926 + 04927
4P
(1) For the connection to fat busbars > 1600 A, order one joint per phase:
b 1 joint for busbars, W = 80/100 mm (04641).
NS1600b on Linergy.
D
D
3
8
4
5
8
7
.
E
P
S
NS1600b on Linergy Evolution.
BOOK EN.indb 21 19/10/2011 14:36:20
A-22
Presentation of Compact NSX
circuit breakers for Prisma Plus
P
B
1
0
3
3
7
1
-
2
5
.
e
p
s
The latest generation of a range that has set the standard in moulded-case circuit
breakers, Compact NSX steps even further ahead to meet your needs in continuity
of service and optimised energy use.
P
B
1
0
3
3
5
4
-
2
5
.
e
p
s
A high-performance range for
each application
Breaking capacity at 415V 25 kA 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 100 kA 150 kA

Performance level NSX-B NSX-F NSX-N NSX-H NSX-S NSX-L

Applications
Usual applications with low
short-circuit levels, e.g.
service sector applications,
retail stores, etc.
Small industrial installations High performance at a
reasonable cost
Demanding applications, e.g.
merchant marine, metallurgy,
etc.
A range of intelligent circuit
breakers
Compact NSX improves management of electrical installations
In addition to protection functions, the new generation of Compact NSX moulded
case circuit breakers provides new features (analysis, measurements and
communication) with access to information:
b either directly on the LCD screen of the trip unit to set the circuit breaker or read
the main electrical values, including U, I, f, P(W) and E (kWh)
b or on the FDM 121 display on the front of the Prisma Plus switchboard (duct door
with special front plate) for quick access to a greater wealth of information.
A cable connects the display to the trip unit without any special settings or
confguration, making it easy to personalise alarms and displays or read event logs
and maintenance indicators.
P
D
3
9
1
2
9
2
.
e
p
s
Circuit breakers
Functional units
400E00035.indd 22 20/10/2011 09:51:23
A-23
Integration of Compact NSX in
Prisma Plus
The Compact NSX range is perfectly interchangeable with Compact NSX.
As for Compact NS, installation of Compact NSX devices in a Prisma Plus functional
switchboard is very easy, based on the same functional-unit system:
b same mounting plates as for the Compact NS
b same power connections (Polypact distribution block and prefabricated
connections)
b identical control connections
b identical partitioning (form 2b to 4b)
b same modularity (taking into account the safety clearances).
This greatly facilitates extension, maintenance and retroftting operations in Prisma
Plus switchboards.
b Only the front plates have been changed for this new range.
P
B
3
9
1
2
8
8
-
6
5
.
e
p
s
A new front plate for a new circuit
breaker
The front of Compact NSX circuit breakers has an eye-pleasing curved profle,
making Prisma Plus switchboards even more attractive. This change is perfectly in
step with the new cut-out for Prisma Plus front plates (the same cut-out for all types
of controls).
P
B
3
9
1
2
8
9
-
1
3
5
.
e
p
s
Toggle
Motor mechanism
module
Rotary handle
Installation architectures for the
measurement function
As mentioned above, Compact NSX circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic 5/6 A
or E trip units provide measurements that can be read on the FDM 121 display
module or directly on the circuit breaker. This makes it possible to optimise the space
required by the functional unit.
Installation times have also been reduced with respect to system with current
transformers.
What is more, installation and connections are made easier because the FDM 121 is
installed just like the 96 x 96 mm Power Meter PM devices:
b direct cut-out in a plain door
b on a front for one or four 96 x 96 devices in the functional unit or the 300 mm wide
duct door.
Note: a single 24 V DC power supply is required to power both the FDM 121 display and the
Micrologic trip unit.
P
B
3
9
1
2
9
0
-
6
0
.
e
p
s
Mode
OK
Mode
OK
Mode
OK
Mode
OK
D
D
3
8
4
0
2
7
.
e
p
s
P
B
3
9
1
2
9
1
-
5
7
.
e
p
s
For more information on the communication functions of Compact NSX, see the
ULPsystem user manual, doc. no. TRV99100, and the Compact NSX catalogue, doc. no.
LVPED208001_EN.
Presentation of Compact NSX
circuit breakers for Prisma Plus
Circuit breakers
Functional units
BOOK EN.indb 23 19/10/2011 14:36:26
A-24
Compact NSX100 to NSX630
Horizontal
Toggle
Fixed
Functional units
Installation
D
D
3
8
3
8
6
8
.
e
p
s
Device No. of vertical
modules
Fixed Compact NSX, Vigicompact NSX or ammeter
NSX100/250 3P 3 03411 03604
4P 4 03412 03606
NSX100/250 +
ammeter or
Vigicompact
3P 3 03411 03604
4P 4 03412 03606
NSX400/630 3P 4 03451 03643
4P 5 03452 03644
Busbar connection
Linergy busbars

D
D
3
8
0
5
1
3
.
e
p
s
Device Prefabricated connection
NSX100/250 3P 04423
4P 04424
NSX400/630 3P 04453
4P 04454
Prefabricated connection.
D
D
3
8
0
6
9
3
.
e
p
s
Linergy Evolution or copper fat busbars
Device Connection Short terminal shields
NSX100/250 3P must be made LV429515
4P must be made LV429516
Selection of fexible bars for the connection: see page B-64.
Short terminal shields.
Connection
D
D
3
8
0
6
9
4
.
e
p
s
Device Long terminal
shields
or Connection transfer
assembly
Short terminal shields
Fixed Compact NSX
NSX100/250 3P LV429517 04425 LV429515
(1)
4P LV429518 04426 LV429516
(1)
NSX400/630 3P LV432593 04455 LV432591
(1)
4P LV432594 04456 LV432592
(1)
Fixed Vigicompact NSX
Vigi NSX100/250 3P LV429517 04429
(2)
+ LV429515 LV429515
(1)
4P LV429518 04430
(2)
+ LV429516 LV429516
(1)
Vigi NSX400/630 3P LV432593 04459
(2)
+ LV432591 LV432591
(1)
4P LV432594 04460
(2)
+ LV432592 LV432592
(1)
Connection transfer assembly. (1) Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning: see page B-42.
(2) No connection.
Circuit breakers
BOOK EN.indb 24 19/10/2011 14:36:27
A-25
Vertical
Toggle
Fixed
Functional units
Installation
D
D
3
8
0
5
0
6
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
devices
No. of
vertical
modules
(1)
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Fixed Compact NSX
NSX100/160 3/4 6 03420 03243

03801
NSX250 3/4 7 03420 03243

03802
NSX400 1 11 03461 03275

03801

03801

NSX400 2 11 03461 03663 03802

03802
NSX630 1 13 03461 03275 03802

03802

NSX630 2 13 03461 03663 03803

03803
Vigi NSX100/160 3/4 8 03420 03241

03801
Vigi NSX250 3/4 9 03420 03241

03802
Vigi NSX400 1 13 03461 03297

03802

Vigi NSX400 2 13 03461 03666

03802 03802

Vigi NSX630 1 15 03461 03297

03801 03803

Vigi NSX630 2 15 03461 03666

03803

03803

D
d
3
8
3
5
5
4
.
e
p
s
(1) For the Compact NSX100/250, the number of modules indicated is for supply via a Polypact
distribution block. For supply via cables, two additional modules are required; add an upstream
plain front plate (03802).
Accessories
D
d
3
8
1
3
3
9
.
e
p
s
Blanking plate for vertical NSX100/250 (03249), Compact NSX electronic trip unit divisible
blanking plate (03222): see page C-23.
Busbar connection
Linergy busbars
D
D
3
8
0
5
0
8
.
e
p
s
Device No. of devices Polypact with connection
NSX100/250 4 x 3P 04403
3 x 4P 04404
Linergy Evolution and copper fat busbars
Device No. of devices Polypact without connection
NSX100/250 4 x 3P 04407
3 x 4P 04408
Accessories Cat. no.
Insulated distribution block with connection. Polypact tooth-caps 04809
Polypact distribution block: see page B-62.
Connection
D
D
3
8
0
6
9
6
.
e
p
s
Device Long terminal shields Short terminal shields
NSX100/250 3P LV429517 LV429515
(1)
4P LV429518 LV429516
(1)
NSX400/630 3P LV432593 LV432591
(1)
4P LV432594 LV432592
(1)
(1) Size reduced one module downstream.
Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning: see page B-42.
Front connection with terminal shields.
Circuit breakers
BOOK EN.indb 25 19/10/2011 14:36:29
A-26
Functional units
Installation
D
D
3
8
3
8
6
9
.
e
p
s
modules
Plug-in Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX
NSX100/250 3P 3 03413 03604

4P 4 03414 03606

NSX400/630 3P 4 03453 03643

4P 5 03454 03644

Busbar connection
Linergy busbars
H
H
D
D
3
8
4
3
2
5
.
e
p
s
Device Prefabricated connection Adaptator + terminal shields
NSX100/250 3P 04431 LV429306 + LV429517
4P 04432 LV429307 + LV429518
NSX400/630 3P 04461 LV432584 + LV432593
4P 04462 LV432585 + LV432594
Prefabricated connection + terminal shields.
D
d
3
8
3
5
5
7
.
e
p
s
Device Connection Adaptator + terminal shields
NSX100/250 3P must be made LV429306 + LV429517
4P must be made LV429307 + LV429518
Terminal shields.
Connection
D
d
3
8
3
5
5
8
.
e
p
s
Device Adaptator + long
terminal shields
or transfer assembly
(w/o connection) +
adaptator + long
terminal shields
Long insulated
terminals
NSX100/250 3P LV429306 +
LV429517
04429
+ LV429306
+ LV429517
LV429235 + LV429236
+ LV429306
4P LV429307 +
LV429518
04430
+ LV429307
+ LV429518
LV429235 + LV429236
+ LV429307
NSX400/630 3P LV432584 +
LV432593
04459
+ LV432584
+ LV432593
LV432475 + LV432476
+ LV432584
Transfer assembly (w/o connection) + long terminal shields.
4P LV432585 +
LV432594
04460
+ LV432585
+ LV432594
LV432475 + LV432476
+ LV432585
Horizontal
Toggle
Plug-in
Circuit breakers
BOOK EN.indb 26 19/10/2011 14:36:30
A-27
Functional units
Installation
D
d
3
8
3
5
5
9
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
devices
No. of
vertical
modules
(2)
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downst.
front
plate
Plug-in Compact NSX
NSX100/160 3/4 9 03421
(1)
03243

03801

+ 03802

03801

NSX250 3/4 10 03421
(1)
03243

03801

+ 03802

03802

NSX100/160 3/4 7 03423 03243

03801

03801

NSX250 3/4 8 03423 03243

03801

03802

NSX400 1 11 03461 03275

03801

03801
NSX400 2 11 03461 03663

03802

03802
NSX630 1 13 03461 03275

03802

03802

NSX630 2 13 03461 03663

03803

03803

Plug-in Vigicompact NSX
Vigi NSX100/160 3/4 11 03421
(1)
03241

03801

+ 03802

03801

Vigi NSX250 3/4 12 03421
(1)
03241

03801

+ 03802

03802

D
D
3
8
3
6
2
0
.
e
p
s
Vigi NSX100/160 3/4 9 03423
(2)
03241

03801

03801

Vigi NSX250 3/4 10 03423
(2)
03241

03801

03802

Vigi NSX400 1 13 03461 03297

03802

Vigi NSX400 2 13 03461 03666

03802

03802
Vigi NSX630 1 15 03461 03297

03801

03803

Vigi NSX630 2 15 03461 03666

03803

03803
(1) Not compatible with Polypact distribution block. For feeding by cables, add an upstream plain
front plate of 2 modules (03802).
(2) Compatible with Polypact distribution block.
03421.
D
D
3
8
3
6
2
1
.
e
p
s
Accessories
D
d
3
8
1
3
3
9
.
e
p
s
03423.
Busbar connection
Linergy busbars
D
d
3
8
3
5
6
0
.
e
p
s
Device No. of devices Polypact (with
connection)
Adaptator
NSX100/250 4 x 3P 04405 LV429306
3 x 4P 04406 LV429307
Device No. of devices Polypact (w/o
connection)
Adaptator
NSX100/250 4 x 3P 04407 LV429306
3 x 4P 04408 LV429307
Polypact tooth-caps 04809
Connection
D
d
3
8
3
5
6
1
.
e
p
s
Device Adaptator + long terminal shields Long insulated terminals
NSX100/250 3P LV429306 + LV429517 LV429235 + LV429236 +
LV429306
4P LV429307 + LV429518 LV429235 + LV429236 +
LV429307
NSX400/630 3P LV432584 + LV432593 LV432475 + LV432476 +
LV432584
4P LV432585 + LV432594 LV432475 + LV432476 +
LV432585
Front connection with long terminal shields.
Vertical
Toggle
Plug-in
Circuit breakers
BOOK EN.indb 27 19/10/2011 14:36:31
A-28
Functional units
Installation
D
d
3
8
3
5
6
2
.
e
p
sDevice No. of vertical
modules
Mounting plate Cut-out front
plate
Collar and raiser
Fixed or plug-in Compact NSX
NSX100/250 3P 3 03413 03604

4P 4 03414 03606

NSX400/630
(1)
3P 4 03453
(2)
03643

4P 5 03454
(2)
03644

Fixed or plug-in Vigicompact NSX
NSX100/250 3P 3 03413 03604

LV429285
Rotary handle 4P 4 03414 03606

LV429285
NSX100/250 3P 3 03413 03604

LV429285
Motor mech. 4P 4 03414 03606

LV429285
NSX400/630
(1)
3P 4 03453

03643

LV429285
Rotary handle 4P 5 03454

03644

LV429285
(1) For direct installation under horizontal busbars, the busbars must be covered: see page B-38.
(2) Catalogue number 03460 is recommended when installing an NSX with a motor mechanism.
Busbar connection
Linergy busbars
D
d
3
8
3
5
6
3
.
e
p
s
Device Prefabricated connection Terminal shields
NSX100/250 3P 04427 LV429515
4P 04428 LV429516
NSX100/250 3P 04427 LV429306 + LV429515
4P 04428 LV429307 + LV429516
D
d
3
8
3
5
6
4
.
e
p
s
Device Connection Terminal shields
Terminal shields. Selection of fexible bars for the connection: see page B-62.
Connection
D
d
3
8
3
5
6
5
.
e
p
sFront connection Rear connection
Device Adaptator +
long terminal
shields
(w/o connection)
+ adaptator + long
terminal shields
Short
terminal
shields
Long insulated
terminals
NSX100/250 3P LV429517 04429 + LV429515 LV429515
(1)
Vigi NSX100/250 4P LV429518 04430 + LV429516 LV429516
(1)
NSX400/630 3P LV432593 04459 + LV432591 LV432591
(1)
Vigi NSX400/630 4P LV432594 04460 + LV432592 LV432592
(1)
NSX100/250 3P LV429306 +
LV429517
04429 + LV429306
+ LV429517
LV429235
+ LV429236
+ LV429306
4P LV429307 +
LV429518
04430 + LV429307
+ LV429518
LV429235
+ LV429236
+ LV429307
NSX400/630 3P LV432584 +
LV432593
04459 + LV432584
+ LV432591
LV432475
+ LV432476
+ LV432584
4P LV432585 +
LV432594
04460 + LV432585
+ LV432592
LV432475
LV432476
+ LV432585
Horizontal
Rotary handle, motor mechanism
Fixed, plug-in
Circuit breakers
BOOK EN.indb 28 19/10/2011 14:36:33
A-29
Functional units
Installation
D
d
3
8
3
5
6
6
.
e
p
s
Device No.
dev.

No. of
vert.
mod.
(1)
Mount.
plate
Cut-out
front
plate
Upst.
front
plate
Downst.
front
plate
Collar and raiser
Fixed Compact NSX
NSX100/160 3/4 6 03422 03243

03801

NSX250 3/4 7 03422 03243

03802

NSX400 1 11 03461
(2)
03275

03801

03801

NSX400 2 11 03461
(2)
03663

03802

03802

NSX630 1 13 03461
(2)
03275

03802

03802

NSX630 2 13 03461
(2)
03663

03803

03803
Vigi NSX100/160 3/4 8 03422 03244

03801

LV429285 + LV429316
(3)
Vigi NSX250 3/4 9 03422 03244

03802

LV429285 + LV429316
(3)
Vigi NSX400 (rot.) 1 13 03461

03297

03802

LV429285 + LV429316
(3)
Vigi NSX400 (rot.) 2 13 03461

03666

03802

03802

LV429285 + LV429316
(3)
Vigi NSX630 (rot.) 1 15 03461

03297

03801

03803

LV429285 + LV429316
(3)
Vigi NSX630 (rot.) 2 15 03461 03666

03803

03803

LV429285 + LV429316
(3)
Plug-in Compact NSX
D
d
3
8
3
5
6
7
.
e
p
s
NSX100/160 3/4 7 03421 03243

03801

03801

NSX250 3/4 8 03421 03243

03801

03802

NSX400 1 11 03461
(2)

03275

03801

03801

NSX400 2 11 03461
(2)
03663

03802

03802

NSX630 1 13 03461
(2)
03275

03802

03802

NSX630 2 13 03461
(2)
03663

03803

03803

Plug-in Vigicompact NSX
Vigi NSX100/160 3/4 9 03421 03244

03801

03801

LV429285 + LV429316
(3)
Vigi NSX250 3/4 10 03421 03244

03801

03802

LV429285 + LV429316
(3)
Vigi NSX400 (rot.) 1 13 03461

03297

03802

LV429285 + LV429316
(3)
Vigi NSX400 (rot.) 2 13 03461

03666

03802

03802 LV429285 + LV429316
(3)
Vigi NSX630 (rot.) 1 15 03461

03297

03801

03803

LV429285 + LV429316
(3)
Vigi NSX630 (rot.) 2 15 03461

03666

03803

03803 LV429285 + LV429316
(3)
(1) For the Compact NSX100/250, the number of modules indicated is for supply via a Polypact
distribution block. For supply via cables, two additional modules are required; add an upstream
plain front plate (03802).
(3) For ammeter, take LV429285 + LV429318 catalogue numbers.
Accessories
Busbar connection
Linergy busbars
D
d
3
8
3
5
6
8
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
devices
Polypact (with
connection)
Polypact (with
connection)
Adaptator
Fixed device Plug in device
Fixed or plug-in Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX
NSX100/250 4 x 3P 04405 04405 + LV429306
3 x 4P 04406 04406 + LV429307
Device No. of
devices
Polypact (w/o
connection)
Polypact (w/o
connection)
Adaptator
Fixed device Plug in device
Fixed or plug-in Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX
NSX100/250 4 x 3P 04407 04407 + LV429306
Insulated distribution block with connection.
3 x 4P 04408 04408 + LV429307
Connection
D
d
3
8
3
5
6
9
.
e
p
s
terminal shields
Short terminal
shields
Long insulated
terminals
NSX100/250 3P LV429517 LV429515
(1)
4P LV429518 LV429516
(1)
NSX400/630 3P LV432593 LV432591
(1)
4P LV432594 LV432592
(1)
NSX100/250 3P LV429306 + LV429517 LV429235 + LV429236 +
LV429306
4P LV429307 + LV429518 LV429235 + LV429236 +
LV429307
NSX400/630 3P LV432584 + LV432593 LV432475 + LV432476 +
LV432584
Front connection with long terminal shields.
4P LV432585 + LV432595 LV432475 + LV432476 +
LV432585
Vertical
Rotary handle, motor mechanism
Fixed, plug-in
Circuit breakers
BOOK EN.indb 29 19/10/2011 14:36:34
A-30
Functional units
Installation
D
D
3
8
3
8
7
0
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
devices
No. of vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Downstr.
front plate
Compact NSX
NSX100/250 1 5 03415 03618 LV429284
NSX400/630 1 6 03462
(1)

03657 LV432534
Vigicompact NSX
Vigi NSX100/250 1 5 03415 03618 LV429285
Vigi NSX400/630
toggle, rotary
handle
1 6 03462
(1)

03657 LV429285
Busbar connection
Linergy busbars
A
B
C
E
F G
H
A
B
C
D
F G
D
H
E
D
d
3
8
3
5
7
1
.
e
p
s
Device Prefabricated connection Adaptator + long terminal shields
Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX
NSX100/250 3P 04427 LV429306 + LV429515
4P 04428 LV429307 + LV429516
Toggle Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX
NSX100/250 3P 04431
4P 04432
NSX400/630 3P 04461
4P 04462
D
d
3
8
3
5
7
2
.
e
p
s
Device Connection Adaptator + long terminal shields
Long terminal shields.
Connection
D
d
3
8
3
5
7
3
.
e
p
s
terminal shields
(w/o connection)
+ adaptator
+ long terminal shields
Long insulated
terminals
NSX100/250 3P LV429306 +
LV429517
04429 + LV429306
+ LV429517
LV429235 +
LV429236 +
LV429306
4P LV429307 +
LV429518
04430 + LV429307
+ LV429518
LV429235 +
LV429236 +
LV429307
NSX400/630 3P LV432584 +
LV432593
04459 + LV432584
+ LV432591
LV432475 +
LV432476 +
LV432584
4P LV432585 +
LV432594
04460 + LV432585
+ LV432592
LV432475 +
LV432476 +
LV432585
Horizontal
All controls
Withdrawable
Circuit breakers
BOOK EN.indb 30 19/10/2011 14:36:35
A-31
Functional units
Installation
D
d
3
8
3
5
7
4
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
devices
No. of
vert.
mod.
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front
plate
Upstream
front
plate
Downst.
front
plate
Collar and
raiser
(1 per device)
Compact NSX
NSX100/160 2 8 03421 03243

03802

03801

LV429284
(1)
NSX250 2 9 03421 03243

03802

03802

LV429284
(1)
NSX400
toggle
1 11 03461 03275

03801

03801

LV432534
NSX400
rotary handle,
motor mech.
1 11 03461
(2)
03275

03801

03801

NSX400 2 11 03461
(2)
03663

03802

03802 LV432534
(1)
NSX630
toggle
1 13 03461 03275

03802

03802

LV432534
NSX630
rotary handle,
motor mech.
1 13 03461
(2)
03275

03802 03802
NSX630 2 13 03461
(2)
03663

03803

03803 LV432534
(1)
Vigicompact NSX
Vigi
NSX100/160
2 10 03421 03244 03802

03801

LV429285
+ LV429284
(1)
Vigi NSX250 2 11 03421 03244

03802

03802

LV429285
+ LV429284
(1)
Vigi NSX400
toggle
1 13 03461 03297 03802

LV429285
+ LV432534
Vigi NSX400
rotary handle
1 13 03461

03297

03802

LV429285
Vigi NSX400
toggle
2 13 03461 03666 03802

03802 LV429285
+ LV432534
Vigi NSX400
rotary handle,
motor mech.
2 13 03461

03666

03802

03802 LV429285
Vigi NSX630
toggle
1 15 03461 03297 03801

03803

LV429285
+ LV432534
Vigi NSX630
rotary handle
1 15 03461

03297

03801

03803

LV429285
Vigi NSX630
toggle
2 15 03461 03666

03803

03803 LV429285
+ LV432534
Vigi NSX630
rotary handle,
motor mech.
2 15 03461

03666 03803

03803 LV429285
(1) For devices with toggle only.
Connection
D
d
3
8
3
5
7
5
.
e
p
s
Device Adaptator + long terminal shields Long insulated terminals
Withdrawable Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX
NSX100/250 3P LV429306 + LV429517 LV429235 + LV429236 +
LV429306
4P LV429307 + LV429518 LV429235 + LV429236 +
LV429307
NSX400/630 3P LV432584 + LV432593 LV432475 + LV432476 +
LV432584
4P LV432585 + LV432594 LV432475 + LV432476 +
LV432585
Vertical
All controls
Withdrawable
Circuit breakers
BOOK EN.indb 31 19/10/2011 14:36:36
Easypact EZC100
Vertical
Fixed
Toggle
Functional units
Installation
Device No. of devices
per row
No. of vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Long terminal
shields
(set of 2)
D
D
3
8
3
5
7
6
.
e
p
s
Easypact
EZC100 15 x 1P 5 03502 03303
5 x 3P 5 03502 03303 EZATSHD3P
3 x 4P 5 03502 03303 EZATSHD4P
Accessories
Designation Cat. no.
1 divisible blanking plate, H = 85 mm, W = 147 mm
colour: white RAL 9001
03249
Easypact EZC100 1P.
D
d
3
8
3
5
7
7
.
e
p
s
Easypact EZC100 3P.
Circuit breakers
A-32
BOOK EN.indb 32 19/10/2011 14:36:37
Easypact EZC250/EZCV250
Easypact EZC400
Functional units
Installation
Vertical devices
D
D
3
8
4
0
0
3
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
devices
per row
No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Long terminal
shields
(set of 2)
Easypact
EZC250/EZCV250 4 x 3P 7 03504 03305 EZETSHD3PN
3 x 4P 7 03504 03305 EZETSHD4PN
EZC400 2 x 3P 10 03505 03307 EZ4TSHD3P
2 x 4P 10 03505 03307 EZ4TSHD4P
Easypact EZC250/EZCV250.
D
D
3
8
4
0
0
4
.
e
p
s
Horizontal devices
Device No. of
devices
per row
No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Long terminal
shields
(set of 2)
Easypact
EZC250/EZCV250 1 x 3P 4 03504 03304 EZETSHD3P
1 x 4P 4 03504 03304 EZETSHD4P
EZC400 1 x 3P 5 03505 03306 EZ4TSHD3P
1 x 4P 5 03505 03306 EZ4TSHD4P
Easypact EZC400.
Circuit breakers
A-33
BOOK EN.indb 33 19/10/2011 14:36:38
Functional units
Presentation
Presentation
A rigid modular rail
Made using an aluminium alloy, the rail design is extremely rigid. The rail supports
are crimp mounted.
Fast mounting
The rail supports have positioning studs to guide the rail on the framework.
Only two mounting screws are required.
Multiple functions
A number of devices clip directly onto the rails, including 80 A and 200 A Multiclip
distribution blocks, all horizontal cable-running accessories such as cable straps
and trunking supports, as well as the supports for earth bars.
What is more, for cable running to the terminal block at the top or bottom of
the cubicle, the supports are designed to allow the passage to two vertical trunking
sections on the left and right.
Supply from all directions
Supply to the rows, using comb busbars or Multiclip distribution blocks, can be via:
b fat or Powerclip insulated busbars installed behind the devices
b fat or Linergy busbars installed in a busbar compartment.
Distribution
80 and 200 A Multiclip distribution blocks
b fast and secure front connection using spring terminals
b reliable connections, will not loosen over time, insensitive to vibrations and
thermal
b variations
b all types of modular devices can be mixed
b easy balancing of phases
b interchangeable devices
b easy installation upgrades
b fully insulated (IPxxB).
Comb busbars
b direct connection to device terminals or via a connector
b fully insulated
b can be cut to length.
Cable running
Straps
b easy and fast to install
b low cost
b perfectly organised and integrated cable running
b professional fnish.
Trunking
b Traditional solution.
P
B
1
0
5
0
0
4
.
e
p
s
Compact NSX400 with motor mechanism, supplying rows of
Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices via Powerclip insulated busbars.
P
B
1
0
5
0
0
5
.
e
p
s
Modular devices
Multi 9 or Acti 9
NG160, NG125, C120 or iC120 circuit breakers
INS40/160 switch-disconnectors
Circuit breakers
A-34
BOOK EN.indb 34 19/10/2011 14:36:39
Functional units
Multi 9 or Acti 9 type modular devices
D
d
3
8
0
7
7
1
.
e
p
s
modules
Modular rail Modular front
plate
All supply systems (comb busbars,
Multiclip) with cable straps and trunking
sections
4 03401 03204
Connection via 63/80 A Multiclip or comb
busbars with cable straps
3 03401 03203
Capacity of modular rail: 48 modules (9 mm).
Note: For a modular row with a 160 A (half row) and 200 A Multiclip distribution block positioned
directly below a non-modular mounting plate (Compact, Interpact, etc.), or at the top of a
switchboard: add one module (i.e. 4 + 1) and a plain upstream front plate (03801).
200 A Multiclip.
Cable running: trunking.
Mounting requires 4 vertical modules.
D
d
3
8
0
7
7
2
.
e
p
s
Comb busbars.
Cable running: cable straps.
D
d
3
8
1
3
0
5
.
e
p
s
80 A Multiclip.
Cable running: cable straps.

3 rows of Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices
modules
Modular rail Modular
front plate
3 rows
D
d
3
8
2
4
4
3
.
e
p
s
Designation
3 rows of Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices y 40 A
supply via comb busbars or Multiclip
distribution blocks (63/80 A)
Cable running using cables straps
8 03401 x 3 03223
Modular devices
Multi 9 or Acti 9 y 63A
Circuit breakers
A-35
400E21400.indd 35 20/10/2011 09:52:26
Functional units
NG160 circuit breaker
D
D
3
8
0
7
6
9
.
e
p
s
modules
Modular rail
adjustable
(1)
Modular front
plate
NG160, Vigi NG160 5 03402 + 04227 03205
(1) To add modular devices to the row, order a raised DIN rail (04227).
Note: Width of NG160 circuit breakers: NG160 3P: 10 modules
NG160 4P: 14 modules
Vigi NG160 3P: 24 modules
Vigi NG160 4P: 27 modules
NG125, C120 or iC120 circuit
breaker
modules
plate
D
d
3
8
2
4
1
6
.
e
p
s
NG125, C120 or iC120 circuit breaker
NG125, Vigi NG125
C120 or iC120, Vigi C120 or Vigi iC120
5 03401 03205
Direct supply via cables.
Note: width of NG125 circuit breakers: NG125 3P: 9 modules
Vigi NG125 3P y 63 A: fxed sensitivity 18 modules
adjustable sensitivity 20 modules
> 63 A: fxed sensitivity 20 modules
C120 or iC120 3P: 9 modules
C120 or iC120 4P: 12 modules
Vigi C120 or Vigi iC120 3P: 19 modules
Vigi C120 or Vigi iC120 4P: 22 modules
INS switch-disconnector
D
D
3
8
0
7
7
0
.
e
p
s
modules
plate
INS160
INS40/160 4 03401 03204
INS100/160 with long terminal shields 5 03401 03205
Direct supply via cables.
Note: width of devices: INS40/80: width 10 modules
INS100/160: width 15 modules
Modular devices
80/160A
NG160, NG125, C120 or iC120 circuit breakers
INS40/160 switch-disconnectors
Circuit breakers
A-36
BOOK EN.indb 36 19/10/2011 14:36:41
Modular devices NG125
circuit breaker
NSA125/160 circuit breaker
INS40/160 switch-disconnector
Functional units
W = 400 mm
Multi 9 or Acti 9 type modular devices
D
d
3
8
2
5
1
9
.
e
p
s
modules
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Modular front
plate
All supply systems (comb busbars, 63/160 A
1/2 row Multiclip) with cable straps and
trunking sections
4 03404 03214
Supply via 63 A Multiclip or comb busbars
with cable straps
3 03404 03213
D
d
3
8
2
5
2
0
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Modular front
plate
Downstream
front plate
Designation
Vigi NG125
3/4P
3P
5 03404 03214 03811
Note: to mix an NSA125/160 circuit breaker with Multi 9 or Acti 9 modular devices, order
(with the device) the symmetrical rail + raiser set (28041).
Width of devices: NG125 3P: 9 modules
NSA125/160 circuit breaker
D
d
3
8
2
5
2
1
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Modular front
plate
Downstream
front plate
Designation
5 03404 03214 03811
Note: to mix an NSA125/160 circuit breaker with Multi 9 or Acti 9 modular devices, order
(with the device) the symmetrical rail + raiser set (28041).
Width of devices: NSA125/160 3P: 10 modules
NSA125/160 4P: 14 modules
D
d
3
8
2
5
2
2
.
e
p
sDevice No. of
vertical
modules
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Modular front
plate
Downstream
front plate
Designation
INS40/160 switch-disconnector 4 03404 03214
with long terminal shields
5 03404 03214 03811
Width of devices: INS40/80: width 10 modules
INS100/160: width 15 modules
Circuit breakers
A-37
400E21400.indd 37 04/11/2011 13:19:27
Functional units
Distribution via Powerclip
busbars
D
d
3
8
1
1
6
0
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
1
6
1
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
3
0
6
.
e
p
s
Powerclip tap-off blocks.
D
d
3
8
1
1
6
2
.
e
p
s
Universal power supply block for the
Powerclip insulated busbars.
200 A Multiclip connection (04021).
Presentation
The Powerclip insulated busbars are mounted using a System G adapter (03595)
made up of four lateral cross-members and two longitudinal cross-members.
The busbars can be positioned at precisely the desired spot, to the left (preferably),
in the middle or to the right of the row of devices.
The depth adjustment of the longitudinal cross-members facilitates connections for all
types of devices (fxed/withdrawable, toggle/rotary handle/motor mechanism, etc.).
For busbars:
b y 800 mm long, order one System G adapter (03595)
b > 800 mm long, order two System G adapters (03595 x 2).
Cat. no. selection
Designation
Powerclip insulated busbars see page B-50
System G adapter, W= 500 mm (03595) see page A-79
D
d
3
8
3
2
8
9
.
e
p
s
One-piece device/Powerclip connection
Respects the degree of protection IpxxB on both busbar and device ends.
Neutral is clearly indicated (blue).
NG160 incoming device (located on left-hand side), NG125, INS160, C120 or
iC120
One-piece 3/4 P fast connection to busbars, equipped with male fttings one end for
tunnel terminals .
One-piece connection, 160A, W = 150 mm 04147
A multi-purpose connection for:
b supply to Powerclip busbars from a switchboard incomer
b supply to a row incomer from Powerclip busbars.
D
d
3
8
3
2
7
4
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
3
2
9
0
.
e
p
s
NG160 Vigi incoming device (located on left-hand side) NG160
(without Vigi) incoming device (located in the middle) NG125,
INS160, C120 or iC120
One-piece 3/4 P fast connection to busbars, equipped with male fttings one end for
tunnel terminals .
One-piece connection, 160A, W = 440 mm 04148
D
d
3
8
3
2
7
6
.
e
p
s
Modular devices
Powerclip busbars
Connections
Circuit breakers
A-38
BOOK EN.indb 38 19/10/2011 14:36:44
Functional units
Distribution via rear busbars
Installation
Solution 1
The rear fat busbars are mounted using a System G adapter (03595) made up of four
lateral cross-members and two longitudinal cross-members.
The depth adjustment of the longitudinal cross-members facilitates connections for all
types of devices (fxed/withdrawable, toggle/rotary handle/motor mechanism, etc.).
The number of adapters that must be ordered depends on the required number of
supports.
Solution 2
The support for the busbars clips to the rear of the modular rail.
Cat. no. selection
D
d
3
8
1
1
6
3
.
e
p
s
Designation
Rear busbars see page B-53
System G adapter, W = 500 mm (03595) see page A-79
Modular devices
Rear busbars
Circuit breakers
A-39
BOOK EN.indb 39 19/10/2011 14:36:44
Functional units
Distribloc distribution block
D
d
3
8
1
3
0
8
.
e
p
s
125 A Distribloc distribution block 04045
See page B-55.
Multiclip distribution blocks
D
D
3
8
0
6
7
5
.
e
p
s
Multiclip, 63 A, 4P, 1/2 row 04008
Multiclip, 80 A 04000
Multiclip, 80 A, 4P 04004
Multiclip, 160 A, 4P, 1/2 row 04018
Connection between 200 A Multiclip 4P and Powerclip insulated busbars 04021
Connection between 160 A Multiclip (1/2 row) and devices 04030
See page B-60.
Comb busbars For C60 or iC60 circuit breakers
D
D
3
8
0
7
5
5
.
e
p
s
1P 24-module comb busbar (9 mm modules) 14881
Two 48-module comb busbars (9 mm modules) 14891
For C120 or iC120 and NG125 circuit breakers
1P (W = 430 mm, 16 poles) 14811
2P (W = 430 mm, 16 poles) 14812
3P (W = 430 mm, 16 poles) 14813
4P (W = 430 mm, 16 poles) 14814
Thoot caps (set of 20) 14818
Cable running
D
D
3
8
0
8
1
1
.
e
p
s
Cable straps
12 vertical cable straps 04262
2 covers, 1-meter long, for vertical cable straps 04263
12 horizontal cable straps 04239
4 covers, 430 mm long, for horizontal cable straps 04243
Trunking
4 horizontal sections, 60 x 30 mm, W = 450 mm 04257
12 horizontal trunking supports 04255
10 adaptable support for horizontal trunking 04256
Vertical section, 80 x 60 mm, W = 2 m 04267
See page B-76.
Blanking plates
D
D
3
8
4
0
2
9
.
e
p
s
Blanking strip, H = 46 mm, W = 1 m 03220
4 divisible blanking plates, H = 46 mm, W = 90 mm 03221
See page C-23.
Modular devices
Distribution
Circuit breakers
A-40
BOOK EN.indb 40 19/10/2011 14:36:46
Source-changeover systems
Compact / Masterpact
Functional units
Source changeover
General
To ensure the supply of energy at all times, certain electrical installations are
connected to two sources:
b the normal source
b the replacement source that steps in to supply the installation if the normal source
is not available.
A mechanical and/or electrical interlocking system between two Interpact, Compact
or Masterpact switch-disconnectors or circuit breakers (or a mixture) avoids
simultaneous connection of the two sources during switching.
The source-changeover system can be:
b manual when the devices are mechanically interlocked
b remote operated when there is also an electrical interlocking system
b automatic, by adding an automatic controller that manages switching from one
source to another according to a number of external parameters.
D
d
3
8
1
6
6
9
.
e
p
s
Manual source-changeover system
This is the most simple system. A human operator is required and consequently, the
transfer from the normal source to the replacement source is delayed.
A manual source-changeover system comprises two or three manually controlled
devices (circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors) that are mechanically interlocked.
The interlocking system avoids simultaneous connection (even transient) of the two
sources.
Remote-operated source-changeover system
This is the most commonly used system. No human intervention is required.
The transfer from the normal to the replacement source is managed electrically.
A remote-operated source-changeover system is made up of two or three devices
linked by an electrical interlocking system implemented in a number of manners.
Device control is backed up by a mechanical interlocking system that protects
against the consequences of an electrical malfunction and inhibits incorrect manual
operation.
Automatic source-changeover system
When a remote-operated source-changeover system is combined with an automatic
controller, the sources can be controlled automatically according to a number of
programmed operating modes.
This solution provides optimum energy management:
b switching to a replacement source depending on any external conditions
b management of sources
b regulation
b emergency source replacement, etc.
A communications function for dialogue with a supervisor is available for the
automatic controller.
See the catalogue dedicated to Compact, Interpact and Masterpact
sourcechangeover systems (ref. LVPED211022EN).
Switch-disconnectors
A-41
400E21160.indd 41 07/11/2011 15:23:05
Source-changeover systems
Possible combinations
Compact NSX100/630, NS630b/1600
Masterpact NT06/16, NW08/32
Functional units
Manual source-changeover
All possibilities for manual source-changeover systems
Type of device Type of interlocking
Complete
assembly
Toggle Keylock Rotary handle On base plate Cable-type
wirh 2 devices
side-by-side
(2)
Cable-type
with 3 devices
side-by-side
(2)
Cable-type
with 2 devices
one above
another
INS250 (ratings 100 to 250) b b
INV100 to INV250
(1)
b
INS320 to INS630 b b
INV320 to INV630
(1)
b
NSX100 to NSX250 b b b
NSX400 to NSX630 b b b
NS630b to NS1600 b b b b
NT06 to NT16 b b b
NW08 to NW32 b b b
(1) Visible break function.
(2) In 2 or 3 cubicles.
D
d
3
8
3
7
0
3
.
e
p
s
Devices side by side in two adjacent cubicles.
Remote-operated source-
changeover systems
Mechanical interlocking system
Combination of Compact Normal and Replacement
source devices
Normal N Replacement R
NSX100 NSX160 NSX250 NSX400 NSX630
D
D
3
8
3
8
0
9
.
e
p
s
NSX100
Ratings 12.5... 100 A b b b
NSX160
NSX250
NSX400
Ratings 160... 400 A b b
NSX630
Ratings 250... 630 A b b
Horizontal NSX100/630.
D
d
3
8
3
5
7
8
.
e
p
s
Combination of Normal and Replacement source devices
(interlocking via cables)
Normal N Replacement R
NS630b to NS1600 NT06 to NT16 NW08 to NW40
NS630b to NS1600 b
NT06 to NT16 b b
NW08 to NW32 b b
NS630b/1600 device one above the other, mechanical
interlocking using cables.
A-42
400E21160.indd 42 20/10/2011 09:54:45
Functional units
NSX100 to 630
Interlocking of rotary handles
The devices are equipped with a rotary handle.
They are mounted on a dedicated mounting plate:
b vertically for NSX100/250
b horizontally for NSX400/630.
ON I
OOFF
ON I
OOFF OOFF OOFF OOFF OOFF
O
reset
D
D
3
8
1
5
2
9
.
e
p
s
No. of vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Compact NSX, rotary handle
NSX100/250 10 03428 03245 03802 03803
NSX400/630 10 03458 03659
Incoming and busbar connections to be made.
Designation Front connection
long terminal shields
Rear connection
short terminal shields
NSX100/250. NSX100/250 3P LV429517 LV429515
4P LV429518 LV429516
NSX400/630 3P LV432593 LV432591
4P LV432594 LV432592
A
A
D
D
3
8
3
8
1
0
.
e
p
s
Designation Devices For 3P device For 4P device
Shields for spreaders NSX400/630 LV432595 LV432596
Designation Devices Catalogue number
Mechanical interlock NSX100/250 LV429369
NSX400/630 LV432621
Coupling accessory NSX100/250 29358 29359
NSX400/630 32619 32620
NSX400/630.
Horizontal NS630b to 1000
Interlocking of direct rotary handles
The devices are equipped with a direct rotary handle.
They are mounted horizontally on a dedicated mounting plate.
D
d
3
8
1
5
3
4
.
e
p
s
No. of vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Compact NS rotary handle, front connection
NS630b/1000 13 03491 03695
Long terminal shields NS630b/1000 33628 33629
Mechanical interlock NS630b/1000 33890 33890
NS630b/1000.
systems

A-43
BOOK EN.indb 43 19/10/2011 14:36:49
Compact NS630b/1600
Source-changeover system with 2 devices one above the other
or side-by-side in two combined cubicles
b These confgurations correspond to two standard incoming devices in terms of:
v selection of functional units
v number of modules
To determine the number of modules required for installation of two devices one on
top of another, add the number of modules required for each.
v incoming and busbar connection
v partitions and covers
Devices mounted vertically
b type of interlocking:
v mechanical interlocking using cables
v interlocking of rotary handles (for NS630b/1600 only)
For possible combinations and details concerning installation, see the catalogue
dedicated to Compact, Interpact and Masterpact source-changeover systems
(ref. LVPED211022EN).
Note: does not operate with 2 NW40s placed one above the other.
Compact NS630b/1600
See page A-15.
Masterpact NT06/16
See page A-9.
Masterpact NW08/40
See page A-4.
All combinations of Masterpact NT and NW fxed and drawout devices are
possible.
D
d
3
8
3
5
7
9
.
e
p
s
systems
Compact NS630b/1600
Masterpact, NT06/16, NW08/32
Functional units
A-44
400E21160.indd 44 08/11/2011 11:16:07
Functional units
Compact NSX100/630
Device installation
The devices are equipped with motor mechanisms.
They are mounted horizontally on a dedicated mounting plate.
D
D
3
8
3
8
1
1
.
e
p
s
No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Compact NSX, fxed or withdrawable/socle
NSX100/250 8 03417
(1)
03616
NSX400/630 10 03457
(2)
03656
(1) Order mounting plate + IVE electrical interlocking unit for NSX100/250 (cat. no. 29350 for AC
or 29351 for DC version).
(2) Order mounting plate + IVE electrical interlocking unit for NSX400/630 (cat. no. 32610 for AC
or 32611 for DC version).
Compact NSX100/250. Designation Front connection
long terminal shields
Rear connection
short terminal shields
D
D
3
8
3
8
1
2
.
e
p
sNSX100/250 3P LV429517 LV429515
4P LV429518 LV429516
NSX400/630 3P LV432593 LV432591
4P LV432594 LV432592
Shields for
spreaders
NSX400/630 LV432595 LV432596
Coupling accessory NSX100/250 29358 29359
NSX400/630 32619 32620
Compact NSX400/630.
Compact NS630b/1600
Source-changeover system with 2 devices one above the other
or side-by-side in two combined cubicles
b These confgurations correspond to two standard incoming devices in terms of:
v selection of functional units
v number of modules
To determine the number of modules required for installation of two devices one on
top of another, add the number of modules required for each.
v incoming and busbar connection
v partitions and covers.
Devices mounted vertically.
Mechanical interlocking using cables + electrical interlocking.
For possible combinations and details concerning installation, see the catalogue
dedicated to Compact, Interpact and Masterpact source-changeover systems
(ref. LVPED211022EN).
Note: does not operate with 2 NW40s placed one above the other.
In case of connection on a vertical busbar protected by a form 2 partitioning, a form 2
restoration kit is mandatory (see form 2 partitioning page B-36).
Compact NS630b/1600
see page A-15.
All fxed and all withdrawable combinations are possible.
Masterpact NT06/16
see page A-9.
All fxed, drawout and fxed + drawout combinations are possible.
Masterpact NW0832
see page A-4.
All fxed, drawout and fxed + drawout combinations are possible.
All combinations of Masterpact NT and NW fxed and drawout devices are
possible.
D
d
3
8
3
7
0
4
.
e
p
s
Remote-operated
sourcechangeover
Masterpact NW08/32, NT06/16
A-45
400E21160.indd 45 20/10/2011 10:22:02
Functional units
Addition of an automatic
controller
When a UA, BA or UA150 automatic controller is added together with an ACP
mounting plate, the sources can be controlled automatically according to a number
of programmed operating modes.
MERLINGERIN
MERLINGERIN
D
D
3
8
3
8
1
3
.
e
p
s
No. of vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front plate
UA or BA controller
UA or BA controller 4 03417 03671
Remote-operated
sourcechangeover systems
Masterpact NW08/32, NT06/16
A-46
BOOK EN.indb 46 19/10/2011 14:36:52
Functional units
system with mechanical
interlocking
Interpact INS-INV250
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
D
D
3
8
1
5
3
7
.
e
p
s
INS-INV250 9 03428 03235 03802

03802

Designation Cat. No
Long terminal shields (set of 2) 29324
Mechanical interlock 31073
Coupling accessory 29358 (for 3P device)
29359 (for 4P device)
INS-INV250.
D
d
3
8
3
7
0
7
.
e
p
s
Interpact INS-INV320/630
Devices mounted horizontally
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
INS-INV320/630 10 03458 03659

Designation Cat. No
Mechanical interlock 31074
INS-INV320/630.
systems
Interpact INS-INV250 to 630
Front direct rotary handle
A-47
BOOK EN.indb 47 19/10/2011 14:36:53
Functional units
Interpact INS250
D
d
3
8
1
5
3
9
.
e
p
s
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
INS250 9 03428 03247 03802 03802
Designation Rating For 3P device For 4P device
Complete
source-
changeover assembly
100 A 31140 31141
160 A 31144 31145
200 A 31142 31143
250 A 31146 31147
Designation Cat. No
D
d
3
8
3
7
0
8
.
e
p
s
Interpact INS320/630
Devices mounted horizontally
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front plate
INS320/630 10 03458 03661
Designation Rating For 3P device For 4P device
Complete
source-
changeover
assembly
320 A 31148 31149
400 A 31150 31151
500 A 31152 31153
630 A 31154 31155
INS-INV320/630. Designation Cat. No
Coupling
accessory
Long terminal
shields (set of 2)
32625
systems
Interpact INS250 to 630
A-48
BOOK EN.indb 48 19/10/2011 14:36:54
Functional units
Connection
Cable connection
D
d
3
8
3
5
8
0
.
e
p
s
Device Vertical
connection
adapters
Vertical
connection
adapters
Cable-lug
adapters
Terminal extension
bar support
Interpact INS-INV
INS-INV630b/
1600
3P 31301 33644
4P 31302 33645
INS-INV2000-
2500
3P 33975 04694
4P 33976 04694
Depending on the type of front connection, an INS-INV2000-2500 can be mounted in
a 400 mm or 600 mm deep enclosure.
For rear connection, a 600 mm deep enclosure is required.
INS-INV630b/1600.
Device installation
D
d
3
8
3
5
8
1
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Interpact INS-INV
INS-INV630b/
1600
3P 14 03501 03713 03804 03804
4P 14 03501 03714 03804 03804
INS-INV2000-
2500
3P/4P 16 03501 03715 03803 03803
Distribution
D
d
3
8
3
5
8
2
.
e
p
s
Device Connection Free supports Cover for BB
connection
Interpact INS-INV
INS-INV630b/
1600
3P 04481 (Linergy) 04926
(1)
4P 04482 (Linergy) 04926
(1)
INS-INV2000-
2500
3P/4P must be made 04662 x 2 04926
(1)
(1) Partitioning of devices must be made.
Selection of Linergy busbars: see page A-49.
Interpact INS-INV630b to 2500
INS-INV2000-2500
A-49
BOOK EN.indb 49 19/10/2011 14:36:55
Horizontal
Front handle
Functional units
Installation
D
D
3
8
0
5
4
3
.
e
p
s
modules
Interpact INS-INV switch-disconnector
INS-INV250 4 03412 03617

INS-INV320/630 5 03452 03658
Busbar connection
Linergy busbars
D
D
3
8
0
5
4
4
.
e
p
s
Device Prefabricated connection Short terminal shields
(set of 2)
INS-INV250 3P 04427 29322
4P 04428 29322
INS-INV320/630 3P must be made 32563
4P must be made 32563
D
D
3
8
1
4
2
3
.
e
p
s
Device Connection Short terminal shields
(set of 2)
INS-INV250 must be made 29322
INS-INV320/630 must be made 32563
Connection
D
D
3
8
0
5
4
5
.
e
p
s
(1)
Device Long terminal shields
(set of 2)
Short terminal shields
(set of 2)
INS-INV250 29324 29322
INS-INV320/630 32565 32563
(1) For rear connection, protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning: see page B-42.
A-50
BOOK EN.indb 50 19/10/2011 14:36:56
Vertical
Front handle
Functional units
Installation
D
D
3
8
0
5
4
6
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
devices
No. of
vertical
modules
(1)
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
INS-INV250 1 7 03420 03248 03801 03801
INS-INV250 2/3 7 03420 03620
(2)
03801 03801

INS-INV320/
400
1 10 03461 03274
INS-INV500/
630
1 11 03461 03274 03801
(1) For the Interpact INS-INV250, the number of modules indicated is for supply via a Polypact
distribution block. For supply via cables, two additional modules are required; add a plain front
plate upstream (03802).
(2) Front plate 03620 is intented for 2 or 3 INS-INV250 devices.
Busbar connection
Linergy busbars
D
D
3
8
0
5
4
7
.
e
p
s
Device Polypact (with connection) Long terminal shields
INS-INV250 04404
D
D
3
8
0
5
4
8
.
e
p
s
Device Polypact (w/o connection) Long terminal shields
INS-INV250 04408
Accessories
Connection
D
D
3
8
0
5
4
9
.
e
p
s
(1)
Device Long terminal shields Short terminal shields
INS-INV250 29324 29322
INS-INV320/630 32565 32563
(1) For rear connection, size reduced one module; a plain downstream front plate (03801) is not
needed. Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning: see page B-42.
A-51
BOOK EN.indb 51 19/10/2011 14:36:57
Fupact ISFL
Vertical
3P
Functional units
Installation through cut-out front
plate in a 650 mm wide cubicle
Mounting principle
b The fuses are installed on the horizontal bars which are in turn supported by a
mounting plate
b The front plates are secured to the hinged front plate support frame
b The front may be covered either by a cover frame or a plain or transparent door
b Current transformers can be installed behind ISFL fuse-switch disconnectors.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
4
4
4
3
.
E
P
S
Device Qty per
row
No. of
modules
occupied
Mounting
plate
+ horizontal
bars
Cut-out
front plate
Fuse-switch disconnectors behind door or cover frame
ISFL160 9 11 03545 +
(1)
03736

+
49903 x 2
(1) The bars are made by the customer: for choice of bars, see page B-26.
Installation through a 2/3 cut-out
front plate in a 650 mm wide
cubicle
Mounting principle
b The fuses are installed on the horizontal bars which are in turn supported
by a mounting plate
b The front of the cubicle is made up of two parts:
v 2/3 cut-out front plate allowing introduction of the fuses
v 1/3 front plate support frame (12 modules) on which the functional units are
mounted
b The front may be covered either by a cover frame or a plain or transparent door
b Current transformers can be installed behind ISFL fuse-switch disconnectors.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
4
4
4
4
.
E
P
S
Device No. of
devices
per row
No. of
vertical
modules
occupied
Mounting
plate
+ horizontal
bars
2/3 front plate + 1/3 frame
Fuse-switch disconnectors behind 2/3 front plate
ISFL160 10 24 03546
+ 49904
(1)
+ 49852
(1)
+
x
x
(2)
5
5
03735
(3)
+
49903 x 2
ISFL250
ISFL400
ISFL630
5 24 03546
(1)
+
(2)
03735
(3)
+
49910 x 2
(1) Adaptation accessories 49904 + 49852 used to:
b install two ISFL160 devices on a mounting plate 03546
b mix ISFL devices.
(2) The bars are made by the customer: for choice of bars, see page B-26.
(3) The cat. number 03735 (IP20 front plate for ISFL, 185 mm between centres, W = 650 mm)
replaces the cat. number 03733.
Accessories Cat. No.
Busbar barrier 04860
D
D
3
8
4
4
5
7
.
E
P
S
Fusegear
A-52
400E21222.indd 52 20/10/2011 10:31:19
Fupact ISFL
Vertical
3P
Determining the busbars
Functional units
Accessories
D
D
3
8
4
4
4
5
.
E
P
SDesignation Cat. no.
Blanking plate for ISFL160 03740
Blanking plate for ISFL250/630
(1)
03741
(1) Use 2 blanking plates per device.
Determining the horizontal rear
busbars for ISFT/ISFL devices
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
ISFL160 1 bar 60 x 10 1400 1250 1320 1160 1250 1070 1160 980 1070 880 980 b
1 bar 80 x 10 1700 1500 1600 1400 1500 1280 1400 1160 1280 1030 1160 b
ISFL250/
400/630
1 bar 80 x 10 1700 1500 1600 1400 1500 1280 1400 1160 1280 1030 1160 b
1 bar 100 x 10 2050 1800 1930 1680 1800 1540 1680 1400 1540 1240 1400 b
1 bar 120 x 10 2390 2100 2250 1950 2100 1800 1950 1630 1800 1440 1630
b Connection impossible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
Fusegear
A-53
BOOK EN.indb 53 19/10/2011 14:37:02
Fupact ISFT
Vertical
3P
Installation on mounting plate or busbars
Functional units
Installation
D
d
3
8
3
5
8
9
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
devices
per row
No. of
vertical
modules
occupied
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front
plate
Downstream
front plate
Long
terminal
shields (qty
per device)
ISFT100 (installation
on mounting plate)
5 6 03554 03320
ISFT100N (installation
on mounting plate)
8 8 03553 03325
on mounting plate)
4 6 03556 03321 49869 x 2
on mounting plate)
2 9 03557 03322 49872 x 2
ISFT1600 on mounting plate. ISFT400 (installation
on mounting plate)
2 9 03557 03323 49875 x 2
on mounting plate)
1 10 03557 03324 03802

49876 x 2
ISFT100N (installation
on busbars)
6 8 03555 03325
on busbars)
4 6 03555 03321 49869 x 2

Accessories
D
d
3
8
3
5
9
0
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
2
4
8
4
.
e
p
sComb busbars for ISFT100
for 2 devices 49861
for 3 devices 49862
for 4 devices 49863
Coupler to connect 2 busbars 49890
Tooth cover 49864
Set of 3 connectors (25 to 95 mm) 49865
Set of 3 distribution connectors 3 x 10 mm 49860
ISFT630.
Busbar connection
Connection made by the customer.
Choice of fexible bars to be used for the connection: see page B-64.
Connection
Cable-tie supports: see page B-65.
Fusegear
A-54
BOOK EN.indb 54 19/10/2011 14:37:03
Fupact ISFT
Vertical
3P
Determining the busbars
Functional units
Determining the horizontal rear busbars
for ISFT devices
Device Permissible current (A)
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
Section/phase IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
ISFT160/ISFT100N 1 bar 30 x 10 730 680 680 630 630 570 570 510 510 450 450 b
b connection not possible.
Fusegear
A-55
BOOK EN.indb 55 19/10/2011 14:37:03
Fupact INF
Horizontal
Extended rotary handle
Functional units
Installation
A
B
C
D E F
A
B
C
D E F
H
H
G
G
D
D
3
8
4
4
5
2
.
E
P
S
Device No. of
devices per
row
No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Long terminal
shields
Switch-disconnector fuses
INF32/40 1 x 3/4P 3 03540 03313
INF63 1 x 3P 5 03541 03314 49658
1 x 4P 5 03541 03314 49658 x 2
INF100/160 1 x 3P 5 03541 03314 49659 x 6
1 x 4P 5 03541 03314 49659 x 8
INF200 1 x 3P 7 03534 03727 49255 x 6
1 x 4P 7 03534 03727 49255 x 8
INF250 1 x 3P 7 03534 03727 49255 x 6
1 x 4P 7 03534 03727 49255 x 8
INF400 1 x 3P 8 03535 03729 49255 x 6
A
B
C
D E F
A
B
C
D E F
H
H
G
G
D
D
3
8
4
4
5
3
.
E
P
S1 x 4P 8 03535 03729 49255 x 8
INF630-800 1 x 3P 11 03536 03730 49257 x 6
1 x 4P 11 03536 03730 49257 x 8
Busbar connection
Choice of fexible bars to be used for the connection for INF y 630 A: see page B-64.
A
B
C
D E F
A
B
C
D E F
H
H
G
G
D
D
3
8
4
4
5
4
.
E
P
S
Fusegear
A-56
BOOK EN.indb 56 19/10/2011 14:37:04
Fupact INF
Vertical
Extended rotary handle
Functional units
Installation
A
B
C
D E F
A
B
C
D E F
H
H
G
G
D
D
3
8
1
8
5
8
.
E
P
S
Device No. of
devices
per
row
No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out
front
plate
Upst.
front
plate
Downst.
front
plate
Long
terminal
shields (qty
per device)
Switch-disconnector fuses
INF32/40 4 x 3P 3 03540 03312
3 x 4P 3 03540 03313
INF63 3 x 3P 5 03541 03314 49658
2 x 4P 5 03541 03315 49658 x 2
INF100/160 2 x 3P 5 03541 03315 49659 x 6
2 x 4P 5 03541 03315 49659 x 8
INF200 1 x 3P 9 03537 03728 03801 03802 49255 x 6
1 x 4P 9 03537 03728 03801 03802 49255 x 8
INF250 1 x 3P 9 03537 03728 03801 03802 49255 x 6
1 x 4P 9 03537 03728 03801 03802 49255 x 8
INF400 1 x 3P 9 03537 03728 03801 03802 49255 x 6
A
B
C
D E F
A
B
C
D E F
H
H
G
G
D
D
3
8
1
8
5
9
.
E
P
S1 x 4P 9 03537 03728 03801 03802 49255 x 8
INF630-800 1 x 3P 11 03537 03728 03802 03803 49257 x 6
1 x 4P 11 03537 03728 03802 03803 49257 x 8
Busbar connection
Choice of fexible bars to be used for the connection for INF y 630 A: see page B-64.
A
B
C
D E F
A
B
C
D E F
H
H
G
G
D
D
3
8
1
8
6
0
.
E
P
S
Fusegear
A-57
BOOK EN.indb 57 19/10/2011 14:37:06
equipment
D
D
3
8
4
6
0
3
.
e
p
s
Presentation
Schneider Electric offers power factor correction equipment that integrates perfectly
in Prisma Plus switchboards.
The power factor correction modules are installed horizontally in a cubicle and
electrically interconnected by a set of front busbars.
The busbars are supplied by a protection device installed outside the cubicle.
Special Prisma Plus cubicles are used for power factor correction, given the
temperature rise inside the cubicles.
They comply with and are tested according to standards IEC 61439-1 and 2.
Installation
Mounting plates are equipped with the power factor correction modules, made up of
a contactor, the corresponding protection fuses and a set of busbars.
They are installed in a 650 mm wide cubicle that is either 400 or 600 mm deep
depending on the depth of the switchboard to which it will be added.
Each cubicle can be equipped with up to 5 or 4 Varpact Classic or Comfort power
factor correction modules or up to four Varpact Harmony power factor correction
modules, positioned one above the other.
The cubicle has a ventilated roof that can be equipped with one or two fans.
The door has cut-outs, one for the Varlogic power factor controller and another in the
bottom for a flter.
D
D
3
8
4
6
0
4
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
6
0
5
.
e
p
s
Standard cubicle supplied via the bottom. Cubicle with a 300 mm wide compartment for
incoming cables via the top.
Functional units
Others
A-58
BOOK EN.indb 58 19/10/2011 14:37:07
equipment
Varpact
Device installation
Prisma Plus cubicles can be used for installation of the new Varpact power factor
correction modules designed to improve power system quality and reduce
consumption of reactive energy.
These modules are made up of capacitors, contactors and special protection against
internal faults. Depending on the version, they come equipped with front busbars or
not.
The following table indicates the maximum number of Varpact modules that can be
installed in one cubicle (D=400 mm or 600 mm) without exceeding temperature rise
limits, as well as the catalogue numbers of the necessary mounting accessories.
D
D
3
8
3
6
6
0
.
e
p
s
Type of equipment No. of power factor
correction modules
per cubicle
Mounting
plate cat. no.
Set of captive
nuts
Varpact Classic 5 51670 + 51635 08921
Varpact Classic and Comfort installation. Varpact Comfort 5 51670 + 51635 08921
Varpact Harmony 4 b 08921
51212 -122 06 123
Harmony 215Hz
30 + 60Kvar - 400V
6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V
50Hz
EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1
Circuit auxiliaire /
auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz
Made in France
D
d
3
8
3
6
2
8
.
e
p
s
Varpact Harmony installation.
Electrical connections
The power factor correction modules equipped with busbars can be interconnected
by jointing the bars (fgure 1). Modules without busbars can be supplied using
Linergy type vertical busbars (fgure 2).
51212 -122 06 123
Harmony 215Hz
30 + 60Kvar - 400V
6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V
50Hz
EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1
Made in France
51212 -122 06 123
Harmony 215Hz
30 + 60Kvar - 400V
6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V
50Hz
EN 60439-1 IEC 43
auxiliairy circuit : 2
Made in France
0/60Hz
V 50/60Hz
D
d
3
8
3
6
2
9
.
e
p
s
G
A
C
D
B
E
F
Module de compensation / Power factor correction module
51212 -122 06 123
Harmony 215Hz
30 + 60Kvar - 400V
6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V
50Hz
EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1
auxiliairy circuit:230V 50/60Hz
Made in France
51212 -122 06 123
Harmony 215Hz
30 + 60Kvar - 400V
6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V
50Hz
EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1
Made in France
51212 -122 06 123
Harmony 215Hz
30 + 60Kvar - 400V
6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V
50Hz
EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1
Made in France
51212 -122 06 123
Harmony 215Hz
30 + 60Kvar - 400V
6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V
50Hz
EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1
Made in France
51212 -122 06 123
Harmony 215Hz
30 + 60Kvar - 400V
6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V
50Hz
EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1
Made in France
51212 -122 06 123
Harmony 215Hz
30 + 60Kvar - 400V
6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V
50Hz
EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1
Made in France
51212 -122 06 123
Harmony 215Hz
30 + 60Kvar - 400V
6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V
50Hz
EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1
Made in France
51212 -122 06 123
Harmony 215Hz
30 + 60Kvar - 400V
6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V
50Hz
EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1
Made in France
D
D
3
8
4
5
8
3
.
E
P
S
Electrical connections between modules. (Figure 1).
Functional units
Others
(Figure 2).
A-59
450E25000.indd 59 20/10/2011 10:38:13
equipment
Varplus
Device installation
Based on Prisma Plus modular design, the Varplus system kit can be used to install
power factor correction equipment in 650 mm wide cubicles.
The table below indicates the type of mounting plate to be used according to
installation requirements.
D
D
3
8
3
6
6
3
.
e
p
s
Type of installation Cubicle depth Mounting plate cat. no.
Vertical installation 400 or 600 mm 03975
Horizontal installation 400 or 600 mm 03978

Reactive power Q per Varplus functional unit depending on voltage.
The following table indicates the maximum permissible reactive power per functional
unit (corresponding to three Varplus capacitors).
Voltage Q (kvar)
230 V 30 kVar
Vertical installation mounting plate Varplus (03975). 400 V 60 kVar
D
D
3
8
3
7
2
6
.
e
p
s
Horizontal installation mounting plate Varplus (03978).
Functional units
Others
A-60
BOOK EN.indb 60 19/10/2011 14:37:15
equipment
Door with cut-outs
Power factor correction equipment is mounted in special, 650 mm wide cubicles that
are 400 or 600 mm deep.
Standard cover panels are used.
However, a special door is used (hinges on left only) that has cut-outs, one for the
Varlogic power factor controller and another in the bottom for a flter.
D
D
3
8
4
6
0
6
.
e
p
s
Door with cut-outs 03970
When several cubicles are combined to build a form 2 switchboard, inter-cubicle
partitions must be used.
Cubicle depth Partition designation Cat. no.
400 mm Inter-cubicle partition, D = 400 mm 04911
600 mm Inter-cubicle partition, D = 600 mm 04931
(1)
(1) For inter-cubicle partitioning of 600 mm depth cubicles, order partitions 04931 + 04911.
Note: for further details, see page B-46.
IP30 / IP31 roof
A roof with a cut-out ensures natural ventilation of the equipment.
It can also be equipped with one or two fans.
It is supplied with a cover to protect the fans against dust, condensation or falling objects.
It is available in 400 and 600 mm depths.
Selection guide
b switchboard IP y 3x
v Varpact Classic or Comfort equipment > 180 kvar and Varpact Harmony - two fans
are required
b switchboard IP > 3x
v two fans are required, whatever the type of equipment.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
2
3
1
5
.
e
p
s
Roof with cut-out + cover W = 650 mmW = 400 mm 08476
W = 600 mm 08676
Fan 08986
Fan characteristics
b Power rating: 35 W
b Input voltage: 230 V
b Throughput via outlet grill:
v with standard flter: 300 m
3
/hr
v with fne flter: 220 m
3
/hr
b Noise level: 52 dB.
Functional units
Others
A-61
BOOK EN.indb 61 19/10/2011 14:37:20
Functional units
Series D and K contactors
D
D
3
8
1
1
5
9
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Useful rail
length
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Plain front plate
Series D and K
contactors y 40 A
3 432 mm 03402 03803
GV2/GV3 circuit breakers
D
d
3
8
1
1
6
4
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Useful rail
length
Modular rail Cut-out front
plate
GV2EM-GV2LE 3 432 mm 03401 03203
GV2L-GV2P 3 432 mm 03402 03203
GV3 5 432 mm 03402 03205
Width of devices without lateral auxiliaries: 45 mm.
D
d
3
8
1
4
2
6
.
e
p
s
Modular blanking plates: see page C-23.
GV2 + contactor combination
D
d
3
8
1
1
6
5
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Useful rail
length
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Transparent
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Combination GV2 + Series D or K contactor y 40 A
GV2 + contactor 5 432 mm 03402 03342 03801
GV2 motor circuit breaker + Series K contactor combination.
TeSys U model
D
d
3
8
1
1
6
6
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Useful
length of
rail (mm)
Rear
modular
rail
Cut-out
front
plate
Front plate
transparent or plain
TeSys U model
TeSys U model 5 432 03402 03205 03342 03804
TeSys U model
(1)
4
(1) Version without communication module, auxiliary contact and reversing module.
D
D
3
8
4
0
5
0
.
e
p
s
Others
A-62
BOOK EN.indb 62 19/10/2011 14:37:22
Functional units
Tego Power
D
d
3
8
1
1
6
7
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Transparent
front plate
Upstream
front plate
Downstream
front plate
Tego Power
Tego Power 2 to 8
feeders
8 03576 03343 03801 03801
ATS01 soft starters
D
D
3
8
3
8
4
2
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Useful
length of
rail (mm)
Modular rail
(adjustable)
Plain front plate
On a modular rail
ATS01N103/106FT 4 432 mm 03402 03804
ATS01N109/112FT 5 432 mm 03402 03805
ATS01N206 to 212 5 432 mm 03402 03805
ATS01N222 to 232 6 432 mm 03402 03806
ATS01N 230LY 5 432 mm 03402 03805
ATS01N 244LY 5 432 mm 03402 03805
ATS01N 244Q 5 432 mm 03402 03805
Width of devices: ATS01N103/106FT: 22.5 mm
ATS01N109/112FT: 45 mm
ATS01N206 to 212: 45 mm
ATS01N222 to 232: 45 mm
ATS01N230LY: 180 mm
ATS01N244LY: 180 mm
ATS01N244Q: 180 mm
D
D
3
8
3
8
1
7
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Slotted mounting
plate
Plain front plate
On a slotted plate
ATS01N272LY 6 03572 03806
ATS01N285LY 6 03572 03806
ATS01N272Q 6 03572 03806
ATS01N285Q 6 03572 03806
Width of devices: ATS01N272LY: 180 mm
ATS01N285LY: 180 mm
ATS01N272Q: 180 mm
ATS01N285Q: 180 mm
Alimentation and LV/LV
transformer
D
d
3
8
1
1
6
9
.
e
p
s
Device No. of
vertical
modules
Slotted mounting
plate
Plain front plate
LV/LV transformer
ABL6-TS/TD up to
2500 VA
4 03571 03804
LV/LV alimentation
ABL6-RT up to
960 W
4 03571 03804
ABL6-RF up to
480 W
4 03571 03804
Others
A-63
BOOK EN.indb 63 19/10/2011 14:37:23
Functional units
Installation
With 1 mounting plate
D
D
3
8
3
1
1
2
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
3
1
1
5
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
2
9
6
2
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
2
9
6
3
.
e
p
s
Device No.
per row
No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Front plate
Meter and connection block
Meter 3 Ph + N 2 6 03508 03343 03806
Connection block 2
Meter + connection block 1 + 1
Earthing wire, 6 mm : cat. no. 08911.
2 meters.
D
D
3
8
3
1
1
3
.
e
p
s
2 connection blocks.
D
D
3
8
3
1
1
4
.
e
p
s
1 meter + 1 connection block.
Metering
3-phase kilowatt-hour meters
Others
A-64
401E21020.indd 64 20/10/2011 10:39:52
Functional units
Installation
With 2 mounting plates
D
D
3
8
3
1
1
6
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
3
1
1
5
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
2
9
6
2
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
2
9
6
3
.
e
p
s
Device No.
per row
No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Front plate
Meter and connection block
Meter 3 Ph + N 4 12 2 x 03508 2 x 03343 2 x 03806
Meter + connection block 2 + 2
Earthing wire, 6 mm : cat. no. 08911.
4 meters.
D
D
3
8
3
1
1
7
.
e
p
s
2 meters + 2 connection blocks.
Metering
Others
A-65
401E21020.indd 65 20/10/2011 10:39:53
Metering
Single-phase kilowatt-hour meters
Class 2
Functional units
Meters can be installed at different levels on the functional uprights of frameworks.
Class 1: Depending on preferences and needs, meters can be installed directly on
mounting plates equipped with earthing braids and combined with partitioning or
front plates.
The mounting plates can be raised using M5 spacers: see page A-78.
Installation
Meters behind front plate
D
D
3
8
2
9
5
4
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
2
9
5
9
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
2
9
6
0
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
2
9
6
2
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
2
9
6
3
.
e
p
s
Device No. per
row
No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Adapter Insulating
plate
Front plate
Ph + N 3 6 03157 03595 03154 03343 03806
Earthing wire, 6 mm: cat. no. 08911.
Others
A-66
400E21020.indd 66 20/10/2011 10:40:56
Metering
Class 2
Functional units
Meters can be installed at different levels on the functional uprights of frameworks.
Class 1: Depending on preferences and needs, meters can be installed directly on
mounting plates equipped with earthing braids and combined with partitioning or
front plates.
The mounting plates can be raised using M5 spacers: see page A-78.
Installation
Meters behind front plate
D
D
3
8
2
9
5
2
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
2
9
6
4
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
2
9
6
0
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
2
9
6
5
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
2
9
6
6
.
e
p
s
Device No. per
row
No. of
vertical
modules
Mounting
plate
Adapter Insulating
plate
Front plate
3 Ph + N 2 9 03152 03595 03154 03344 03807
Earthing wire, 6 mm: cat. no. 08911.
Others
A-67
400E21020.indd 67 20/10/2011 10:40:57
Functional units
The human-switchboard interface mounting plates
have been modifed to ensure compatibility with the
new front plates (catalogue numbers unchanged).
The visor has also been changed to ensure
compatibility with the new mounting plates.
The old human-switchboard interface mounting plates
and visor are not compatible with the new front plates.
Presentation
Device mounting
On an interface with plastic mounting plates, H = 150 mm (3 modules)
The interface is made up of a metal front plate and plastic mounting plates that clip
onto the front plate:
b the devices are attached in the cut-outs of the plastic mounting plates and
insulated from the front plate
b a system at the rear of the mounting plates guides the wires
b each mounting plate can receive an adhesive label
b plain mounting plates are available to blank off any unused locations.
D
d
3
8
1
7
0
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
6
8
7
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
6
8
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
6
8
9
.
e
p
s
The mounting plates have guides for auxiliary
wires.
Mounting plates can be identifed by a label.
On a metal front plate with cut-outs, H = 150 mm (3 modules)
b Devices are attached directly to the metal front plate
b Blanking plates are available to blank off any unused locations
b Economical solution.
Installation in a switchboard
The mounted assembly can be installed:
b in the device zone of enclosures and cubicles, like a front plate
b on a door with cut-outs in a 300 or 400 mm wide cubicle
b on a partial door with cut-outs in wall-mounted and foor-standing enclosures
(except IP55).
The degree of protection for installed devices is IP30.
Note: to maintain the IP55 degree of protection, the measurement devices must be installed
behind a transparent door. If they are installed on a plain door, use the corresponding mounting
plates.
D
d
3
8
3
6
4
2
.
e
p
s
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
D
d
3
8
1
6
8
4
.
e
p
s
Mounting on a partial door with cut-outs.
Mounting on a 300 mm wide door in a cubicle
Human-switchboard interface
72 x 72 and 96 x 96 mm devices
Others
A-68
400E21080.indd 68 20/10/2011 10:42:30
72 x 72 mm measurement devices
On an interface with plastic mounting plates
D
d
3
8
1
7
0
5
.
e
p
s
Cat. no. selection
Front plate with cut-outs, 3 modules (for 5 plastic mounting plates) 03904

Plastic mounting plate with cut-out (for 72 x 72 mm device) 03902
Plain plastic mounting plate 03900
D
d
3
8
2
5
7
5
.
e
p
s
The plain plastic mounting plates have knock-outs:
b 4 holes, 16 mm diameter
b 1 hole, 45 x 45 mm
D
d
3
8
1
6
8
9
.
e
p
s
On a metal front plate with cut-outs
Cat. no. selection
Metal front plate with cut-outs, 3 modules (for six 72 x 72 mm devices) 03910

Blanking plate (for 72 x 72 mm hole) 03907
D
d
3
8
2
6
3
7
.
e
p
s
The blanking plates have knock-outs:
On an interface with plastic mounting plates
D
d
3
8
2
6
3
2
.
e
p
s
Cat. no. selection
Front plate with cut-outs, 3 modules (for 4 plastic mounting plates) 03904
Plastic mounting plate with cut-out (for 96 x 96 mm device) 03903
(1)
Plain plastic mounting plate 03901
(1) Not designed for Power meter PM700/800 installation.
D
d
3
8
2
6
3
3
.
e
p
s
The plain plastic mounting plates have knock-outs:
Functional units
Others
A-69
BOOK EN.indb 69 19/10/2011 14:37:29
D
d
3
8
1
7
1
1
.
e
p
s
Cat. no. selection
Metal front plate with cut-outs, 3 modules (for four 96 x 96 mm devices) 03911
D
d
3
8
2
6
3
4
.
e
p
s
The blanking plates have knock-outs:
b 1 hole, 72 x 72 mm.
D
D
3
8
3
6
6
2
.
e
p
s
Cat. no. selection
Metal front plate with cut-outs, 3 modules (for one 96 x 96 device) 03913

The human-switchboard interface mounting plates
have been modifed to ensure compatibility with the
new front plates (catalogue numbers unchanged).
The visor has also been changed to ensure
compatibility with the new mounting plates.
The old human-switchboard interface mounting plates
and visor are not compatible with the new front plates.
Visor for measurement
devices on an interface
with plasstic mounting plates
Presentation
A visor can be used to incline 72 x 72 or 96 x 96 mm devices by 30.
The devices are mounted on a cut-out plastic mounting plate (see previous page)
that clips directly to the visor.
The visor can be installed on 300 and 400 mm wide doors with cut-outs in cubicles
or on partial doors with cut-outs, in wall-mounted and foor-standing enclosures.
It is supplied with a drilling diagram for mounting on a plain door.
Cat. no. selection
D
d
3
8
2
6
3
6
.
e
p
s
Visor 03928
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
A
60
40
10
0
60 60
A
60
40
10
0
D
d
3
8
0
8
6
2
.
e
p
s
Functional units
Others
A-70
BOOK EN.indb 70 19/10/2011 14:37:30
One 144 x 144 mm device
+ four 72 x 72 mm devices
Installation
Devices are installed in the device compartment on a metal front plate with cut-outs.
Blanking plates clip onto the unused 72 x 72 mm holes.
D
d
3
8
1
7
1
2
.
e
p
s
Cat. no. selection
Metal front plate with cut-outs, 4 modules (for one 144 x 144 mm device
+ four 72 x 72 mm devices)
03912

D
d
3
8
2
6
3
5
.
e
p
s
The blanking plates have knock-outs (22 mm diameter) to install:
b 1 to 2 lamps or pushbuttons
b 1 switch
b 1 emergency off (EPO) pushbutton.
Pushbuttons or lamps
Installation
In the device compartment on a metal front plate with cut-outs.
D
d
3
8
1
6
9
0
.
e
p
s
Cat. no. selection
Metal front plate with knock-outs (2 modules) for twelve 22 mm diameter
lamps or pushbuttons
03914
144 x 144 mm devices
22.2 mm diameter lamps, pushbuttons
Functional units
Others
A-71
BOOK EN.indb 71 19/10/2011 14:37:30
Powerlogic system
m s t 1 1
D
d
3
8
3
0
1
9
.
e
p
sDevice No. of vertical
modules
Cut-out front plate
Power meter PM
Power meter PM400/500/700/800
(96 x 96 mm case)
3 03911

FDM121 3 03911

Powerlogic system
CM 4000
D
D
3
8
1
7
1
6
.
e
p
s
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Plain front
plate
Circuit monitor CM
Circuit monitor CM3000 4 03571 03918 03804

Circuit monitor CM4000 6 03572 03918 03806

Installation in the device compartment.
Digipact DMB300
com
?
P
U
I
select
1
2
3
4
D
D
3
8
1
6
9
4
.
e
p
s
modules
Cut-out front
plate
DMB300/400
DMB300 3 03916

DMC300/400 4 03917

03916.
Digipact DM C300
com
Alarm
D
D
3
8
1
7
1
7
.
e
p
s
modules
Slotted mounting
plate
Plain front plate
Digipact
DC150 data concentrator +
SC150 indication and control
module
4 03571 03804

CLS150, UM100, IM100
(72 x 72 mm cases)
see page A-68
03917.
D
D
3
8
4
0
2
8
.
e
p
s
Installation in the device compartment or the connection compartment.
D
d
3
8
0
8
5
9
.
e
p
s
Data concentrator in a 300 mm wide compartment.
Functional units
Others
A-72
BOOK EN.indb 72 19/10/2011 14:37:32
Vigilohm system Installation in the device compartment.
7 8 9 1
MERLINGERIN
Vigirex RM12
D
d
3
8
1
7
5
4
.
e
p
s
modules
Mounting plate Cut-out front
plate
Vigilohm
XM200 or
XM300C
with 3 XD301
or with 2 XD312
or with XD301
+ XD312
6 03930 03932

XML308/316 or XM300C 4 03931 03933

with two interfaces XLI300
or XTU300
or XAS
or XD308C
03930 + 03932.
D
d
3
8
1
6
9
8
.
e
p
s
XML308/316 or
XM300C
with XL308
or with XL316
4 03931 03933

03931 + 03933.
Vigilohm
A
60
40
10
0
D
d
3
8
1
6
9
9
.
e
p
s
03934.
modules
plate
Vigilohm
TR22A/AH (1 TR + 6 measurement
devices, 72 x 72 mm)
4 03934

EM9, TR5A, SM21 (modular devices) 3 03401 03203

Vigirex
modules
plate
MERLIN GERIN
Vigirex
RH10M
Reset on
fault
Test
Test no trip
D
d
3
8
1
7
2
0
.
e
p
s
Vigirex
RH10/RH21/RH99 relays
Modular device 3 03401 03203

72 x 72 mm cases see page A-68
RHU relay (72 x 72 mm cases) see page A-68
RMH relay and RM12T multiplexer
RMH (modular devices) 3 03401 03203

RM12T (72 x 72 mm cases) see page A-68
Functional units
Others
A-73
BOOK EN.indb 73 19/10/2011 14:37:33
Multi 9 or Acti 9 type modular
devices
modules
plate
A
2 3 5 4
A
2 3 5 4
D
d
3
8
1
7
2
2
.
e
p
s
Multi 9 or Acti 9 measurement device
Lamps, pushbuttons, etc. 2 03401 03202

Ammeter, voltmeter, etc. 3 03401 03203

Device behind transparent front
plate
500 mm wide transparent front plate
Transparent front plate, 4 modules, H = 200 mm 03342

D
d
3
8
3
6
4
3
.
e
p
s



Functional units
Others
A-74
BOOK EN.indb 74 19/10/2011 14:37:33
Cable running
D
D
3
8
4
6
3
0
.
e
p
s
Cable trunking for doors, W = 2000 mm 04233
Flexible trunking for wiring to door 04235
Terminal block for auxiliaries 04228
10 grommets for wiring through front 04234
D
d
3
8
1
6
4
1
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
3
7
2
.
e
p
s
Auxiliary wiring on partial door with cut-outs. Trunking for a door. Flexible trunking to protect and guide wires.
D
D
3
8
1
6
4
4
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
3
6
5
3
.
e
p
s
Terminal block for auxiliaries. Grommets.
Four-pole auxiliary bus duct
A duct for four conductors, 1755 mm long, for the distribution of auxiliary voltages
from the power and regulation devices to the automatic relay, control and indication
systems.
Composition
b Insulating duct.
b Four brass conductors offering 166 tap-off points per linear meter via 6.35 mm tab
terminals.
b Two clamps for mounting on cable-tie supports.
b One lateral clamp.
Characteristics
b Rated insulation level: Ui = 660 V.
b Rated operational current (40 C): 32 A.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
6
0
2
.
e
p
s
Four-pole auxiliary bus duct 04203
Functional units
Others
A-75
400E21080.indd 75 21/10/2011 10:35:37
A-76
Functional units
Device compartment, W = 650 mm
D
D
3
8
1
5
8
3
.
e
p
s
500 mm wide plain front plate Cat. no.
1 module (H = 50 mm) 03801
2 modules (H = 100 mm) 03802
3 modules (H = 150 mm) 03803
4 modules (H = 200 mm) 03804
5 modules (H = 250 mm) 03805
6 modules (H = 300 mm) 03806
9 modules (H = 450 mm) 03807
12 modules (H = 600 mm) 03808
D
D
3
8
1
5
8
2
.
e
p
s
500 mm wide transparent front plate Cat. no.
4 modules (H = 200 mm) 03342
6 modules (H = 300 mm) 03343
9 modules (H = 450 mm) 03344
12 modules (H = 600 mm) 03345
D
d
3
8
3
1
2
1
.
e
p
s
500 mm wide vertical modulair front plate Cat. no.
9 modules (H = 450 mm) 03228
12 modules (H = 600 mm) 03229
Lateral compartment W = 400 mm
D
D
3
8
1
5
8
4
.
e
p
s
250 mm wide plain front plate Cat. no.
1 module (H = 50 mm) 03811
2 modules (H = 100 mm) 03812
3 modules (H = 150 mm) 03813
4 modules (H = 200 mm) 03814
5 modules (H = 250 mm) 03815
6 modules (H = 300 mm) 03816
9 modules (H = 450 mm) 03817
D
D
3
8
1
5
8
5
.
e
p
s
250 mm wide transparent front plate Cat. no.
4 modules (H = 200 mm) 03352
6 modules (H = 300 mm) 03353
9 modules (H = 450 mm) 03354
Reserve space
Others
BOOK EN.indb 76 19/10/2011 14:37:35
A-77
Clip-nuts for slotted mounting
plates
These nuts are used to install various devices (contactors, transformers) on a slotted
mounting plate.
They can also be installed on the cable-tie supports in enclosures and cubicles, as
well as on the universal lateral and longitudinal cross-members in cubicles.
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
2
.
e
p
s
20 clip-nuts for slotted mounting plates
M4 03180
M5 03181
M6 03182
Clip-nuts for modular rails
These nuts are used to install various devices on a modular rail.
20 clip-nuts for modular rails
D
d
3
8
1
3
1
3
.
e
p
s
M4 03164
M5 03165
M6 03166
Clip-nuts for lateral and
longitudinal cross-members
These nuts can be installed on the universal lateral and longitudinal cross-members
in cubicles, as well as on the functional uprights in IP30/55 wall-mounted and
foorstanding enclosures.
D
d
3
8
1
6
1
2
.
e
p
s
20 M6 captive nuts 03194
Pratic raiser
Colour RAL 9001.
The raiser clips onto a slotted mounting plate or a modular rail.
It is 27 mm wide and serves to raise a device 10 mm.
It is made of an insulating material and can directly receive terminal blocks, modular
devices, etc.
D
D
3
8
1
5
7
6
.
e
p
s
5 Pratic raisers 04224
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
4
.
e
p
s
Fixing accessories
Functional units
Others
BOOK EN.indb 77 19/10/2011 14:37:36
A-78
Hexagonal spacers
M5 hexagonal spacers
4 spacers H = 9 mm 03185
H = 23 mm 03186
H = 55 mm 03187
4 spacers H = 9 mm 03195
H = 23 mm 03196
H = 25 mm 03198
H = 55 mm 03197
4 spacers H = 40 + 10 mm 03199
D
d
3
8
0
8
2
8
.
e
p
s
Universal angle brackets
The angle brackets are used to install terminal blocks, trunking, etc.
D
D
3
8
1
5
1
3
.
e
p
s
4 angle brackets + screws 03580
2 universal angle brackets 03581
6 universal inserts System P 03582
D
D
3
8
3
6
5
7
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
1
5
7
7
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
2
9
2
0
.
e
p
s
03580 03581 03582
Installation of a terminal block in a cubicle.
D
D
3
8
3
0
7
8
.
e
p
s
03583
Fixing accessories
Functional units
Others
BOOK EN.indb 78 19/10/2011 14:37:37
A-79
System G adapter
Functional units
System G adapter
Kit with four lateral and two longitudinal cross-members that can be depth adjusted.
It is used to install System G components, notably the functional mounting plates,
the Powerclip insulated busbars and the 400 A rear busbars.
It is the means to enhance the fexibility of the Prisma Plus system.
It is available in two widths:
b 500 mm wide (for installation in a device compartment W = 650 mm)
b 250 mm wide (for installation in a device compartment W = 400 mm).
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
6
0
3
.
e
p
s
System G adapter, W= 500 03595
System G adapter, W= 250 03596
Note: the adapter 03595 can be used for all mounting plates, except 03030.
D
d
3
8
3
5
9
1
.
e
p
s
NSX250 circuit breaker installed with a Polybloc distribution
block.
The Powerclip busbars can be positioned to the left, middle or right of the modular row.
Depth adjustable, the busbars can be supplied by an Interpact INS switch-disconnector or a
fxed/withdrawable Compact NSX circuit breaker, whatever the type of operating system (toggle,
rotary handle, motor mechanism).
For Powerclip busbars, order two adapters (03595 x 2).
Others
BOOK EN.indb 79 19/10/2011 14:37:37
A-80
Other devices
Mounting on lateral and longitudinal
cross-members
Functional units
Universal cross-members
Longitudinal cross-members
Set of two longitudinal cross-members, W = 650 mm.
They are connected directly to the framework (W = 650 mm or 800 mm (650 +
150 mm).
They can also be mounted on the lateral cross-members (see opposite).
They are essentially used to position and support the cables of an incoming device
or to install all types of devices.
Lateral cross-members
They are connected directly to the framework.
They offer numerous positioning holes and can be used to adjust the depth of
longitudinal cross-members.
There are two lengths:
b Set of two lateral cross-members, W = 400 mm for frameworks that are 400 mm
deep
b Set of two lateral cross-members, W = 200 mm, can be added to the 400 mm
crossmembers for frameworks that are 600 mm deep. They can also be installed
separately.
Cat. no. selection
D
d
3
8
1
1
7
3
.
e
p
s
Longitudinal cross-members attached directly
to the framework.
D
d
3
8
1
3
1
6
.
e
p
s
Set of two lateral
cross-members
W = 400 mm 03584
W = 200 mm 03586
Set of two longitudinal
cross-members
W = 650 mm 03587
Longitudinal cross-members mounted on lateral
cross-members, W = 400 mm.
D
d
3
8
1
5
8
0
.
e
p
s
Creation of a platform with two lateral and two longitudinal
cross-members.
D
D
3
8
1
5
8
1
.
e
p
s
Set of two lateral cross-members, W = 200 mm.
Others
400E00135.indd 80 20/10/2011 10:43:51
A-81
Other devices
Mounting on a plain backplate

Functional units
Plain backplate
Metal plain backplate, H = 1780 mm for 36 modules cubicle.
Supplied with four angle brackets and two slide rails to facilitate mounting.
The four angle brackets can be replaced by two sets of two slide rails (03593 x 2) for
depth adjustment.
There are two wides
b 510 mm wide for installation in a device compartment W = 650 mm or W = 800 mm
(650 + 150)
b 660 mm wide for installation for a cubicle W = 800 mm.
Cat. no. selection
D
d
3
8
1
1
7
4
.
e
p
s
Plain backplate, 36 modules 510 mm wide 03570
Plain backplate, 36 modules 660 mm wide 03569
2 slide rails + angle brackets
For the installation and depth adjustment of plain backplates and slotted mounting
plates.
Cat. no. selection
D
d
3
8
1
3
0
9
.
e
p
s
Set of 2 slide rails + angle brackets 03593
Plain backplate mounted on slide rails.
Others
BOOK EN.indb 81 19/10/2011 14:37:39
A-82
Functional units
Slotted mounting plates + 4 lateral
cross-members
Galvanised, slotted metal mounting plate, supplied with four lateral cross-members.
Installation
b either in the device zone on the four lateral cross-members (depth adjustment is
possible)
b or vertically at the rear of a cable compartment, W = 300 mm (03571) or
W = 400 mm (03572).
In this case, use four universal angle brackets.
Cat. no. selection
D
d
3
8
1
1
7
5
.
e
p
s
Slotted mounting plate + 4 lateral cross-members
H = 200 mm (4 modules) 03571
H = 300 mm (6 modules) 03572
Slotted mounting plate in the device compartment.
D
d
3
8
1
4
2
7
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
1
7
6
.
e
p
s
Useful dimensions of the mounting plate
Cat. number H (mm) W (mm)
03571 180 480
03572 280 480
Slotted mounting plate, H = 200 mm, installed vertically in a
cable compartment, W = 300 mm, using four universal angle
brackets. The height occupied is 600 mm (12 modules).
Slotted mounting plate without
lateral cross-members
Galvanised metal, slotted mounting plate, H = 600 mm.
Supplied with four angle brackets, they connect directly to the rear of a framework,
W = 650 mm or 800 mm (650 + 150 mm).
The mounting plate can also be installed using two sets of two slide rails (03593 x 2)
for depth adjustment.
Cat. no. selection
D
d
3
8
1
1
7
8
.
e
p
s
Slotted mounting plate, H = 600 mm (12 modules) 03574
D
d
3
8
1
1
7
7
.
e
p
s
Slotted mounting plate attached to the rear of the framework.
D
d
3
8
1
1
7
9
.
e
p
s
Useful dimensions of the mounting plate:
H = 580 mm, W = 420 mm.
D
d
3
8
1
3
5
5
.
e
p
s
Slotted mounting plate, H = 600 mm, installed on slide rails
(03593 x 2).
Plain and transparent front plates,
see page A-76.
Other devices
Mounting on a slotted plate
Others
BOOK EN.indb 82 19/10/2011 14:37:40
A-83
Functional units
Modular rails
D
d
3
8
0
5
0
5
.
e
p
s
Modular rail Useful length (mm) Cat. no.
Modular rail 432 03401
Modular rail (adjustable) 432 03402
2 modular rails, with 4 holes,
dia. 6.4 mm, 450 mm between centres
1600 04226
D
d
3
8
1
1
8
0
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
1
8
7
.
e
p
s
Modular device rail (03401). Adjustable modular device rail (03402).
D
d
3
8
1
3
1
0
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
1
8
5
.
e
p
s
Modular device rail (04226). Terminal block in a compartment on a modular device
rail (04226).
Modular rail, W = 650 mm
D
d
3
8
1
1
8
6
.
e
p
s
Modular device rail, W = 650 mm
(supplied with two angle brackets for mounting on the framework)
03590

D
d
3
8
1
3
5
5
.
e
p
s
Plain and transparent front plates, see page A-76.
Other devices
Mounting on a modular rail

Others
BOOK EN.indb 83 19/10/2011 14:37:41
A-84
Switchboard lighting
This system is generally used to illuminate the front of a switchboard.
The kit is made up of:
b a base
b a neon tube
b a front plate with cut-out (1 module)
b a door contact.
Characteristics
b supply voltage: 220/240 V
b power rating: 8 W.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
4
0
9
8
.
e
p
s
Designation No. of modules Cat. no.
Switchboard lighting 1 08964
Installation in a cubicle.
Switchboard portable lamp
Lamp with a magnetic base for installation behind a door or directly on the cubicle
framework.
Supplied without a power cord.
It does not take up any useful space in the switchboard.
D
D
3
8
1
6
7
5
.
e
p
s
Switchboard portable lamp 08965
Characteristics
b supply voltage: 220/240 V
b power rating: 11 W.
Switchboard lighting
Others
Functional units
BOOK EN.indb 84 19/10/2011 14:37:42
Contents
Distribution
B-1
Presentation 20
Functional units A-1
Main distribution B-7
Presentation of Linergy Evolution busbars 630 A to 4000 A B-7
Horizontal/vertical B-7
New horizontal/vertical busbars B-8
Lateral busbars B-10
Presentation of Linergy busbars B-12
Presentation of Copper busbar B-13
Horizontal and lateral busbars B-13
Horizontal busbars up to 1600 A B-14
Linergy Evolution bars B-14
Lateral Linergy busbars up to 3200 A B-18
Lateral busbars up to 4000 A B-20
Rear Linergy busbars up to 1600 A B-23
Linergy accessories B-25
Mounting hardware- Markers B-25
Flat copper bars 5 mm thick B-26
Flat copper bars 10 mm thick B-27
Lateral fat busbars up to 1600 A B-28
Busbars, 5 mm thick B-28
Lateral fat busbars up to 3200 A B-30
Rear fat busbars up to 1600 A B-32
Form 1 electrical switchboards B-34
Covering the supply terminals on the incoming device B-35
Form 2 partitioning B-36
Other partitions B-46
Secondary distribution B-51
400 A rear busbars B-54
Distribloc distribution block B-56
Polybloc distribution block B-58
160/630 A multi-stage distribution block B-60
Multiclip distribution block B-61
Polypact distribution block B-63
Insulated fexible bars B-65
Connection accessories B-66
Cable-tie supports B-66
Busbar accessories B-68
Mounting hardware B-68
Terminal blocks B-70
Spring technology B-70
Screw technology B-71
Accessories B-72
Adjustable earth + neutral terminal blocks B-73
Spring or screw technology B-73
Terminal blocks B-74
Connection B-76
Connector B-76
Cable running B-77
Cable straps B-77
Trunking B-79
Trunking, accessories B-80
Earth bars B-81
Neutral bars B-82
PE conductor B-83
PEN conductor B-84
Enclosures C-1
BOOK EN.indb 1 19/10/2011 14:37:42
B-2
Linergy
Evolution
Putting the latest
technological innovation
in your hands
BOOK EN.indb 2 19/10/2011 14:37:42
B-3
Linergy Evolution
a breakthrough in busbar systems
Schneider Electrics Prisma Plus
TM
is one of the leading
switchboard enclosure systems on the market. Designed for
use with Prisma Plus, the new Linergy Evolution
TM
busbar
system now includes horizontal busbars, for greater electrical
switchboard enclosure performance, reliability, and cost-
effectiveness.
Manufactured using a revolutionary process, patented Linergy
Evolution busbars are unique on the market, taking your
electrical switchboard installations a giant leap into the future.
Safe, reliable,
exible, and
exible with
the highest
level of
performance
Discover how
Linergy Evolution
can place the
next generation
of low-voltage
switchboards in
your hands.
400E22600.indd 3 27/10/2011 08:53:20
B-4
from an energy expert you can trust
Innovative technology
Patented Linergy Evolution is backed by Schneider Electrics decades of
expertise in electrical distribution systems and is certified IEC61439-2
compliant by ASEFA.
High Velocity Oxy-Fuel, unique
on the busbar market
Patented Linergy Evolution uses a supersonic
high-temperature coating process for a robust
copper contact surface.
Linergy Evolutions unique profle
was designed with the ratings you need, a
commitment to performance backed by regular
testing up to 4000 A.
Heat is dissipated by conduction
and radiation for performance only a market
leader like Prisma Plus can bring you.
Linergy Evolution busbars
performances and conductivity are
identical or better than traditional all-copper
busbars.
Unlike tin-plated aluminum
busbars, rugged Linergy Evolution busbars
are resistant to scratching during assembly to
ensure optimal connection quality and reliability.
400E22600.indd 4 20/10/2011 15:43:08
B-5
The Linergy Evolution line now includes horizontal busbars, helping you achieve
better electrical switchboard performance while optimizing busbar layout and
facilitating assembly.
A revolutionary design
for greater efficiency
Reduce costs
and assembly
times over
copper busbars
Increase short-circuit
withstand capacity
from 85 kA/1s
to 100 kA/1s
Boost Prisma Plus
capacity
from 3200 A
to 4000 A
Linergy Evolution is
50 % lighter
than copper
Schneider Electric
TM
has drawn upon 30 years of
expertise in electrical distribution systems and a
decade of hands-on experience with the proven
and reliable Linergy line of products. It brings
you a revolutionary design featuring a high-
quality copper contact surface that delivers even
better results than traditional copper-to-copper
connections.
Linergy Evolution busbars offer a number of
benets to help you enhance performance and
boost your competitiveness.
Attractive
The revolutionary copper contact strips, anodized
aluminum surface, and unique shapes give
a modern appearance and a soft touch.
IEC standards-
compliant
The latest standards were factored in from the
early design stages to ensure that temperatures
are kept below the IEC61439-2 standard
requirements, for optimal performance regardless
of the switchboard conguration.
Environmentally-
friendly
Instead of increasingly-scarce copper, Linergy
Evolution is made from 70 % recycled raw
materials offering the same performance as
primary raw materials.
Cost-effective
Linergy Evolution helps you achieve cost
savings now and provides protection against
uctuating copper prices in the future, plus all
the advantages of a raw material that is easy to
purchase and store.
Lightweight
Linergy is half the weight of equivalent-rated
copper bars for more fuel-efcient transport,
easier handling, and smoother installation.
Higher-capacity
A single Linergy Evolution bar can withstand
ratings up to 4000 A. It would take two or three
copper bars per pole to achieve similar ratings.
Robust and flexible
Linergy Evolution bars are extruded for a unique
prole that includes both closed and ribbed
sections, improving rigidity, thermal dissipation,
and resistance to short circuits, with a short-
circuit withstand capacity (lcw) of 100 kA/1s.
BOOK EN.indb 5 19/10/2011 14:37:52
B-6
Linergy accessories are also
evolving!
Linergy Evolution is a full-featured busbar system that
includes all the connections, screws, bolts, isolating supports,
and other accessories you need for drill-free assembly.
Panel builders, weve thought of
everything to make your life easier!
Linergy Evolution busbars are lightweight,
making them easy to transport and handle in
the workshop.
With Linergy Evolution, you can continue to use
the familiar Prisma Plus busbar supports you
already know for flat copper bars. Theres no
new system to learn.
Linergy Evolution offers single bars for each
rating, making handling during installation faster
and more convenient.
Linergy Evolution bars are fast and easy to
position without drilling, thanks to a sliding bolt
and track system.
Linergy screws let you add extra outgoing
connections without drilling new holes or
dismounting previous connections or busbar
supports, saving you time and giving you
greater flexibility in the event of last-minute
changes.
Linergy Evolution busbars offer a unique
shape with no sharp edges for safer, smoother
handling and installationthe bars simply slide
right in to the busbar supports.
Existing Linergy vertical busbars are easy to
connect to Linergy Evolution with ready-to-
install accessories like vertical connectors.
Linergy materials are easy to recycle via
well-established aluminum recycling services
already in use for materials like aluminum cans,
coffee capsules, door and window frames, and
engine blocks.
400E22600.indd 6 20/10/2011 09:42:02
B-7
Presentation of Linergy
Evolution busbars 630 A to
4000 A
Horizontal/vertical
Distribution
1.0
H
C
F
G
H
H
C
F
G
H
H
C
F
G
H
H
C
F
G
H
H
C
F
G
H
H
C
F
G
H
H
C
F
G
H
H
C
F
G
H
H
C
F
G
H
The Linergy solution, a complete set of horizontal and vertical busbars
operational up to 4000 A:
b 630 A to 4000 A
b Icw of 85 kA/1 s for the 630 A to 1600 A confgurations
b Icw of 100 kA/1 s for the 2500 A to 4000 A confgurations.
More power in a given switchboard volume.
No longer any need to drill, thanks to the Linergy concept, greater accessibility
for connecting bars, ties and connecting plates.
Winning solution in all the Linergy Evolution options chosen, allows the
panelbuilder to:
b achieve substantial time savings (procurement, handling, mounting,
accessibility, changes, etc.) thanks to the aluminium material and the busbar
design and connection
b supply more effcient, less heavy switchboards without risk of vandalism on
the copper.
Complete compatibility of Linergy Evolution with existing 630 to 1600 A Linergy
vertical busbar.
Replacement of high/low horizontal copper busbar with Linergy Evolution up to
4000 A.
Re-use of the existing 1000 to 1600 A Linergy and double Linergy busbars up to
3200 A or replacement with vertical 2000 to 4000 A Linergy Evolution.
Linergy Evolution + Linergy, a comprehensive offering
Light
Economical
Simplifcation
Time saving
Direct connection
Unchanged
fasteners
Mounting
compatibility
Multiple
adaptations
Connection
modularity
Easier access
Main distribution
N
E
W
P
D
3
8
4
6
2
3
.
e
p
s
400E22610.indd 7 20/10/2011 16:30:54
B-8
Presentation of Linergy
Evolution busbars 630 A to
4000 A
New horizontal/vertical busbar
Distribution
The Linergy Evolution solution is based on:
b the Linergy y 1600 A busbar concept (approved
technology, trusted by industry specialists)
b the already existing fat busbar mounting method
(th. = 5 mm and 10 mm).
Presentation Linergy Evolution profles
D
D
3
8
4
5
3
6
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
3
7
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
3
8
.
e
p
s
630 A. 800 A. 1000 A.
D
D
3
8
4
5
3
9
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
4
0
.
e
p
s
1200 A. 1600 A.
D
D
3
8
4
5
4
1
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
4
2
.
e
p
s
2000 A. 2500 A.
D
D
3
8
4
5
4
3
.
e
p
s
3200 A.
D
D
3
8
4
5
4
4
.
e
p
s
4000 A.
Main distribution
BOOK EN.indb 8 19/10/2011 14:38:50
B-9
Horizontal busbars from 630 to 4000 A
Installation
The Linergy Evolution busbar can be installed either at
the top or the bottom of a frame.
b Size for 630 to 2500 A: 150 mm.
b Size for 3200 to 4000 A: 200 mm.
The mounting technique is the same as that for the
copper busbar, sparing the installer any constraints.
Busbar type
b Horizontal busbar:
v Functionalized profled busbar L = 2000 mm
v for 630 to 2500 A busbars, a single strip is
incorporated over the entire length
v for 3200 to 4000 A busbars, a double strip is
incorporated over the entire length.
H
C
F
G
H
H
C
F
G
H
H
C
F
G
H
D
d
3
8
4
5
1
8
.
E
P
S
Vertical busbars from 2000 to 4000 A
Flexibility for upgrading existing switchboards
It is possible to mount the Linergy Evolution busbar
vertically for all ratings from 2000 to 4000 A.
Busbar type
b Vertical busbar:
v functionalized profled busbar L = 2000 mm to be
re-cut to 1675 mm for connection with horizontal
busbar from 1600 to 2500 A. Installation in duct
W = 150 mm
v functionalized profled busbar L = 2000 mm to be
re-cut to 1620 mm for connection with horizontal
busbar from 3200 to 4000 A.Installation in duct
W = 300 mm
v for 2000 to 2500 A busbars, a single strip is
incorporated over the entire height
v for 3200 to 4000 A busbars, a double strip is
incorporated over the entire height.
NB: this busbar does not allow the use of Prisma Plus
system prefabricated connections.
D
D
3
8
4
5
5
5
.
E
P
S
BOOK EN.indb 9 19/10/2011 14:39:01
B-10
Presentation of Linergy busbars
630 A to 3200 A
Lateral busbars
P
D
3
9
1
3
0
5
_
S
E
.
e
p
s
Linergy busbars are installed in a busbar zone to the left or right of the device zone.
The busbars are secured to the framework by supports that maintain the distances
between busbars. All connection points are directly accessible from the front of the
switchboard.
The bars are channelled and the devices, installed on either side, can be connected
at any height, without drilling.
Linergy busbars up to 1600 A
P
D
3
9
0
4
0
2
R
.
e
p
s
P
D
3
9
0
4
0
3
R
.
e
p
s
Sliding bolts enable connections at any height,
without drilling.
All connection points are directly accessible
from the front of the switchboard.
P
D
3
9
1
3
0
6
.
e
p
s
P
D
3
9
0
4
0
5
R
.
e
p
s
Prefabricated connections supply the devices
mounted to the left or right of the busbars.
The bottom support maintains the bars in
position.
Distribution
Main distribution
BOOK EN.indb 10 19/10/2011 14:39:03
B-11
P
D
3
9
0
5
6
8
R
.
e
p
s
Channelled busbars
Linergy channelled busbars implement advanced technology and are made of
aluminium, a material widely used for electrical conduction.
Ductile and malleable, aluminium can be used to create complex shapes that
improve electrical conduction, rigidity, ventilation and appearance.
Ergonomic shape
The low density of aluminium and its malleability make it possible to produce
hightech sections offering both exceptional rigidity and minimum weight.
Twice as light as copper for the same current ratings, the busbars can held easily in
one. What is more, their shape is ideal for handling and installation.
Maximum power in less space
The manufacturing process allows great fexibility in terms of the shape, notably for
the creation of internal partitions that increase the current-fow perimeter. In this way,
busbar effciency is optimised and external dimensions reduced.
As a result, up to 1600 A, these channelled busbars can be installed in
compartments just 150 mm wide and 400 mm deep.
Very rigid shapes
The ease and fexibility of the extrusion process makes it possible to create closed
and ribbed sections offering exceptional rigidity.
Two supports spaced over the bars and one at the bottom are suffcient to cover
most installation needs (Icw y 40 kA rms / 1 s).
Always at the right temperature
The increased heat exchange surface enhances the natural convection of the bars.
The bars are anodised to enhance emission and radiation, and thus the evacuation
of heat.
Whatever the switchboard confguration, the bars maintain their performance level.
A new generation of busbars.
P
D
3
9
0
4
1
3
R
.
e
p
s
Designed to resist ageing and creep, the busbar supports, made of a heat-setting,
insulating material, offer a particularly high level of performance, notably their
withstand to high temperatures.
Their remarkable mechanical withstand means fewer are required, thus freeing
maximum space along the busbars for the connection of devices.
Multi-function busbar supports
The same support is used for all busbars up to 1600 A and can also be used as the
bottom support.
As a result, ordering is easy and stocking costs are reduced.
P
D
3
8
4
6
2
3
.
e
p
s
Electrical connections without drilling
Tested in special test stations, copper connections are used to interconnect two sets
of busbars.
Connections are fast with 10 mm thick horizontal busbars.
Drilling is not required; the connections are made by clamping the busbars.
P
D
3
9
0
4
1
5
R
.
e
p
s
An aluminium bar with a high-quality copper contact surface
A copper powder is thermally projected at high speed along the entire length of the
bar. It forms a rough, exceptionally hard surface. The quality of the electrical
connection is enhanced by the many contact points. The result is convincing and
even better than a traditional copper/copper connection.
Modern busbars
Linergy busbars are produced in a number of different shapes offering both a high
level of performance and good appearance. The anodisation process protects
against ageing and provides an attractive fnish.. The copper-coloured bands along
the entire length refect the modern design and high technology of these busbars.
400E22610.indd 11 20/10/2011 16:33:50
B-12
Presentation of Linergy busbars
Distribution
Linergy busbars
up to 1600 A
D
d
3
8
2
3
2
6
.
e
p
s
Type of busbar
Very rigid profle to improve withstand to
electrodynamic forces.
Connection points accessible from the front and
adjustable from top to bottom.
Compatible with all Prisma Plus prefabricated
connections.
Installation
Can be installed independently on either the left or
right-hand side of an 800 mm wide framework (650 +
150 mm) for distribution on either side.
For an Icw y 40 kA rms / 1 s, two supports in the
device zone are suffcient to maintain the bars. A third
support is required as the bottom support for the bars.
Linergy busbars up to 1600 A.
Linergy busbars
up to 3200 A
D
D
3
8
2
3
2
7
R
.
e
p
s
Installation
Two sets of busbars are installed in parallel in two
adjacent frameworks, each 800 mm wide
(650 + 150 mm). They must be interconnected by three
equipotential links. Generally speaking, these links are
provided by:
b the horizontal busbars
b connections in the middle and at the bottom of the
vertical busbars.
Linergy busbars up to 3200 A.
Horizontal-busbar connections
D
D
3
8
2
5
7
6
.
e
p
s
Note: equipotential connection must be made.
Main distribution
BOOK EN.indb 12 19/10/2011 14:39:06
B-13
Presentation of Copper busbar
Horizontal and lateral busbars
Distribution
Horizontal busbars up to 3200 A
v Horizontal and lateral busbars up to 3200 A require
the same amount of space.
b horizontal busbars
v fat copper bars without holes, W = 2000 mm,
5 mm thick
v fat copper bars without holes, W = 2000 mm,
10 mm thick
b lateral busbars
v fat copper bars with holes, W = 1675 mm,
5 mm thick
v fat copper bars with holes, W = 1675 mm,
10 mm thick
D
d
3
8
3
7
2
8
.
E
P
S
Horizontal copper busbar for switchboards up to 3200 A. Adapts to all Linergy 1600 A profles
and also to the lateral Linergy Evolution busbar.
Lateral busbars up to 3200 A
Type of busbar
Flat copper busbars with holes, 5 mm thick
(up to 1600 A).
Flat copper busbars with holes, 10 mm thick
(up to 2500 A).
Two 10 mm holes every 25 mm along the entire length
of the busbars.
Prisma Plus prefabricated connections cannot be used
with these busbars.
Installation
Can be installed independently on either the left or
right-hand side of an 800 mm wide framework for
distribution on either side.
Three fxed supports (04661) are mandatory. When
more than three supports are required (see the tables
for busbar calculations on the following pages), use
free supports (04662).
Busbars are positioned on the bottom support (04663).
D
d
3
8
3
7
0
9
.
E
P
S
Lateral copper busbar for switchboards up to 3200 A. Adapts to all profles of the horizontal
Linergy Evolution busbar.
Main distribution
BOOK EN.indb 13 19/10/2011 14:39:07
B-14
Horizontal busbars
up to 1600 A
Linergy Evolution bars
Distribution
Main distribution
Busbar calculation
Linergy
Evolution
busbar
Cat. No. Rating
(A)
No. of supports
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
The table opposite indicates:
b the catalogue numbers of the bars to be used,
depending on the permissible current level in the
busbars
b the number of supports required, depending on the
rated short-time withstand current (Icw in kA rms / 1
second).
For more information on other ambient temperatures,
see page D-24.
For more information on busbar calculations,
see page D-26.
y 15 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85 y 100
W = 650 mm
W = 650 +
150 mm
04560
04561
630/800
04562 1000
04563 1250 2
04564 1600
3
Note: t he permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of
35 C around the switchboard.
Note: for a W = 800 mm framework, add a free support to the number of fxed supports given by
the table below.
Busbar selection
Linergy Evolution busbars, W = 2000 mm
Cat. no. selection
See the table below.
Each bar is supplied with a stop for the bottom support.
D
D
3
8
4
5
2
0
.
E
P
S
D
D
3
8
4
5
3
6
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
3
7
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
3
8
.
e
p
s
Bar 630 A.
Cat. No. 04560
Bar 800 A.
Cat. No. 04561
Bar 1000 A.
Cat. No. 04562
D
D
3
8
4
5
3
9
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
4
0
.
e
p
s
Bar 1250 A.
Cat. No. 04563
Bar 1600 A.
Cat. No. 04564
Dimensions
Cat. No.
04560
04561
04562
04563
04564
60
23
D
D
3
8
4
6
3
1
.
e
p
s
400E22630.indd 14 07/11/2011 15:49:12
B-15
Horizontal busbars
up to 1600 A
Distribution
Main distribution
D
d
3
8
1
2
2
6
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
2
2
5
.
e
p
s
Busbar supports
Two fxed supports for 650 mm, 650 + 150 mm wide frameworks and one fxed
support for 300/400 mm wide frameworks are mandatory. If more supports are
required, use free supports.
Cat. No.
04664. 04662. Fixed support for horizontal bars 04664
Free support (additional) 04662
D
D
3
8
4
5
3
5
.
E
P
S
Designation Cat. No.
1 joint per bar from 630 to 1600 A 3P 04620 x 3
4P 04620 x 4 + 04624
(1)
(1) 04624 is mandatory in case of jointed 4P Linergy evolution busbars installations and must be
installed only at the junction on side-by-side frameworks combination.
Note: when installed,at the bottom of cubicles, the busbars must be partitioned, see page B-38.
04620.
D
D
3
8
4
6
1
5
.
e
p
s
04624.
Busbar dimensions Type of busbars No. of vertical modules required
Top or bottom horizontal busbars 3
m
D
D
3
8
4
5
3
4
.
E
P
S
BOOK EN.indb 15 19/10/2011 14:39:10
B-16
Horizontal busbars
up to 4000 A
Distribution
Main distribution
Busbar calculation
Linergy
Evolution
busbar
Cat. No. Rating
(A)
No. of supports
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
busbars
second).
see page D-26.
y 15 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85 y 100
W = 650 mm
W = 650 +
150 mm
04565 2000
2 3
04566 2500
4
04567 3200
04568 4000
Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of
the table below.
Busbar selection
D
D
3
8
4
5
3
3
.
E
P
S
D
D
3
8
4
5
4
1
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
4
2
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
4
3
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
4
4
.
e
p
s
Bar 2000 A.
Cat. No. 04565
Bar 2500 A.
Cat. No. 04566
Bar 3200 A.
Cat. No. 04567
Bar 4000 A.
Cat. No. 04568
Dimensions
Cat. No.
04565
04566
100
31
D
D
3
8
4
6
3
2
.
e
p
s
04567
04568
31
150
D
D
3
8
4
6
3
3
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
2
2
6
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
2
2
5
.
e
p
s
Busbar supports
04664. 04662. Fixed support for horizontal bars 2500 A 04664 + 04671
3200 A 04664 + 04646
Free support (additional) 2500 A 04662 + 04671
3200 A 04662 + 04646
12 spacers 150 mm 3200 - 4000 A 04646
400E22630.indd 16 07/11/2011 15:48:54
B-17
Horizontal busbars
up to 4000 A
Distribution
Main distribution
D
D
3
8
4
5
8
8
.
E
P
S
Joints
1 joint per bar 3P 2000 - 2500 A 04621 x 3
3200 - 4000 A 04623 x 3
4P 2000 - 2500 A 04621 x 4 + 04624
(1)
3200 - 4000 A 04623 x 4 + 04624
(1)
(1) 04624 is mandatory in case of jointed 4P Linergy Evolution busbars installations and must be
installed only at the junction on side-by-side frameworks combination.
04623.
D
D
3
8
4
6
1
4
.
e
p
s
04624.
Busbar dimensions Type of busbars No. of vertical modules required
Top or bottom horizontal busbars y 2500 A 3
Top or bottom horizontal busbars u 3200 A 4
m
D
D
3
8
4
5
5
8
.
E
P
S
BOOK EN.indb 17 19/10/2011 14:39:13
B-18
Lateral Linergy busbars up to
3200 A
Distribution
Busbar calculation
Linergy
busbars
Cat. no. Permissible
current
at 35 C
for switchboard
No. of supports
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
busbars
second).
Above 1600 A, the busbars must be doubled and
installed in two busbar sections, side by side. In this
case, they must be interconnected by three
equipotential links.
see page D-27.
IP y 31 IP > 31 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85
Linergy 630 04502 680 590
Linergy 800 04503 840 760
Linergy 1000 04504 1040 950 3
Linergy 1250 04505 1290 1170
4 5
Linergy 1600 04506 1650 1480
7 8
Double busbars
Linergy 2000 04504 x 2 2000 1820
Linergy 2500 04505 x 2 2500 2260 2 x 3 2 x 4 2 x 5
Linergy 3200 04506 x 2 3200 2920
Note: The permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of
The bottom support also maintains the bars in position.
Each catalogue number represents one bar.
Busbar selection
Linergy busbars, W = 1670 mm
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
2
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
3
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
4
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
5
.
e
p
s
Bar 630 A.
Cat. no. 04502
Bar 800 A.
Cat. no. 04503
Bar 1000 A.
Cat. no. 04504
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
6
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
7
.
e
p
s
Bar 1250 A.
Cat. no. 04505
Bar 1600 A.
Cat. no. 04506
Note: in a combined arrangement with the Linergy Evolution 3200 A and 4000 A horizontal
busbars, re-cutting of the bar to 1620 mm is recommended.
Busbars up to 1600 A.
Main distribution
BOOK EN.indb 18 19/10/2011 14:39:14
B-19
Lateral Linergy busbars up to
3200 A
Distribution
D
D
3
8
1
5
0
9
.
e
p
s
Busbar supports
Supports are used to install busbars to the left or right of the device zone.
They are supplied with 8.8 class mounting hardware.
Busbar supports 04651
12 chocks for Linergy busbars 01109
D
D
3
8
0
7
4
1
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
7
4
2
.
e
p
s
Double busbars up to 3200 A.
Install three equipotential links between the busbars. Busbar supports. Each bar is supplied with a stop for
installation on the bottom support.
Horizontal Linergy Evolution
busbar connections
These connections are used to connect Linergy Evolution horizontal busbars to
lateral Linergy busbars up to 1600 A.
Supplied with mounting hardware.
D
D
3
8
4
5
5
7
.
E
P
S
Cat. No.
1600 A connection plate for Linergy Evolution 04602
1600 A shifted connection plate for Linergy Evolution
(1)
04603
(1) To be used when using horizontal connection in 150 mm duct.
Connection 04602 for Linergy or copper busbars.
D
D
3
8
4
5
5
6
.
E
P
S
Dedicated connection 04603 for Linergy busbar in 150 mm
duct with horizontal jointing.
Horizontal copper busbar
connections
These connections are used to connect horizontal copper busbars, 5 or 10 mm thick,
to lateral Linergy busbars.
D
d
3
8
1
2
3
9
.
e
p
s
Connection to horizontal copper busbars, 5 mm thick
1000 A connection 04634
(1)
(1)
width of horizontal bars y 80 mm 04636
(1)
width or horizontal bars > 80 mm 04636
(1)
+ 04642
(1) Catalogue numbers 04634, 04635 and 04636 include 1 connection only. Order 1 connection
per phase.
Connection 04635 to horizontal copper busbars, 5 mm thick.
D
D
3
8
1
2
4
0
.
e
p
s
Connection 04636 to horizontal copper busbars, 10 mm thick.
Main distribution

BOOK EN.indb 19 19/10/2011 14:39:16
B-20
3200-4000 A in 300 mm width framework
Distribution
Busbar calculation
Linergy
Evolution
busbar
Cat. No. Rating
(A)
No. of supports
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
busbars
second).
see page D-27.
y 15 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85 y 100
W = 300 mm 04560
04561
630/800
04562 1000
04563 1250
04564 1600
5
7
04565 2000 3
04566 2500
9
04567 3200
04568 4000
Note: the heights of 2000 and 2500 A Linergy evolution channelled busbars are 100 mm and
those of 3200 and 4000 A 150 mm. Their installation in 300 mm widht duct is recommended.
Busbar selection
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
4
6
0
7
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
5
0
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
5
1
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
5
2
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
5
3
.
e
p
s
Bar 2000 A.
Cat. no. 04565
Bar 2500 A.
Cat. no. 04566
Bar 3200 A.
Cat. no. 04567
Bar 4000 A.
Cat. no. 04568
D
D
3
8
4
5
4
5
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
4
6
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
4
7
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
4
8
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
4
9
.
e
p
s
Bar 630 A.
Cat. no. 04560
Bar 800 A.
Cat. no. 04561
Bar 1000 A.
Cat. no. 04562
Bar 1250 A.
Cat. no. 04563
Bar 1600 A.
Cat. no. 04564
Linergy Evolution busbars are supplied in W = 2000 mm. For a lateral installation, the
recommended bar length is 1675 mm.
Dimensions
Cat. No.
04560
04561
04562
04563
04564
60
23
D
D
3
8
4
6
3
1
.
e
p
s
Note: for mounting with the Linergy Evolution horizontal
busbar, it is recommended to re-cut the Linergy Evolution
vertical busbar as indicated below:
Rating horizontal busbars Rating re-cuts
630 to 1600 A 1675 mm
2000 to 2500 A 1675 mm
3200 to 4000 A 1625 mm
04565
04566
100
31
D
D
3
8
4
6
3
2
.
e
p
s
04567
04568
31
150
D
D
3
8
4
6
3
3
.
e
p
s
Main distribution
400E22640.indd 20 08/11/2011 08:36:51
B-21
3200-4000 A in 300 mm width framework
Distribution
Busbar supports
Three fxedsupports are required to maintain the busbars. If more than three
supports are required, use additional free supports.
Fixed support for lateral bars y 1600 A 04661
2000 - 2500 A 04661 + 04671
3200 - 4000 A 04661 + 04646
D
d
3
8
0
8
2
9
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
6
5
0
.
e
p
s
Busbar supports
04661.
Each bar is supplied with a stop for
installation on the bottom support 04662.
Busbars chocks
The bottom support maintains the bars in position.It is not considered a busbar
support.
D
D
3
8
4
5
7
7
.
E
P
S
12 spacers for 150 mm busbar 04646
12 stops for 630-1600 A busbar 04658
12 stops for 2000-4000 A busbar 04659
Bottom support for lateral vertical 5/10mm busbars 04663
Support mounting hardware for bars > 80 mm 04671
04658 for Linergy Evolution y 1600 A busbar mounted on
support 04663.
D
D
3
8
4
5
7
6
.
E
P
S
04659 for Linergy Evolution >1600 A busbar mounted on
support 04663.
D
D
3
8
4
5
7
9
.
E
P
S
12 spacers 04646.
Main distribution

400E22640.indd 21 08/11/2011 11:15:30
B-22
Distribution
Main distribution
Busbar connections
D
D
3
8
4
5
5
9
.
E
P
S
These connections are used to connect Linergy Evolution horizontal busbars up to
4000 A to lateral Linergy Evolution busbars.
Short horizontal/vertical connection up to 2500 A 04604
Long horizontal/vertical connection up to 2500 A 04605
Horizontal/vertical connection up to 4000 A 04607
Short connection 04604 for 2500 A.
D
D
3
8
4
5
7
5
.
E
P
S
Long connection 04605 for 2500 A.
400E22640.indd 22 20/10/2011 10:44:59
B-23
Rear Linergy busbars
up to 1600 A
Distribution
Busbar calculation
Linergy
busbars
Cat. no. Permissible
current at 35 C
for switchboard
No. of supports
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
busbars
second).
Busbars are installed in cubicles 650 or 800 mm wide,
whatever the depth.
For more information on other ambient temperatures
and on the depth available for devices, see page D-24.
IP y 31 IP > 31 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50
Linergy 630 04502 680 590
3
Linergy 800 04503 840 760
4
Linergy 1000 04504 1040 950
5
Linergy 1250 04505 1290 1170
7
Linergy 1600 04506 1650 1480
35C around the switchboard.
Each catalogue number represents one bar.
Busbar selection
Linergy busbars, W = 1670 mm
Cat. no. selection
D
d
3
8
1
2
4
1
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
3
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
4
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
5
.
e
p
s
Bar 630 A.
Cat. no. 04502
Bar 800 A.
Cat. no. 04503
Bar 1000 A.
Cat. no. 04504
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
6
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
7
.
e
p
s
Bar 1250 A.
Cat. no. 04505
Bar 1600 A.
Cat. no. 04506
Busbar supports
The bottom support maintains the bars in position.
They are supplied with 8.8 class mounting hardware.
The bottom support also maintains the bars in position. Designation Cat. no.
Busbar supports 04652
D
d
3
8
1
2
4
2
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
2
4
3
.
e
p
s
Busbar supports. Each bar is supplied with a stop for
installation on the bottom support.
Main distribution
BOOK EN.indb 23 19/10/2011 14:39:27
B-24
up to 1600 A
Distribution
busbar connections
These connections are used to connect horizontal Linergy Evolution busbars to
vertical rear Linergy busbars.
D
D
3
8
4
6
1
1
.
E
P
S
Connection to horizontal Linergy Evolution busbars 630 to 4000 A 04602
Connection to horizontal Linergy Evolution busbars y 1600 A.
D
D
3
8
4
6
1
2
.
E
P
S
Connection to horizontal Linergy Evolution busbars > 2000 A.
Horizontal copper busbar
connections
These connections are used to connect horizontal copper busbars, 5 or 10 mm thick,
to vertical rear Linergy busbars.
D
d
3
8
1
2
4
4
.
e
p
s
Connection to horizontal copper busbars, 5 mm thick 04635
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
width of horizontal bars > 80 mm 04636
(2)
+ 04642
(1)
(1) A part of the connection must be made.
(2) Catalogue numbers 04635 and 04636 include 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per
phase.
Connection to horizontal copper busbars, 5 mm thick.
D
d
3
8
1
2
4
5
.
e
p
s
Connection to horizontal copper busbars, 10 mm thick.
Main distribution
BOOK EN.indb 24 19/10/2011 14:39:29
B-25
Linergy accessories
Mounting hardware
Markers
Distribution
Linergy hardware
Presentation
D
D
3
8
1
2
1
8
.
e
p
s
b For secure connections, without drilling:
b Linergy bolts clip into the channel of the busbar
b they can slide along the entire length of the busbar
b they cannot fall to the bottom of the switchboard because they are held in place by
the ball in the head, thus facilitating connections
b a mark at the end of the bolt indicates whether the bolt is correctly positioned
b 8.8 class hardware guarantees withstand to tightening torques and to premature
ageing of the electrical contact.
Composition of sets:
b set of hardware including 20 bolts + 20 nuts + 20 contact washers.
Cat. no. selection
D
d
3
8
1
2
2
1
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
2
2
0
.
e
p
s
Set of 20 M8 Linergy bolts, W = 25 mm (for cable lugs and fexible bars) 04766
(1)
Set of 20 M8 Linergy bolts, W = 39 mm (for copper bars) 04767
(2)
(1) Cable lug connected to Linergy busbar using bolt (04766) (compatible with Linergy Evolution
and Linergy).
(2) Copper bar connected to Linergy busbar using bolt (04767) (compatible with Linergy only).
04766. 04767.
Flat washers
Presentation
These washers, sold separately, are required for connection of fexible bars to
Linergy busbars.
They spread the tightening forces and avoid creep of the copper.
b set of 20 fat washers for M8 bolts.
Cat. no. selection
D
d
3
8
1
2
1
9
.
e
p
s
Set of 20 M8 fat washers, 20 mm external diameter 04772
Conducting washers
Flat washers
For M8 bold and lugs y 25 mm, 20 mm external diameter.
b set of 20 fat washers.
D
d
3
8
3
1
2
2
.
e
p
s
20 fat washers for lugs y 25 mm 04775
Connection cross-section
Determining connections using cables
see page D-48.
Determining connections using fexible bars
see page D-46.
Markers
D
d
3
8
1
2
2
2
.
e
p
s
Set of 12 phase markers
(12 clip-in supports + N, L1, L2, L3, PE, PEN labels)
04794
Linergy Evolution connection screwplate kit 01130
Mounting hardware
400E22230.indd 25 20/10/2011 10:58:07
B-26
Horizontal busbars
up to 1600 A
Flat copper bars 5 mm thick
Distribution
Busbar calculation
The bars are secured by insulated supports attached to
the framework.
The tables opposite indicate:
b the number and size of the bars to be used,
busbars
b the number of busbar supports for each type of
framework, depending on:
v the size of the busbars
v the rated short-time withstand current Icw.
see page D-25.
Number and size of copper busbars
Permissible current (A) No. of bars / phase
IP y 31 IP > 31
800 750 1 bar, 60 x 5
1000 900 1 bar, 80 x 5
1400 1250 2 bars, 60 x 5
1800 1600 2 bars, 80 x 5
35C around the switchboard.
Number of supports
Framework width
(mm)
Size of bars
(mm)
No. of supports
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
y 15 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50
W = 650 mm
W = 650 + 150 mm
1 bar, 60 x 5
1 bar, 80 x 5
2 bars, 60 x 5 2 3
2 bars, 80 x 5
W = 300 mm All sizes 1 2
the table below.
Busbar selection
Flat busbars, W = 2000 mm
D
d
3
8
1
2
2
3
.
e
p
s
Copper bar without holes, 60 x 5 04536
Busbar supports
Fixed support for horizontal bars 04664
D
d
3
8
1
2
2
6
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
2
2
5
.
e
p
s
Icw 30 kA eff / 1 s.
04664. 04662.
Joints
D
d
3
8
1
2
2
7
.
e
p
s
1 joint for bars W = 60 mm 04640
W = 80 mm 04641
04640.
Busbar calculation
D
d
3
8
1
2
2
8
.
e
p
s
Type of busbars No. of vertical modules required
Main distribution
BOOK EN.indb 26 19/10/2011 14:39:32
B-27
Horizontal busbars
up to 3200 A
Flat copper bars 10 mm thick
Distribution
Busbar calculation
Number and size of copper busbars
The bars are secured by insulated supports attached to
the framework.
The tables opposite indicate:
busbars
b the number of busbar supports for each type of
framework, depending on:
v the rated short-time withstand current Icw.
see page D-23.
Permissible current (A) No. of bars / phase
IP y 31 IP > 31
1800 1600 1 bar, 80 x 10
2050 1850 2 bars, 50 x 10
2300 2000 2 bars, 60 x 10
2820 2500 2 bars, 80 x 10
3300 2900 2 bars, 100 x 10
Number of supports
Framework width
(mm)
Size of bars
(mm)
No. of supports
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85
W = 650 mm
W = 650 + 150 mm
1 bar, 80 x 10 4
2 bars, 50 x 10 2 3
2 bars, 60 x 10
2 bars, 80 x 10
2 bars, 100 x 10 2 3
the table below.
Busbar selection
D
d
3
8
1
2
2
9
.
e
p
s
Busbar supports
required, use free support.
Fixed support for horizontal
bars
Width y 80 mm 04664
Width > 80 mm 04664 + 04671
Free support (additional) for
bars
Width y 80 mm 04662
Icw 50 kA eff / 1 s.
Width > 80 mm 04662 + 04671
D
d
3
8
1
2
3
1
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
2
2
6
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
2
2
5
.
e
p
s
04664. 04662.
Joints
1 joint for bars Width 50 and 60 mm 04640
Width 80 and 100 mm 04641
Note: when installed, at the bottom of cubicles, the busbars must be partitioned, see page B-38.
04641.
Busbar calculation
D
d
3
8
1
2
2
8
.
e
p
s
Type of busbars No. of vertical modules required
Main distribution
400E22100.indd 27 20/10/2011 16:26:13
B-28
Lateral flat busbars
up to 1600 A
Busbars 5 mm thick
Distribution
Busbar calculation
The bars are secured by insulated supports. Three
fxed supports, attached to the framework, are
mandatory.
If necessary, additional free supports may be used.
The bars rest on a bottom support.
busbars
b the number of supports required in a cubicle,
depending on the rated short-time withstand current
(Icw).
Permissible current
for switchboards
No. of bars /
phase
No. of supports
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
IP y 31 IP > 31 y 15 y 20 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50
800 750 1 bar, 60 x 5 mm
3
5
1000 900 1 bar, 80 x 5 mm 7
1400 1250 2 bars, 60 x 5 mm
1800 1600 2 bars, 80 x 5 mm
For more information on busbar calculations, see page D-25.
Busbar selection
D
D
3
8
0
7
2
4
.
e
p
s
Copper bar with holes, 60 x 5 mm 04516
D
d
3
8
1
5
0
5
.
e
p
s
Busbar supports
Three fxed supports are required to maintain the busbars. If more than three
Fixed support for lateral fat busbars 04661
D
d
3
8
0
8
2
9
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
6
5
0
.
e
p
s
04661. 04662.
Busbar chocks
It is not considered a busbar support.
Icw 30 kA rms / 1 s.
The bars are secured by three mandatory fxed supports and
two free supports.
Bottom support for lateral fat busbars 04663
D
D
3
8
0
7
2
8
.
e
p
s
Note: When connecting 5 mm fat bars to horizontal busbars, part no. 04663 is not required.
Main distribution
400E22310.indd 28 20/10/2011 11:00:24
B-29
up to 1600 A
Busbars 5 mm thick
Distribution
Direct connection (75 mm between centres)
For busbars with 75 mm between centres, the bars must fully overlap.
D
D
3
8
3
8
4
4
.
e
p
s

D
D
3
8
3
3
9
8
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
3
3
9
9
.
e
p
s
Drilling diagram for horizontal busbars, 5 mm thick.
Prefabricated connection
These connections are used to connect horizontal busbars, 5 mm thick, to lateral
Linergy busbars or fat busbars.
Connection to horizontal busbars, 5 mm thick
To satisfy safety clearances, the assembly points on adjacent
bars must be staggered as shown above.
(1)
(1)
(1) Catalogue numbers 04634, 04635 and 04636 include 1 connection only. Order 1 connection
per phase.
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
9
.
e
p
s

Connection 04635 to horizontal busbars, 5 mm thick.
Main distribution
400E22310.indd 29 20/10/2011 11:00:25
B-30
Distribution
Busbar calculation
mandatory. If necessary, additional free supports may
be used.
busbars
(Icw).
Above 2800 A (2500 A with IP > 31), the busbars must
be doubled and installed in two busbar sections, side
by side. In this case, they must be interconnected by
three equipotential links.
Permissible
current
for switchboards
No. of bars /
phase
No. of supports
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
IP y 31 IP > 31 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85
1200 1080 1 bar, 50 x 10 mm
3
5 7
1400 1250 1 bar, 60 x 10 mm
9
1800 1600 1 bar, 80 x 10 mm
2050 1850 2 bars, 50 x 10 mm
2300 2000 2 bars, 60 x 10 mm
2820 2500 2 bars, 80 x 10 mm
Double busbars
3200 2820 2 x 1 bar, 80 x 10 mm 2 x 3 2 x 5
For more information on busbar calculations, see page D-27.
Busbar selection
D
d
3
8
1
4
9
7
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
5
0
5
.
e
p
s
Busbar supports
Busbars y 1600 A (IP y 31). Designation Cat. no.
Fixed support for lateral fat busbars 04661
D
d
3
8
1
4
9
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
2
9
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
6
5
0
.
e
p
s
04661. 04662.
Busbar chocks
Bottom support for lateral fat busbars 04663
D
D
3
8
1
1
2
4
.
e
p
s
Connection to horizontal busbars, 10 mm thick.
D
d
3
8
1
4
9
9
.
e
p
s
Designation Horizontal
busbars
Vertical
busbars
Cat. no.
Connection between vertical busbars
(1 bar/phase) and horizontal busbars
W = 80 mm 50/60 mm 04636
(1)
W > 80 mm 50/60 mm 04636
(1)
+ 04642
W y 80 mm 80 mm 04637
(1)
W > 80 mm 80 mm 04637
(1)
+ 04642
Connection between vertical busbars
(2 bars/phase) and horizontal busbars
W y 80 mm 50/80 mm 04637
(1)
W > 80 mm 50/80 mm 04637
(1)
+ 04642
Connection between double vertical
busbars and horizontal busbars
W = 80 mm 80 mm 04636
(1)
x 2
W > 80 mm 80 mm (04637
(1)
+ 04642) x 2
phase.
up to 3200 A
Busbars 10 mm thick
Main distribution
400E22310.indd 30 20/10/2011 11:00:26
B-31
Distribution
Busbar calculation
Permissible
current
for switchboards
No. of bars /
phase
No. of supports
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
mandatory.
busbars
(Icw).
IP y 31 IP > 31 y 15 y 20 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50
800 750 1 bar, 60 x 5 mm
3
1000 900 1 bar, 80 x 5 mm 5 7
1400 1250 2 bars, 60 x 5 mm
1800 1600 2 bars, 80 x 5 mm
Permissible
current
for switchboards
No. of bars /
phase
No. of supports
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
IP y 31 IP > 31 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85
1800 1600 1 bar, 80 x 10 mm
3
7 9
2150 1900 1 bar, 100 x 10 mm
2820 2500 2 bars, 80 x 10 mm 5
7
3300 2900 2 bars, 100 x 10 mm
Busbar supports
D
d
3
8
3
1
9
3
.
e
p
s
Fixed support for lateral fat busbars y 80 mm 04661
Fixed support for lateral fat busbars > 80 mm 04661 + 04671
Free support (additional) y 80 mm 04662
Free support (additional) > 80 mm 04662 + 04671
D
d
3
8
0
8
2
9
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
6
5
0
.
e
p
s
04661. 04662.
Busbar chocks
Bottom support for lateral fat busbars W = 300 mm 04666
all bars 5 mm width
1 bar. 80 x 10 mm
2 bars, 80 x 10 mm
Bottom support for busbar 100 x 10 mm 04666 + 04661
D
D
3
8
3
1
9
4
.
e
p
s
Direct connection (75 mm between centres)
For busbars with 75 mm between centres, the bars must fully overlap.
D
D
3
8
3
8
4
4
.
e
p
s
50/60/80/100 D
D
3
8
4
3
2
0
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
3
3
9
9
.
e
p
s
Drilling diagram for horizontal busbars, 10 mm thick.
Number of assembly screws (04645)
Horizontal bars (mm) Vertical bars (mm)
50 60 80 100
50 2 2 2 2
60 - 2 2 2
80 - - 3 3
100 - - - 4
To satisfy safety clearances, the assembly points on adjacent
bars must be staggered as shown above.
up to 3200 A
For 300 mm width framework
Main distribution
400E22310.indd 31 20/10/2011 11:00:27
B-32
Distribution
Busbar calculation
mandatory.
Mounting chocks screwed to the busbars rest on one of
the fxed supports.
busbars
rated short-time withstand current (Icw).
see page D-25.
Permissible current
for switchboards
Bars / phase No. of supports Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
IP y 31 IP > 31 y 15 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50
800 750 1 bar, 60 x 5 mm
3
1000 900 1 bar, 80 x 5 mm 7
1400 1250 2 bars, 60 x 5 mm 5
1800 1600 2 bars, 80 x 5 mm
A set of busbars made up of two 80 x 5 mm bars per phase must be installed in a cubicle 600 mm
deep.
Busbar selection
D
D
3
8
0
7
2
9
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
5
0
5
.
e
p
s
Busbar supports
Three fxed supports are required to maintain the vertical busbars. If more than three
Fixed support for rear fat busbars 04653
D
D
3
8
0
7
3
2
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
1
6
5
2
.
e
p
s
04653. 04662.
Icw 30 kA rms / 1 s. and maintains the position of the bar.
The bars are secured by three mandatory fxed supports (3 x
04653) and two free supports (2 x 04662).
Busbar chocks
A metal mounting chock, 5 mm thick, is screwed to the bar. It rests on a fxed support
and maintains the position of the bar.
100 mounting chocks (5 mm) for busbars 04669
D
d
3
8
0
8
1
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
3
0
3
.
e
p
s
Chocking for one bar per phase. Chocking for two bars per phase.
D
D
3
8
0
7
3
0
.
e
p
s
1600 A connection
connection to horizontal busbars, 5 mm thick 04635
(1) (2)
connection to horizontal busbars, 10 mm
thick
Width y 80 mm 04636
(1) (2)
Width > 80 mm 04636
(2)
+ 04642
(1)
phase.
Rear flat busbars up to 1600 A
Busbars, 5 mm thick
Main distribution
BOOK EN.indb 32 19/10/2011 14:39:39
B-33
Distribution
Busbar calculation
mandatory.
Mounting chocks screwed to the busbars rest on one of
the fxed supports.
busbars
rated short-time withstand current (Icw).
see page D-25.
Permissible current
for switchboards
Size of bars No. of supports Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
IP y 31 IP > 31 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85
1200 1080 1 bar, 50 x 10
3 5 7 1400 1250 1 bar, 60 x 10
9
1800 1600 1 bar, 80 x 10
Busbar selection
D
d
3
8
1
5
0
3
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
5
0
5
.
e
p
s
Busbar supports
Three fxed supports are required to maintain the vertical busbars. If more than three
Fixed support for rear fat busbars 04653
D
D
3
8
0
7
3
2
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
1
6
5
2
.
e
p
s
04653. 04662.
Icw 40 kA rms / 1 s. and maintains the position of the bar.
The bars are secured by three mandatory fxed supports
(3 x 04653) and two free supports (2 x 04662).
Busbar chocks
A metal mounting chock, 5 mm thick, is screwed to the bar. It rests on a fxed support
and maintains the position of the bar.
D
d
3
8
0
8
1
5
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
7
3
3
.
e
p
s
Chocking for one bar per phase. Chocking for two bars per phase.
D
d
3
8
1
5
0
4
.
e
p
s
Connection y 1600 A for horizontal bars, 10 mm thick
(1)(2)
width of horizontal bars > 80 mm 04636
(2)
+ 04642
(1)
Rear flat busbars up to 1600 A
Busbars, 10 mm thick
Main distribution
BOOK EN.indb 33 19/10/2011 14:39:40
B-34
04926.
Distribution
Presentation
Decisions concerning the Form of separation and the
degree of protection are the subject of an agreement
between the manufacturer and the user.
In most installations, Prisma Plus cubicles do not require partitioning. In this case,
the switchboard is a Form 1.
Safety being one of its foremost goals, Schneider Electric offers options and features
that go well beyond the recommendations of the standard.
The protection of life and property is a standard feature due to:
b front plates that require a tool to be removed
b keylocks on doors, some of which provide access to live parts
b the systematic installation of terminal shields on Compact NSX circuit breakers
and Interpact INS and INV switch-disconnectors
b covering of the upstream and downstream terminals on the incoming device so
that operators are perfectly safe at all points in the switchboard when the incoming
device is off (open).
What is more, Prisma Plus offers different levels of partitioning to create separations
inside the cubicles and thus create Form 2, 3 and 4 electrical switchboards.
Electrical switchboards must meet the degree of protection IP2X to comply with
standard IEC 61439-1 and 2.
Form 1 confguration
Covering of upstream and downstream terminals on all
devices.
D
D
3
8
4
5
8
5
.
e
p
s
The protection of life and property is ensured by:
b the systematic installation of terminal shields on Compact NSX circuit breakers and on
Interpact INS and INV switch-disconnectors (see the pages on the functional units)
b covering of the upstream and downstream terminals of the incoming device.
Covering of the connection
between an incoming device and
lateral busbars
Cat. no. selection
Device Cover
Masterpact NW 04926 + 04927
Masterpact NT 04926
Compact NS630b/1600 04926
Compact NS1600b/3200
(1)
04926
Interpact INS-INV630b/2500 04926
(1) For more informations, see page A-21.
D
d
3
8
2
0
4
1
.
e
p
s
Form 1 electrical switchboards
Main distribution
400E22900.indd 34 21/10/2011 10:44:15
B-35
Distribution
Front connection
Cable connection
D
d
3
8
2
0
1
9
.
e
p
s
Device Form 1 cover
Fixed or drawout Masterpact circuit breaker
NW08/40 04861
NT06/16 04852
Fixed or withdrawable Compact circuit breaker
Fixed NS630b/1600 04851
Withdrawable NS630b/1600 04852
04861.
D
d
3
8
2
0
2
0
.
e
p
s
Canalis connection
Device Form 1 cover
NW08/40 04861 + 04871
NT06/16 04852 + 04871
Fixed NS630b/1600 04851 + 04871
Withdrawable NS630b/1600 04852 + 04871

04861 + 04871.
Rear connection
Cable connection
D
d
3
8
2
0
2
1
.
e
p
s
Device Form 1 cover
NW08/40 04863
NT06/16 04854
Fixed NS630b/1600 04853
Withdrawable NS630b/1600 04854
04863.
D
d
3
8
2
0
2
2
.
e
p
s
Canalis connection
Device Form 1 cover
NW08/40 04863 + 04871
NT06/16 04854 + 04871
Fixed NS630b/1600 04853 + 04871
Withdrawable NS630b/1600 04854 + 04871
04863 + 04871.
Form 1 electrical switchboards
Covering the supply terminals on the
incoming device

Main distribution
BOOK EN.indb 35 19/10/2011 14:39:48
B-36
Distribution
Defnition of Form 2
Separation of busbars from the functional units:
b protection against contact with live parts upstream of the outgoing circuits
b protection against penetration of foreign solid bodies.
The two types of Form 2 separation as defned by IEC 61439-2
D
d
3
8
1
6
7
9
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
6
7
9
.
e
p
s
Form 2a. Form 2b.
b Form 2a
Terminals for external conductors not separated from busbars.
The functional units are separated from the busbars, but not the terminals.
b Form 2b
Terminals for external conductors separated from busbars.
b The functional units and the terminals are separated from the busbars.
Form 2 confguration
Separation of busbars from the functional units
Form 2 partitioning is essential to ensure excellent protection for the installation and
operators working in the switchboard.
When added to standard protection features (terminal shields, prefabricated
connections, etc.), it eliminates the risk of direct contacts with live parts.
Prisma Plus offers Form 2b.
Form 2b provides much better safety than Form 2a, notably during connection,
because the terminals are separated from the busbars.
P
D
3
9
0
4
2
0
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
2
6
.
e
p
s
Form 2b partitioning.
Form 2 partitioning
Main distribution
400E22900.indd 36 08/11/2011 13:55:55
B-37
Distribution
Partitioning of lateral vertical
busbars
Lateral partitioning
b vertical barrier made of insulating slats
b can be installed on both sides of Linergy and fat busbars
b made up of:
v four supports that clip to the framework
v fve extruded slats that clip to the supports
v two metal plates at the top and bottom that can be cut out to pass a PE or PEN
conductor, or one or two 30 x 60 mm trunking sections
b the space between the slats is suffcient for prefabricated connections (one copper
bar, 5 or 10 mm thick, or insulated fexible bars) or for cables up to 35 mm, while
maintaining the degree of protection IP2X
b compliance with standard IEC 695.2.1 concerning withstand to fre.
Form 2 restoration for side-barrier cut-out
This kit enables passage of the connection between a device > 1600 A (NW, INS)
and lateral vertical busbars.
It is made up of an insulated plate (six modules high = 300 mm) that can be cut as
required, supplied with supports and the necessary hardware.
It can be installed at any height in the switchboard.
Cat. no. selection
D
d
3
8
3
7
1
2
.
e
p
s
04922.
D
d
3
8
3
7
1
3
.
e
p
s
Form 2 side barrier 04922
Form 2 restoration kit 04924
04924.
Front and rear barrier
Barrier, W = 150 mm or W = 300 mm, from top to bottom of the cubicle.
Can be installed in the front and rear of the busbar compartment.
Protects against direct contact with the busbars.
Cat. no. selection
Front or rear barrier for lateral vertical busbars 04921
Front or rear barrier for lateral vertical busbars W = 300 mm
(1)
04920
(1) A busbar support (04666) must be mounted for the bottom fxture of the 300 mm wide barrier.
D
d
3
8
3
7
1
4
.
e
p
s
Front protection
This barrier is not required in front when the cubicle is equipped with a plain or
transparent door.
With door With cover frame Framework width 300 mm
D
d
3
8
1
5
8
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
5
8
9
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
2
5
2
8
.
e
p
s
04921 04920
b For 800 mm cubicles :
b the door is systematically supplied with a barrier.
b the cover frame is supplied with a wicket door, W = 150 mm, on which devices can
be mounted. A front barrier is indispensable.
D
d
3
8
3
7
1
5
.
e
p
s
Rear protection
A barrier is required at the rear of the busbar compartment in cubicles that are 600,
800 and 1000 mm deep.
D
D
3
8
2
4
4
0
.
e
p
s
Form 2 partitioning
Main distribution
400E22900.indd 37 20/10/2011 11:02:31
B-38
Form 2 partitioning
Partitioning of horizontal
busbars
Set of two barriers (front and rear), plus a slotted rear panel for effcient natural
convection in the switchboard.
The set can be used to partition horizontal busbars installed at the top or bottom of
the cubicle.
The space required for the busbars is not increased.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
4
5
2
1
.
E
P
S
Framework dimensions Modules Cat. no.
Form 2 cover for horizontal busbars, W=300mm,
D=400mm
3M 04973
D=400mm
3M 04974
D=400mm
3M 04976
D=400mm
3M 04976
04976
For framework, W = 650 mm, W = 800 mm (650 + 150).
D=400mm
3M 04978
D
D
3
8
4
5
2
2
.
E
P
S
D=600mm
3M 04983
D=600mm
3M 04984
D=600mm
3M 04986
Form 2 cover for horizontal busbars, W=650mm
+150mm, D=600mm
3M 04986
D=600mm
3M 04988
D=600mm, 4000 A
4M 04963
D=600mm, 4000 A
4M 04964
04974
For framework, W = 400 mm.
D=600mm, 4000 A
4M 04966
Form 2 cover for horizontal busbars,
W=650mm+150mm, D=600mm, 4000 A
4M 04966
D=600mm, 4000 A
4M 04968
Note: when the busbars are at the bottom of the cubicle, gland plates are mandatory, see page
C-12.
D
D
3
8
4
5
2
4
.
e
p
s
To protect horizontal busbars installed at the bottom of the cubicle, the slotted
horizontal panel can be replaced by a plain barrier.
Plain barrier W = 300, W = 400 04915
Plain barrier W = 650, W = 800 04919
04919
For framework, W = 650 mm, W = 800 mm (650 + 150).
D
D
3
8
4
5
2
3
.
e
p
s
04915
For framework, W = 300 mm, W = 400 mm.
Main distribution
Distribution
400E22900.indd 38 08/11/2011 13:35:45
B-39
Distribution
Form 2 partitioning
Main distribution
Running of auxiliary wires
We recommend running all auxiliary wires in trunking or straps.
In Prisma Plus system P cubicles, the wires can be run in any combination of
three directions (vertical, horizontal widthwise and horizontal depthwise) to
ensure optimum and rational wiring layouts.
Auxiliary wiring knock-outs
With Prisma Plus, the top and bottom partitioning plates of the lateral vertical
busbars are equipped with knock-outs designed for the passage of two 30 x 60
mm trunking sections.
These plates are reversible front and back to adapt to auxiliary wires running in
the front or rear of the cubicles.
D
D
3
8
4
5
8
6
.
E
P
S
JdB < 80 mm
D
D
3
8
4
0
1
4
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
0
9
9
.
e
p
s
BOOK EN.indb 39 19/10/2011 14:40:01
B-40
Distribution
Defnition of Form 3
Separation of busbars from the functional units and separation of all functional units
from one another.
Separation of the terminals for external conductors from the functional units, but not
from each other.
b protection against contact with live parts
b reduction in the risk of faults between the functional units (propagation of electrical
arcs, etc.).
The two types of Form 3 separation as defned by IEC 61439-1 and 2.
D
d
3
8
1
6
8
0
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
6
8
1
.
e
p
s
Form 3a. Form 3b.
Form 3a
Terminals for external conductors not separated from busbars.
The functional units are separated from each other and from the busbars, but not the
terminals.
b Form 3b
Terminals for external conductors separated from busbars.
The functional units are separated from each other and from the busbars.
The terminals are separated from the busbars, but not from each other.
Form 3 confguration
Form 2 switchboard with:
b separation of the functional units from one another
b separation of the terminals for external conductors
from the functional units.
Prisma Plus offers Form 3b because it provides much better safety than Form 3a,
because the terminals are separated from the busbars.
D
D
3
8
4
5
2
7
.
e
p
s
Form 3b partitioning.
Form 3 partitioning
Main distribution
2.0
400E22910.indd 40 08/11/2011 13:28:47
B-41
Distribution
Form 3 confguration
Front connection
Presentation
A horizontal metal partition can be used to physically separate functional units from
one another.
It is fxed at the rear by a support (two uprights) secured to the framework (400 mm
deep) or to the intermediate uprights (600 mm deep frameworks).
A set of brackets can be used to install partial Form 3 partitioning in the cubicle.It
does not take up any useful space in the switchboard.
Cat. no. selection
D
d
3
8
3
7
1
9
.
e
p
s
Horizontal metal partition, W = 650 m 04901
Rear support for partitions, W = 650 mm 04943
D
D
3
8
3
1
0
7
.
e
p
s
04901 + 04943 04901 + 03583
D
d
3
8
3
0
8
1
.
e
p
s
Rear connection
Presentation
For rear connection, in addition to the horizontal partitions, vertical partitions are
required at the rear of each functional unit.
There are two heights:
b 3 to 4 modules
b 5 to 6 modules.
Cat. no. selection
Vertical partitions (two cat. no. per functional unit)
3 to 4 modules 04955
D
d
3
8
3
6
0
1
.
e
p
s
Vertical partitions for rear connected Compact NSX250.
Form 3 partitioning
Main distribution
BOOK EN.indb 41 19/10/2011 14:40:11
B-42
Distribution
Defnition of Form 4
b separation of busbars from the functional units and separation of all functional
units from one another, including the terminals for external conductors which are an
integral part of the functional unit
b protection against contacts with live parts and reduction in the risk of faults
between the functional units (propagation of electrical arcs, etc.).
The two types of Form 4 separation as defned by IEC 61439-1 and 2
D
d
3
8
2
3
6
9
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
3
7
0
.
e
p
s
Form 4a. Form 4b.
b Form 4a
Terminals for external conductors in the same compartment as the associated
b functional unit.
b Form 4b
Terminals for external conductors not in the same compartment as the associated
functional unit, but in individual, separate, enclosed protected spaces or
compartments.
Form 4 confguration
Form 3 switchboard with covers over the terminals for
external conductors.
b Prisma Plus offers both Form 4a and Form 4b.
In addition to partitioning of the main busbars (Form 2) and installation of the
horizontal partitions between functional units (Form 3), the cubicle must be equipped
with:
b Form 4 gland plates to achieve Form 4a
b Form 4 covers for connection transfer assemblies to achieve Form 4b.
D
D
3
8
4
5
2
5
.
e
p
s
Form 4 partitioning: Form 4a (cubicle on left) and Form 4b (cubicle on right).
Form 4 partitioning
Main distribution
400E22920.indd 42 08/11/2011 13:30:00
B-43
Distribution
Covering the connection
terminals on the incoming device
D
d
3
8
2
0
1
2
.
e
p
s
See the pages on functional units or see page B-34.
Covering the connection
terminals of outgoing devices
D
d
3
8
3
0
8
4
.
e
p
s
See the following pages.
Form 4 partitioning
Main distribution
BOOK EN.indb 43 19/10/2011 14:40:23
B-44
Distribution
Front connection
Form 4a - direct connection to the device
Presentation
On a cubicle already equipped with Form 2 and 3 partitions, Form 4 is achieved by
installing:
b a backplate (one cat. no. per cubicle) made up to two metal half panels mounted
on the rear supports for Form 3 partitions. This backplate is not indispensable for 400
mm deep frameworks
b a plastic gland plate that can be easily cut out (one for each functional unit) and is
mounted on the framework.
There are two heights:
b 3 to 4 modules
b 5 to 6 modules.
Cat. no. selection
D
d
3
8
3
6
0
3
.
e
p
s
Form 4 backplate (one cat. no. per cubicle) 04946
Form 4 gland plate 3 to 4 modules 04951
D
d
3
8
3
6
0
4
.
e
p
s
Form 4b - connection in a lateral compartment
Presentation
installing:
b a backplate (one cat. no. per cubicle) made up to two metal half panels mounted
on the rear supports for Form 3 partitions. This backplate is not indispensable for 400
mm deep frameworks
b a cover with plastic gland plates that can be easily cut out on the side and bottom.
It is available in two heights:
v 3 to 5 modules, 150 mm wide
v 4 to 6 modules, 200 mm wide.
Cat. no. selection
Form 4 backplate (one cat. no. per cubicle) 04946
Form 4 cover for connection transfer
assembly
3 to 5 modules (W = 150 mm) 04953
4 to 6 modules (W = 200 mm) 04954
D
d
3
8
2
0
3
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
0
3
6
.
e
p
s
04953. 04954.
D
d
3
8
2
4
3
8
.
e
p
s
Form 4 partitioning
Outgoing device
Main distribution
BOOK EN.indb 44 19/10/2011 14:40:25
B-45
Distribution
Rear connection
Form 4a - direct connection to the device
Presentation
installing a gland plate at the rear of each functional unit. They are connected directly
to the rear supports for Form 3 partitions.
It is available in two heights:
b 3 to 4 modules
b 5 to 6 modules.
Cat. no. selection
A
B C
E
F G
H
A
B
C
D
F G
D
H
E
B C
E
F G
H
B
C
D
D
F G
H
F G
H
F G
H
F G
H
F G
H
F G
H
D
d
3
8
3
6
0
5
.
e
p
s
Form 4 gland plate 3 to 5 modules 04951
HHHHHHHH
D
d
3
8
3
6
0
7
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
3
6
0
6
.
e
p
s
Form 4b - connection at the rear of the cubicle
Presentation
installing a Form 4 cover. It comprises two height-adjustable metal fanges and
plastic gland plates that can be easily cut out at the rear and bottom.
It is available in two versions:
b 3 to 5 modules (D = 150 mm)
b 4 to 6 modules (D = 200 mm).
Cat. no. selection
Form 4 cover for connection transfer
assembly
D
d
3
8
2
0
3
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
0
3
9
.
e
p
s
04954. 04953.
D
d
3
8
3
0
9
0
.
e
p
s
Form 4 partitioning
Outgoing device
Main distribution
BOOK EN.indb 45 19/10/2011 14:40:29
B-46
Distribution
Inter-cubicle partition
Metal partition, used to separate two adjacent cubicles.
It is made up of two panels, each 850 mm high.
The top and bottom ends have knock-outs for busbars, PE/PEN conductors or
auxiliary wiring.
Supplied with the necessary supports and hardware, the partition is mounted on the
framework and does not hinder installation of the functional mounting plates.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
3
7
2
0
.
e
p
s
Depth 400 mm 04911
Depth 600 mm 04911 + 04931
04911.
D
d
3
8
3
7
2
2
.
e
p
s
04911 + 04931.
Other partitions
Main distribution
400E22930.indd 46 21/10/2011 08:37:42
B-47
Distribution
Other partitions
Main distribution
Metal partition used to separate two adjacent cubicles (for example, when the power
factor correction cubicle is combined with a main low-voltage switchboard).
It is made up of two panels, each 850 mm high.
The top and bottom have knock-outs for horizontal busbars.
Supplied with the necessary supports and mounting hardware, the partition is
mounted on the framework and does not hinder installation of the power factor
correction modules.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
3
7
2
1
.
e
p
s
Depth 400 mm 04911
Depth 600 mm 04931 + 04911
400E22930.indd 47 21/10/2011 08:37:46
B-48
For incoming devices up to 630 A
160 to 630 A multi-stage
distribution block
160 to 250 A Polybloc
- Reliable spring-terminal connections for outgoing
circuits, requiring no maintenance
- Horizontal or vertical installation in minimum space
B-57
- Traditional, highly versatile solution
- Many installation possibilities
B-59
Prisma Plus System P distribution blocks
BOOK EN.indb 48 19/10/2011 14:40:43
B-49
Prisma Plus System P distribution blocks
125 to 160 A Distribloc
For rows of devices

- Spring terminals for
electrical connections
that stay tight
- Front designed to
integrate perfectly with
modular devices
B-55
63/200 A Multiclip
Adaptable earthing terminal
blocks 63/160 A
- Reliable spring-terminal
connections requiring no
maintenance
- Fast installation
- Easy upgrades through
replacement or addition
of devices
- Easy balancing of
phases
- Fast and direct
connections, adaptable to
all needs
- Fast, economical
connections
- Innovative solution
B-60
B-47
B-72
100/250 A Polypact
- Tested solution for all
needs up to 800 A
- High-quality
connections requiring no
maintenance
- Easy switchboard
upgrades
B-62
BOOK EN.indb 49 19/10/2011 14:40:49
B-50
Distribution
Presentation
Composition
Powerclip busbars are made up of ETP H12 channelled copper bars with threaded
M6 holes every 25 mm.
They are mounted on insulated bases and can be cut every 150 or 200 mm,
depending on the rating.
The ends of the busbars are plugged.
Clip-on covers protect against direct contact from the front. The covers can be easily
cut for the connections to the devices.
Installation
The busbars are supplied with supports that screw to the functional uprights of
enclosures or to an adapter in a cubicle.
They can be cut every 150 or 200 mm, depending on the rating.
Powerclip busbars are compact and fully insulated
(IPxxB).
They are supplied ready for installation in the
switchboard.
There are three and four-pole versions with ratings
from 125 to 630 A.
Available in four lengths, they can be cut every 150 or
200 mm, depending on the rating.
D
d
3
8
2
5
7
7
.
e
p
s
Permissible current of
the busbars (A)
Rated short-time withstand
current Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
Rated peak withstand current Ipk
(k)
125 8.5 20
160 10 30
250 13 30
400 20 52.5
630 25 52.5
v rated insulation voltage:
v Powerclip 125 A busbars: Ui = 500 V
v Powerclip 160/400 A busbars: Ui = 750 V
v Powerclip 630 A busbars: Ui = 1000 V
b impulse withstand voltage:
v Powerclip 125/630 A busbars: Uimp = 8 kV.
125 A Powerclip busbars
Available in two lengths (450 and 750 mm) in three and four-pole versions.
The busbars can be cut to length every 150 mm.
They are supplied with clip-on covers that block off the connected cable lugs and can
be cut as needed.
For Powerclip busbars installation, order two adapters 03595 x 2 (4 lateral cross-
members + 2 longitudinal cross-members).
Cat. no. selection
D
d
3
8
2
5
7
8
.
e
p
s
Powerclip busbars 125 A Cat. no.
Three-pole W = 450 mm 04103
W = 750 mm 04107
Four-pole W = 450 mm 04104
W = 750 mm 04108
Busbar connection
Four 125 A connections, W = 230 mm
(for NG125, NSA and INS equipped with tunnel terminals)
04145
A 35 mm ferrule for connection to tunnel terminals is crimped to one end.
A 45 ring lug is crimped to the other end.
95 mm tunnel terminals for INS : cat. no. 28947 (set of 3)
cat. no. 28948 (set of 4)
Secondary distribution
400E22010.indd 50 20/10/2011 11:05:48
B-51
Distribution
160/630 A Powerclip busbars
Available in two lengths (1000 and 1400 mm) in three and four-pole versions.
The busbars can be cut to length every 200 mm.
Prefabricated connections are available for the devices.
D
d
3
8
2
5
7
9
.
e
p
s
Powerclip busbars 160 A 250 A 400 A 630 A
Three-pole W = 1000 mm 04111 04112 04113 04114
W = 1400 mm 04116 04117 04118 04119
Four-pole W = 1000 mm 04121 04122 04123 04124
W = 1400 mm 04126 04127 04128 04129
Connection between incoming device and Powerclip busbars Cat. no.
Power supply block (with connection) NSX250 04060
NSX400 04070
NSX630 04071
Universal power supply block
(without connection)
100/250 A 04061
400/630 A 04074
Connection for universal power supply block Vertical NSX100/250 04062
Vertical NSX100/250 in duct 04064
Vertical NSX400/630 in duct 04073
D
d
3
8
3
6
4
6
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
3
6
4
4
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
3
6
4
5
.
e
p
s
NSX400 power supply block (04070) between
incoming device and busbars.
NSX250 power supply block (04060) between
busbars and Compact NS250.
250 A universal power supply block (04061) +
250 A connection (04062) between incoming
device and busbars.
Connection between 200 A Multiclip and Powerclip busbars Cat. no.
200 A 4P connection for Multiclip (supplied with mounting hardware) 04021
35 mm additional blocks Cat. no.
35 mm additional blocks 3P 04155
4P 04156
35 mm 4P additional blocks (04156).
Busbar connection Cat. no.
4 160 A connections, W = 230 mm (for NSA160) 04146
Cable lugs
Bare tubular elbow cable lugs: see page D-50.
Adaptation Cat. no.
System G adapter, W = 500 mm 03595
Note: the adapter 03595 can be used for all mounting plates, except 03030.
For Powerclip busbars installation, order two adapters 03595 x 2 (4 lateral cross-members
+ 2 longitudinal cross-members).
BOOK EN.indb 51 19/10/2011 14:40:52
B-52
Distribution
Accessories
Powerclip tap-off blocks
Each block can be used to connect:
b one 6 mm and one 10 mm cable (04151)
b one 16 mm cables (04152).
Equipped with spring terminals.
D
d
3
8
2
5
8
0
.
e
p
s
12 Powerclip tap-off blocks with 6 mm + 10 mm terminals 04151
12 Powerclip tap-off blocks with 16 mm terminals 04152
Connection cover
Clip-on covers that block off the connected cable lugs and can be cut
as needed.
They maintain IPxxB with 90 angle lugs and/or cable sizes from 10 to 25 mm.
D
d
3
8
2
5
8
1
.
e
p
s
8 IPxxB covers for Powerclip busbars 04150
8.8 class mounting hardware
Used for electrical connections to the copper bars.
Set of 20 CHC M6 x 12 mm screws for Powerclip busbars 04158
400E22010.indd 52 20/10/2011 11:13:59
B-53
400 A rear busbars

Presentation
D
d
3
8
2
6
2
7
.
e
p
s
The rear busbars are mounted directly on the uprights
of the framework.
There are three and four-pole versions with ratings
from 160 to 400 A.
Available in two lengths, 1000 and 1400 mm, they can
be cut as needed.
The connection with a Compact or Interpact incoming
device occupies two vertical modules (50 mm each).
Composition
Flat, copper bars with threaded M6 holes every 25 mm for connection along the
entire length of the busbars.
The insulating supports can receive a ffth bar, 15 x 5 mm or 20 x 5 mm, to create
an earth bar.
Installation
The busbars are mounted directly on the functional uprights of enclosures or on an
adapter (03595) in a cubicle.
Connection
b 16 mm to 50 mm fexible cables, with crimped lugs
b insulated fexible bars (see page B-64).
b rated peak withstand current Ipk (k)
v 30 k for 160 A busbars
b rated insulation level Ui = 1000 V
Busbar calculation
Busbar size and distance between supports
The table below indicates:
b the size of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the
busbars
b the distance between supports, depending on the rated short-time withstand
current (Icw).
Rating
(A)
Size of bars
(mm)
Distance between support centres
(1)
(mm)
Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
10 13 15 20 25
160 15 x 5
250 20 x 5
400 32 x 5 450 300 225
(1) Multiclip 200 A distribution blocks equipped with connections (04029) can be used as
intermediate supports (200 mm max. distance between centres) in addition to the top and bottom
supports.
Distribution
BOOK EN.indb 53 19/10/2011 14:40:54
B-54
400 A rear busbars
Busbar selection
D
d
3
8
2
6
2
8
.
e
p
s
Copper bars Rating (A) Size of bars (mm) Cat. no.
Four copper bars, W = 1000 160 15 x 5 04161
250 20 x 5 04162
400 32 x 5 04163
Four copper bars, W = 1400 160 15 x 5 04171
250 20 x 5 04172
400 32 x 5 04173
Busbar supports
Rear busbar support 04191
D
d
3
8
1
3
8
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
3
8
9
.
e
p
s
Copper bars. Busbar supports.
Accessories
Rear busbar barrier
Protects against direct contact with the busbar connections.
D
d
3
8
2
6
2
9
.
e
p
s
Rear busbar barrier, H = 100 mm 04198
04198.
D
d
3
8
2
6
3
0
.
e
p
s
125 A connection
For direct supply to comb busbars from the rear busbars in the switchboard.
Four 125 A connections, W = 230 mm
(for NG125, NSA and INS equipped with tunnel terminals)
04145
95 mm tunnel terminals for INS : cat. no. 28947 (set of 3)
cat. no. 28948 (set of 4).
04145.
160 A connection
For direct supply from the rear busbars in the switchboard.
4 160 A connections 04146
D
d
3
8
2
6
3
1
.
e
p
s
200 A connection
For supply of a 200 A Multiclip distribution block from the rear busbars in the
switchboard.
Rear busbar connection for 200A Multiclip distribution block 04029
Connection between busbars
For electrical connections between two sets of rear busbars.
04029. Designation Cat. no.
4 copper angle brackets, 250A 04190
D
d
3
8
1
4
5
8
.
e
p
s
8.8 class mounting hardware
Set of 20 M6 x 20 bolts (20 bolts + 20 nuts +40 contact washers) 04194
Set of 40 M6 x 16 screws (40 screws + 40 contact washers) 04195
04190.
Distribution
BOOK EN.indb 54 19/10/2011 14:40:55
B-55
Distribution
General
Downstream circuits are connected from the front, to spring terminals.
Contact pressure automatically adapts to the size of the conductor. It does not
depend on the operator.
Contacts are insensitive to vibrations and thermal variations.
Only one cable (fexible or rigid, without a metal ferrule) can be inserted in a spring
terminal.
Degree of protection: IPxxB.
Advantages
b a reliable electrical connection, no maintenance required (tightness guaranteed
over time)
b very fast connection
b easy phase balancing
b rewiring is very easy if the switchboard is expanded or modifed.
D
d
3
8
1
3
9
9
.
e
p
s
Cable connection.
The four-pole distribution block is made up of:
b a fully insulated, one-piece distribution block complying with the degree of
protection IPxxB (protection against direct contacts)
b a modular cover.
The design of the front (45 mm nose) blends perfectly into a row comprising modular
devices.
P
D
3
9
0
6
5
1
R
-
S
E
-
2
0
.
e
p
s
P
D
3
9
0
6
5
7
R
-
S
E
-
4
7
.
e
p
s
Distribloc 63 A (top connection) 04040
Distribloc 63 A (bottom connection) 04041
160 A Distribloc distribution block + connection 04046
b Electrical characteristics
b rated insulation level: Ui = 750 V
b rated operational current Ie (40C):
v 125 A for the 125 A Distribloc
v 160 A for the 160 A Distribloc with its prefabricated connection for INS160 or
NSA160
b short-circuit withstand current: the reinforced breaking capacity due to cascading
in circuit-breaker combinations is maintained. The worst-case situations have been
tested.
b complies with the low-voltage device standard IEC 60947.7.1 and/or IEC 61439-1
and 2
b impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV.
Supply
b tunnel terminal on 125 A Distribloc 125 for 6 to 35
v
fexible cables (10 to 35
v
rigid
cables)
b the 160 A Distribloc is supplied with a prefabricated fexible connection. It is
designed for an INS100/160 or NSA160 switch-disconnector, installed on the left or
right.
Distribution (125 and 160 A Distribloc)
b spring terminals:
v 2 outgoers from 1 to 10
v
, fexible or rigid
v
, fexible or rigid
v
, fexible or rigid
b tunnel terminals:
v 1 outgoer from 4 to 16
v
, fexible (4 to 25
v
rigid)
Supply
b an identifcation label
b adhesive labels for phase identifcation
b a prefabricated fexible connection for the INS160 or NSA160 (160 A Distribloc
only).
D
D
3
8
1
6
6
0
.
e
p
s
400E22015.indd 55 07/11/2011 15:32:54
B-56
Distribution
Installation
b clipped onto a modular rail
b width occupied is 12 modules (9 mm each)
b screwed to plain or slotted backplate. Distances between centres = 100 x 75 mm.
Dimensions
D
d
3
8
1
6
0
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
6
0
9
.
e
p
s
125 A connection
Set of four fexible connections, 35
v
, L = 210 mm.
To supply a 125 A Distribloc from a NG125 or a INS125.
P
D
3
9
0
6
5
8
R
.
e
p
s
4 NG-INS125 connections for Distribloc 04047
D
d
3
8
0
9
3
2
.
e
p
s
BOOK EN.indb 56 19/10/2011 14:40:57
B-57
Distribution
General
Downstream circuits are connected from the front, without screws, to spring
terminals. Contact pressure automatically adapts to the size of the conductor
(minimum size = 1 mm

). Contacts are insensitive to vibrations and thermal
variations.
terminal.
Advantages of spring terminals
b a reliable electrical connection, no maintenance required
b the fast connections make phase balancing very easy.
b rewiring is very easy if the switchboard is expanded or modifed.

D
d
3
8
1
3
9
9
.
e
p
s
250 A Polybloc distribution block
Applications
The Polybloc distribution block is designed for installation directly downstream of
Compact circuit breakers and Interpact switch-disconnectors devices up to 250 A.
It can be rapidly mounted in the horizontal position.
Electrical connections are made directly to the device terminals.
It has the same width as the devices and does not take up any additional space
in the switchboard.
The connection terminals are slanted to facilitate cable entry and not exceed
the bending radius of the fexible and rigid cables.
Cat. no. selection
P
D
3
9
0
5
4
9
R
.
e
p
s
Polybloc distribution block, 3P, 250 A 04033
The electrical characteristics are perfectly compatible with the connected devices.
Neither the temperature derating curves nor the performance levels of the circuit
breakers and switch-disconnectors are altered.
tested.
Supply
Directly to the terminals of the Compact NSX and Interpact INS devices up to 250 A.
Distribution
Via cables, up to six 10 mm cables and three 16 mm cables per phase.
Installation
Directly on the mounting plates of horizontally mounted Compact NSX100/250 and
Interpact INS250 devices in the enclosures.
It can also be mounted downstream of vertically mounted Compact NSX100/250 and
Interpact INS250 devices in the enclosures. In this case, the Polybloc is mounted on
a depth-adjustable modular rail (03402).
Dimensions
D
D
3
8
1
4
0
2
.
e
p
s
Vertically mounted Polybloc on a depth-adjustable modular rail
(03402) in a cubicle.
H (mm) W (mm) D (mm)
Polybloc, 3P 105 138 63
Polybloc, 4P 140 138 63
W
D
D
D
3
8
4
5
8
1
.
e
p
s
Polybloc distribution block
BOOK EN.indb 57 19/10/2011 14:40:58
B-58
Distribution
35 mm additional blocks
These blocks with screw terminals can be mounted on the 250 A Polybloc for
connection of two 35 mm cables per phase.
D
D
3
8
1
4
0
3
.
e
p
s
35 mm 3P additional blocks (3 blocks) 04155
35 mm 4P additional blocks (4 blocks) 04156
160 A Polybloc distribution block
The 160 A Polybloc is made up of individual elements that can be used alone or with
others to make two-pole, three-pole or four-pole distribution blocks.
Mounting is very fast. It clips onto a modular rail and is supplied by cables via a
tunnel terminal.
The connection spring terminals are slanted to facilitate cable entry and bending of
the fexible and rigid cables.
It is supplied with a cover that also guides the cables.
Cat. no. selection
D
d
3
8
3
6
5
4
.
e
p
s
Three 160 A Polybloc distribution blocks in the vertical position
on a modular rail, supplied by an NG125.
in circuit-breaker combinations is maintained. The worst-case situations were tested.
The electrical characteristics are perfectly compatible with the connected devices.
Neither the temperature derating curves nor the performance levels of the circuit
breakers and switch-disconnectors are altered.
Supply
Direct to a tunnel terminal, for cables up to 70 mm.
Distribution
Via cables, up to six 16 mm cables.
Installation
The blocks clip onto a modular rail.
Dimensions
D
d
3
8
2
9
8
1
.
e
p
s
36
70
95
D
d
3
8
4
3
2
1
.
e
p
s
Polybloc distribution block
400E22090.indd 58 20/10/2011 11:15:07
Distribution
160/630 A four-pole multi-stage
distribution block
The distribution block can be installed horizontally in the device zone or vertically in
the 300 mm wide duct of wall-mounted and foor-standing enclosures.
It is not compatible with Pack enclosures.
The distribution block is made up of:
b two staggered supports made of an insulating material
b four slanted copper bars with holes every 25 mm
v 13 threaded M6 holes for outgoers
v four 12.2 mm diameter holes to supply the distribution block.
It is supplied with:
b M6 hardware
b one IPxxB insulating barrier for the front.
Cat. no. selection
P
D
3
9
0
6
5
9
R
.
e
p
s
Multi-stage distri. block Size of bars (mm) Cat. no.
160 A Distribloc (40 C) 15 x 5 04052
250 A Distribloc (40 C) 20 x 5 04053
400 A Distribloc (40 C) 32 x 5 04054
630 A Distribloc (40 C) 32 x 8 04055
D
d
3
8
1
3
4
1
.
e
p
s
b rated operational current Ie (40 C):
v 160 A for distribution block 04052
b rated short-time withstand current Icw:
v 10 kA rms / 1 s for 160 A block
b rated peak withstand current Ipk:
v 30 k for 160 A block
Supply
b 16 mm
2
to 50 mm
2
cables with crimped lugs
b 20 x 2 mm fexible bars for NSX100/160
b 20 x 3 mm fexible bars for NSX250
b 32 x 5 mm fexible bars for NSX400
b 32 x 8 mm fexible bars for NSX630.
Distribution
13 outgoers per phase, max. 50 mm
2
.
Installation
b screwed to plain or slotted backplate
b screwed onto the adapter 03595.
Dimensions
D
D
3
8
1
3
4
4
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
3
6
4
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
3
6
4
7
.
e
p
s
160/630 A multi-stage
distribution block
B-59
BOOK EN.indb 59 19/10/2011 14:41:00
Distribution
General
For connections, the distribution block uses a proven technique, i.e. spring terminals.
Downstream circuits are connected from the front, without screws, to spring
terminals. Contact pressure does not depend on the operator. It automatically adapts
to the size of the conductor (minimum size = 1mm). Contacts are insensitive to
vibrations and thermal variations.
terminal
Advantages
b A reliable electrical connection, no maintenance required (tightness guaranteed
over time)
b The fast connections make phase balancing very easy.
b Rewiring is very easy if the switchboard is expanded or modifed.
D
d
3
8
1
3
9
9
.
e
p
s
Cable connection.
63/80 A Multiclip distribution
blocks
Application
Distribution over half or full rows of modular devices. It is generally supplied
by a device at the head of a group of outgoers (NG125, INS, C60 or IC60, etc.).
Cat. no. selection
P
B
1
0
4
5
0
5
.
e
p
s
80 A Multiclip distribution block 04000
80 A Multiclip distribution block, 4P 04004
63 A Multiclip distribution block, 4P, 1/2 row 04008
b Rated insulation level Ui = 500 V.
b Impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 6 kV.
b Short-circuit withstand current: the reinforced breaking capacity due to cascading
tested.
b 63/80 A Multiclip distribution blocks:
v 4 mm cable outgoer: Imax = 32 A
v two 6 mm cables: Imax = 63 A.
Supply
Via tunnel terminals up to 25 mm, generally from a device supplying a group of
outgoers.
The tunnel terminals are positioned to facilitate cable entry and screw tightening.
They are designed for cables arriving from the top or bottom.
Distribution
b For the full-row Multiclip, 4P (04004), each phase offers:
v 2 connection points for 6 mm max. cable
b The neutral offers:
v 13 connection points for 4mm max. cable
b For the half-row Multiclip, 4P (04008), each phase offers:
b The neutral offers:
Each connection point can receive a single cable, either fexible or rigid.
Installation
b Clipped onto the rear of modular rail.
b Screwed to plain or slotted backplate.
D
D
3
8
4
0
8
8
.
E
P
S
04000.
04008.
D
D
3
8
1
6
6
1
.
e
p
s
04004.
D
d
3
8
1
6
6
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
6
6
4
.
e
p
s
Half-row Multiclip distribution block supplied
by an INS switch-disconnector.
Multiclip distribution block supplied by a Vigi
NG125 circuit breaker.
Supplied with 100 mm long bared copper connections
b For full-row Multiclip (04004):
v 2 sets of ten 4 mm connections + 1 set of six 6 mm connections
b For half-row Multiclip (04008):
v 1 set of ten 4 mm connections + 1 set of six 6 mm connections.
B-60
400E22110.indd 60 20/10/2011 11:16:34
Distribution
160/200 A Multiclip distribution
blocks
Application
Distribution over full rows of modular devices.
The distribution block is generally supplied by busbars in enclosures and cubicles.
Cat. no. selection
P
D
3
9
0
6
6
1
R
.
e
p
s
200 A Multiclip, 2P 04012
160 A Multiclip, 4P, 1/2 row 04018
b Impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV.
b Short-circuit withstand current: the reinforced breaking capacity due to cascading
in circuit-breaker combinations is maintained. The worst-case situations have been.
b 160/200 A Multiclip distribution blocks:
v two 10 mm cables: Imax = 63 A.
Supply
b Direct to terminals:
v 50 mm cables with crimped lugs
v 20 x 3 mm fexible bars
b From Powerclip insulated busbars in a wall-mounted or foor-standing enclosure
(04021).
b From lateral, channelled busbars in a cubicle (connection must be made).
b From busbars in the duct of a wall-mounted or foor-standing enclosure (04024).
b From busbars in the rear of a wall-mounted or foor-standing enclosure (04029).
Busbar connection
D
D
3
8
1
6
7
2
.
e
p
s
04012.
Connection between 200 A Multiclip and Powerclip insulated busbars
(enclosure)
04021
D
D
3
8
1
6
7
0
.
e
p
s
Connection between 200 A Multiclip and busbars in a duct (enclosure) 04024
Connection between 200 A Multiclip and rear busbars (enclosure) 04029
Distribution
b 200 A Multiclip, 2P (04012):
v 12 connection points for phase and neutral
b 200 A Multiclip, 3P and 4P (04013 and 04014):
v 12 connection points for each phase
v 18 connection points for the neutral
b 160 A Multiclip, 4P, 1/2 row (04018):
v 6 connection points for each phase
v 9 connection points for the neutral
Each connection point can receive a single 10 mm cable, either fexible or rigid.
Installation
b clipped onto the rear of modular rail
b screwed to plain or slotted backplate.
Supplied with:
b 100 mm long, bared 10 mm copper connections
v 200 A Multiclip, 2P, 3P and 4P (04012, 04013 et 04014): 2 sets of 12 connections
v 160 A Multiclip, 1/2 row (04018): 1 set of 12 connections
b protection covers for the supply terminals (IPxxB)
b the hardware required for the supply terminals.
04013.
D
D
3
8
1
6
7
1
.
e
p
s
04014.
D
D
3
8
1
6
7
3
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
3
6
5
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
3
4
7
2
.
e
p
s
04018.
Supply from busbars in the duct of a cubicle
(connection 04024).
Supply from Powerclip busbars in a cubicle
(connection 04021).
B-61
BOOK EN.indb 61 19/10/2011 14:41:03
Distribution
Polypact distribution block
Presentation
Polypact is a horizontal distribution block. It connects directly to the mounting plate
and can supply:
three four-pole and four three-pole Compact NSX circuit breakers, whatever the
ratings (100, 160 or 250 A), the operating systems (toggle, rotary handle, motor
mechanism), whether fxed or plug-in, front or rear connection (the circuit breakers
must be equipped with long terminal shields downstream)
three three-pole or four-pole Interpact INS switch-disconnectors, whatever the
ratings (100, 160 or 250 A), whether front or rear connection.
The design and small size blend perfectly with the devices.
It can be supplied by fat or Linergy busbars positioned to the left or right.
A dependable switchboard
Fully insulated, Polypact contributes to the safety of life and property.
The prefabricated connections supplied separately are secured using torque nuts to
ensure the correct tightness over time, without maintenance.
Numerous and well distributed vents ensure natural convection and optimum cooling
of the conductors.
An upgradeable switchboard
The circuit breakers can be easily connected from the front. It is simple to
interchange a device or to add a device in a reserve slot.
Functional features
There are markings (N, L1, L2, L3) on the front and the sides for the phases.
The running of auxiliary cables between the devices and the corresponding terminal
blocks is also taken into account. Spacious trunking is built into the blocks for
the auxiliary wiring.
Cat. no. selection
P
D
3
9
0
5
6
9
R
.
e
p
s
P
D
3
9
0
5
7
0
R
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
3
5
9
2
.
e
p
s
Fixed Compact NSX100/250 with toggle and Interpact INS250
Connection to Linergy busbars Cat. no.
Polypact with prefabricated connections
Three-pole distribution block 04403
Four-pole distribution block 04404
Fixed/plug-in Compact NSX, all operating systems
(1) (2)
Connection to fat or Linergy busbars Cat. no.
Polypact with prefabricated connections
Polypact without connection
(3)
(1) For plug-in Compact NSX circuit breakers, order the adapter LV429306 (3P)
or LV429307 (4P) with the base.
(2) The connection of a Polypact distribution block using prefabricated connections or insulated
fexible bars is not compatible with Form 2 partitioning (04922).
In this case, use the form 2 restoration kit (04924): see page B-38.
(3) Make the connection with fexible bars, 32 x 8 mm (04753): see page B-64.
b In (A): distribution-block derating follows the normal
derating curves of Compact NSX and Interpact INS devices.
b Rated insulation level: 750 V
b Impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV
b Short-circuit withstand current compatible with the breaking capacity
of the Compact NS circuit breakers connected to the distribution block.
Remark
For most installations, the temperature around the switchboard is 40 C,
corresponding to an average temperature of 60 C inside the switchboard.
Under certain conditions, the temperature inside the switchboard may be different,
for example if the room temperature is higher than 40 C or if the cubicle is equipped
with a fan.
B-62
BOOK EN.indb 62 19/10/2011 14:41:05
Distribution
Polypact selection table for special cases
In (A) as a function of the temperature inside the switchboard
Temperature (C) 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
I
nc
(A) Polypact 3P 800 800 775 750 725 700 675
Polypact 4P 675 675 655 635 615 595 570
b To obtain the maximum permissible current for the Polypact distribution block,
apply the rated diversity factor RDF:
b Polypact 3P: RDF = 0.8
b Polypact 4P: RDF = 0.9.
Supplied with:
b self-adhesive labels to mark the phases for the connections to the busbars.
D
D
3
8
1
2
4
7
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
2
4
9
.
e
p
s
04404. 04408.
D
d
3
8
1
2
5
0
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
2
5
1
.
e
p
s
Supply of three NSX100/250 four-pole devices
equipped with long terminal shields
downstream.
Auxiliary wires running in the built-in trunking.
D
d
3
8
3
5
9
3
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
2
5
3
.
e
p
s
Phase marking on the front of the distribution
block.
Phase marking on the side of the distribution
block. Identifcation labels on the fexible
connections.
Tooth-caps
D
d
3
8
3
5
9
4
.
e
p
s
The caps block off the reserve terminals on a Polypact three-pole or four-pole
distribution block.
Made of an insulating material, they simply clip on from the front.
D
d
3
8
1
2
5
5
.
e
p
s
B-63
BOOK EN.indb 63 19/10/2011 14:41:06
Distribution
Presentation
The insulated fexible bars are tested in a type-tested switchboard environment.
Their design takes into account the switchboard architecture where they are often
in close proximity to a protection device (circuit breaker or fuse) with signifcant heat
losses.
In-depth knowledge of switchboard architecture and the connected devices led
to the establishment of a selection table based on the type of device.
Flexible bars are 1800 mm long and made of copper with an insulating sheath.
Rated insulation level Ui = 1000 V.
The sizes for the fexible bars indicated below take into account the heat losses
of Schneider devices in a Prisma Plus switchboard.
D
D
3
8
1
6
5
9
.
e
p
s
Catalogue number selection
Connection between device and busbars
The fexible bars are determined taking into account the connected device, whatever
the internal temperature of the switchboard.
The bar sizes indicated below take into account the derating curves of devices.
Device Size (mm) Cat. no.
NSX100 20 x 2 04742
NSX160/250 20 x 3
(1)
04743
NSX400 32 x 5 04751
NSX630 32 x 8 04753
INS125/160 20 x 2 04742
INS250 20 x 3 04743
INS400 32 x 5 04751
INS630 32 x 6 04752
200 A Multiclip 20 x 3 04743
Polypact, 3P
(2)
32 x 8 04753
Polypact, 4P
(2)
32 x 8 04753
Fupact 250 24 x 5 04746
Fupact 400 32 x 5 04751
Fupact 630 32 x 8 04753
(1) To connect a Compact NSX250 to Powerclip busbars, use a 24 x 5 mm fexible bar (04746).
(2)The connection of a Polypact distribution block using insulated fexible bars is not compatible
with Form 2 partitioning (04922).
In this case, use the form 2 restoration kit 04924 (see page B-38).
b Connection between busbars
Flexible bars are designed for connections between busbars taking into account
the following characteristics:
b a maximum temperature of 60 C inside the switchboard. This corresponds to
the average temperature inside a switchboard for an ambient temperature of 35 C
b the maximum withstand temperature for the insulating material is 125 C.
Ie max. (A) Size (mm) Cat. no.
200 20 x 2 04742
250 20 x 3 04743
400 24 x 5 04746
520 32 x 5 04751
580 32 x 6 04752
660 32 x 8 04753
D
D
3
8
2
0
0
8
.
e
p
s
Insulated flexible bars
B-64
BOOK EN.indb 64 19/10/2011 14:41:07
Connection accessories
Cable-tie supports
Cable-tie supports
Cable-tie supports are used to correctly position the cables in the connection
compartment.
They are sold in sets of four and supplied with the necessary hardware for
connection to the framework.
Longitudinal cable-tie supports
D
D
3
8
1
5
5
5
.
e
p
s
Width of cable compartment Set of four cable-tie supports
W = 300 mm 08773
W = 400 mm 08774
W = 650 mm 08776
W = 800 mm 08778
D
D
3
8
1
5
5
6
.
e
p
s
b Lateral cable-tie supports
There are two sizes:
b D = 400 mm for frameworks that are 400 mm deep
b D = 200 mm, this support is added to the 400 mm support for frameworks
that are 650 mm deep. It can also be installed alone.
Depth of cable compartment Set of four cable-tie supports
D = 400 mm 08794
D = 600 mm 08796 + 08794
D
D
3
8
1
5
5
7
.
e
p
s
08794.
D
d
3
8
1
6
3
8
.
e
p
s
08796.
Distribution
B-65
BOOK EN.indb 65 19/10/2011 14:41:08
Cable-tie supports
C-shaped cable-tie supports
b C-shaped longitudinal and lateral cable-tie supports
1600 mm long support that can be cut to length as needed.
Can be secured to:
b universal angle bracket 03581 (for the longitudinal support)
b universal angle bracket 03582 (for the lateral support)
b modular rail 03593 (for depth adjustment).
D
d
3
8
3
4
2
5
.
e
p
s
Cable-tie support W = 1600 mm 08783
Supplied with hardware for mounting on universal angle brackets and modular rails.
Cables can be attached by ties or clamps.
Universal cross-members
b Longitudinal cross-members
Set of two longitudinal cross-members, W = 650 mm.
They are connected directly to the framework (W = 650 mm or 650 + 150 mm).
They can also be mounted on the lateral cross-members (see opposite).
They are used to position and support the cables of an incoming device.
Lateral cross-members
They are connected directly to the uprights of the framework.
They offer numerous positioning holes and can be used to adjust the depth of
longitudinal cross-members.
There are two lengths:
b Set of two lateral cross-members, W = 400 mm for frameworks that are 400 mm
deep
b Set of two lateral cross-members, W = 200 mm, can be added to the 400 mm
crossmembers for frameworks that are 600 mm deep. They can also be installed
separately.
D
D
3
8
1
3
1
6
.
e
p
s
Set of two lateral
crossmembers
W = 400 mm 03584
W = 200 mm 03586
Set of two longitudinal
cross-members
W = 650 mm 03587
Distribution
B-66
BOOK EN.indb 66 19/10/2011 14:41:09
General
The 8.8 class (64 N/mm) hardware ensures precise tightening torques
and a reliable contact over time.
The hardware is designed to resist creep and ageing of the electrical contact.
It is protected against corrosion by a Zn8c treatment.
M8 bolts
b set of 20 bolts + 20 nuts + 40 contact washers.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
0
7
3
7
.
e
p
s
Set of 20 bolts, M8 x 20 04782
Flat washers
Presentation
These washers, sold separately, are required for connection between fexible bars
and fat or Linergy busbars.
They spread the tightening forces and avoid creep of the copper.
b set of 20 fat washers for M8 bolts.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
0
7
3
8
.
e
p
s
Busbar accessories
Mounting hardware
Distribution
B-67
BOOK EN.indb 67 19/10/2011 14:41:09
Torque nuts
Can be used to obtain the correct tightening torque (28 Nm) recommended
by then manufacturer, without using a torque wrench.
Torque nuts may be used for all electrical connections.
D
D
3
8
0
7
3
5
.
e
p
s
20 M8 torque nuts 04759
Voltage tap-offs
D
D
3
8
0
7
3
6
.
e
p
s
20 M10 voltage tap-offs for two 6.35 mm tab connectors 04229
Note: For small lugs (on low-current cables or measurement tap-offs), insert a conducting
washer (cat. no. 04775) between the busbar and the lug.
Mounting chocks (5 mm) for fat
busbars
Metal chock, 5 mm thick.
Chocks are used to maintain the position of rear, vertical, fat busbars.
D
D
3
8
0
7
3
3
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
7
3
4
.
e
p
s
Chock for rear, vertical, fat busbars.
Mounting hardware
Special mounting hardware for the connection of fat lateral busbars to horizontal
busbars.
Assembly of 10 mm thick bars for confgurations with 2 bars/phase (1850 A to
3200 A).
D
D
3
8
3
1
2
0
.
e
p
s
20 screws for connection of two 10 mm thick horizontal/vertical busbars 04645
Busbar accessories
Distribution
B-68
BOOK EN.indb 68 19/10/2011 14:41:10
Terminal blocks
Spring technology
Distribution
Terminal blocks
Terminal blocks for 4 to 16
v
cables, fexible or rigid, without a metal ferrule.
b Connection to spring terminals, no screws.
b Contact pressure automatically adapts to the size of the conductor.
b Only one cable can be inserted in a spring terminal.
b Two versions:
v 4 - 6 - 10 - 16
v
: one incomer and one outgoer for cables
v 4
v
: one incomer and two outgoers for cables
b Three colours: grey for phases, blue for neutral and green/yellow for earth.
b Mounting by clipping onto a modular rail.
b Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV.
Advantages
b The quality of the connection does not depend on the operator and remains stable
over time without maintenance.
b Contacts are insensitive to vibrations and thermal variations.
b Less expensive to apply.
b Permits a frontal connection.
D
D
3
8
3
8
1
8
.
e
p
s
Terminal blocks for 4
v
cables
6 mm wide
Number per set Cat. no.
1 incomer, 1 outgoer
Grey block 2 x 4
v
100 AB1 RRN435U2GR
Blue block 2 x 4
v
100 AB1 RRN435U2BL
Green/yellow block 2 x 4
v
100 AB1 RRNTP435U2
Partition 10 AB1 RRNTPAC442
Grey end plate 10 AB1 RRNAC442GR
Blue end plate 10 AB1 RRNAC442BL
D
D
3
8
3
8
1
9
.
e
p
s
1 incomer, 2 outgoers
Grey block 3 x 4
v
100 AB1 RRN435U3GR
Blue block 3 x 4
v
100 AB1 RRN435U3BL
Partition 10 AB1 RRNTPAC443
Commoning link 2 pole 10 AB1 RRAL42
Grey end plate 10 AB1 RRNAC443GR
Blue end plate 10 AB1 RRNAC443BL
D
D
3
8
3
8
2
0
.
e
p
s
v
cables
8 mm wide
Grey block 2 x 6
v
50 AB1 RRN635U2GR
Blue block 2 x 6
v
50 AB1 RRN635U2BL
v
100 AB1 RRNTP635U2
Commoning link 2 pole 10 AB1 RRNAL62
D
D
3
8
3
8
2
1
.
e
p
s
v
cables
10 mm wide
Grey block 2 x 10
v
50 AB1 RRN1035U2GR
Blue block 2 x 10
v
50 AB1 RRN1035U2BL
v
50 AB1 RRNTP1035U2
Commoning link 2 pole 10 AB1 RRAL102
D
D
3
8
3
8
2
2
.
e
p
s
v
cables
12 mm wide
Grey block 2 x 16
v
50 AB1 RRN1635U2GR
Blue block 2 x 16
v
50 AB1 RRN1635U2BL
v
50 AB1 RRNTP1635U2
Commoning link 2 x 16
v
10 AB1 RRAL162
B-69 400E22120
Version : 2.0
19/10/2011
BOOK EN.indb 69 19/10/2011 14:41:11
Terminal blocks
Screw technology
Distribution
Terminal blocks
Terminal blocks for 35 to 150
v
cables, fexible or rigid, without a metal ferrule.
Complementary offer terminal blocks spring technology for cables up to 16
v
.
b Two colours: grey for phases, blue for neutral.
b Mounting by clipping onto a modular rail.
b Rated insulation level:
v terminal blocks for 35 to 70
v
cables: Ui = 800 V
v terminal blocks for 150
v
cables: Ui = 1000 V.
b Rated impulse withstand voltage:
v terminal blocks for 35 to 150
v
cables: Uimp = 8 kV.
5
0
1
6
8
5
R
_
1
.
e
p
s
v
cables
16 mm wide
Grey block 2 x 35
v
20 AB1 VVN3535U
Blue block 2 x 35
v
20 AB1 VVN3535UBL
Commoning link 2 pole 10 AB1 ALN352
5
0
1
6
8
6
R
_
1
.
e
p
s
v
cables
24 mm wide
Grey block 2 x 70
v
20 AB1 VVN7035U
Blue block 2 x 70
v
20 AB1 VVN7035UBL
5
0
1
6
8
7
R
_
1
.
e
p
s
v
cables
28 mm wide
Grey block 2 x 150
v
10 AB1 VVN15035U
Blue block 2 x 150
v
10 AB1 VVN15035UBL
B-70 400E22120
Version : 2.0
19/10/2011
BOOK EN.indb 70 19/10/2011 14:41:11
Distribution
Stop plate
Stop plate Number per set Cat. no.
Stop plate 100 AB1 AB8P35
Markers
Sold in lots of 25 identical strips.
D
D
3
8
1
5
7
2
.
e
p
s
Marking 6 mm pitch 8 mm pitch
Blank AB1-BV6 AB1-BV8
1 10 AB1-B610 AB1-B810
11...20 AB1-B620 AB1-B820
21...30 AB1-B630 AB1-B830
31...40 AB1-B640 AB1-B840
41...50 AB1-B650 AB1-B850
51...60 AB1-B660 AB1-B860
61...70 AB1-B6670 AB1-B870
71...80 AB1-B680 AB1-B880
81...90 AB1-B690 AB1-B890
91...100 AB1-B6100 AB1-B8100
L1 AB1-B6L1
L2 AB1-B6L2
L3 AB1-B6L3
+ red AB1-BV6RP
- blue AB1-BV6BM
Marking Number per set Cat. no.
Blank clip-on marker
(4.5 x 8.3 mm)
500 AB1-SA1
Marker strips with numbers 101 to 110, etc. up to 991 999.
Please consult Terminal blocks catalogue, reference number: ART960061.
Spring-technology terminal blocks
AB1 XX XXXXX XX XX
Colour Grey Blue
GR BL
No. of points 2 3 4
U2 U3
(1)
U4 (1) For 4 mm only.
Block type Pass-through For protective earth
Conductor size 4 mm 6 mm 10 mm 16 mm 4 mm 6 mm 10 mm 16 mm
435 635 1035 1635 TP435 TP635 TP1035 TP1635
Technology Spring
RR
Example: AB1RR635U2GR: grey 2-point spring-type terminal block for 6 mm conductors.
Screw-technology terminal blocks
AB1 XX XXXXX XX XX
Colour Grey Blue
GR BL
No. of points 2
U
Block type Pass-through
Conductor size 35 mm 70 mm 150 mm
N3535 N7075 N15035
Technology Screw
VV
Example: AB1VVN3535UBL: blue 2-point screw-type terminal block for 35 mm conductors.
Terminal blocks
Accessories
B-71 400E22120
Version : 2.0
21/10/2011
400E22120.indd 71 21/10/2011 08:40:09
Distribution
Adjustable earth + neutral
terminal blocks
Spring or screw technology
Terminal block components
P
B
1
0
1
6
3
8
_
6
8
.
e
p
sb These components are used to build and install a terminal block:
b on the framework near the conductor entry point
b on a DIN rail mounted on the enclosure framework
b at the rear of the enclosure or the interface
b on the functional uprights in Prisma Plus switchboards.
Permissible current:
b 50 mm terminal block kit: 160 A max. at 40 C
b 25 mm terminal block kit: 90 A max. at 40 C
b 6 x 4 mm terminal block kit: 63 A max. at 40 C
b 8-block junction kit:
v 90 A with 1 junction
v 160 A with 2 junctions mounted in parallel.
b 2-block junction kit: 90.
D
B
1
0
7
8
8
3
.
e
p
s
D
B
1
0
7
8
8
4
.
e
p
s
D
B
1
0
7
8
8
5
.
e
p
s
Terminal blocks Cat. no.
50 mm terminal block kit W = 2 blocks Batch of 2 PRA90045
25 mm terminal block kit W = 1 block Batch of 5 PRA90046
PRA90045 PRA90046 PRA90047
4 x 6 mm terminal block kit W = 1 block Batch of 10 PRA90047
D
B
1
0
7
8
8
6
.
e
p
s
D
B
1
0
7
8
8
7
.
e
p
s
Terminal block junction
8-block junction kit W = 8 blocks Batch of 1 PRA90050
2-block junction kit W = 2 blocks Batch of 10 PRA90049
Terminal block support
PRA90049 PRA90050 Terminal block support kit W = 34 blocks
maximum
Batch of 1 PRA90051
D
B
1
0
7
8
8
8
.
e
p
s
PRA90051
Use as incoming splitter block
P
B
1
0
1
6
3
9
_
3
2
.
e
p
s
D
B
1
0
7
8
9
1
.
e
p
sIncoming splitter block kit W = 1 block Batch of 4 PRA90048
For converting terminal block kits PRA90045/PRA90046/PRA90047 into an
incoming splitter block up to 125 A and 50 mm.
Permissible current:
b entry via PRA90046 (1 x 25 mm - 1 block): 80 A
b entry via PRA90045 (1 x 50 mm - 2 blocks): 125 A
Ui: 400 V and Uimp: 6 kV.
B-72 400E22120
Version : 2.0
19/10/2011
BOOK EN.indb 72 19/10/2011 14:41:13
Introduction
In Prisma Plus cubicles, terminal blocks are commonly installed in a lateral
compartment, generally 300 or 400 mm wide.
They may also be installed at the top or bottom of the cubicle.
D
d
3
8
3
7
1
1
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
5
1
1
.
e
p
s
Terminal blocks, see page B-69 .
Terminal blocks
Distribution
B-73
BOOK EN.indb 73 19/10/2011 14:41:14
Installation at top or bottom
of a cubicle
Terminal blocks are grouped on modular rails that can be depth adjusted behind
a plain front plate.
D
d
3
8
1
5
1
2
.
e
p
s
Modular rail, depth adjustable (W = 432 mm) 03402
Width of standard terminal blocks
Max. cable CSA Width of terminal block
4 mm 6 mm
6 mm 8 mm
10 mm 10 mm
16 mm 12 mm
Height required in switchboard
Max. cable CSA No. of vertical modules Corresponding plain front plate
4 mm 3 03803
6 mm 3 03803
10 mm 5 03805
16 mm 6 03806
D
D
3
8
0
7
7
6
.
e
p
s
Terminal blocks can also be installed on a modular rail turned using universal angle
brackets and mounted on lateral cross-members.
2 modular rails, W = 1600 mm 04226
Set of two lateral cross-members, W = 400 mm 03584
Installation in a lateral
compartment
The terminal block is generally installed in the cable compartment,
W = 300 or 400 mm.
The terminal blocks clip onto a modular rail. The rail is secured to cable-tie supports
using universal angle brackets for precise positioning of the terminal blocks.
D
d
3
8
1
5
1
3
.
e
p
s
2 modular rails, W = 1600 mm 04226
Cable-tie supports see page B-65
Installation on a device mounting
plate
Terminal blocks can be directly installed on the mounting plates for horizontally
mounted Compact NSX100/630 and vertically mounted Compact NS630b/1600 for
connection of auxiliary wires.
D
d
3
8
1
5
1
4
.
e
p
s
Terminal blocks
Distribution
B-74
BOOK EN.indb 74 19/10/2011 14:41:15
Distribution
Connector
4 connectors for copper or aluminium cables.
D
D
3
8
1
5
9
4
R
.
e
p
sDesignation Cat. no.
180 A for rigid cables 70 mm 07051
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1) These connectors are designed for use on rear busbars only.
E
1
3
7
7
1
.
e
p
s
E
5
6
8
5
2
.
e
p
s
E
5
6
8
5
1
.
e
p
s
E
5
6
8
5
0
.
e
p
s
07051 07052 07053
Connection
Connector
B-75
BOOK EN.indb 75 19/10/2011 14:41:15
Distribution
Vertical cable straps
D
D
3
8
1
6
2
9
.
e
p
s
12 cable straps for vertical cables 04262
D
d
3
8
1
6
3
2
.
e
p
s
Installation on a mounting plate.
D
d
3
8
1
6
3
1
.
e
p
s
Installation on a modular rail support.
Cover for vertical cable straps
D
d
3
8
1
6
3
3
.
e
p
2 covers for vertical cable straps W = 1 m 04263
D
d
3
8
1
6
3
4
.
e
p
s
Cable running
Cable straps
B-76
BOOK EN.indb 76 19/10/2011 14:41:20
Distribution
Horizontal cable straps
D
d
3
8
1
6
1
8
.
e
p
s
Designation
Cat. no.
12 cable straps for horizontal cables 04239
Horizontal cable straps have the same capacity as 60 x 30 mm trunking.
D
d
3
8
1
6
1
9
.
e
p
s
Cover for horizontal cable straps
D
d
3
8
1
6
2
1
.
e
p
s
Designation
Cat. no.
4 covers for horizontal cable straps W = 430 mm 04243
D
d
3
8
1
6
2
2
.
e
p
s
Cable running
Cable straps
B-77
BOOK EN.indb 77 19/10/2011 14:41:22
Distribution
Vertical trunking support
The 30 or 60 mm deep trunking sections can be installed directly on the modular-rail
supports or on the mounting plates of vertically mounted Compact NSX circuit
breakers.
D
d
3
8
1
6
2
3
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
6
2
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
0
8
6
6
.
e
p
s
Trunking installed on a modular rail. Trunking installed on a mounting plate.
Horizontal trunking support
D
d
3
8
1
6
2
6
.
e
p
s
Designation
Cat. no.
Trunking installed horizontally on the rear of a modular rail. 04255
D
d
3
8
2
3
2
0
.
e
p
s
Trunking installed horizontally on the rear of a modular rail.
D
d
3
8
2
9
2
2
.
e
p
sAligns the cover of a horizontal trunking section (H = 60 or 80 mm) with that
of a vertical trunking section (H = 80 mm).
Designation
Cat. no.
10 adaptable support for horizontal trunking 04256
D
d
3
8
2
9
2
4
.
e
p
s
Note: Not designed for use with Pack enclosures.
Cable running
Trunking
B-78
BOOK EN.indb 78 19/10/2011 14:41:23
Distribution
Trunking
D
d
3
8
1
6
3
9
.
e
p
s
4 horizontal sections, 60 x 30 mm, W = 450 mm (with supports) 04257
Vertical trunking, 80 x 60 mm, W = 2000 mm
(sold in sets of 18)
04267
D
d
3
8
1
6
4
0
.
e
p
s
Cable trunking for doors
D
d
3
8
1
6
4
1
.
e
p
s
Cable trunking for doors, W = 2000 mm
(sold in sets of 30)
04233
Adhesive trunking, 30 x 30 mm.
Flexible trunking
D
D
3
8
0
8
6
3
.
e
p
s
Adhesive trunking, 30 x 30 mm. 04235
Length = 500 mm, inner diameter = 19mm.
D
D
3
8
4
3
7
2
.
e
p
s
Terminal block for auxiliaries
D
D
3
8
1
6
4
4
.
e
p
s
Disconnectable terminal block for auxiliaries 04228
D
D
3
8
0
8
6
7
.
e
p
s
Grommets for wiring through
front
D
D
3
8
0
8
6
4
.
e
p
s
10 grommets for wiring through front 04234
D
d
3
8
3
6
5
3
.
e
p
s
Cable running
Trunking, accessories
B-79
BOOK EN.indb 79 19/10/2011 14:41:25
B-80
Earth bar
Presentation
The earth bar can be:
b a bare earth bar, 12 x 3 mm with 330 mm of connection space, equipped with
a 35 mm terminal and on which earth blocks with spring terminals can be clipped
b an earth bar (200 or 450 mm long), equipped with a 35 mm terminal and clamps
with captive screws.
Earth bar with spring terminals
04214.
04201.
D
d
3
8
1
5
6
0
.
e
p
s
Bare earth bar, 12 x 3 mm with 330 mm of connection space, equipped
with a 35 mm tunnel terminal (for earth blocks with spring terminals)
04201
4 earth blocks with 12 x 4 mm spring terminals (W = 75 mm) 04214
4 earth blocks with 3 x 16 mm spring terminals (W = 37 mm) 04215
04215.
Earth bar with clamps
D
d
3
8
1
5
1
6
.
e
p
s
Earth bar with 40 clamps + one 35 mm terminal (W = 450 mm) 04200
2 earth bars with 20 clamps + one 35 mm terminal (W = 200 mm) 04202
04200. Installation
The earth bar is mounted on two supports that clip onto the rear of a modular rail
installed horizontally in the device compartment or vertically in the cable
compartment.
2 supports for earth bar on modular rail 04205
D
d
3
8
1
5
1
7
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
5
1
8
.
e
p
s
Earth bar mounted on rear of modular rail using supports (04205).
Earth bars
Distribution
BOOK EN.indb 80 19/10/2011 14:41:26
B-81
Neutral bar
A neutral bar is created by inserting insulating spacers behind an earth bar.
D
d
3
8
1
5
1
9
.
e
p
s
Kit for neutral bar 04210

Neutral bars
Distribution
BOOK EN.indb 81 19/10/2011 14:41:26
Distribution
Vertical PE conductor
Linergy W = 1670
The conductor is generally installed in the cable compartment.
A Linergy bar is secured to the framework using three supports.
Selection
D
d
3
8
1
1
8
3
.
e
p
s
Icw (kA rms / 1 s) Permissible current (A) Cat. no.
for bars
y 40 630 04502
> 40 800 04503
Support selection
Set of three supports for a vertical PE (supplied with PE marking) 04657
Linergy connection hardware
Composition of set:
Set including 20 M8 bolts (W = 25 mm) + 20 nuts + 20 contact washers for
connection to cable lugs or fexible bars.
Cat. no. selection
Mounting of a vertical PE (Linergy).
20 bolts for lug connection to Linergy busbars 04766
D
D
3
8
1
1
8
2
.
e
p
s
Flat bar W = 1675
A fat bar is secured to the framework using three supports.
Selection
Icw (kA rms / 1 s) Selection (mm) Cat. no.
for bars
y 40 25 x 5 04512
> 40 50 x 5 04515
Support selection
Set of three supports for a vertical PE (supplied with PE marking) 04657
Mounting of a vertical PE (fat bar).
Horizontal PE conductor
A fat bar is mounted at the top or bottom of a switchboard (contrary to horizontal
busbars) using supports.
Selection
D
d
3
8
1
1
8
4
.
e
p
s
Icw (kA rms / 1 s) Selection (mm) Cat. no.
for bars
y 40 25 x 5 04512
> 40 50 x 5 04515
Support selection
Set of two supports for a horizontal PE 04667
Mounting of a horizontal PE (fat bar).
Connection between PE
conductors
A copper connection plate can be used to connect:
b a vertical PE bar to a horizontal PE bar
b two horizontal PE bars.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
1
1
5
8
.
e
p
s
Set of two connection plates for horizontal/vertical PE bars 04672
Connection between horizontal PE bars or horizontal/vertical
PE bars.
PE conductor
B-82
BOOK EN.indb 82 19/10/2011 14:41:27
Distribution
Vertical Linergy PEN conductor
A Linergy bar is secured to the framework using a mounting kit.
Cat. no. selection
D
D
3
8
4
6
1
6
.
e
p
s
Linergy bar see page D-51
Linergy vertical PEN kit 04656
1600 A connection plate for 10 mm horizontal bar 04636
1600 A connection plate for Linergy Evolution 04602
Contents of Linergy PEN kit
b 4 insulating supports
b 1 neutral disconnecting device
b 1 connection between a horizontal PEN and a vertical PEN y 1600 A.
PEN conductor
B-83
BOOK EN.indb 83 19/10/2011 14:41:29
B-84
BOOK EN.indb 84 19/10/2011 14:41:29
C-1
Enclosures
2.0
Contents
Presentation 20
Distribution B-1
IP30/31/55 cubicles Presentation C-2
Cover panels C-8
Cubicles C-12
Frameworks C-12
IP30/31 cover panels C-14
IP55 cover panels C-16
Plinth C-18
Cubicle handling and rolling base - Lifting reinforcement kit
for combined cubicles C-19
Right-angle kit C-20
Installation accessories C-21
Front plate accessories C-23
Enclosure accessories C-25
Door handles and locks C-25
Air-conditioning accessories C-27
Dimensions C-30
Cubicles C-30
BOOK EN.indb 1 19/10/2011 14:41:29
C-2
Enclosures
Carefully designed in every detail, Prisma Plus
cubicles are the solution for all common switchboard
confgurations up to 4000 A.
A reduced number of catalogue numbers facilitates
selection, while offering the essential functions such as:
b multiple combination possibilities
b an array of interchangeable cover panels and doors,
IP30 or IP55, without adding gaskets
b total accessibility to all connection points in the
switchboard
b wide cable compartments
b high for large capacity (36 modules, each 50 mm
high).The discreet design, with simple lines and oval
shapes in the RAL 9001 colour, mean Prisma Plus
cubicles blend in naturally on all commercial and
industrial sites.They offer 36 modules, each 50 mm
high, of useful space.
They comply with standard EN 50298.
P
D
3
9
0
4
2
2
.
e
p
s
All cover panels and doors (IP30 or IP55) are secured using quarter-turn fasteners.Electrical
continuity is achieved naturally, without having to add clips or earthing braids.
IP30/31/55 cubicles
Presentation
BOOK EN.indb 2 19/10/2011 14:41:30
C-3
Enclosures
D
D
3
8
0
6
4
2
.
e
p
s
Frameworks can be combined side-by-side or back-to-back to create all switchboard
confgurationsup to 3200 A.
D
D
3
8
0
6
4
1
.
e
p
s
Front plates are installed on a frame that can pivot on the framework.
The front can be:
b a plain door (IP30/55)
b a transparent door (IP30/55)
b a cover frame (IP30).
IP30/31/55 cubicles
Presentation
BOOK EN.indb 3 19/10/2011 14:41:31
C-4
Enclosures
P
D
3
9
0
5
7
3
R
.
e
p
s
The framework
The framework is both light and rigid due to the closed sections used for the uprights.
The compact design of the framework means there is 15 % more space available for
devices. There are no sharp edges. Assembly is particularly fast with only 12 screws,
all directly accessible. Uprights have wing holes every 25 mm. A measuring tape can
be hooked to a slot marking the starting point for measurements on the heights
required to mount devices. Marks every 50 mm and double marks every 100 mm
make it easy to count modules.The foor fxing kit can also be used to level the
cubicles.
P
D
3
9
0
5
7
4
R
.
e
p
s
P
D
3
9
0
5
7
5
R
.
e
p
s
Cross-pieces can be removed to facilitate work.
Only 12 screws, all directly accessible,
are required for assembly.
Marks make it easy to count the vertical
modules.
P
D
3
9
0
5
7
6
R
.
e
p
s
The foor fxing kit can also be used to level
the cubicles.
P
D
3
9
1
3
0
7
.
e
p
s
The front plates are equipped with clip-mount grips with a built-in quarter-turn
fastening system for fast handling and installation.The lead-sealing function is
directly integrated in the grip mechanism.
Hinged front plate support frame
This frame provides direct and fast access to the devices.
It is reversible and has two factory-mounted hinges.
Only two screws are required to secure it to the framework.
By pivoting, the front plate support frame provides direct
access to devices.
IP30/31/55 cubicles
Presentation
400E23000.indd 4 20/10/2011 11:18:27
C-5
Doors
Both plain and transparent doors are reversible and designed for quick and easy left
or right-hand mounting by a single person. The factory-mounted hinges are secured
on quarter-turn studs. The one-piece handle clips frmly into place. All connection
points are located on the front of the uprights and do not take up any useful space for
devices. For 800 mm wide cubicles, the doors are supplied with a 150 mm wide
barrier to block access to the busbars. A wide range of locks are available for the
push and pull handle.
P
D
3
9
0
8
7
4
.
e
p
s
A discreet, user-friendly handle.
P
D
3
9
0
6
4
9
R
.
e
p
s
Rear panels
The IP30 panels are made up of two identical and interchangeable half panels that
are easy to handle. They are fat to occupy minimum of foor space. Vents ensure
natural ventilation of the switchboard. The IP55 panels are reinforced (IK10) and
have positioning studs to facilitate mounting.
Side panels
They are easy to handle given their ergonomic design and rounded edges. Mounting
is guided at the base by hooking onto special studs. Similar to all the cover panels,
the side panels are rapidly secured by quarter-turn fasteners.
Vented IP30 panels.
P
D
3
9
0
6
5
0
R
.
e
p
s
The roof
The roof panel is fat for passage under all doorways and includes four holes for the
lifting rings. The lifting rings can be installed and removed without removing the roof.
The lifting rings can be installed without removing the roof.
IP30/31/55 cubicles
Presentation
Enclosures
BOOK EN.indb 5 19/10/2011 14:41:32
C-6
Enclosures
D400 frameworks (depth 400 mm)
D
D
3
8
0
5
7
0
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
5
6
0
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
5
6
1
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
5
6
2
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
5
6
3
.
e
p
s
W = 300/400 W = 650/800 W = 800 with a busbar
compartment
Dimensions of cubicle with cover panels
Height 2006 mm (capacity = 36 modules, each 50 mm high)
Width Width of the framework + 56 mm
Depth 450 mm with screw-on rear panel + front door
476 mm with front and rear doors
D600 frameworks (depth 600 mm)
D
D
3
8
0
5
7
1
.
e
p
s

D
D
3
8
0
5
6
4
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
5
6
5
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
5
6
6
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
5
6
7
.
e
p
s
W = 300/400 W = 650/800 W = 800 with a busbar
compartment
Dimensions of cubicle with cover panels
Height 2006 mm (capacity = 36 modules, each 50 mm high)
Width Width of the framework + 56 mm
Depth 650 mm with screw-on rear panel + front door
676 mm with front and rear doors
Framework combinations
Side-by-side
The 650 and 800 mm wide frameworks are supplied with a combination kit.
To maintain the IP55 degree of protection, an optional gasket must be installed
between the combined cubicles.
Back-to-back
An optional kit for back-to-back combinations is available. It is used to mechanically
connect the frameworks. It is supplied with a gasket to be installed between the
cubicles (for IP55).
D
D
3
8
0
5
7
8
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
5
7
9
.
e
p
s
IP30/31/55 cubicles
Presentation
BOOK EN.indb 6 19/10/2011 14:41:33
C-7
Cover panels
D
D
3
8
0
5
6
8
.
e
p
s
Front panels
b for frameworks 650 and 800 mm wide.
Any of the following can be installed in front
of the hinged front plate support frame:
v a plain door (IP30 or IP55)
v a transparent door (IP30 or IP55)
v a cover frame (IP30)
b for frameworks 300 and 400 mm wide.
A plain door is used (IP30 or IP55).
Rear panels
The rear panel can be made up of:
b two parts for IP30 panels
b one reinforced part for IP55 panels.
A plain door can also be used, notably for switchboards
with rear connections (800 and 1000 mm deep).
Side panels
A set of two panels is used (IP30 or IP55).
If frameworks are installed back to back (double depth),
two sets of two panels are required.
Roof
There is a plain roof (IP30 or IP55) for each size of
framework.
Gland plates
They are mandatory, whatever the desired degree of
protection for the switchboard.
For each size of framework, there are plain gland
plates
(IP55) or two-part gland plates (IP30).
Degree of protection
IP30 switchboard
Use:
b the IP30 cover panels with a door or cover frame
b IP30 plain roof
b gland plates (plain or in two parts).
IP31 switchboard
Use:
b the IP30 cover panels with a door
b IP30 plain roof
b IP31 sealing kit
IP55 switchboard
Use:
b the IP55 cover panels with a door
b IP55 plain roof
b plain gland plates.
If frameworks are combined, use the IP55 sealing kit
for side-by-side combinations.
Prisma Plus cubicle, W = 650 mm + cable compartment, W = 300 mm.
D
D
3
8
0
5
6
9
.
e
p
s
Prisma Plus cubicle, W = 800 mm + cable compartment, W = 300 mm.
IP30/31/55 cubicles
Presentation
Enclosures
BOOK EN.indb 7 19/10/2011 14:41:34
Enclosures
400 mm deep switchboard
For switchboards with front connections.
b front panels
Any of the following can be installed
in front of the hinged front plate support frame:
v a fxed cover frame (IP30)
b rear panel = screw-on panel
b side panels = set of two panels
b plain roof
D
D
3
8
0
5
5
4
.
e
p
s
Parts list for switchboard 1
1 08406 : framework, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000
2 08566 : front plate support frame, W = 650
3 08576 : cover frame, W = 650
4 08736 : rear panel, W = 650 (two half panels)
5 08750 : set of two side panels, D = 400
6 08436 : plain roof, W = 650, D = 400
7 08486 : plain gland plate, W = 650, D = 400 Switchboard 1 - IP30 cubicle with cover frame, W = 650.
D
D
3
8
0
6
0
7
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
5
5
5
.
e
p
s
1 08403 : framework, W = 300, D = 400, H = 2000
2 08407 : framework, W = 800, D = 400, H = 2000
3 08406 : framework, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000
5 08513 : plain door, W = 300
6 08538 : transparent door, W = 800 (supplied with barrier
for busbar compartment, W = 150)
7 08536 : transparent door, W = 650
12 08433 : plain roof, W = 300, D = 400
13 08438 : plain roof, W = 800, D = 400
14 08436 : plain roof, W = 650, D = 400
15 08483 : plain gland plate, W = 300, D = 400
D
D
3
8
0
6
0
5
.
e
p
s
Switchboard 2 - combination of IP30 cubicles with transparent doors.
Cover panels
C-8
BOOK EN.indb 8 19/10/2011 14:41:35
Enclosures
For switchboards with front connections.
b front panels
in front of the hinged front
plate support frame:
b plain roof
D
D
3
8
0
5
5
6
.
e
p
s
1 08607 : framework, W = 800, D = 600, H = 2000
3 08578: fxed cover frame, W = 800 (supplied with
a wicket door, W = 150)
6 08638 : plain roof, W = 800, D = 600
Switchboard 1 - IP30 cubicle with cover frame, W = 800.
D
D
3
8
0
6
0
9
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
5
5
7
.
e
p
s
1 08603 : framework, W = 300, D = 600, H = 2000
2 08607 : framework, W = 800, D = 600, H = 2000
3 08606 : framework, W = 650, D = 600, H = 2000
5 08513 : plain door, W = 300
6 08538 : transparent door, W = 800 (supplied with barrier
for busbar compartment, W = 150)
12 08633 : plain roof, W = 300, D = 600
13 08638 : plain roof, W = 800, D = 600
14 08636 : plain roof, W = 650, D = 600
D
D
3
8
0
6
1
1
.
e
p
s
Switchboard 2 - combination of IP30 cubicles with transparent doors.
Cover panels
C-9
BOOK EN.indb 9 19/10/2011 14:41:37
Enclosures
Made up of two cubicles back-to-back.
Rear connections are possible.
b front panels
b plain roof
D
d
3
8
2
5
7
2
.
e
p
s
Parts list
1 08407 x 2 : 2 frameworks, W = 800, D = 400, H = 2000
2 08406 x 2 : 2 frameworks, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000
4 08578 : fxed cover frame, W = 800 (supplied with a
wicket door, W = 150)
5 08576 : cover frame, W = 650
6 08518 : plain door, W = 800
(supplied with barrier for busbar compartment,
W = 150)
7 08516 : plain door, W = 650
8 08750 x 2 : 2 sets of two side panels, D = 400
9 08438 x 2 : 2 plain rooves, W = 800, D = 400
10 08436 x 2 : 2 plain rooves, W = 650, D = 400
11 08487 x 2 : 2 plain gland plates W = 800, D = 400 Combination of IP30 cubicles with cover frames.
12 08486 x 2 : 2 plain gland plates W = 650, D = 400
08719 x 2 : double depth combination kit
D
D
3
8
0
6
1
5
.
e
p
s
Cover panels
C-10
BOOK EN.indb 10 19/10/2011 14:41:37
Enclosures
Made up of two cubicles back-to-back.
Rear connections are possible.
b front panels
b plain roof
D
d
3
8
2
5
7
3
.
e
p
s
Parts list for IP30 switchboard
1 08607 : framework, W = 800, D = 600, H = 2000
2 08606 : framework, W = 650, D = 600, H = 2000
3 08407 : framework, W = 800, D = 400, H = 2000
4 08406 : framework, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000
W = 150)
8 08518 : plain door, W = 800
W = 150)
9 08516 : plain door, W = 650
12 08638 : plain roof, W = 800, D = 600
13 08636 : plain roof, W = 650, D = 600
14 08438 : plain roof, W = 800, D = 400
15 08436 : plain roof, W = 650, D = 400
18 08487 : plain gland plate, W = 800, D = 400 Combination of cubicles with transparent doors.
08719 : double depth combination kit
Parts list for IP55 switchboard
D
D
3
8
0
6
1
3
.
e
p
s
1 08607 : framework, W = 800, D = 600, H = 2000
2 08606 : framework, W = 650, D = 600, H = 2000
3 08407 : framework, W = 800, D = 400, H = 2000
4 08406 : framework, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000
6 08548 : transparent door, W = 800 (supplied with
barrier for busbar compartment, W = 150)
8 08528 : plain door, W = 800
W = 150)
9 08526 : plain door, W = 650
12 08658 : plain roof, W = 800, D = 600
13 08656 : plain roof, W = 650, D = 600
14 08458 : plain roof, W = 800, D = 400
15 08456 : plain roof, W = 650, D = 400
08717 x 2: IP55 sealing kit for side-by-side combinations
08719 x 2: double depth combination kit
Cover panels
C-11
BOOK EN.indb 11 19/10/2011 14:41:38
Enclosures
400 mm deep framework
D
D
3
8
0
5
7
2
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
5
7
3
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
5
7
4
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
8
0
0
.
e
p
s
Framework width Cat. no.
W = 300 mm 08403
W = 400 mm 08404
W = 650 mm 08406
W = 800 mm 08408
W = 800 mm (650 + 150) 08407
b composition of catalogue numbers:
v two frames (with two additional uprights for W = 650 + 150 mm cubicles for the
v mounting plates and to separate the busbar compartment)
v four cross-pieces
v mounting hardware
v side-by-side combination kit
b for the 800 mm width, the busbar compartment can be on the left or right
b cubicles can be combined side-by-side and back-to-back
b can be equipped with IP30 or IP55 cover panels.
08407.
600 mm deep framework
D
D
3
8
0
5
7
5
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
5
7
6
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
5
7
7
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
8
0
1
.
e
p
s
Framework width Cat. no.
W = 300 mm 08603
W = 400 mm 08604
W = 650 mm 08606
W = 800 mm 08608
W = 800 mm (650 + 150) 08607
b composition of catalogue numbers:
v two frames (three for W = 650 + 150 mm cubicles), equipped with intermediate
v uprights for the mounting plates
v four cross-pieces
v mounting hardware
v side-by-side combination kit
b for the 800 mm width, the busbar compartment can be on the left or right
b cubicles can be combined side-by-side and back-to-back
b can be equipped with IP30 or IP55 cover panels.
08607.
Hinged front plate support frame
D
D
3
8
3
9
3
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
3
2
4
.
e
p
Hinged front plate support frame, W = 400mm 08564
(1)
Hinged front plate support frame, W = 650mm 08566
(2)
(1) Replaces catalogue number 08504.
b reversible for left or right-hand opening
b secured at two points
b can be mounted on 650 mm and 800 mm (650 + 150) wide cubicles.
08564
(1)
. 08566
(2)
.
Cubicles
Frameworks
C-12
BOOK EN.indb 12 19/10/2011 14:41:40
Enclosures
Framework combinations
Side-by-side
D
D
3
8
0
7
5
1
.
e
p
s
The 650 and 800 mm wide frameworks are supplied with a combination kit
comprising six M6 bolts.
To maintain the IP55 degree of protection, an optional gasket must be installed
between the combined cubicles.
IP55 sealing kit for side-by-side combinations (1 kit per combination) 08717
D
d
3
8
1
3
2
5
.
e
p
s
Note: for Prisma/Prisma Plus side-by-side combinations, see page C-22.
D
D
3
8
0
7
5
2
.
e
p
s
Back-to-back
Double depth combination kit 08719
b The kit is made up of:
b a set of hardware for the mechanical connections between the cross-pieces
b two assembly plates to connect the uprights
b the IP55 sealing kit.
D
d
3
8
1
3
2
6
.
e
p
s
Accessories
D
d
3
8
1
3
2
7
.
e
p
Set of 20 screws + wing nuts for framework 08921
Set of 10 screws + combination accessories 08718
D
d
3
8
3
0
4
8
.
e
p
s
Cubicles
Frameworks
C-13
BOOK EN.indb 13 19/10/2011 14:41:41
Enclosures
Front panels
Door, W = 650/800 mm
D
D
3
8
0
5
8
2
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
5
8
3
.
e
p
Plain door W = 650 mm 08516
W = 800 mm 08518
Transparent door W = 650 mm 08536
W = 800 mm 08538
b equipped with a handle and keylock (key 405). For other possibilities,
see page C-25.
Note: the 800 mm door is supplied with a 150 mm barrier for the side compartment, plus a
fnishing accessory to improve the appearance of the upright.
08536. 08538.
D
D
3
8
3
9
3
6
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
5
8
1
.
e
p
s
Cover frame
Cover frame W = 400 mm 08574
(1)
W = 650 mm 08576
(2)
W = 800 mm (650 +150) 08578
(3)
b Secured using four screws.
Note: for 800 mm wide frameworks, the 650 mm frame is supplied with a plain wicket door,
150 mm wide.
08576
(1)
. 08578
(3)
.
Door, W = 300/400 mm.
D
D
3
8
0
5
8
4
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
6
0
2
.
e
p
s
W = 400 mm 08514
Door with cut-out W = 300 mm 08593
W = 400 mm 08594
see page C-25.
Note: fhe door with cut-out can be equipped with front plates for 72 x 72 or 96 x 96 instruments,
see page A-68.
08513. 08593.
Cubicles
IP30/31 cover panels
C-14
BOOK EN.indb 14 19/10/2011 14:41:42
Enclosures
Rear panels
Rear panel
D
D
3
8
0
6
0
3
.
e
p
Rear panel W = 300 mm 08733
W = 400 mm 08734
W = 650 mm 08736
W = 800 mm 08738
b made up of two half panels with vents
b supplied with quarter-turn fasteners.
08738.
D
d
3
8
2
5
6
6
.
e
p
s
Plain door
W = 400 mm 08514
W = 650 mm 08516
W = 800 mm 08518
b equipped with a handle and keylock (key 405).
For other possibilities, see page C-25.
b reversible for left or right-hand opening.
08518.
Side Panels
Side panels
D
D
3
8
0
6
0
0
.
e
p
s
Set of two side panels D = 400 mm 08750
D = 600 mm 08760
Supplied with quarter-turn fasteners.
Side panels for L combinations
Left or right combinations of two cubicles with different depths
(800 + 400 or 1000 + 600).
Set of two side panels for L
combinations
D = 400 mm 08756
These panels simply replace the standard side panels.
D
d
3
8
1
3
2
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
3
2
9
.
e
p
s
08750.
Roof
D
D
3
8
0
6
0
1
.
e
p
s
Plain IP30 roof, D = 400 mm W = 300 mm 08433
W = 400 mm 08434
W = 650 mm 08436
W = 800 mm 08438
Plain IP30 roof, D = 600 mm W = 300 mm 08633
W = 400 mm 08634
W = 650 mm 08636
W = 800 mm 08638
b supplied with quarter-turn fasteners for mounting on the framework
b with markings for cut-outs, if necebbbssary.
08438.
IP Sealing kit
The kit is made up of a self-adhesive gasket that attaches to the roof and a defector.
It ensures the IP31 degree of protection for a 650 or 800 mm wide cubicle, or for two
cubicles (800 + 400) when they are equipped with plain or transparent front doors.
IP31 sealing kit 08711
Cubicles
IP30/31 cover panels
C-15
BOOK EN.indb 15 19/10/2011 14:41:43
Enclosures
Front panels
Door, W = 650/800 mm
D
D
3
8
0
5
8
2
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
0
5
8
3
.
e
p
W = 800 mm 08528
W = 800 mm 08548
b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket
see page C-25.
08546. 08548.
D
D
3
8
0
5
8
4
.
e
p
s
Door, W = 300/400 mm
W = 400 mm 08524
see page C-25.
08523.
Cubicles
IP55 cover panels
C-16
400E23100.indd 16 20/10/2011 11:20:33
Enclosures
Rear panels
Rear panel
D
D
3
8
0
5
9
9
.
e
p
s
Rear panel W = 300 mm 08743
W = 400 mm 08744
W = 650 mm 08746
W = 800 mm 08748
b supplied with mounting hardware
b one-piece, reinforced panel designed to ensure the degree of protection.
08748.
D
d
3
8
2
5
6
6
.
e
p
s
Plain door
W = 400 mm 08524
W = 650 mm 08526
W = 800 mm 08528
see page C-25.
reversible for left or right-hand opening.
fnishing accessory to improve the appearance of the upright. 08528.
Side panels
Side panels
D
D
3
8
0
6
0
0
.
e
p
s
Set of two side panels D = 400 mm 08755
D = 600 mm 08765
b supplied with mounting hardware.
Side panels for L combinations
Left or right combinations of two cubicles with different depths (800 + 400 or 1000 +
600).
Set of two side panels for L
combinations
D = 400 mm 08756
08755. b these panels simply replace the standard side panels
b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket.
D
d
3
8
1
3
2
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
3
2
9
.
e
p
s
Roof
D
D
3
8
0
6
0
1
.
e
p
s
Plain roof, D = 400 mm W = 300 mm 08453
W = 400 mm 08454
W = 650 mm 08456
W = 800 mm 08458
Plain roof, D = 600 mm W = 300 mm 08653
W = 400 mm 08654
W = 650 mm 08656
W = 800 mm 08658
b supplied with mounting hardware
b with markings for clear identifcation of cable-running zones, if necessary.
08458.
Cubicles
IP55 cover panels
C-17
BOOK EN.indb 17 19/10/2011 14:41:44
Enclosures
Plinth, H = 100 mm
The plinth is made up of two catalogue numbers:
b one catalogue number comprising four corner posts + two cross-pieces (front and
rear), that can be used in side-by-side combinations or stacked to form a plinth
200 mm high (maximum)
b one catalogue number comprising two side plates (400 or 600 mm).
Each catalogue number is supplied with the necessary hardware.
D
d
3
8
1
3
3
0
.
e
p
s
Four corner posts + two cross-pieces
(front and rear)
W = 300 mm 08723
W = 400 mm 08724
W = 650 mm 08726
W = 800 mm 08728
Two side plates D = 400 mm 08720
D = 600 mm 08721
D
d
3
8
1
3
3
1
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
3
3
2
.
e
p
s
08726 + 08720.
Side-by-side combination of two cubicles with a
plinth.
Two stacked plinths.
D
d
3
8
1
3
3
3
.
e
p
s
The front and rear cross-pieces can be easily
removed for a pallet-mover.
Gland plates
Gland plates (IP55)
D
d
3
8
1
3
3
4
.
e
p
s
Gland plates, D = 400 W = 300 mm 08483
W = 400 mm 08484
W = 650 mm 08486
W = 800 mm (650 + 150) 08487
W = 800 mm 08488
Gland plates, D = 600 W = 300 mm 08683
W = 400 mm 08684
W = 650 mm 08686
W = 800 mm (650 + 150) 08687
W = 800 mm 08688
08486.
D
d
3
8
1
3
3
5
.
e
p
s
Two-part gland plates (IP30)
Two-part gland plates, D = 400 mm W = 300 mm 08493
W = 400 mm 08494
W = 650 mm 08496
W = 800 mm (650 + 150) 08497
W = 800 mm 08498
Two-part gland plates, D = 600 mm W = 300 mm 08693
W = 400 mm 08694
W = 650 mm 08696
W = 800 mm (650 + 150) 08697
W = 800 mm 08698
08496.
Cubicles
Plinth
C-18
BOOK EN.indb 18 19/10/2011 14:41:45
Enclosures
Cubicle handling and rolling base
This type of base is designed to avoid any risk of cubicle deformation during
transport and handling.
Five different catalogue numbers offer 27 width possibilities (1200 to 3050 mm) for
400 and 600 mm deep cubicles.
b Two catalogue numbers each include 2 end-pieces for handling bases for 400 and
600 mm deep cubicles respectively and the corresponding mounting hardware.
b Three catalogue numbers each include 2 lengths for the sides of handling bases
for 1200 to 3050 mm wide cubicles respectively and the corresponding mounting
hardware.
Handling bases can be used for both side-by-side and back-to-back cubicle
combinations.
In this case, the mounting hardware for one of the sets is used.
L
50
D
D
3
8
3
8
4
5
.
e
p
s
08714 + 08705.
D
D
3
8
3
8
4
9
.
e
p
s
2 cubicle handling base end-pieces D = 400 mm 08714
D = 600 mm 08716
2 cubicle handling base side-lengths W = 1200 to 900 mm 08705
W = 2000 to 2550 mm 08706
W = 2650 to 3030 mm 08707
D
D
3
8
3
8
4
0
.
e
p
s
Combined cubicles equipped with a handling base can be
moved easily and safely on rollers.
08716
08705
D
D
3
8
0
6
5
2
.
e
p
s
Side-by-side and back-to-back combination of 4 cubicles equipped with a handling base.
Lifting reinforcement kit
Kit 08722 is recommended for lifting combined cubicles and can be used together
with handling base end-pieces 08714 or 08716 for severe transport or handling
conditions.
Catalogue number 08722 includes 3 reinforcement brackets for 400 or 600 mm deep
cubicles and the corresponding mounting hardware. D
D
3
8
3
8
3
8
.
e
p
s
Lifting reinforcement kit W = 400/600 mm 08722
08722 08722 08722
300 650 400 800 800 800
D
D
3
8
3
8
3
9
.
e
p
s
A lifting reinforcement kit should be installed every 800 mm.
Cubicles
Lifting reinforcement kit for combined
cubicles
C-19
BOOK EN.indb 19 19/10/2011 14:41:48
Enclosures
IP30 right-angle kit
Metal duct
Used to create and protect the connection of horizontal busbars between two
cubicles installed at right angles.
D
d
3
8
1
3
3
6
.
e
p
s
IP30 right-angle kit 08713
Free support and joints, see page B-26.
D
d
3
8
1
3
3
7
.
e
p
s
Cubicles
Right-angle kit
C-20
BOOK EN.indb 20 19/10/2011 14:41:49
Enclosures
Lifting rings
Set of four lifting rings screwed to the framework.
Use a set of lifting rings for each framework (W = 650 and 800 mm) containing
devices.
When two cubicles with devices have been combined, use a lifting beam.
D
d
3
8
1
5
4
1
.
e
p
s
4 lifting rings 08700
b can be installed and removed without removing the roof
b even if they are left attached, the switchboard conserves its original degree of
protection.
D
d
3
8
1
5
4
2
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
5
4
3
.
e
p
s
Positions of the lifting rings for two combined cubicles containing devices. In this case, a lifting
beam must be used.
Framework stabiliser kit
D
D
3
8
3
8
4
6
.
e
p
s
Stabiliser kit 08701
b made up of four blocks under the framework
b suitable for all types of cubicles, whatever the width and depth
b increases the stability of the cubicle during mounting of devices
b makes possible cubicle handling using a pallet mover or a forklift
b protects the front, side and rear cover panels during handling
b can be reused.
Levelling kit
D
d
3
8
1
5
4
5
.
e
p
s
Levelling kit (set of 4 fxtures) 08702
v can be installed at any time, even when the cubicle is already in position
b maximum adjustment range = 10 mm
v secures the cubicle to the foor.
D
d
3
8
1
5
4
9
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
5
5
0
.
e
p
s
Maximum adjustment range = 10 mm.
Secures the cubicle to the foor.
D
d
3
8
1
5
5
1
.
e
p
s
Recommended positions of the fxtures for combined cubicles.
Installation accessories
C-21
BOOK EN.indb 21 19/10/2011 14:41:51
Enclosures
Floor/wall fxing kit
D
d
3
8
1
5
4
8
.
e
p
s
Floor/wall fxing kit 08704
b made up of two brackets and four clamps
b can be used to offset the switchboard fxing points for easier access
b the wall brackets ensure suffcient wall clearance (at least 30 mm) for natural
convection.
D
d
3
8
1
5
5
4
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
5
5
3
.
e
p
s
At least 30 mm of clearance between the wall and a cubicle with a vented rear panel is required
for natural convection.
The offset foor fxing points are easily accessible.
False foor fxing kit
D
d
3
8
1
5
4
7
.
e
p
s
False foor fxing kit 08703
b made up of four independent clamps
b clamp on U sections (H = 175 mm, W = 70 mm) or I sections (H = 120 mm,
W = 64 mm)
b clamp travel = 11 mm.
D
d
3
8
1
5
5
2
.
e
p
s
Prisma PH/Prisma Plus
side-by-side combinations
To add a Prisma Plus cubicle to an existing Prisma PH installation, use the following
combination kit
D
D
3
8
3
8
4
7
.
e
p
s
Prisma PH/Prisma Plus side-by-side combination kit 01198
When combining Prisma PH and Prisma Plus IP55 enclosures, use the IP55 sealing kit for
side-by-side combinations (08717) together with the side-by-side combination kit (01198).
Prisma PH Prisma Plus
300-700-900
D
D
3
8
3
9
3
7
.
e
p
s
Prisma/Prisma Plus
side-by-side combinations
To add a Prisma Plus cubicle to an existing Prisma installation, use the following
combination kit and a 400 mm wide frame.
D
d
3
8
2
9
2
6
.
e
p
s
Prisma/Prisma Plus side-by-side combination kit 01199
D
d
3
8
2
5
2
7
.
e
p
s
Installation accessories
C-22
BOOK EN.indb 22 19/10/2011 14:41:53
C-23
Enclosures
Front plate accessories
D
D
3
8
3
9
5
0
.
e
p
s
Front plate hinge kit (set of 2 hinges) 08585

Blanking plates
For modular devices
D
D
3
8
4
0
2
9
.
e
p
s
Blanking strip, H = 46 mm, W = 1000 mm 03220
4 divisible blanking plates, H = 46 mm, W = 90 mm
03221
For Compact NSX100/250
OK
D
D
3
8
4
0
3
0
.
e
p
s
1 divisible blanking plates, H = 85 mm, W = 147 mm
03249
Compact NSX electronic trip unit divisible blanking plate 03222
Mode
OK
Mode
OK
Mode
OK
D
D
3
8
4
0
9
1
.
e
p
s
Adhesive labels for mimic
diagrams
Designation Black
10 lines, 900 mm long and 7 mm thick 01005
10 outgoing arrows 01006
10 incoming arrows 01007
10 transformers 01008
10 earth symbols 01009
2.0
BOOK EN.indb 23 19/10/2011 14:41:54
C-24
Enclosures
Switchboard identifcation plate
D
D
3
8
1
7
2
1
.
e
p
s
Switchboard identifcation plate 08900
Identifcation labels
Clip-on labels
Clip-on labels
The clip-on support is supplied with a paper label and a transparent cover.It clips
onto the front plate horizontally or vertically and can be screwed to any support (plain
door, plain front plate, etc.).
Engraving plates
Supplied separately, these plates simply replace the paper labels.
Cat. no. selection
L
IG
H
T
D
D
3
8
3
9
7
4
.
e
p
s
Clip-on label. Designation Cat. no.
12 clip-on labels 18 x 35 08913
LIG
H
T
D
d
3
8
3
9
7
5
.
e
p
s
18 x 72 08915
25 x 85 08917
12 engraving plates 18 x 35 08914
18 x 72 08916
25 x 85 08918
D
D
3
8
4
0
3
1
.
e
p
s
Engraving plate.
D
D
3
8
1
7
1
5
.
e
p
s
Adhesive labels
The adhesive label holders are supplied with a paper label and a transparent cover.
12 label holders, W = 180 mm H = 24 mm 08905
H = 36 mm 08906
12 label holders, W = 432 mm H = 24 mm 08903
H = 36 mm 08904
D
D
3
8
1
7
5
1
.
e
p
s
Symbol sheets
Each sheet comprises adhesive symbols that can be positioned on the
identifcationlabels to immediately identify the type of circuit.
Standard symbols:
b loads: sockets, lights, heating units, etc.
b rooms: bedroom, bathroom, etc.
Special symbols:loads:
b lightning arrestor, gate, swimming pool, etc.
b rooms: technical room, computer room, etc.
Cat. no. selection
Standard symbols. Set of ten symbol sheets standard standard 13735
special 13736
D
D
3
8
1
7
5
2
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
1
7
5
3
.
e
p
s
Special symbols. Symbols on an adhesive label holder.
BOOK EN.indb 24 19/10/2011 14:41:55
Enclosures
Handles
D
D
3
8
4
3
6
2
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
3
6
3
.
e
p
s
EURO handle without barrel 08932
D
D
3
8
4
3
6
4
.
e
p
s
ASSA/ABLOY handle without barrel 08933
D
D
3
8
4
3
6
5
.
e
p
s
Designation
Cat. no.
Ral 7016 standard handle 08931
Can be equipped with all the barrel locks and inserts presented below.
Barrel locks, inserts
The barrel locks and inserts below can be mounted on handle 08930 and on all the
door handles of the Prisma Plus range after removing the standard barrel lock
(key no. 405).
D
D
3
8
4
3
6
6
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
1
2
0
3
.
e
p
s
Barrel locks
Barrel lock +1 keys no. 405 08940
Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 455 08941
Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 1242E 08942
Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 3113A 08943
Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 2433A 08944
Barrel lock + 2 keys no.2432E 08956
Inserts
DIN double bar insert 08945
Screwdriver slot insert 08946
6.5 mm male triangle insert 08947
7 mm male triangle insert 08948
6 mm male square insert 08951
6 mm female square insert 08955
Padlocking
D
D
3
8
4
3
6
7
.
e
p
s
Handle padlocking kit 08938
The kit can be installed on the door handles of the Prisma Plus range equipped with
any of the barrel locks and inserts above.
Enclosure accessories
Door handles and locks
C-25
BOOK EN.indb 25 19/10/2011 14:41:57
Enclosures
Earthing braid
D
D
3
8
4
3
6
8
.
e
p
s
Earthing braid, 6 mm 08910
b The braid is equipped with a 4 mm diameter lug at one end and a 6 mm diameter
lug on the other.
It is used to earth:
b a door or wicket door with devices
b a front-plate support frame equipped with switchgear in a cubicle.
D
D
3
8
1
3
3
8
.
e
p
s
08910.
Earthing wire, 6 mm 08911
The wire is equipped with a 5 mm diameter lug at one end and a 6 mm diameter lug
on the other. The earthing wire is used to earth:
b a door or wicket door with devices
b a front-plate support frame equipped with switchgear in a cubicle.
Highly recommended for mounting on doors of System P cubicles.
D
D
3
8
4
3
6
8
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
0
5
2
.
e
p
s
08911.
Touch-up accessories
D
D
3
8
4
0
0
8
.
e
p
s
Touch-up spray paint, colour RAL 9001 08962
Touch-up paint brush, colour RAL 9001 08961
Drawing holder
D
D
3
8
1
2
0
8
.
e
p
s
Adhesive drawing holder, colour RAL 9001 08963
Enclosure accessories
08910.
08911.
C-26
BOOK EN.indb 26 19/10/2011 14:41:58
Enclosures
Presentation
In most cases and notably for IP30 switchboards, convection takes place naturally
and does not require fans.
However, when the switchboard is installed in temperate environments or when
the degree of protection is high (IP55), ventilation accessories are indispensable.
For more in-depth information on selecting air-conditioning accessories and the
thermal management of switchboards, see page D-84.
Front or side fan
b The switchboard is cooled by drawing in cool external air.
Presentation
The set comprises the fan with a grill and a flter.
It can be clipped directly on the cut-out front plate.
Installation
These fans are generally installed at the bottom of foor-standing enclosures:
b by cutting out a side panel
b or on the front, using the front plate with cut-out for a fan.
D
D
3
8
1
7
0
3
.
e
p
s
Fan 08987
Front plate with cut-out for fan or flter (7 modules) 03890
Characteristics
Power rating: 70 W.
Input voltage: 230 V.
Noise level: 69 dB.
Degree of protection: IP54.
Weight: 3 kg.
Unimpeded throughput: 460 m3/h.
Throughput with counterpressure (grill + standard flter, cat. no. 08988): 350 m3/h.
D
D
3
8
1
7
2
3
.
e
p
s
Filter for front or side fan
Presentation
The grill is supplied with a standard flter that can be replaced or exchanged for a
fner flter.
The grill can be clipped directly on the cut-out front plate.
Installation
The grill/flter can be installed:
b by cutting out a side panel
b or on the front, using the front plate with cut-out for a fan.
Characteristics
Degree of protection: IP54.
D
D
3
8
1
7
0
4
.
e
p
s
Grill with flter (supplied with standard flter, maximum throughput = 350 m3/h) 08988
5 standard flters (replacement) 08989
5 fne flters 08990
Front plate with cut-out for fan or flter (7 modules) 03890
D
D
3
8
1
7
2
4
.
e
p
s
Air-conditioning accessories
C-27
BOOK EN.indb 27 19/10/2011 14:41:59
Enclosures
Roof fan
Presentation
A roof with a cut-out (IP31) can also be equipped with one or two fans.
It is supplied with a cover to protect the fans against dust or falling objects.
It is available in 400 and 600 mm depths.
Cat. no. selection
D
d
3
8
1
7
2
5
.
e
p
s
Ventilated roof, W = 650 mm D = 400 mm 08476
D = 600 mm 08676
Fan 08986
Fan characteristics
Power rating: 35 W.
Noise level: 52 dB.
Throughput: 300 m
3
/h.
D
d
3
8
2
3
1
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
6
4
8
.
e
p
s
Ventilated front plate
D
d
3
8
1
6
7
6
.
e
p
s
IP30 ventilated front plate, H = 50 mm (1 module), S = 80 cm 03891
IP30 ventilated front plate, H = 150 mm (3 modules), S = 250 cm 03895
Located at the top and bottom of the switchboard, IP30 ventilated front plates
facilitate natural convection in the switchboard.
S is the surface area of the openings.
D
d
3
8
1
6
7
7
.
e
p
s
C-28
BOOK EN.indb 28 19/10/2011 14:42:00
Enclosures
Heating elements
N
L
N1 L N2
D
d
3
8
1
6
6
6
.
e
p
s
Designation H W D (mm) Cat. no.
55 W heating resistor 184 70 60 08992
b The resistors can be mounted horizontally or vertically. They prevent
condensation, corrosion and superfcial leakage currents.
They maintain a positive temperature in the enclosures and cubicles when external
temperatures drop very low.
Characteristics
b aluminium case with fns
b turns off at 60 C, turns on at 25-30 C (temperature of the resistor itself)
b equipped with a symmetrical rail for rapid mounting (clips on)
b input voltage: 230 V.
D
d
3
8
1
5
7
3
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
5
7
4
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
6
6
7
.
e
p
s
08994. 08992, 08993.
Thermostat
D
d
3
8
1
6
6
8
.
e
p
s
Thermostat 08998
Used to control the temperature inside electrical switchboards in conjunction with
heating resistors and fans.
Setting range: +5 C to +60 C.
Fixing: clips onto a modular rail.
D
d
3
8
4
3
5
9
.
e
p
s
C-29
BOOK EN.indb 29 19/10/2011 14:42:01
Frameworks, D = 400 mm
D
d
3
8
1
8
7
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
2
2
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
2
3
.
e
p
s
Frameworks, D = 600 mm
D
d
3
8
1
8
2
4
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
2
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
2
6
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
2
7
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
9
3
.
e
p
s
Fixing to foor
Without plinth
D
d
3
8
1
8
2
9
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
3
0
.
e
p
s
A B
300 262.5
400 362.5
650 612.5
800 762.5
Enclosures
Dimensions
Cubicles
C-30
BOOK EN.indb 30 19/10/2011 14:42:02
Cubicle with cover panels
Height Width
D
d
3
8
1
8
3
1
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
3
2
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
3
3
.
e
p
s
Depth
Door in front and panel in rear Doors front and rear
D
d
3
8
2
3
2
2
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
3
2
3
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
3
2
4
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
3
2
5
.
e
p
s
Door
IP30 door IP55 door
D
d
3
8
1
8
3
4
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
3
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
3
6
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
3
7
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
2
8
.
e
p
s
Available space behind door
D
d
3
8
2
2
7
7
.
e
p
s
Enclosures
Dimensions
Cubicles
C-31
400E31000.indd 31 20/10/2011 11:40:24
Linergy Evolution busbars
630 A - 1600 A 2000 A - 2500 A 3200 A - 4000 A
60
23
2000
D
D
3
8
4
5
9
7
.
e
p
s
100
31
2000
D
D
3
8
4
5
9
8
.
e
p
s
150
31
2000
D
D
3
8
4
5
9
9
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
4
5
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
4
6
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
4
7
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
4
8
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
4
9
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
5
0
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
5
1
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
5
2
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
5
3
.
e
p
s
Layout of horizontal Linergy Evolution busbars
D
D
3
8
4
6
0
0
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
6
0
1
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
8
9
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
4
5
9
0
.
e
p
s
Layout of vertical Linergy Evolution busbars
630 A - 1600 A
99
D
D
3
8
4
5
9
1
.
e
p
s
99
D
D
3
8
4
5
9
2
.
e
p
s
99
D
D
3
8
4
5
9
3
.
e
p
s
99
D
D
3
8
4
5
9
4
.
e
p
s
2000 A - 2500 A 3200 A - 4000 A
99
D
D
3
8
4
5
9
5
.
e
p
s
249
159
300
D
D
3
8
4
5
9
6
.
e
p
s
Enclosures
Dimensions
Cubicles
C-32
400E31000.indd 32 21/10/2011 14:46:59
Horizontal fat busbars
D
d
3
8
1
8
4
9
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
7
6
.
e
p
s
Layout of horizontal fat busbars
D
d
3
8
1
8
5
0
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
5
1
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
5
2
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
5
3
.
e
p
s
Vertical Linergy busbars
D
d
3
8
1
8
5
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
5
6
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
5
7
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
5
8
.
e
p
s
630 A. 800 A. 1000 A.
D
d
3
8
1
8
5
9
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
6
0
.
e
p
s
1250 A. 1600 A.
Layout of Linergy busbars
D
d
3
8
1
8
6
1
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
6
2
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
6
3
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
6
4
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
6
5
.
e
p
s
Double Linergy busbars.
Enclosures
Dimensions
Cubicles
C-33
BOOK EN.indb 33 19/10/2011 14:42:09
Vertical fat busbars
D
d
3
8
1
8
6
6
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
6
7
.
e
p
s
Layout of lateral busbars
D
d
3
8
1
8
6
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
6
9
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
7
0
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
7
1
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
7
2
.
e
p
s
Double fat busbars.
Layout of rear busbars
D
d
3
8
1
8
7
3
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
7
4
.
e
p
s
A
50 60 80
D = 400 mm B 284 274 254 D = 400 mm B 284
C 250 240 220 C 242
D = 600 mm B 484 474 454 D = 600 mm B 484
C 450 440 420 C 442
Enclosures
Dimensions
Cubicles
C-34
BOOK EN.indb 34 19/10/2011 14:42:10
Enclosures
Plain gland plates
D
d
3
8
1
8
3
8
.
e
p
s
A C
300 110
400 210
650 460
800 610
D
d
3
8
4
5
5
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
4
0
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
4
5
5
9
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
4
2
.
e
p
s
Dimensions
Cubicles
C-35
BOOK EN.indb 35 19/10/2011 14:42:11
Enclosures
Two-part gland plates
D
d
3
8
1
8
3
8
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
4
3
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
4
4
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
4
5
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
4
6
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
4
7
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
8
4
8
.
e
p
s
Dimensions
Cubicles
C-36
BOOK EN.indb 36 19/10/2011 14:42:11
D-1
Contents
Additional information
Presentation 20
Distribution B-1
Enclosures C-1
After-sales support D-4
Energy effciency with Prisma Plus D-8
Energy effciency with Prisma Plus D-8
Monitor electrical network status D-9
Power monitoring solutions D-9
Local supervision- Switchboard display units D-10
Remote supervision - Transparent Ready D-11
Remote supervision - PowerLogic PowerView D-12
Power monitoring solutions D-13
Installation D-15
Optimise electrical networks D-16
Improving power quality D-16
Installation D-17
Additional equipment to optimise electrical installations D-18
Designing electrical characteristics D-20
Designing Prisma Plus power circuits D-20
Presentation and approach D-20
Designing horizontal busbars D-23
Linergy Evolution D-23
Copper D-24
Designing Linergy busbars D-25
Designing vertical fat busbars D-26
Linergy Evolution D-26
Copper D-27
Designing connections u 630 A D-29
Prefabricated connections for Linergy busbars D-29
Designing connections u 630 A between a device and busbars D-32
Fixed Masterpact NW08 to NW40 - Front or rear connection D-32
Drawout Masterpact NW08 to NW32 - Front or rear connection D-34
Fixed Masterpact NT06 to NT16 D-36
Drawout Masterpact NT06 to NT16 D-38
Fixed Compact NS1600b to NS3200 - Front or rear connection D-40
Fixed Compact NS630b to NS1600 D-41
Withdrawable Compact NS630b to NS1600 D-43
Fixed Compact NS630b to NS1000 - Horizontal D-45
Designing connections y 630 A D-46
Device connections D-46
Compact circuit breakers NSX100 to NSX630 D-47
Designing connections with cables D-48
Tubular lugs D-49
Designing the PE protective conductor D-50
Power circuit D-50
Designing the PEN conductor D-51
Power circuit D-51
Designing customer connections D-52
Prefabricated connections for Compact NS630b to NS1600 -
Top or bottom front connection D-52
Prefabricated connections for Masterpact NT06 to NT16 -
Top or bottom front connection D-53
Connection transfer assembly for horizontal fxed
Compact NS630b to NS1000 D-54
Fixed Masterpact NT06 to NT16 - Rear connection D-59
Drawout Masterpact NT06 to NT16 - Rear connection D-61
Fixed Compact NS1600b to NS3200 - Front or rear connection D-63
Fixed Compact NS630b to NS1600 - Rear connection D-64
BOOK EN.indb 1 19/10/2011 14:42:11
D-2
Contents
Withdrawable Compact NS630b to NS1600, rear connection D-66
Fixed Compact NS630b to NS1600 - Horizontal D-68
Designing busbars D-69
Fupact INF, ISFT, ISFL - Horizontal Linergy Evolution busbars D-69
Fupact INF, ISFT, ISFL - Horizontal copper bars D-70
Fupact INF, ISFT - Vertical Linergy Evolution busbars D-71
Fupact INF, ISFT - Vertical copper bars D-72
Enclosure characteristics D-73
Selection of enclosures according to the premises D-73
Properties of metal enclosures D-80
Thermal characteristics of switchboards D-82
Thermal management of switchboards D-82
General D-82
Example D-85
Charts D-87
Ventilation D-88
Heating D-89
Practical information D-90
Tools required for mounting and connection D-90
Cable sizes according to permissible current D-91
Connection accessories D-92
Protective circuits D-93
Connection of horizontal to vertical busbars D-95
Installation of the current transformer D-96
Installation of source changeover systems D-98
Storage recommendations D-100
Packing information D-101
Handling on the site D-102
Transport D-104
Cubicle handling and rolling base -
Lifting reinforcement kit for combined cubicles D-105
Connection of busbar trunking D-106
Connection of power cables D-107
BOOK EN.indb 2 19/10/2011 14:42:12
D-3
BOOK EN.indb 3 19/10/2011 14:42:12
Powerclip busbar accessories
1 2 3
4 3 1 2
5
D
D
3
8
4
5
6
0
.
E
P
S
Powerclip accessories, 160/400A 01210
2 end plugs
2 angle brackets support
2 screws
Powerclip accessories, 630A 01211
2 end plugs
2 metal angle brackets
2 brackets for support
2 hexagonal blocks
2 self-tapping screws
2 IPxxB clipon covers for Powerclip 01201
Framework accessories
1 2 3 4
6
5
D
D
3
8
4
5
6
2
.
E
P
S
Framework accessories 01104
4 top sealing components
4 bottom sealing components
4 bottom cross-piece plugs
2 adjacent mounting spacer tubes
Mounting hardware (2)
12 conical washers
1
2
3 4
D
D
3
8
4
5
6
3
.
E
P
S
Mounting hardware D=400mm or D=600mm framework 01108
2 adjacent mounting spacer tubes
2 washers
4 bottom cross-piece plugs
Mounting hardware (2)
Multiclip busbar accessories (IP30)
D
D
3
8
4
5
6
1
.
E
P
S
4 terminal covers for 200 A Multiclip 01202
Linergy busbar accessories (IP30)
D
D
3
8
4
5
7
4
.
E
P
S
12 chocks for Linergy busbars 01109
After-sales support
D-4
BOOK EN.indb 4 19/10/2011 14:42:13
Rear accessories
4 2 3 1
D
D
3
8
4
5
6
6
.
E
P
S
Accessories (IP55) 01101
2 roof/rear panel spacers
6 rear panel spacers
4 IP55 framework plugs
3 white grommet plugs
D
D
3
8
4
5
7
8
.
E
P
S
Rear panel accessories 01106
2 IP30 roof and rear panel fxing systems
8 IP30 rear panel fxing systems
Front-plate accessories
D
D
3
8
4
5
6
4
.
E
P
S
20 self adhesive front plate grips 01093
D
D
3
8
4
5
8
2
.
e
p
s
10 sets of 2 grips quarter turn 01094
Accessory
D
D
3
8
4
5
6
5
.
E
P
S
Plain wicket door, W=150mm 01110
Linergy Evolution busbar accessories
2
3
1
4 5 6
D
D
3
8
4
6
0
9
.
e
p
s
Linergy Evolution connection screwplate kit 01130
4 fat plates
4 fat plates
4 fat plates
24 conical contact washer 8
24 torque nut M8
24 fat washers 22
After-sales support
D-5
400E24000.indd 5 21/10/2011 08:55:14
After-sales support
Side panel accessories
D
D
3
8
4
5
6
7
.
E
P
S
Side panel accessories 01100
16 fxing system IP30
2
1
D
D
3
8
4
5
6
8
.
E
P
S
Accessories for IP55 side panel 01102
16 fxing system IP30
16 cage nuts
1 2
D
D
3
8
4
5
6
9
.
E
P
S
Accessories for IP55 roof 01103
4 lifting ring plugs
6 sheet metal nuts
Roof accessories
Roof accessories 01112
D
D
3
8
4
5
7
0
.
E
P
S
4 lifting ring plugs
6 IP30 roof and rear panel fxing systems
Front plate support frames
D
D
3
8
4
5
7
1
.
E
P
S
Front plate support striker kit for 08564 - 08566 01123
D-6
400E24000.indd 6 21/10/2011 08:55:15
After-sales support
Framework accessory
Framework accessories
D
D
3
8
4
6
0
8
.
E
P
S

CS frame bottom cross-member W400 to be used with old model 08504 01115
CS frame bottom cross-member W650 to be used with old model 08506 01116
CS frame bottom cross-member W150 + 650 to be used with old model 08506 01117
CS frame bottom cross-member W650 + 150 to be used with old model 08506 01118
D
D
3
8
4
5
7
2
.
E
P
S
Frame bottom cross-member W400 to use with 08564
01119
(1)
Frame bottom cross-member W650 to use with 08566 01120
(1)
Frame bottom cross-member W150+650 to use with 08566 01121
(1)
Frame bottom cross-member W650+150 to use with 08566
01122
(1)
(1) Spare parts on stock in RAL 9001 only.
Door accessories
2 3 1
4 5 6
D
D
3
8
4
6
1
7
.
e
p
s
Closing accessories 01105
Screw THF M6 x 16
Stop rod
1/4 turn stud
Stop doors
Hinge pins
Captive nut for frame
1 2
3
4
5
6
7
D
D
3
8
4
5
7
3
.
E
P
S
Retroft handle 01221
1 handle
1 key no. 405
1 handle staple
1 shifting fork
1 Pozidriv screw for handle staple
2 nut + washer with teeth
2 control rod
D-7
400E24000.indd 7 21/10/2011 08:55:16
Energy efficiency with Prisma Plus
Energy effciency the easy way.
Prisma Plus contributes to energy effciency by
integrating electrical installation supervision solutions.
Simple and fast access to key information concerning
the electrical equipment makes it possible to:
b monitor electrical network status to maintain power
quality
b adjust power quality
b optimise electrical networks using suitable
equipment
Solutions designed for Prisma Plus
All the proposed energy-effciency solutions have been designed for use with Prisma
Plus. This ensures easy installation and operation, compatible front plates and
mounting plates, fast and easy connections, etc.
A comprehensive approach
The new energy-effciency solutions are accompanied by catalogues and guides
covering aspects such as special software and communicating devices.
D
D
3
8
4
0
6
3
.
e
p
s
P
D
3
9
0
1
8
0
-
5
0
_
S
E
.e
p
s
Energy efficiency
with Prisma Plus
D-8
BOOK EN.indb 8 19/10/2011 14:42:17
Schneider Electric's comprehensive approach to power
monitoring makes it possible to supervise installation
status in real time.
Two solution levels cover the needs of all types of electrical installations.
A. Local supervision for all types of installations via switchboard display units
b Display of data, e.g. current, voltage, power and energy in real time.
b Improved operation via alarms indicating equipment problems.
B. Remote supervision for small to mid-sized installations with Transparent
Ready and PowerLogic PowerView solutions
b Display of data, e.g. current, voltage, power, power factor, energy and harmonics
in real time.
b Data recording for trend analysis.
b Curve plotting and preparation of reports
Transparent
Ready
PowerLogic
PowerView
PowerMeter
switchboard
display
FDM121
switchboard
display unit
Local supervision Remote supervision
S
i
z
e

o
f

i
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
Monitor electrical network
status
Power monitoring solutions
D-9
BOOK EN.indb 9 19/10/2011 14:42:18
Switchboard display units are a simple, low-cost
solution for basic monitoring of electrical switchboards.
They can be rapidly installed for direct readout of data
through specially designed front plates.
FDM121 switchboard display unit for Compact NSX
The FDM121 displays the measurement, alarm and operating information of the
intelligent functional unit.
Two possibilities for door installation
b Surface mounting using a fxing accessory (requires door drilling).
b Installation in door cutout using clips.
Installation on metal front plates with cutouts
P
B
3
9
1
2
9
1
-
5
7
.
e
p
s
Metal front plate with cut-outs, 3 modules (for four 96 x 96 mm devices) 03911
D
d
3
8
1
7
1
1
.
e
p
s
P
E
8
6
1
5
8
-
3
7
.
e
p
s
PowerMeter switchboard display
PowerMeter devices are compatible with all intelligent functional units via their
Modbus communication port (except Compact NSX) and can also be used as an
interface between the communication gateway and the intelligent device to combine
both local and remote monitoring.
Installation on metal front plates with cutouts
Metal front plate with cut-outs, 3 modules (for one 96 x 96 device) 03913

D
D
3
8
3
6
6
2
.
e
p
s
status
Local supervision
Switchboard display units
D-10
BOOK EN.indb 10 19/10/2011 14:42:19
D
D
3
8
4
0
6
3
.
e
p
s
Transparent Ready is the Schneider Electric solution to access information without
specifc software. With a simple interface and a standard web browser, users can
choose the information they want to display via web pages.
Functions
b Energy management using Transparent Ready to forward information on current,
voltage, power factor, etc.
b Equipment management through monitoring of equipment state and maintenance
needs.
b Monitoring of power quality with a full panorama of energy characteristics that are
updated daily.
D
D
3
8
4
0
6
6
_
S
E
.
e
p
s
Typical solution
b Intelligent devices.
b Modbus interface module for each Compact NSX.
b Modbus network for all devices in the switchboard.
b Connection of the entire network to an EGX400 communication gateway including
web pages and an Ethernet connection.
status
Remote supervision
Transparent Ready
D-11
BOOK EN.indb 11 19/10/2011 14:42:20
P
E
8
6
1
0
6
.
e
p
s
PowerLogic PowerView is a complete power monitoring solution for small to
midsized sites.
The software, easy to install and use, includes the drivers required for serial and
Ethernet connections. It is ideal for monitoring small to mid-sized sites.
Functions
Energy management with real-time display of current, voltage, power, power factor,
energy, demand power, demand current and total harmonic distortion (THD).
b Supervision of equipment and preventive maintenance.
b Strategic planning to avoid system down time.
b Display of curves in Excel.
b Preparation of reports.
Typical solution
Serial link
b Modbus interface module for each Compact NSX
b Connection of switchboard to local Modbus network.
Ethernet link
b Modbus interface module for each Compact NSX.
b Connection of switchboard via an EGX100 communication gateway to the
b Ethernet network.
D
D
3
8
4
0
6
7
_
S
E
.
e
p
s
status
Remote supervision PowerLogic
PowerView
D-12
BOOK EN.indb 12 19/10/2011 14:42:22
Communicating devices
Intelligent functional units (e.g. Masterpact, Compact NSX) in the switchboard can
provide power monitoring functions without any additional installation requirements.
Prisma Plus is perfectly suited in terms of device layout, installation on mounting
plates, use of specially designed front plates, etc.
P
B
1
0
3
2
0
8
-
3
3
.
e
p
s
P
B
1
0
0
7
0
8
_
2
0
_
S
E
.e
p
s
Device Installation
Designation
Masterpact See page A-5
Compact NSX -
PM710.
Other intelligent functional units from the motor control range such as TeSys U are
also very easy to install and set up.
Note: for more information, see pages 212-213 in the catalogue and the catalogue Contrle
Commande Moteur
M
3 a
D
B
1
0
7
8
4
9
.
e
p
s
Modbus interface module
Compact NSX devices require a Modbus interface module for data transmission.
The devices are installed on a stacking accessory that can be clip-mounted on a
modular rail.
D
D
3
8
4
0
6
5
.
e
p
s
Device Installation
No. of vertical
modules
plate
Designation
Modbus interface Module 4 03401 03805
Note: Modbus interface modules are set up either manually or using RSU software
(see the ULP guide).
Communication gateway
For remote operation, the Prisma Plus intelligent-switchboard offers two
communication gateways, the EGX100 and 400. The EGX400 is also a web server
with a 16 MB memory.
They transmit data over Ethernet networks and can be easily installed in the
switchboard on a modular rail.
D
B
1
0
7
8
5
1
_
3
3
_
S
E
.e
p
s
Device Installation
No. of vertical
modules
plate
Designation
EGX100 4 03401 03805
EGX400 8 03401 03807
EGX100.
P
B
1
0
0
7
0
4
_
6
8
_
S
E
.e
p
s
EGX400.
status
D-13
BOOK EN.indb 13 19/10/2011 14:42:28
Power monitoring units
Circuit monitor CM
PowerLogic CM3000 and CM4000 circuit monitors are high-performance power
monitoring units that can be installed on incoming devices, at the head of the
switchboard, or on critical outgoing circuits. They offer a wide range of measurement
possibilities and integrate easily in supervision systems thanks to their Ethernet
capabilities and on-board web server. They are Transparent Ready.
Functions
b Recording of electrical installation parameters.
b Cost control.
b Power quality improvement and reduced downtime
Installation
0
5
9
1
6
2
_
4
2
_
S
E
.
e
p
s
modules
Mounting
plate
Cut-out front
plate
Plain front
plate
Powerlogic system
CM 4000
D
D
3
8
1
7
1
6
.
e
p
s
Circuit Monitor CM
Circuit Monitor CM3000 4 03571 03918 03804

Circuit Monitor CM4000 4 03572 03918 03806

status
D-14
BOOK EN.indb 14 19/10/2011 14:42:28
Simple wiring makes for fast and easy installation of
the supervision system in the switchboard.
Schneider Electric provides all the tools required to
produce intelligent switchboards while maintaining
the criteria that make Prisma Plus stand out, i.e. safety,
quality and simplicity.
D
D
3
8
4
0
6
4
.
e
p
s
Masterpact
NW 2500A
EGX
100
NSX
630A
NSX
630A
NSX
630A
NSX
630A
Rseau ULP
Rseau Modbus
I
F
M
FDM
121
FDM
121
FDM
121
FDM
121
PM
800
Tesys U
Tesys U
Ethernet
D
D
3
8
4
0
5
5
.
e
p
s
Example of a communication network in a switchboard combining power distribution and motor control.
Wiring rules
Some care is required in setting up a communicating circuit in a switchboard.
The cables must be as short as possible to avoid loops that cause stray currents
generated by magnetic felds.
For more information on wiring rules, please see the installation guide.
E
2
0
5
4
3
.
e
p
s
status
Installation
D-15
400E15000.indd 15 20/10/2011 11:41:10
To improve power quality, Schneider Electric proposes
two power-factor correction systems, Varpact and
Varplus.
Both are designed for optimum installation in Prisma
Plus.
Varpact
Prisma Plus enclosures are designed for installation of the new Varpact power-factor
correction modules that improve the quality of the electrical distribution system and
reduce consumption of reactive energy.
The modules are made up of capacitors, contactors and devices protecting against
internal faults.
Installation
see page A-59 for information on installation in the enclosure.
D
D
3
8
3
6
6
0
.
e
p
s
Varpact Classic and Comfort installation.
51212 -122 06 123
Harmony 215Hz
30 + 60Kvar - 400V
6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V
50Hz
EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1
Made in France
D
d
3
8
3
6
2
8
.
e
p
s
Varpact Harmony installation.
Varplus
2
The Varplus kit system combines capacitors, contactors and a fuse holder.
It is intended for the installation of power-factor correction equipment in enclosures
650 mm wide.
Installation
See page A-60 for information on installation in the enclosure.
D
D
3
8
3
6
6
3
.
e
p
s
Vertical installation mounting plate Varplus (03975).
D
D
3
8
3
7
2
6
.
e
p
s
Horizontal installation mounting plate Varplus (03978).
Optimise electrical networks
Improving power quality
D-16
BOOK EN.indb 16 19/10/2011 14:42:31
Power-factor correction modules equipped with busbars can be connected by
busbar joints.
The modules without busbars can be supplied by vertical busbars, e.g. Linergy.
G
A
C
D
B
E
F
51212 -122 06 123
Harmony 215Hz
30 + 60Kvar - 400V
6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V
50Hz
EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1
Made in France
51212 -122 06 123
Harmony 215Hz
30 + 60Kvar - 400V
6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V
50Hz
EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1
Made in France
51212 -122 06 123
Harmony 215Hz
30 + 60Kvar - 400V
6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V
50Hz
EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1
Made in France
51212 -122 06 123
Harmony 215Hz
30 + 60Kvar - 400V
6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V
50Hz
EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1
Made in France
51212 -122 06 123
Harmony 215Hz
30 + 60Kvar - 400V
6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V
50Hz
EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1
Made in France
51212 -122 06 123
Harmony 215Hz
30 + 60Kvar - 400V
6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V
50Hz
EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1
Made in France
51212 -122 06 123
Harmony 215Hz
30 + 60Kvar - 400V
6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V
50Hz
EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1
Made in France
51212 -122 06 123
Harmony 215Hz
30 + 60Kvar - 400V
6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V
50Hz
EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1
Made in France
D
D
3
8
4
5
8
3
.
E
P
S
Installation
D-17
BOOK EN.indb 17 19/10/2011 14:42:34
During design or during subsequent operation,
electrical installations are increasingly outftted with
components designed to optimise energy
consumption.
With Prisma Plus, most of these products can already
be added to the switchboard.
By limiting the temperature within the switchboard, it is
possible to extend the life of the equipment and
optimise its use.
In addition, electricity consumption is reduced because
equipment in good condition has lower losses.
Heaters
Heaters contribute to equipment optimisation by limiting condensation, corrosion
and, above all, leakage currents along surfaces.
Installation and characteristics
See page C-29.
D
d
3
8
1
6
6
6
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
6
6
7
.
e
p
s
Fans
Several types of fans are available: enclosure wall or roof-mount versions.
They are particularly useful for switchboards installed in temperate environments or
when the degree of protection of the enclosure is high (IP55).
Installation and characteristics See page C-27 and page C-28.
D
D
3
8
1
7
0
3
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
2
3
1
5
.
e
p
s
Thermostat
Thermostats are used to limit the temperature inside switchboards when heaters and
fans are installed, thus reducing heat losses.
Installation and characteristics
See page C-29.
D
d
3
8
1
6
6
8
.
e
p
s
Installation
Heaters and thermostats simply clip onto a modular rail.
D
D
3
8
4
0
5
4
.
e
p
s
Additional equipment to optimise
electrical installations
D-18
BOOK EN.indb 18 19/10/2011 14:42:37
D-19
BOOK EN.indb 19 19/10/2011 14:42:37
D-20
The Prisma Plus system takes into account the
installation and connection conditions of
Schneider Electric devices.
The entire installation complies with standard IEC
61439-1 and 2. The result is a type tested switchboard.
In the following pages you will fnd a number of examples, validated for Prisma Plus
switchboards, intended to assist in determining the busbars as well as the upstream
and downstream connections for the installation.
The examples assume that the devices have already been selected.
A complete process involves a number of steps before making fnal choices
(transformer, conductors, protection, etc.).
Schneider Electric offers a number of tools to assist in designing a complete
installation (technical guides, software).
P
D
3
9
0
3
1
1
_
S
E
.
e
p
s
Busbar sizing
The factors that must be taken into account in determining the size of busbars
include:
b the diversity factor.
Not all the loads supplied by a set of busbars are used at full rated load or at the
same time. The diversity factor is the means to determine the maximum load current
used to size the busbars.
Standard IEC 61439-1 and 2 4.7 specifes the table below.
Number of circuits Diversity factor
2 and 3 0.9
4 and 5 0.8
6 to 9 0.7
10 and more 0.6
b the degree of protection IP.
b the ambient temperature around the switchboard.
Designing Prisma Plus
power circuits
Presentation and approach
Designing electrical characteristics
400E42000.indd 20 07/11/2011 15:34:32
D-21
Busbars
The maximum load current for a set of busbars is a function of the thermal
environment.
The type and the size of the conductors must be determined in view of carrying the
required currents taking into account the temperatures reached in the switchboard.
These conductors are subjected to additional heat rise caused by the fowing current
(joule effect) and the connected devices.
The temperatures reached by the conductors and the insulating materials, etc. must
not exceed the maximum temperatures for which the products were designed.
Schneider Electric busbars and distribution blocks are sized to operate without any
particular constraints for the assemblies in Prisma Plus switchboards operating
under normal environmental conditions (standard switchboard confguration, 35 C
outside the switchboard, etc.).
D
D
3
8
1
4
5
9
.
e
p
s
To determine the Linergy busbars or Linergy Evolution required, see the tables
on see page page D-27.
They can be used to determine:
b the type of Linergy busbars or Linergy Evolution, as a function of:
v the current
v the IP value
v the ambient temperature around the switchboard
v ICW/1s.
b Linergy busbars: I y 1600 A.
b Double Linergy busbars: 1600 A < I y 3200 A
b Linergy Evolution busbars: y 4000 A.
D
D
3
8
1
4
6
0
.
e
p
s
To determine the required fat busbars, see the tables on see page D-25 (horizontal
busbars) and on see page D-27 (vertical busbars)
b the permissible current as a function of:
v the number of bars
v the ambient temperature around the switchboard
v the IP value
v ICW/1s.
b fat copper busbars 5 mm thick: I y 1600 A.
b fat copper busbars 10 mm thick: I y 3200 A.
Connection of devices u 630 and
busbar connections
To determine the size of upstream and downstream connections for devices, see
the tables starting on page D-31.
b the size of copper busbars
b the maximum permissible current.
As a function of:
b the type of circuit breaker
b the IP value
b the ambient temperature around the switchboard
b the type of installation.
power circuits
BOOK EN.indb 21 19/10/2011 14:42:39
D-22
PE and PEN conductors
To determine the required size of the PE conductor, see page D-50.
Two possibilities:
b either the equation indicated by standard IEC 61439-1 and 2 to obtain an
optimised value:
S
PE
=
I
2

t
k
Example
v Isc = 36 kA rms C the value of the phase-to-earth fault current = 60 % of the value
of the phase-to-phase fault current (standard IEC 61439-1 and 2 8.2.4.2),
i.e.: 36 x 0.6 = 21.6 kA
v maximum time delay for the control unit: 0.5 s
v k = 143 for copper conductors with PVC insulation.
The calculation is therefore:
S
PE
=
21600
2

x 0,5
= 106,8 mm
2
143
The PE conductor must therefore be a 25 x 5 mm bar (= 125 mm).
b or the Schneider Electric table based on the standard.
To determine the required size of the PEN conductor, see page D-51.
power circuits
400E42000.indd 22 21/10/2011 08:47:59
characteristics
Designing horizontal busbars
Linergy Evolution
Permissible current and selection of Linergy Evolution
busbars
Up to 4000 A
Linergy Evolution Profl
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
Size per phase IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
Linergy Evolution 630 680 580 650 550 630 530 590 500 550 470 520 b
b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
D-23
BOOK EN.indb 23 19/10/2011 14:42:40
Permissible current and selection of horizontal busbars
The goal is to optimise busbar size according to the installation and operating
criteria.
Up to 1600 A
Flat busbars, 5 mm thick
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
1 bar, 60 x 5 mm 890 840 850 790 800 750 760 700 710 650 660 b
1 bar, 80 x 5 mm 1130 1050 1080 990 1000 900 970 870 910 810 860 b
2 bars, 60 x 5 mm 1580 1420 1500 1350 1400 1250 1350 1180 1260 1090 1180 b
2 bars, 80 x 5 mm 2010 1820 1920 1720 1800 1600 1720 1510 1610 1390 1510 b
Up to 3200 A
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
1 bar, 50 x 10 mm 1330 1220 1260 1160 1200 1080 1130 1010 1060 940 990 b
1 bar, 60 x 10 mm 1550 1400 1470 1320 1400 1250 1320 1160 1240 1070 1160 b
1 bar, 80 x 10 mm 1990 1800 1890 1700 1800 1600 1700 1500 1600 1390 1500 b
2 bars, 50 x 10 mm 2270 2090 2160 1980 2050 1850 1930 1740 1810 1610 1690 b
2 bars, 60 x 10 mm 2550 2270 2420 2140 2300 2000 2170 1870 2030 1720 1900 b
2 bars, 80 x 10 mm 3110 2820 2970 2660 2820 2500 2660 2330 2500 2160 2330 b
2 bars, 100 x 10 mm 3650 3280 3490 3100 3300 2900 3130 2720 2950 2510 2750 b
Example
Two 50 x 10 mm bars can be used for a 2160 A current with an IP y 31 and
an ambient temperature of 30 C around the switchboard.
Where possible, use of 10 mm bars is worthwhile in terms of the In/Isc:
b gain in time during switchboard mounting given, where applicable, the lesser
number of bars installed
b for short-circuits, the rigidity of the bars means fewer busbar supports.
Recommendation
Use 5 mm bars for In y 1600 A and low Icw values (40 kA rms).
Use 10 mm bars for In > 1600 A and medium to high Icw values (> 40 kA rms).
Note: The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
characteristics
Designing horizontal busbars
Copper
D-24
BOOK EN.indb 24 19/10/2011 14:42:41
Permissible current and selection of Linergy busbars
criteria.
Linergy bar
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
Linergy 630 750 680 710 630 680 590 630 550 590 530 550 b
Linergy 800 920 840 880 800 840 760 800 720 760 680 720 b
Linergy 1000 1140 1040 1090 990 1040 950 990 900 950 850 900 b
Linergy 1250 1410 1290 1350 1230 1290 1170 1230 1100 1170 1050 1100 b
Linergy 1600 1800 1650 1720 1580 1650 1480 1580 1390 1480 1320 1390 b
Linergy 2000 (2 x 1000) 2200 2000 2100 1900 2000 1820 1900 1720 1820 1620 1720 b
Linergy 2500 (2 x 1250) 2740 2500 2620 2380 2500 2260 2380 2120 2260 2020 2120 b
Linergy 3200 (2 x 1600) 3480 3200 3340 3060 3200 2920 3060 2780 2920 2640 2780 b
Example
A Linergy channelled bar can be used for a 1650 A current with an IP y 31 and
an ambient temperature around the switchboard of 35 C.
Linergy bar
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
Linergy 630 750 680 710 630 680 590 630 550 590 530 550 b
Linergy 800 920 840 880 800 840 760 800 720 760 680 720 b
Linergy 1000 1140 1040 1090 990 1040 950 990 900 950 850 900 b
Linergy 1250 1410 1290 1350 1230 1290 1170 1230 1100 1170 1050 1100 b
Linergy 1600 1800 1650 1720 1580 1650 1480 1580 1390 1480 1320 1390 b
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
3
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
4
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
5
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
6
.
e
p
s
630 A bar.
Cat. no. 04502.
800 A bar.
Cat. no. 04503.
1000 A bar.
Cat. no. 04504.
1250 A bar.
Cat. no. 04505.
D
D
3
8
1
2
3
7
.
e
p
s
1600 A bar.
Cat. no. 04506.
Note: The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
characteristics
Designing Linergy busbars
D-25
BOOK EN.indb 25 19/10/2011 14:42:41
characteristics
Designing vertical flat busbars
Linergy Evolution
busbars
Up to 4000 A
Linergy Evolution Profl
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
D-26
BOOK EN.indb 26 19/10/2011 14:42:41
Permissible current and selection of vertical busbars
criteria.
Up to 1600 A
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
1 bar, 60 x 5 mm 890 840 850 790 800 750 760 700 710 650 660 b
1 bar, 80 x 5 mm 1130 1050 1080 990 1000 900 970 870 910 810 860 b
2 bars, 60 x 5 mm 1580 1420 1500 1350 1400 1250 1350 1180 1260 1090 1180 b
2 bars, 80 x 5 mm 2010 1820 1920 1720 1800 1600 1720 1510 1610 1390 1510 b
Up to 3200 A
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
1 bar, 50 x 10 mm 1330 1220 1260 1160 1200 1080 1130 1010 1060 940 990 b
1 bar, 60 x 10 mm 1550 1400 1470 1320 1400 1250 1320 1160 1240 1070 1160 b
1 bar, 80 x 10 mm 1990 1800 1890 1700 1800 1600 1700 1500 1600 1390 1500 b
1 bar, 100 x 10 mm 2370 2150 2260 2030 2150 1900 2030 1780 1900 1650 1780 b
2 bars, 50 x 10 mm 2270 2090 2160 1980 2050 1850 1930 1740 1810 1610 1690 b
2 bars, 60 x 10 mm 2550 2270 2420 2140 2300 2000 2170 1870 2030 1720 1900 b
2 bars, 80 x 10 mm 3110 2820 2970 2660 2820 2500 2660 2330 2500 2160 2330 b
2 x 1 bar, 80 x 10 mm 3540 3200 3370 3020 3200 2820 3020 2650 2840 2450 2650 b
2 bars, 100 x 10 mm 3650 3280 3490 3100 3300 2900 3130 2720 2950 2510 2750 b
Example
Two 80 x 10 mm bars can be used for a 2820 A current with an IP y 31 and an
ambient temperature of 35C around the switchboard.
Two 80 x 10 mm bars installed separately in two busbar compartments can be used
for a 3200 A current with an IP y 31 and an ambient temperature of 35C around the
switchboard.
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma Plus switchboards.
characteristics
Copper
D-27
100E42030.indd 27 20/10/2011 11:46:14
Permissible current and selection of vertical busbars
criteria.
Up to 1600 A
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
1 bar, 60 x 5 mm 890 840 850 790 800 750 760 700 710 650 660 b
1 bar, 80 x 5 mm 1130 1050 1080 990 1000 900 970 870 910 810 860 b
2 bars, 60 x 5 mm 1580 1420 1500 1350 1400 1250 1350 1180 1260 1090 1180 b
2 bars, 80 x 5 mm 2010 1820 1920 1720 1800 1600 1720 1510 1610 1390 1510 b
Up to 3200 A
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
1 bar, 50 x 10 mm 1330 1220 1260 1160 1200 1080 1130 1010 1060 940 990 b
1 bar, 60 x 10 mm 1550 1400 1470 1320 1400 1250 1320 1160 1240 1070 1160 b
1 bar, 80 x 10 mm 1990 1800 1890 1700 1800 1600 1700 1500 1600 1390 1500 b
2 bars, 50 x 10 mm 2270 2090 2160 1980 2050 1850 1930 1740 1810 1610 1690 b
2 bars, 60 x 10 mm 2550 2270 2420 2140 2300 2000 2170 1870 2030 1720 1900 b
2 bars, 80 x 10 mm 3110 2820 2970 2660 2820 2500 2660 2330 2500 2160 2330 b
characteristics
Lateral busbars
D-28
100E42030.indd 28 20/10/2011 11:46:15
Compact NS630b to NS1600,
vertically mounted
D
D
3
8
3
5
3
7
.
e
p
s
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the permissible current for a
prefabricated connection between a vertical Compact NS630b/NS1600, fxed or
withdrawable, and Linergy busbars depending on the ambient temperature around
the switchboard and the IP value.
Fixed
Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
NS630b 3P Cat. no. 04485 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 b
4P Cat. no. 04486
NS800 3P Cat. no. 04485 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 b
4P Cat. no. 04486
NS1000 3P Cat. no. 04485 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b
4P Cat. no. 04486
NS1250 3P Cat. no. 04485 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1200 1250 1150 1200 b
4P Cat. no. 04486
NS1600 3P Cat. no. 04487 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 1450 1500 1400 1450 1350 1400 b
4P Cat. no. 04488
Withdrawable
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
NS630b 3P Cat. no. 04477 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 b
4P Cat. no. 04478
NS800 3P Cat. no. 04477 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 b
4P Cat. no. 04478
NS1000 3P Cat. no. 04477 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b
4P Cat. no. 04478
NS1250 3P Cat. no. 04477 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1200 1250 1150 1200 b
4P Cat. no. 04478
NS1600

3P Cat. no. 04491 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330 b
4P Cat. no. 04492
Example
For a fxed Compact NS1600, 4P, where the ambient temperature around
the switchboard is 35C and the IP > 31:
the maximum permissible current for the prefabricated connection (04488) is 1450 A.
characteristics
Designing connections u 630 A
Prefabricated connections for Linergy
busbars
D-29
BOOK EN.indb 29 19/10/2011 14:42:43
Masterpact NT06 to NT16,
vertically mounted
D
d
3
8
3
6
6
6
.
e
p
s
prefabricated connection between a vertical Masterpact NT06/NT16, fxed or
drawout, and Linergy busbars depending on the ambient temperature around the
switchboard and the IP value.
Fixed
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
NT06 3P Cat. no. 04475 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 b
4P Cat. no. 04476
NT08 3P Cat. no. 04475 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 b
4P Cat. no. 04476
NT10 3P Cat. no. 04475 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b
4P Cat. no. 04476
NT12 3P Cat. no. 04475 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1200 1250 1150 1200 b
4P Cat. no. 04476
NT16 3P Cat. no. 04489 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 1470 1370 1420 b
4P Cat. no. 04490
Withdrawable
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
NT06 3P Cat. no. 04477 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 b
4P Cat. no. 04478
NT08 3P Cat. no. 04477 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 b
4P Cat. no. 04478
NT10 3P Cat. no. 04477 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b
4P Cat. no. 04478
NT12 3P Cat. no. 04477 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1200 1250 1150 1200 b
4P Cat. no. 04478
NT16 3P Cat. no. 04491 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330 b
4P Cat. no. 04492
Example
For a drawout Masterpact NT16 , 4P, where the ambient temperature around
the switchboard is 35C and the IP > 31:
the maximum permissible current for the prefabricated connection (04492) is 1380 A.
characteristics
busbars
D-30
BOOK EN.indb 30 19/10/2011 14:42:44
horizontally mounted, fxed
D
d
3
8
3
5
3
8
.
e
p
s
prefabricated connection between a horizontal, fxed Compact NS630b/NS1000 and
Linergy busbars depending on the ambient temperature around the switchboard and
the IP value.
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
NS630b 3P Cat. no. 04473 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 b
4P Cat. no. 04474
NS800 3P Cat. no. 04473 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 b
4P Cat. no. 04474
NS1000 3P Cat. no. 04473 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b
4P Cat. no. 04474
characteristics
busbars
D-31
BOOK EN.indb 31 19/10/2011 14:42:44
Fixed, top or bottom connection
D
d
3
8
3
6
6
7
.
e
p
s
1
Connection.
2
Horizontal link.
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the
maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a
vertical, fxed Masterpact NW08/NW40, front or rear connection, taking into account
the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Connection
(1)
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
NW08 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250
I (A) 1600 1600 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 1470
(1) In the case of a door mounted at the rear of cubicle, add 10 C.
Horizontal link
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250
I (A) 1600 1600 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 1470
characteristics
between a device and busbars
Fixed Masterpact NW08 to NW40
Front or rear connection
D-32
BOOK EN.indb 32 19/10/2011 14:42:45
D
d
3
8
3
6
6
8
.
e
p
s
1
Connection.
2
Horizontal link.
Connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250
I (A) 1600 1600 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 1470
I (A) 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 1900 1950
I (A) 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2460 2500 2380 2500 2300 2460
I (A) 3200 3000 3170 2910 3080 2820 3000 2730 2910 2630 2820
Horizontal link
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250
I (A) 1600 1600 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 1470
I (A) 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 1900 1950
I (A) 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2460 2500 2380 2500 2300 2460
I (A) 3200 3000 3170 2910 3080 2820 3000 2730 2910 2630 2820
characteristics
D-33
BOOK EN.indb 33 19/10/2011 14:42:45
Drawout, top or bottom
connection
D
d
3
8
3
6
6
9
.
e
p
s
1
Connection.
2
Horizontal link.
vertical, drawout Masterpact NW08/NW40, front or rear connection, taking into
account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Connection
(1)
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 1200 1230 1160 1200
I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
(1) In the case of a door mounted at the rear of cubicle, add 10 C.
Horizontal link
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 1200 1230 1160 1200
I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
characteristics
Drawout Masterpact NW08 to NW32
D-34
BOOK EN.indb 34 19/10/2011 14:42:46
connection
D
d
3
8
3
6
7
0
.
e
p
s
1
Connection.
2
Horizontal link.
Connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1180 1210 1140 1180 1100 1140
I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
I (A) 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 1900 1950 1830 1900 1760 1830
I (A) 2470 2280 2410 2210 2350 2140 2280 2070 2210 2000 2140
I (A) 2960 2730 2890 2630 2820 2530 2730 2450 2630 2370 2530
Horizontal link
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1180 1210 1140 1180 1100 1140
I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
I (A) 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 1900 1950 1830 1900 1760 1830
I (A) 2470 2280 2410 2210 2350 2140 2280 2070 2210 2000 2140
I (A) 2960 2730 2890 2630 2820 2530 2730 2450 2630 2370 2530
characteristics
D-35
BOOK EN.indb 35 19/10/2011 14:42:47
D
d
3
8
3
6
7
1
.
e
p
s
1
Connection.
2
Horizontal link.
vertical, fxed Masterpact NT06/NT16, taking into account the ambient temperature
around the switchboard and the IP value.
Connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
NT06 Size per phase 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1200 1250
NT16
(1)
Size per phase 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 1470 1370 1420
(1) Make the neutral connection with two bars, 50 x 5 mm.
Horizontal link
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1200 1250
I (A) 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 1470 1370 1420
characteristics
Fixed Masterpact NT06 to NT16
D-36
BOOK EN.indb 36 19/10/2011 14:42:48
Connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1180 1230
NT16
(1)
I (A) 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 1470 1370 1420
(1) Make the neutral connection with one bar, 50 x 10 mm.
Horizontal link
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1180 1230
I (A) 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 1470 1370 1420
characteristics
D-37
BOOK EN.indb 37 19/10/2011 14:42:49
Drawout
D
d
3
8
3
6
7
2
.
e
p
s
1
Connection.
2
Horizontal link.
vertical, drawout Masterpact NT06/NT16, taking into account the ambient
temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
NT06 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 960 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 1180 1230 1130 1180
NT16
(1)
4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 b
I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
Horizontal link
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 960 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 1180 1230 1130 1180
I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
characteristics
Drawout Masterpact NT06 to NT16
D-38
BOOK EN.indb 38 19/10/2011 14:42:49
Connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 960 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1160 1210 1110 1160
NT16
(1)
I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
Horizontal link
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 960 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1160 1210 1110 1160
I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
characteristics
D-39
BOOK EN.indb 39 19/10/2011 14:42:50
D
d
3
8
3
5
3
9
.
e
p
s
1
Connection.
2
Horizontal link.
vertical, fxed Compact NS1600b/3200, front or rear connection, taking into account
the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.
Connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
NS1600b Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 b
I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
NS2000 Size per phase 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 b
I (A) 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 1900 1950 1830 1900 1760 1830
I (A) 2470 2280 2410 2210 2350 2140 2280 2070 2210 2000 2140
I (A) 2860 2630 2790 2530 2720 2430 2630 2350 2530 2270 2430
Horizontal link
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
I (A) 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 1900 1950 1830 1900 1760 1830
I (A) 2470 2280 2410 2210 2350 2140 2280 2070 2210 2000 2140
NS3200 Size per phase 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 b
I (A) 2860 2630 2790 2530 2720 2430 2630 2350 2530 2270 2430
characteristics
Fixed Compact NS1600b to NS3200
D-40
BOOK EN.indb 40 19/10/2011 14:42:50
Fixed
D
d
3
8
3
5
4
4
.
e
p
s
1
Connection.
2
Horizontal link.
vertical, fxed Compact NS630b/NS1600, taking into account the ambient
Connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 970 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1200 1250 1150 1200
NS1600
(1)
I (A) 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 1450 1500 1400 1450 1350 1400
Horizontal link
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 970 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1200 1250 1150 1200
I (A) 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 1450 1500 1400 1450 1350 1400
characteristics
D-41
BOOK EN.indb 41 19/10/2011 14:42:51
Connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 970 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1180 1230 1130 1180
NS1600
(1)
I (A) 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 1450 1500 1400 1450 1350 1400
Horizontal link
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 970 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1180 1230 1130 1180
I (A) 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 1450 1500 1400 1450 1350 1400
characteristics
D-42
BOOK EN.indb 42 19/10/2011 14:42:52
Withdrawable
D
D
3
8
3
8
0
6
.
e
p
s
1
Connection.
2
Horizontal link.
vertical, withdrawable Compact NS630b/NS1600, taking into account the ambient
Connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 960 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 1180 1230 1130 1180
NS1600
(1)
I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
Horizontal link
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 960 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 1180 1230 1130 1180
I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
characteristics
Withdrawable Compact
NS630btoNS1600
D-43
BOOK EN.indb 43 19/10/2011 14:42:52
Connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 960 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1160 1210 1110 1160
NS1600
(1)
I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
Horizontal link
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 970 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1160 1210 1110 1160
I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
characteristics
Withdrawable Compact
NS630btoNS1600
D-44
100E42040.indd 44 20/10/2011 11:51:15
Horizontal, fxed
D
d
3
8
3
5
3
8
.
e
p
s
horizontal, fxed Compact NS630b/NS1000, taking into account the ambient
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
characteristics
Horizontal
D-45
BOOK EN.indb 45 19/10/2011 14:42:53
Flexible copper bars with an
insulating sheath
Switchboards that comply with standard IEC 61439-1/2
It is imperative to use the values indicated below that have been validated for the
installation of devices in Prisma Plus switchboards.
The parameters determining the size of fexible bars are:
b the environment in which the devices are installed:
v position in the enclosure
v dimensions of other conductors in the circuit
v ambient temperature around the switchboard
b the characteristics of the connected devices:
v device heat losses
v the type of installation (horizontal or vertical)
v the type of device (fxed or withdrawable).
Only the equipment manufacturer with in-depth knowledge on:
b the characteristics of the installed devices
b the confguration of the installation in the enclosure can provide the correct sizes
of fexible bars for a given permissible current.
Insulated, fexible bars make for easy, fast and fexible implementation up to 630 A,
but higher ratings require sizes that cancel these advantages.
For high Isc values, it is advised to use rigid bars which require fewer supports.
Insulated fexible bars are better than cables, they offer:
b better insulation temperature withstand (125 C for bars, 105 C for cables) and a
larger exchange surface for an equivalent size, i.e. a smaller size for a given current
b greater rigidity offering better electrodynamic characteristics for short-circuit
currents
b no intermediate parts (lugs) for a direct connection between the device and the
busbars therefore less temperature rise and less risk of error
b fast implementation of prefabricated connections already cut to length, formed
and drilled.
Technical characteristics
b thickness of the insulation: variable depending on the bar size, 2 mm on average
b impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 12 kV
b maximum withstand temperature of insulating material = 125 C.
Connection
In all cubicles with IP y 55
b the switchboard internal temperature is 60 C
b the withstand temperature of the insulating material is 125 C.
If the withstand temperature of the insulation is only 105 C, use the next largest
fexible bar.
The bar sizes indicated below take into account the derating curves of devices.
Connection of devices and distribution blocks to busbars
Device INS125 INS160 INS250 INS320
INS400
INS500
INS630
NSX100
(1)
NSX160
(1)
S (mm) 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 3 32 x 5 32 x 6 20 x 2 20 x 3
Device NSX250
(1)
NSX400
(1)
NSX630 INF250
ISFT250
INF400
ISFT400
INF630
ISFT630
S (mm) 20 x 3 32 x 5 32 x 8 24 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 8
(1) The values for circuit breakers apply to contactors with the same ratings.
To connect a Compact NSX250 to Powerclip busbars, use a 24 x 5 mm fexible bar
(04746).
Device Multiclip distribution
block (200 A)
Polypact distribution
block (3P)
Polypact distribution
block (4P)
S (mm) 20 x 3 32 x 6 32 x 5
Disconnectors, terminal blocks, connections, busbars to
busbars
I max. (60 C) 200 A 250 A 400 A 400 A 480 A 520 A 580 A 660 A
S (mm) 20 x 2 20 x 3 24 x 5 24 x 5 24 x 6 32 x 5 32 x 6 32 x 8
characteristics
Designing connections y 630 A
Device connections
D-46
400E42060.indd 46 07/11/2011 15:36:19
Insulated fexible copper bars
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31
NSX100
TMD-TMG
Size per phase 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2
I
nc
(A) 100 100 100 97.5 95 92.5
NSX125
TMD-TMG
I
nc
(A) 125 125 125 122 119 115
NSX160
(1)
TMD-TMG
I
nc
(A) 160 160 160 156 152 148
NSX250
(1)
TMD-TMG
I
nc
(A) 250 244 238 231 225 219
NSX100
STR
I
nc
(A) 100 100 100 100 100 100
NSX160
STR
I
nc
(A) 160 160 160 160 160 160
NSX250
(2)
STR
I
nc
(A) 250 245 237 230 225 220
NSX400N/H/L
fxed
I
nc
(A) 400 400 400 390 380 370
NSX400N/H/L
with Vigi
I
nc
(A) 400 390 380 370 360 350
NSX400N/H/L
withdrawable
I
nc
(A) 400 390 380 370 360 350
NSX630N/H/L
fxed
I
nc
(A) 630 615 600 585 570 550
NSX630N/H/L
Vigi or withdrawable
I
nc
(A) 570 550 535 520 505 490
IP > 31
NSX100 TMD-TMG Size per phase 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2
I
nc
(A) 100 100 100 97.5 95 92.5
NSX125 TMD-TMG Size per phase 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2
I
nc
(A) 125 125 125 122 119 115
NSX160
(1)
TMD-TMG Size per phase 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3
I
nc
(A) 160 160 160 156 152 148
NSX250
(1)
TMD-TMG Size per phase 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3
I
nc
(A) 238 231 225 219 213 207
NSX100 STR Size per phase 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 2
I
nc
(A) 100 100 100 100 100 100
NSX160 STR Size per phase 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3
I
nc
(A) 160 160 160 160 160 160
NSX250
(2)
STR Size per phase 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3 20 x 3
I
nc
(A) 237 230 225 220 215 210
NSX400 fxed Size per phase 32 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 5
I
nc
(A) 400 400 400 390 380 370
NSX400 with Vigi Size per phase 32 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 5
I
nc
(A) 400 390 380 370 360 350
NSX400 withdrawable Size per phase 32 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 5
I
nc
(A) 400 390 380 370 360 350
NSX630b fxed Size per phase 32 x 6 32 x 6 32 x 6 32 x 6 32 x 6 32 x 6
I
nc
(A) 600 585 570 550 535 520
NSX630 Vigi or
withdrawable
I
nc
(A) 535 520 505 490 475 420
(1) For a withdrawable NSX160 or NSX250 equipped with a Vigi or an insulation-monitoring
module, multiply the In values by 0.9.
(2) For a withdrawable NSX250 equipped with a Vigi or an insulation-monitoring module, multiply
the In values by 0.86.
characteristics
Designing connections y 630 A
Compact circuit breakers
NSX100 to NSX630
D-47
400E42060.indd 47 21/10/2011 08:49:29
D-48
Cables
Practical guidelines
Schneider Electric provides cabling recommendations according to the rating of the
circuit breaker.
The size of cables must be selected according to:
b the level of current
b the ambient temperature around the conductors
b the degree of protection for the switchboard.
The tables below take into account the installation conditions for each type of device
(permissible temperature at connection terminals, etc.).
They follow the temperature derating values for installed devices in all cubicles with
cover panels rated IP y 55.
b switchboard internal temperature 60 C
b connections using copper cables.
Connection of circuit breakers
Size of
cables
(mm)
Permissible current (A)
Cables tied individually Cable tied together
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
1.5 16 14 14 12
2.5 25 25 22 20
4 32 29 28 24
6 40 39 36 33
10 63 55 55 50
16 90 77 80 70
25 110 100 100 93
35 135 125 125 120
50 180 150
70 230 190
95 275 230
Connection of other devices
Size of
cables
(mm)
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
1.5 13 12 12 10
2.5 23 21 20 19
4 28 26 25 22
6 36 35 32 30
10 55 50 50 46
16 80 70 72 63
25 100 90 90 84
35 120 115 110 103
50 165 135
70 210 176
95 250 210
Connection of NSX100 to 630 A
Device NSX100 NSX160 NSX250
Size (mm) 25 50 95
Note: Schneider Electric recommends connecting NSX400/630 circuit breakers with insulated
fexible bars or rigid bars, see page D-48.
Designing connections with
cables
2.0
BOOK EN.indb 48 19/10/2011 14:42:55
D-49
Tubular lugs for incoming
connection blocks
Maximum size of lugs for connection to the different incoming connection blocks.
Standard Cu
lugs
Narrow Cu
lugs
Narrow
bimetal lugs
Incoming connection block for NSX-INS250
supplied via the top or bottom, cat. no. 04066 and
04067
150 mm 240 mm 185 mm
In-duct incoming connection block for NSX630,
cat. no. 04076
240 mm 300 mm 300 mm
D
D
3
8
2
7
8
8
.
e
p
s
Narrow bimetal lugs
Cat. no. selection
Cat. no. Cable size
(mm)
Quantity
Lugs for aluminium cable
(1)
29504 150 3
29505 150 4
29506 185 3
29507 185 4
32504 240 3
32505 240 4
32506 300 3
32507 300 4
(1) Supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers.
Customer connection of devices
u 630 A
Maximum size and number of cables for connection to terminal extension bars
(according to busbar drawing supplied) for customer connection of Compact NSX
and Masterpact NT/NW devices.
Cable size
(mm)
Quantity
Size and number of cables
Copper lugs 300 12
Bimetal lugs 240 12
Designing connections with
cables
Tubular lugs
400E42070.indd 49 20/10/2011 11:51:58
Size of PE protective conductor
The conductor must be suffciently sized and securely installed in the switchboard to
accept the thermal and electrodynamic stresses of the fault current.
It must be connected to the exposed conductive parts of the switchboard.
It must be accessible to enable connections both in the factory and on site.
Optimised calculation method
Use the calculation equation indicated in standard IEC 61439-1 and 2.
PE
k
=
S
l
2
t
b SPE : cross-sectional area of PE in mm
b I : value of the phase-to-earth fault current = 60 % of the value of the phase-
tophase fault current (IEC 61439-1 8.2.4.2)
b t : time the fault current fows in seconds
b k : coeffcient that depends on the type of metal, k = 143 for a copper conductor
with PVC insulation.
Simplifed method (based on the equation above)
Use the table below to determine the size of the PE conductor as a function of the
device Isc.
D
D
3
8
1
4
7
1
.
e
p
s
Size of PE conductor All Schneider Electric devices
Isc y 40 kA 1 bar, 25 x 5 mm Linergy 630
Isc > 65 kA 1 bar, 50 x 5 mm Linergy 800
Schneider Electric prefabricated solution
For all Schneider Electric devices for an Isc up to 85 kA: see page B-82 .
characteristics
Designing the PE
protective conductor
Power circuit
D-50
100E42080.indd 50 21/10/2011 11:00:03
Size of PEN protective conductor
The size of the PEN is determined in the same manner as a neutral conductor, i.e.:
b for copper single-phase circuits or sized y 16mm, it must be the same size as the
phase conductors
b for copper three-phase circuits sized > 16 mm, it can be:
v the same size as the phase conductors
v smaller on the condition that:
- the current likely to fow in the neutral during normal operation is less than the
permissible current for the conductor
- the power rating of single-phase loads does not exceed 10 % of the total rating.
The conductor must be accessible to enable connections both in the factory and
on site, as well as checks on the tightness of connections.
Implementing the PEN protective
conductor
According to standard IEC 61439-1 and 2, the practical guidelines for implementing
the PEN are the following:
b at the entry to the assembly, the PEN connection must be next to the phase
connections
b within the assembly, the PEN does not need to be insulated from the exposed
conductive parts (except on sites where there is a risk of fre or explosion)
b the size of the conductor must be at least equal to that of the neutral
b the size must remain constant throughout the main busbars
b the change from a TNC to a TNS system must take place at a single point in the
switchboard, via a marked neutral-disconnection bar that is accessible and can be
dismantled to facilitate the impedance measurement of the fault loop
b after the TNS creation point, it is forbidden to recreate a TNC system.
The PE and the neutral must meet their specifc requirements.
D
D
3
8
4
6
1
6
.
e
p
s
Linergy PEN kit
see page B-83.
characteristics
Designing the PEN conductor
Power circuit
D-51
BOOK EN.indb 51 19/10/2011 14:42:57
vertically mounted
D
D
3
8
3
5
4
0
.
e
p
s
prefabricated connection between a vertical Compact NS630b/NS1600, fxed or
withdrawable, and Linergy busbars depending on the ambient temperature around
Fixed
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
NS630b 3P cat. no. 33642 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 b
4P cat. no. 33643
NS800 3P cat. no. 33642 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 b
4P cat. no. 33643
NS1000 3P cat. no. 33642 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b
4P cat. no. 33643
NS1250 3P cat. no.33642 + 33644 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1200 1250 1150 1200 b
4P cat. no.33643 + 33645
NS1600

3P cat. no.33642 + 33644 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 1450 1500 1400 1450 1350 1400 b
4P cat. no.33643 + 33645
Withdrawable
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
NS630b 3P cat. no.33642 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 b
4P cat. no.33643
NS800 3P cat. no.33642 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 b
4P cat. no.33643
NS1000 3P cat. no.33642 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b
4P cat. no.33643
NS1250 3P cat. no.33642 + 33644 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1200 1250 1150 1200 b
4P cat. no.33643 + 33645
NS1600

3P cat. no.33642 + 33644 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330 b
4P cat. no.33643 + 33645
characteristics
Designing customer
connections
Prefabricated connections for Compact
NS630b to NS1600 - Top or bottom front
connection
D-52
BOOK EN.indb 52 19/10/2011 14:42:58
Masterpact NT06 to NT16,
vertically mounted
D
d
3
8
3
6
7
3
.
e
p
s
prefabricated connection between a vertical Masterpact NT06/NT16, fxed or
drawout, and Linergy busbars depending on the ambient temperature around the
switchboard and the IP value.
Fixed
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
NT06 3P cat. no. 33642 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 b
4P cat. no. 33643
NT08 3P cat. no. 33642 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 b
4P cat. no. 33643
NT10 3P cat. no.33642 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b
4P cat. no.33643
NT12 3P cat. no.33642 + 33644 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1200 1250 1150 1200 b
4P cat. no.33643 + 33645
NT16 3P 33642 + 33644 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 1470 1370 1420 b
4P cat. no.33643 + 33645
Drawout
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
NT06 3P cat. no. 33642 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 b
4P cat. no. 33643
NT08 3P cat. no. 33642 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 b
4P cat. no. 33643
NT10 3P cat. no.33642 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b
4P cat. no.33643
NT12 3P cat. no.33642 + 33644 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1200 1250 1150 1200 b
4P cat. no.33643 + 33645
NT16 3P 33642 + 33644 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330 b
4P cat. no.33643 + 33645
characteristics
Designing customer
connections
Prefabricated connections for Masterpact NT06
to NT16 - Top or bottom front connection
D-53
BOOK EN.indb 53 19/10/2011 14:42:59
horizontally mounted, fxed
D
d
3
8
3
5
4
1
.
e
p
s
prefabricated connection between a horizontal, fxed Compact NS630b/NS1000 and
Linergy busbars depending on the ambient temperature around the switchboard and
the IP value.
Connection transfer assemblies
25 C 30 C 35 C 40C 45 C 50 C
NS630b 3P cat. no. 04483 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 b
4P cat. no. 04484
NS800 3P cat. no. 04483 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 b
4P cat. no. 04484
NS1000 3P cat. no. 04483 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b
4P cat. no. 04484
characteristics
Designing customer
connections
Connection transfer assembly for horizontal
fixed Compact NS630b to NS1000
D-54
BOOK EN.indb 54 19/10/2011 14:43:00
D
d
3
8
3
6
7
4
.
e
p
s
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and
the maximum permissible currents when making a front or rear customer connection
for a vertical, fxed NW08/NW40, taking into account the ambient temperature
Connection to be made according to the busbar drawings supplied.
For connection cable cross-sections and quantities, see page D-50.
Customer connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250
I (A) 1600 1600 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 1470
characteristics
Designing customer
connections
D-55
BOOK EN.indb 55 19/10/2011 14:43:00
D
d
3
8
3
6
7
5
.
e
p
s
Customer connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40C 45 C 50 C
NW08 Size per phase 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 1b 60x 10 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250
NW16 Size per phase 1b 80x 10 1b 80x 10 1b 80x 10 1b 80x 10 1b 80x 10 1b 80x 10 1b 80x 10 1b 80x 10 1b 80x 10 1b 80x 10 1b 80x 10 b
I (A) 1600 1600 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 1470
NW20 Size per phase 2b 80x 10 2b 80x 10 2b 80x 10 2b 80x 10 2b 80x 10 2b 80x 10 2b 80x 10 2b 80x 10 2b 80x 10 2b 80x 10 2b 80x 10 b
I (A) 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 1900 1950
NW25 Size per phase 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 b
I (A) 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2460 2500 2380 2500 2300 2460
I (A) 3200 3000 3170 2910 3080 2820 3000 2730 2910 2630 2820
I (A)
(1)
3680 3680 3600 3600 3520 3520 3440 3440 3340 3340 3120
(1) For NW40 IP >31, performances realized with forced ventilation.
Canalis connection
For Canalis connections, apply the appropriate derating coeffcient K.
Devices NW08 NW10 NW12 NW16 NW20 NW25 NW32
Derating
coeffcient K
1 1 1 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.97

characteristics
Designing customer
connections
D-56
100E42500.indd 56 21/10/2011 08:53:07
connection
D
d
3
8
3
6
7
6
.
e
p
s
maximum permissible currents when making a front or rear customer connection for
a vertical, drawout NW08/NW40, taking into account the ambient temperature
For connection cable cross-sections and quantities, see page D-50
Customer connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 1200 1230 1160 1200
I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
characteristics
Designing customer
connections
D-57
BOOK EN.indb 57 19/10/2011 14:43:02
connection
D
d
3
8
3
6
7
7
.
e
p
s
Customer connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
NW08 Size per phase 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1180 1210 1140 1180 1100 1140
I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
I (A) 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 1900 1950 1830 1900 1760 1830
I (A) 2470 2280 2410 2210 2350 2140 2280 2070 2210 2000 2140
I (A) 2960 2730 2890 2630 2820 2530 2730 2450 2630 2370 2530
I (A)
(1)
3680 3680 3600 3600 3520 3520 3440 3440 3340 3340 3120
(1) For NW40 IP >31, performances realized with forced ventilation.
Canalis connection
Devices NW08 NW10 NW12 NW16 NW20 NW25 NW32
Derating
coeffcient K
1 1 1 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.97
characteristics
Designing customer
connections
D-58
100E42500.indd 58 21/10/2011 08:53:27
Fixed D
D
3
8
3
6
7
8
maximum permissible currents when making a customer connection for a vertical,
fxed Masterpact NT06/NT16, taking into account the ambient temperature around
Customer connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40C 45 C 50 C
NT06 Size per phase 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 b
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1200 1250
I (A) 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 1470 1370 1420
characteristics
Designing customer
connections
Rear connection
D-59
BOOK EN.indb 59 19/10/2011 14:43:03
Customer connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40C 45 C 50 C
NT06 Size per
phase
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NT08 Size per
phase
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
NT10 Size per
phase
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
NT12 Size per
phase
1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 b
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1180 1230
NT16 Size per
phase
1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 b
I (A) 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 1470 1370 1420
Canalis connection
Devices NT06b NT08 NT10 NT12 NT16
Derating
coeffcient K
1 1 1 1 0.98
characteristics
Designing customer
connections
Rear connection
D-60
BOOK EN.indb 60 19/10/2011 14:43:04
Drawout
D
d
3
8
3
6
7
9
.
e
p
s
vertical, drawout Masterpact NT06/NT16, taking into account the ambient
Customer connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 960 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 1180 1230 1130 1180
I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
characteristics
Designing customer
connections
Rear connection
D-61
BOOK EN.indb 61 19/10/2011 14:43:04
Customer connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 960 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1160 1210 1110 1160
NT16 Size per phase 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 b
I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
Canalis connection
Devices NT06 NT08 NT10 NT12 NT16
Derating
coeffcient K
1 1 1 1 0.98
characteristics
Designing customer
connections
Rear connection
D-62
BOOK EN.indb 62 19/10/2011 14:43:05
D
d
3
8
3
5
4
2
.
e
p
s
maximum permissible currents when making a front or rear customer connection for
a vertical, fxed Compact NS1600b/3200, taking into account the ambient
Customer connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40C 45 C 50 C
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP>31
I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
I (A) 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 1900 1950 1830 1900 1760 1830
I (A) 2470 2280 2410 2210 2350 2140 2280 2070 2210 2000 2140
I (A) 2860 2630 2790 2530 2720 2430 2630 2350 2530 2270 2430
characteristics
Designing customer
connections
D-63
BOOK EN.indb 63 19/10/2011 14:43:05
Fixed
D
d
3
8
3
5
4
3
.
e
p
s
Determining the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents
when making a customer connection for a vertical, fxed Compact NS630b/NS1600,
taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP
value. Connection to be made according to the busbar drawings supplied.
Customer connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40C 45 C 50 C
NS630b Size per phase 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 b
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NS800 Size per phase 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 b
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 970 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1200 1250 1150 1200
I (A) 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 1450 1500 1400 1450 1350 1400
characteristics
Designing customer
connections
Rear connection
D-64
BOOK EN.indb 64 19/10/2011 14:43:06
Customer connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 970 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1180 1230 1130 1180
NS1600 Size per phase 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 b
I (A) 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 1450 1500 1400 1450 1350 1400
Canalis connection
Devices NS630b NS800 NS1000 NS1250 NS1600
Derating
coeffcient K
1 1 1 1 0.98
characteristics
Designing customer
connections
Rear connection
D-65
BOOK EN.indb 65 19/10/2011 14:43:07
Withdrawable
D
D
3
8
3
8
0
7
.
e
p
s
Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and
the maximum permissible currents when making a rear customer connection for
a vertical, withdrawable Compact NS630b/NS1600, taking into account the ambient
Customer connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40C 45 C 50 C
NS630b Size per phase 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 b
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 960 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 1180 1230 1130 1180
I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330

characteristics
Designing customer
connections
Withdrawable Compact NS630b
to NS1600, rear connection
D-66
BOOK EN.indb 66 19/10/2011 14:43:07
Customer connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 960 1000
I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1160 1210 1110 1160
NS1600 Size per phase 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 b
I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330
Canalis connection
Devices NS630b NS800 NS1000 NS1250 NS1600
Derating
coeffcient K
1 1 1 1 0.98
characteristics
Designing customer
connections
Withdrawable Compact NS630b
to NS1600, rear connection
D-67
BOOK EN.indb 67 19/10/2011 14:43:08
Horizontal, fxed
D
d
3
8
3
5
4
5
.
e
p
s
horizontal, fxed Compact NS630b/NS1600, taking into account the ambient
Customer connection
25 C 30 C 35 C 40C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
25 C 30 C 35 C 40C 45 C 50 C
I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
characteristics
Designing customer
connections
Horizontal
D-68
BOOK EN.indb 68 19/10/2011 14:43:09
characteristics
Designing busbars
Fupact INF, ISFT, ISFL
Horizontal Linergy Evolution busbars
busbars
busbars
Fupact INF/ISFT/ISFL
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
D-69
BOOK EN.indb 69 19/10/2011 14:43:09
Permissible current and selection of horizontal copper bars
criteria.
Horizontal copper bars
Fupact INF/ISFT/ISFL
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
1 bar, 60 x 5 mm 800 750 760 700 710 650 660 600 610 550 560 b
1 bar, 80 x 5 mm 1000 910 970 860 910 810 860 750 810 700 750 b
2 bars, 60 x 5 mm 1400 1250 1320 1160 1250 1070 1160 980 1070 880 980 b
2 bars, 80 x 5 mm 1700 1500 1600 1400 1500 1280 1400 1160 1280 1030 1160 b
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
1 bar, 50 x 10 mm 1150 1000 1080 930 1000 850 930 760 850 670 760 b
1 bar, 60 x 10 mm 1400 1250 1320 1160 1250 1070 1160 980 1070 880 980 b
1 bar, 80 x 10 mm 1700 1500 1600 1400 1500 1280 1400 1160 1280 1030 1160 b
2 bars, 50 x 10 mm 1940 1690 1840 1560 1700 1420 1560 1270 1420 1100 1270 b
2 bars, 60 x 10 mm 2170 1900 2040 1750 1900 1590 1750 1420 1590 1240 1420 b
2 bars, 80 x 10 mm 2670 2340 2500 2160 2340 1970 2160 1770 1970 1550 1770 b
2 bars, 100 x 10 mm 3120 2750 2930 2520 2750 2310 2520 2070 2310 1820 2070 b
Rear horizontal copper bars
Fupact ISFT/ISFL
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
ISFT 160 1bar, 50 x 10 mm 730 680 680 630 630 570 570 510 510 450 450 b
ISFL 160 1bar, 60 x 10 mm 1400 1250 1320 1160 1250 1070 1160 980 1070 880 980 b

1bar, 80 x 10 mm 1700 1500 1600 1400 1500 1280 1400 1160 1280 1030 1160 b
ISFL 250/400/630 1bar, 80 x 10 mm 1700 1500 1600 1400 1500 1280 1400 1160 1280 1030 1160 b
1bar, 100 x 10 mm 2050 1800 1930 1680 1800 1540 1680 1400 1540 1240 1400 b
1bar, 120 x 10 mm 2390 2100 2250 1950 2100 1800 1950 1630 1800 1440 1630 b
characteristics
Designing busbars
Fupact INF, ISFT, ISFL
Horizontal copper bars
D-70
BOOK EN.indb 70 19/10/2011 14:43:09
characteristics
Designing busbars
Fupact INF, ISFT
Vertical Linergy Evolution busbars
busbars
Vertical Linergy Evolution busbars
Fupact INF/ISFT
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
Permissible current and selection of vertical Linergy busbars
criteria.
Fupact INF/ISFT
Linergy bar
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
Linergy 630 680 590 630 550 590 530 550 500 530 460 460 b
Linergy 800 840 760 800 720 760 680 720 640 680 600 640 b
Linergy 1000 1040 950 990 900 950 850 900 800 850 750 800 b
Linergy 1250 1290 1170 1230 1100 1170 1030 1100 970 1050 910 980 b
Linergy 1600 1580 1390 1480 1320 1390 1250 1320 1180 1250 1110 1180 b
Linergy 2000 (2 x 1000) 1900 1720 1820 1620 1720 1520 1620 1420 1520 1320 1420 b
Linergy 2500 (2 x 1250) 2380 2120 2260 2020 2120 1900 2020 1780 1900 1660 1780 b
Linergy 3200 (2 x 1600) 3060 2780 2920 2640 2780 2500 2640 2360 2500 2220 2360 b
D-71
BOOK EN.indb 71 19/10/2011 14:43:10
characteristics
Designing busbars
Fupact INF, ISFT
Vertical copper bars
Lateral fat busbars
Fupact INF/ISFT
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
1 bar, 60 x 5 mm 800 750 760 700 710 650 660 600 610 550 560 b
1 bar, 80 x 5 mm 1000 910 970 860 910 810 860 750 810 700 750 b
2 bars, 60 x 5 mm 1400 1250 1320 1160 1250 1070 1160 980 1070 880 980 b
2 bars, 80 x 5 mm 1700 1500 1600 1400 1500 1280 1400 1160 1280 1030 1160 b
25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
1 bar, 50 x 10 mm 1150 1000 1080 930 1000 850 930 760 850 670 760 b
1 bar, 60 x 10 mm 1400 1250 1320 1160 1250 1070 1160 980 1070 880 980 b
1 bar, 80 x 10 mm 1700 1500 1600 1400 1500 1280 1400 1160 1280 1030 1160 b
2 bars, 50 x 10 mm 1940 1690 1810 1560 1700 1420 1560 1270 1420 1100 1270 b
2 bars, 60 x 10 mm 2170 1900 2040 1750 1900 1590 1750 1420 1590 1240 1420 b
2 bars, 80 x 10 mm 2670 2340 2500 2160 2340 1970 2160 1770 1970 1550 1770 b
2 x 1 bar, 80 x 10 mm 3020 2650 2840 2450 2650 2230 2450 2010 2230 1760 2010 b
D-72
BOOK EN.indb 72 19/10/2011 14:43:10
The IP and IK degrees of protection provided by an enclosure must be specifed as a
function of the various external infuences defned by standard IEC 30364-5-51, in
particular:
b presence of foreign solid bodies (code AE)
b presence of water (code AD)
b mechanical stress (code not specifed)
b capability of persons (code BA)
b ...
Prisma Plus switchboards are designed for indoor installation.
Unless the rules, standards and regulations of a specifc country stipulate otherwise,
Schneider Electric recommends the following IP and IK values based on French
guide UTE C 15-103 (March 2004).
Using the table
1 Opposite the relevant premises, read the recommended IP and IK values.
2 The b symbol indicates the enclosure or cubicle satisfying the criteria of the UTE
guide.
Any enclosure or cubicle with a higher degree of protection can also be used.
3 If several degrees of protection are possible (refer to the standard for more
details) and the v and b symbols are indicated (e.g. 24
v
/25
b
), enclosures that
correspond to the higher degree of protection (b) are suitable for the lower degree
of protection (v).
Type of premises Enclosure
Cubicle
with fxed frame with door + IP30
cover
with door + gasket
+ IP30 cover
with door + IP55
cover
Min. IP/IK
required
IP30/IK07 IP30/IK08 IP31/IK08 IP43/IK08 IP55/IK10
IP IK
Domestic or comparable premises or locations
Porch 24 07 b
Bathrooms (see washrooms)
Bicycles, motorcycles, tricycles, etc.
(premises for)
20 07 b
Water, sewer and heating
connections
23 02 b
Laundries 21 02 b
Cellars, garages, furnace rooms 20 02/07 b
Bedrooms 20 02 b
Trash rooms 25 07 b
Halls in cellars 20 07
Courtyards 24/25 02/07 b
Kitchens 20 02 b
Shower rooms (see washrooms)
Indoor stairways and alleys 20 02/07 b
Outdoor stairways and outdoor alleys
without roofs
24 07
Outdoor alleys with roofs 21 02 b
Attics (roof space) 20 02 b
Garden shelters 24/25 02/07 b
Latrines 20 02 b
Dustbin rooms 25 02/07 b
Ironing room 20 02 b
Access ramps to garages 25 07 b
Enclosure characteristics
Selection of enclosures
according to the premises
D-73
BOOK EN.indb 73 19/10/2011 14:43:10
Cubicle
cover
with door + gasket
+ IP30 cover
with door + IP55
cover
Min. IP/IK
required
IP IK
Washrooms, rooms
containing a bathtub or
shower
volume 0 27 02
volume 1 24 02 b
volume 2 23 02 b
volume 3 21 02 b
Lounges, living rooms, etc 20 02 b
Drying rooms 21 02 b
Covered terraces 21 02 b
WCs 20 02 b
Verandas 20 02 b
Crawl spaces 23 07
Commercial premises and adjoining areas
Gunsmiths (storage area, workshop) 30 08 b
Laundries (wash room) 24 07 b
Butchers shop 24 07 b
cold room
y -10 C
23 07 b
Bakers, cake shops (kitchens) 50 07 b
Coffee roasters 21 02 b
Coal, wood, oil 20 08
b
Delicatessen (production) 24 07 b
Sweets (production) 20 02 b
Shoe repair shops 20 02 b
Dairies 24 02 b
Hardware stores (storage areas for
chemicals and paint)
33 07 b
Wood workers 50 07 b
Art galleries 20 02/07 b
Florists 24 07 b
Furriers 20 07 b
Fruit and vegetable merchants 24 07 b
Grain shops 50 07 b
Bookshops, stationers 20 02 b
Motorcycle and bicycle repairs and
accessories
20 08 b
Messenger services 20 08 b
Furniture shops (antiques,
secondhand)
20 07 b
Glass and mirror merchants
(workshop)
20 07 b
Wallpaper shop (storage area) 20 07 b
Cosmetics shop (storage area) 20 02 b
Chemists (storage area) 20 02 b
Photographers (dark room) 23 02 b
Plumbers (storage area) 20 08 b
Fishmongers 25 07 b
Dry cleaners 23 02 b
Hardware stores (without paint,
chemicals, etc.)
20 07 b
Locksmiths 20 07
v
/08
b
v b
Vintners, spirits 20 07 b
Interior decorator (carding) 50 07 b
Tailors, clothing retailers (storage
area)
20 02 b
Pet care 35 07 b
D-74
BOOK EN.indb 74 19/10/2011 14:43:11
Cubicle
cover
with door + gasket
+ IP30 cover
with door + IP55
cover
Min. IP/IK
required
IP IK
Buildings open to the general public
Shared premises of
buildings open to the
general public
storage rooms 20 08 b
packing rooms 20 08 b
archive rooms 20 02 b
flm and magnetic
media storage
20 02 b
linen rooms 20 02 b
laundry rooms 24 07 b
misc. shops 21 07/08 b
kitchens (large)
J Reception old and handicapped
people
20 02 b
L Lecture halls,
meeting rooms,
auditoriums,
halls used for
several purposes
halls 20 02/07 b
stage areas 20 08 b
scenery storage
rooms
20 08 b
costume rooms 20 07 b
M Retail premises,
shopping malls
sales premises 20 08 b
areas for storage
and handling of
packing
20 08 b
N Restaurants and cafes 20 08 b
O Hotels and boarding houses 20 02 b
P Dance halls and gaming parlours 20 07 b
R Teaching
establishments,
holiday camps
classrooms 20 02 b

dormitories 20 08 b
S Libraries and documentation centres
20 02

b
T Exhibitions halls and rooms 20 02 b
areas for reception
of equipment
and merchandise
20 07 b
U Healthcare
establishments
bedrooms 20 02 b
incineration 21 07/08 b
operating rooms 20 07 b
centralised
sterilisation
24 02/07 b
pharmacies and labs
with more than 10 l of
infammable liquids
21
v
/23
b
02
v
/07
b
v b
V Places of worship 20 02 b
W Administrative premises, banks 20 02 b
X Indoor sports
facilities
halls 20 07
v
/08
b
v b
premises containing
refrigeration facilities
21 08 b
Y Museums 20 02 b
PA Covered open air facilities 23
v
/25
b
08
v
/10
b
v b
CTS Marquees and tents 44 08 b
SG Infatable structures 44 08 b
PS Covered parking lots 21 08
v
/10
b
v b
D-75
BOOK EN.indb 75 19/10/2011 14:43:11
Cubicle
cover
with door + gasket
+ IP30 cover
with door + IP55
cover
Min. IP/IK
required
IP IK
Technical premises
Battery rooms 23 02/07 b
Lifts (machine rooms and pulley
rooms)
20 07
v
/08
b
v b
Electrical rooms 20 07 b
Control rooms 20 02 b
Workshops 21
v
/23
b
07
v
/08
b
v b
Laboratories 21
v
/23
b
02
v
/07
b
v b
Air conditioning washers 24 07 b
Garages (used exclusively
for parking vehicles)
of an area not exceeding 100 m
2
21 07 b
Machine rooms 31 07/08 b
Water pressurisers 23 07/08 b
Boiler houses and adjoining premises (power in excess of 70 kW)
Boiler rooms coal fuel 51
v
/61
b
07
v
/08
b
v
other fuel 21 07/08 b
electrical 21 07/08 b
Fuel
storage areas
coal 50
v
/60
b
08 v
oil 20 07
v
/08
b
v b
liquefed gas 20 07
v
/08
b
v b
Cinder tips 50 08 b
Pump rooms 21
v
/23
b
07
v
/08
b
v b
Pressure reduction rooms (gas) 20 07
v
/08
b
v b
Steam or hot water facilities 21
v
/23
b
07
v
/08
b
v b
Expansion vessel room 21 02 b
Garages and car parks of an area exceeding 100 m
2
Parking lots 21 07
v
/10
b
v b
Carwash areas (inside premises) 25 07 b
Petrol stations inside 21 07 b
outside
Lubrication areas 23 08 b
Battery recharging areas 23 07 b
Workshops 21 08 b
Public building (other than for the general public)
Offces 20 02 b
Libraries 20 02 b
Archives 20 02 b
Computer rooms 20 02 b
Design offces 20 02 b
Rooms containing reprographic
machines
20 02 b
Sorting rooms 20 07 b
Refectories in restaurants or
canteens
21 07 b
Large kitchens
Sports rooms 20 07
v
/08
b
v b
Barracks 20 07 b
Meeting rooms 20 02 b
Waiting rooms, lounges, halls 20 02 b
Medical consulting rooms, not ftted
with specifc equipment
20 02 b
Demonstration
and exhibition rooms
20 02/07 b
D-76
BOOK EN.indb 76 19/10/2011 14:43:11
Cubicle
cover
with door + gasket
+ IP30 cover
with door + IP55
cover
Min. IP/IK
required
IP IK
Farm premises or locations
Alcohol (storage) 23 07 b
Closed cattle sheds 35 07 b
Laundries 24 07 b
Wood storage rooms 30 10 b
Threshing foors 50 07 b
Distilling cellars 23 07 b
Vat rooms (wine) 23 07 b
Courtyards 35 07 b
Poultry barns 35 07 b
Stables 35 07 b
Fertiliser (storage) 50 07 b
Stables 35 07 b
Manure heaps 24 07 b
Haylofts 50 07 b
Haystacks, forage (storage) 50 07 b
Granaries, barns 50 07 b
Straw (storage) 50 07 b
Greenhouses 23 07 b
Grain silos 50 07 b
Milking rooms 35 07 b
Pig sties 35 07 b
Chicken houses 35 07 b
Miscellaneous installations
Fair facilities 33 08 b
Water treatment facilities 24/25 07/08 b
Thermodynamic installations, air-conditioned rooms and cold rooms
Height
above
ground
from 0 to 1.10 m 25 07 b
from 1.10 to 2 m 24 07 b
above 2 m under
evaporator or water
drain pipe
21 07 b
ceiling and up to 10
cm underneath
23 07 b
Temperature y -10 C 23 07 b
Compressor room 21 08 b
integral unit located
outside or on a terrace
34 08
D-77
BOOK EN.indb 77 19/10/2011 14:43:12
Cubicle
cover
with door + gasket
+ IP30 cover
with door + IP55
cover
Min. IP/IK
required
IP IK
Industrial facilities
Slaughter houses 55 08 b
Batteries (manufacture) 33 07 b
Acid (manufacture and storage) 33 07 b
Alcohol (manufacture and storage) 33 07 b
Aluminium (manufacture and
storage)
51 08 b
Livestock (raising, fattening and sale) 45 07 b
Asphalt and bitumen storage 53 07 b
Wool beating and carding 50 08 b
Industrial laundry 24/25 07 b
Wood (processing) 50 08 b
Meat packers 24/25 07 b
Bakeries 50 07 b
Breweries 24 07 b
Brickworks 53 08 b
Rubber (production and processing) 54 07 b
Carbide (manufacture and storage) 51 07 b
Ammunition factories 53 08 b
Carton board (production) 33 07 b
Quarries 55 08 b
Celluloid (manufacture of objects) 30 08 b
Cellulose (manufacture) 34 08 b
Coal (depots) 53 08 b
Pork products 24/25 07 b
Boiler-making works 30 08 b
Lime kilns 50 08 b
Rag (storage) 30 07 b
Chlorine (manufacture and storage) 33 07 b
Chrome-plating 33 07 b
Cement works 50 08 b
Coking plant 53 08 b
Adhesives (production) 33 07
Bottling lines 35 08 b
Liquid fuels (storage) 31
v
/33
b
08 v
Fats (processing) 51 07 b
Leather (tanning and storage) 31 08 b
Copper (ore processing) 31 08 b
Paint stripping 54 08 b
Detergents (manufacture) 53 07 b
Distilleries 33 07 b
Electrolysis 33 08 b
Ink manufacturing 31 07 b
Fertilisers (manufacture and storage) 53 07 b
Explosives (manufacture and
storage)
55 08 b
Iron (production and processing) 51 08 b
Spinning mills 50 07 b
Furriers (beating process) 50 07 b
Cheese factories 25 07 b
Gas (production and storage) 31 08 b
tar (processing) 33 05 b
Seed production 50 07 b
Metal engraving 33 07 b
Oils (extraction) 31 07 b
Petroleum products (manufacture) 33
v
/34
b
08 v b
Printworks 20 08
D-78
BOOK EN.indb 78 19/10/2011 14:43:12
Cubicle
cover
with door + gasket
+ IP30 cover
with door + IP55
cover
Min. IP/IK
required
IP IK
Industrial establishments (continued)
Dairies 25 07 b
Public wash-houses 25 07 b
Liqueurs (production) 21 07 b
Halogenated liquids (use) 21 08 b
Infammable products
(storage and workshops where they
are used)
21 08 b
Magnesium (production, storage
and use)
31 08 b
Machine rooms 20 08 b
Plastics (production) 51 08 b
Cabinet makers 50 08 b
Metals (processing) 31
v
/33
b
08 v b
Combustion engines (testing of) 30 08 b
Ammunition storage 33 08 b
Nickel (or processing) 33 08 b
Household waste (processing) 54 07 b
Paper (production) 33
v
/34
b
07 v b
Paper (storage) 31 07 b
Perfume (production and storage) 31 07 b
Pulp mill 34/35 07 b
Paint (production and storage) 33 08 b
Plaster (processing and storage) 50 07 b
Gunpowder factory 55 08 b
Chemicals (production) 30
v
/50
b
08 v b
Oil refneries 34/35 07 b
Salt preserve factories 33 07 b
Soap (production) 31 07 b
Saw mills 50 08 b
Metalwork shops 30 08 b
Grain or sugar silos 50 07 b
Silk and artifcial hair factories 50 08 b
Sodium carbonate (processing and
storage)
33 07 b
Sulphur (processing) 51 07 b
Spirits (storage) 33 07 b
Sugar mills 55 07 b
Tanners 35 07 b
Dye works 35 07 b
Textile and fabric (production) 51 08 b
Varnish (production and application) 33 08 b
Glass works 33 08 b
Zinc works 31 08 b
No applicable
D-79
BOOK EN.indb 79 19/10/2011 14:43:13
Schneider Electric enclosures comply with standard EN 50298 for empty enclosures.
The sheet metal used for Schneider Electric enclosures receives an anti-corrosion
epoxy electrophoresis treatment and a coating of a thermosetting, polyester-
resinmodifed epoxy powder for colour and appearance.
This two-coat system provides excellent fnish and corrosion protection.
The characteristics of this coating are much better than those of traditional epoxy
powders:
b improved colour stability
b wider operating temperature range.
Mechanical properties of enclosures
Static load on doors, wall-mounted and foor-standing enclosures and
cubicles
Cubicle 400 kg
Cubicle door 12 kg
Mechanical properties of powder coated surfaces
Test conditions
Test piece made of 1 mm thick steel sheet, degreased, iron phosphated, fnal
rinsing with 100000 W cm DI water, 15 microns of anti-corrosion
electrophoresis treatment and 35 microns of powder paint.
Adhesion (cross-hatch and pull-off) class 0 required (ISO 2409)
Impact strength
(1)
> 1 kg/50 cm (ISO 6272)
Mandrel bending test
(2)
< 10 mm (ISO 6860)
Persoz hardness 300 s (ISO 1522)
(1) No cracking of the paint flm after dropping a weight of one kilogram on the test piece from
a height of 50 centimetres.
(2) Film cracks over a length of 10 millimetres maximum.
Artifcial ageing test on powder coating
Test conditions:
Two tests carried out on the same 1 mm thick steel sheet test piece.
b cyclical damp-heat test:
v as per standard IEC 68-2-30
- six 24-hour cycles at temperatures higher than 40 C
b continuous resistance to neutral salt mist:
v the tests were carried out over a period of 400 hours, far more than the 48 hours
required by the standard for indoor installations
v as per standard IEC 68-2-11 and ISO 7253
- 400 hours without blistering for normal surface on test piece
- 250 hours for a scratched surface.
Evaluation of corrosion as per ISO 4628:
b adhesion: class y 1
b blistering: degree 1 dim.1
b rusting: Ri 1
b cracking: class 1
b faking imp. 1 dim. 1
propagation of corrosion under scratch with respect to the scratch axis: 3 mm max.
Properties of metal enclosures
D-80
BOOK EN.indb 80 19/10/2011 14:43:13
Chemical properties of powder
coating
Tests carried out at ambient temperature on phosphated test pieces coated
with a 150 to 200 micron flm.
Test duration (months) 2 4 6 8 10 12
Acids Concentration
Acetic 20 %
Sulphuric 30 %
Nitric 30 %
Phosphoric 30 %
Hydrochloric 30 %
Lactic 10 %
Citric 10 %
Bases Soda 10 %
Ammonia 10 %
Water Distilled water
Seawater
Tap water
Diluted bleach
Solvents Petrol
High alcohols
Aliphatics
Aromatics
Ketones, esters
Tri-perchlorethylene
Film intact.
Film damaged (blisters, yellowing, loss of shine).
Properties of metal enclosures
D-81
BOOK EN.indb 81 19/10/2011 14:43:13
A switchboard is designed for operation under normal ambient conditions.
Most devices do not operation correctly outside a temperature range of -10 and
+70 C.
It is therefore important to maintain the switchboard internal temperature within this
temperature range by:
b correctly sizing the switchboard during design
b correcting the temperature using suitable means.
Management of the internal
temperature
Cooling
There are a number of way to dissipate heat from the switchboard.
The drawings below present the various means.
Convection Forced-air ventilation
D
d
3
8
1
4
8
4
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
4
8
3
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
4
8
2
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
4
8
1
.
e
p
s
IP > 31 IP y 31 IP y 54 IP y 54
Ensured naturally in Prisma Plus
enclosures.
Using fans, it signifcantly increases the
thermal capacity of an enclosure.
Forced-air
ventilation with
air-air exchanger
Forced
convection and
cooling
D
d
3
8
1
9
2
0
.
e
p
s
D
d
3
8
1
9
2
1
.
e
p
s
IP > 31 IP > 31
On special request.
For these extreme cases, many installers prefer to set up the switchboards with
other electrotechnical and electronic devices in air-conditioned electrical rooms.
Heating
The means employed to raise the internal temperature in a switchboard is a
resistor-based heater, used to:
b avoid condensation by limiting variations in temperature
b ensure that the switchboard does not freeze.
Thermal characteristics of
switchboards
Thermal management
of switchboards
General
D-82
BOOK EN.indb 82 19/10/2011 14:43:14
Calculation of the internal
temperature
Calculation of the temperature is the means to check that the enclosure can
evacuate the dissipated power of the installed devices.
Important note
Correct thermal management of the switchboard depends on compliance with
the installation requirements for the distribution system (power circuits).
Incorrect installation will have major consequences on the connected device, but
almost none on the internal temperature of the enclosure.
Once the circuit has been correctly sized, it is necessary to check whether the
assembly (devices + distribution system + cables) have a level of dissipated power
P(W) y the P(W) that the enclosure can handle.
D
d
3
8
1
4
0
1
.
e
p
s
Method defned by IEC 890 technical report
This IEC guide for switchboards proposes a calculation method to determine three
levels of internal temperature, depending on the dissipated power of the devices and
distribution blocks installed in the switchboard.
Users can consult this document when it is necessary to determine precisely the
internal temperature in view of optimising the switchboard.
On request, Schneider Electric can carry out a thermal study to check that the
installed assembly and the thermal capacity of the enclosure are compatible.
D
D
3
8
1
3
5
0
.
e
p
s
Comparative method
A number of qualifed and tested confgurations serve as the basis for indicating the
thermal capacity of Prisma Plus enclosures.
This is en empirical means to check whether the dissipated power of the desired
confguration is close to that of a tested confguration.
D
D
3
8
2
4
2
2
.
e
p
s
Method using charts taking into account enclosure characteristics
To speed up calculations, Schneider Electric produces charts based on the
companys experience and a number of assumptions on the installation.
They can be used suffciently precisely to determine the variations in temperature
and the dissipated-power levels for the different types of wall-mounted enclosures,
foor-standing enclosures and cubicles.
For details on the calculation of the dissipated power in the device zone, see page
D-85.
switchboards
Thermal management of
switchboards
General
D-83
400E45000.indd 83 20/10/2011 13:10:32
Two cubicles with busbar compartment, 800 mm
wide, 400 mm deep, IP30
Diversity factor: 0.7 and 0.8
Ambient temperature around the switchboard: 35 C
Cubicle 1 : P(W) of device zone = 580 W
NSX250
NSX400
NSX NSX NSX NSX
D
D
3
8
3
8
8
9
.
e
p
s
wide, 1000 mm deep, two 300 mm wide ducts, IP30
Diversity factor: 0.7
NSX400
NSX NSX NSX NSX
NSX630
D
D
3
8
3
8
9
0
.
e
p
s
switchboards
switchboards
General
D-84
BOOK EN.indb 84 19/10/2011 14:43:15
wide, 1000 mm deep, two 300 mm wide ducts, IP30
Diversity factor: 0.7
Cubicle
1
: P(W) of device zone = 580 W
Cubicle
2
: P(W) of device zone = 180 W
NSX250
NSX NSX NSX NSX
NSX400
D
D
3
8
3
9
5
8
.
e
p
s
Application of the diversity factor
In the confguration below, the standardised diversity factor (K div.) for a total of 14
outgoing circuits is 0.6, i.e. 60 % of In for each outgoing circuit.
Schneider Electric prefers a more conservative approach and therefore divides the
installation into four main circuits:
b NSX250
b 200 A Multiclip: 8 outgoers V K div. = 0.7
b Polypact: 4 outgoers V K div. = 0.8
b NSX400.
1 NSX250 + 1 Multiclip 200 A + 1 Polypact + 1 NSX400 V 4 outgoers, i.e. a diversity
factor of 0.8.
As a result, the current fowing in each circuit is at least 70 % and up to 80 % of In.
Calculation of the power dissipated by
devices in the incoming cubicle
Dissipated power of the NT1600 indicated by the manufacturer: 460 W. The power
dissipated by the connections is approximately 30 % of the device P(W):
0.3 x 460 = 138 W.
Power of circuit breaker + connections = 460 + 138 = 598 W at 1600 A.
For I (the Watts are proportional to the square of the current) at 1410 A
(In of the incoming device):
Dissipated power of the NSX250 indicated by the manufacturer: 42 W.
Dissipated power of the connections: 0.3 x 42 = 12.6 W.
Power of circuit breaker + connections = 42 +12.6 = 54.6 W at 250 A.
For 200 A (the tested value):
54.6
200
2
= 35 W x
250
2
Dissipated power of the Polypact and its four NSX250 circuit
breakers:
4 x 35 W (same calculation as above) = 14
Sum of the dissipated power in the incoming cubicle:
P(W) = 405 + 35 +140 = 580 W
switchboards
switchboards
Example
598
1410
2
= 405 W x
1600
2
D-85
400E45000.indd 85 20/10/2011 13:15:23
Once the dissipated power of the devices has been determined and the enclosure
with its IP selected, transfer the results (sum of the dissipated power and width of the
device zone) to the chart corresponding to the enclosure IP.
D
D
3
8
2
4
2
3
.
e
p
s
Draw a line parallel to the others on the chart and read the corresponding difference
in temperature.
For the given example, the heat rise is 22 C at mid-height in the enclosure.
The internal temperature = external temperature + heat rise
= 35 C + 22 C = 57 C
57 C < 60 C stipulated by the standard, i.e. the result is acceptable for an IP3
cubicle.
This gives roughly: Internal temperature = 60 C at mid-height in the enclosure for a
low IP value.
Internal temperature = 70 C at mid-height in the enclosure for a high IP value.
switchboards
switchboards
Example
D-86
BOOK EN.indb 86 19/10/2011 14:43:16
Quick calculation charts for
internal temperatures
For the enclosures not mentioned on the previous
pages, use the equation:
where:
DT: internal temperature - external temperature
P: power dissipated by the devices, connections and
busbars (in Watts)
S: total free surface area of the enclosure (expressed
in m)
K: thermal-conduction coeffcient of the material
(W/m C)
K = 5.5 W/m C for painted sheet metal.
Note: The dissipated power of each device is provided by
the manufacturer. Add approximately 30 % to account for
the connections and the busbars.
Test conditions: the cubicle is on the foor against a wall, the indicated internal heat
rise is that measured at mid-height in the enclosure.
IP3X cubicle, 400 mm deep IP3X cubicle, 600 mm deep

D
D
3
8
2
4
2
4
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
2
4
2
5
.
e
p
s
IP3X cubicle, 800 mm deep IP3X cubicle, 1000 mm deep
D
D
3
8
2
4
2
6
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
2
4
2
7
.
e
p
s
IP55 cubicle, 400 mm deep IP55 cubicle, 600 mm deep
D
D
3
8
2
4
2
8
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
2
4
2
9
.
e
p
s
IP55 cubicle, 800 mm deep IP55 cubicle, 1000 mm deep
D
D
3
8
2
4
3
0
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
2
4
3
1
.
e
p
s
switchboards
switchboards
Charts
P
S x K
DT =
D-87
BOOK EN.indb 87 19/10/2011 14:43:17
Switchboard ventilation
The air enters the lower section via the fans and exits the upper section:
b through a ventilated roof
b or through a ventilation opening.
The air throughput of the fans is determined by the equation:
P
DT
D = 3.1 x - KS
( )
The chart below can be used to determine the necessary throughput, based on the
dissipated power, the difference in temperature (internal - external) and the exposed
surface area of the enclosure.
Example
Consider an IP3X cubicle, 650 mm wide and 400 mm deep, containing components
(devices, connections, busbars, etc.) dissipating 1000 W.
The ambient temperature around the cubicle is 50 C.
Given that the average temperature at mid-height should not exceed 60 C, the
difference in temperature DT is equal to 60 - 50 = 10 C.
The exposed surface of the cubicle (non adjacent to a wall or other cubicle) is
4.46 m.
(back = 1.3 m, front = 1.3 m, roof = 0.26 m, side panels = 1.6 m).
What is the necessary throughput of the ventilation system?
The throughput can be calculated as:
1000
10
D = 3.1 x - 5.5 x 4.46
( )
D = 234 m
3
/h.
In the range of Prisma Plus accessories, select a system with a throughput
of 300 m
3
/h.
D
d
3
8
1
3
9
1
.
e
p
s
Calculation data
P : power dissipated by the devices, connections and busbars (in Watts)
Pr : power of the heating resistor (in Watts)
Tm : maximum internal temperature in the device zone (in C)
Ti : average internal temperature (in C)
Te : average external temperature (in C)
DTm = Tm Te
DT = Ti Te
S : total free surface area of the enclosure (expressed in m
2
)
K : thermal-conduction coeffcient of the material (W/m
2
C)
K = 5.5 W/m
2
C for painted sheet metal
D: ventilation throughput (in m
3
/h)
Note: The dissipated power of each device is provided by the manufacturer.
Add approximately 30% to account for the connections and the busbars.
switchboards
switchboards
Ventilation
D-88
BOOK EN.indb 88 19/10/2011 14:43:17
Switchboard heating
The heating resistor, placed in the bottom of the switchboard, maintains the internal
temperature 10 C higher than the external temperature. When the switchboard is
not in operation, the heater compensates the dissipated power normally emitted by
the switchboard.
The power of the heating resistor is calculated:
b using the equation: Pr = (DT x S x K) - P
b or using the charts below, based on the exposed surface area of the enclosure
and the desired difference in temperature.
Chart to determine the heating resistor for small wall-mounted enclosures
(exposed surfaces y 1 m
2
)
D
d
3
8
1
7
8
8
.
e
p
s
Chart to determine the heating resistor for all types of enclosures and cubicles
D
d
3
8
1
7
8
9
.
e
p
s
Calculation data
P : power dissipated by the devices, connections and busbars (in Watts)
Pr : power of the heating resistor (in Watts)
Tm : maximum internal temperature in the device zone (in C)
Ti : average internal temperature (in C)
Te : average external temperature (in C)
DTm = Tm Te
DT = Ti Te
S : total free surface area of the enclosure (expressed in m
2
)
K : thermal-conduction coeffcient of the material (W/m
2
C)
K = 5.5 W/m
2
C for painted sheet metal
D: ventilation throughput (in m
3
/h).
Note: The dissipated power of each device is provided by the manufacturer. Add approximately
30 % to account for the connections and the busbars.
switchboards
switchboards
Heating
D-89
BOOK EN.indb 89 19/10/2011 14:43:17
D
D
3
8
3
9
0
4
.
e
p
s
b Vacuum cleaner to clean the switchboards
b Ratchet wrench with sockets
b Torque wrench with sockets and ring bits to tighten the electrical connections to
the correct torque (max. torque 50 Nm)
b Open-ended torque wrench
b Open-ended spanners (15 to 27 mm).
b Electrician's knife
b 7, 8, 10, 13, 16, 17 and 19 mm sockets
b Bit holder socket
b 4, 5, 6, 8 and 10 mm hexagonal-head bits
b Pozidriv no. 1, 2 and 3 bits
b Rubber mallet
b Level.
b Measurement and inspection tools and instruments
b Drill
b Semi-circuit nosed pliers
b Cable-tie pliers
b Wire stripper
b Crimping tool
b Diagonal cutter
b Wire cutters
b Flat-nosed pliers
b Bit holder for screwdriver
b Extension
b Electric saw
b Jig saw
b Clamp for cubicle alignment
b Buzzer or tester
b 3, 5, 4, 5.5 and 8 mm fat screwdrivers
b Posidriv no. 2 crosshead screwdriver (to mount handle)
b Hydraulic jacks that can be operated in horizontal position to lift cubicles and move
them sideways if necessary.
b Coloured, indelible and temperature resistant acrylic varnish.
b Electric screwdriver
Note: a Facom brand torque wrench is available with a capacity of 75 Nm and a thin shape. It is
recommended for tightening under diffcult access conditions.
Part numbers:
b SP3723 = wrench handle (essential)
b SP3721 = extra-fat ratchet adapter (essential)
b SP3722 = ratchet for ordinary sockets (optional) for mounting on handle SP3723
b SP2709 = extra-fat 13 mm short socket
b SP2709A = extra-fat 13 mm long socket
b SP4370 = extra-fat 16 mm long socket
b SP4372 = extra-fat 19 mm long socket.
Practical information
Tools required for mounting
and connection
D-90
BOOK EN.indb 90 19/10/2011 14:43:18
Schneider Electric provides cabling recommendations according to the rating of
the circuit breaker.
The size of cables must be selected according to:
b the level of current
b the ambient temperature around the conductors
b the degree of protection of the switchboard.
The tables below take into account the installation conditions for each type of device
(permissible temperature at connection terminals, etc.).
They follow the temperature derating values for installed devices in all cubicles with
cover panels rated IP y 55
b switchboard internal temperature is 60 C
b connections using copper cables.
Connection of circuit breakers
Size of
cables
(mm)
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
1.5 16 14 14 12
2.5 25 25 22 20
4 32 29 28 24
6 40 39 36 33
10 63 55 55 50
16 90 77 80 70
25 110 100 100 93
35 135 125 125 120
50 180 150
70 230 190
95 275 230
Connection of other devices
Size of
cables
(mm)
IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31
1.5 13 12 12 10
2.5 23 21 20 19
4 28 26 25 22
6 36 35 32 30
10 55 50 50 46
16 80 70 72 63
25 100 90 90 84
35 120 115 110 103
50 165 135
70 210 176
95 250 210
Connection of NSX100 to 630 A
Devices NSX100 NSX160 NSX250
25 50 95
Note: Schneider Electric recommends connecting NSX400/630 circuit breakers with insulated
fexible bars or rigid bars, see page D-48.
Cable sizes according
to permissible current
D-91
BOOK EN.indb 91 19/10/2011 14:43:18
Tubular lugs for incoming
connection blocks
Maximum size of lugs for connection to the different incoming connection blocks.
Standard Cu
lugs
Narrow Cu
lugs
Bimetal
narrow lugs
Incoming connection block for NSX-INS250
supplied via the top or bottom, cat. no. 04066 or
04067
150 mm 240 mm 185 mm
In-duct incoming connection block for NSX630
supplied via the top or bottom, cat. no. 04076
240 mm 300 mm 300 mm
D
D
3
8
2
7
8
8
.
e
p
s
Narrow bimetal lugs
Cat. no. selection
Cat. no. Cable size
(mm)
Quantity
Lugs for aluminium cables
(1)
29504 150 3
29505 150 4
29506 185 3
29507 185 4
32504 240 3
32505 240 4
32506 300 3
32507 300 4
(1) Supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers.
Customer connection
of devices u 630 A
Maximum size and number of cables for connection to terminal extension bars (as
per busbar drawing supplied) for customer connection of Compact NSX and
Masterpact NT/NW devices.
Max. size
(mm)
Quantity
Maximum size and number of cables
Copper lugs 300 12
Bimetal lugs 240 12
D-92
400E41000.indd 92 20/10/2011 13:23:12
Designing the PEN conductor
The size of the PEN is determined in the same manner as a neutral conductor, i.e.:
b for copper single-phase circuits or circuits with conductors sized y 16mm, the
PEN conductor must be the same size as the phase conductors
b for copper three-phase circuits with conductors sized > 16 mm, it can be:
v the same size as the phase conductors
v smaller on the condition that:
- the current likely to fow in the neutral during normal operation is less than
the permissible current for the conductor
- the power rating of single-phase loads does not exceed 10 % of the total rating.
The PEN conductor must be accessible to enable connections both in the factory
and on site, as well as checks on the tightness of connections.
Implementing the PEN protective conductor
According to standard IEC 61439-1 and 2, the practical guidelines for implementing
the PEN are the following:
b at the head of the assembly, the PEN connection must be near the phase
connections
b within the assembly, the PEN does not need to be insulated from the exposed
conductive parts (except on sites where there is a risk of fre or explosion)
b the size of the conductor must be at least equal to that of the neutral
b the size must remain constant throughout the main busbars the change from the
TNC to the TNS system must take place at a single place in the switchboard, via a
marked neutral-disconnection bar that is accessible and can be dismantled to
facilitate the impedance measurement of the fault loop
b after the TNS creation point, it is forbidden to recreate a TNC system.
The PE and the neutral must meet their individual constraints.
D
D
3
8
4
6
1
6
.
e
p
s
PEN kit for Linergy busbars
see page B-83.
Protective circuits
D-93
400E41000.indd 93 07/11/2011 15:43:11
Designing the PE protective
conductor
The protective conductor must be suffciently sized and securely installed in the
switchboard to accept the thermal and electrodynamic constraints of the fault
current.
It must be connected to the exposed conductive parts of the switchboard.
It must be accessible to enable connections both in the factory and on site.
Optimised calculation method
Use the calculation equation indicated in standard IEC 61439-1 and 2.
S
PE
=
l
2
t
k
S
PE
: cross-sectional area of the PE in mm
I: value of the phase-to-earth fault current = 60 % of the value of the phase-tophase
fault current (IEC 61439)
t: time the fault current fows in seconds
k: coeffcient that depends on the type of metal, k = 143 for a copper conductor with
PVC insulation.
Simplifed method (based on the equation above)
Use the table below to determine the size of the PE conductor as a function of
device short-circuit current Isc.
D
D
3
8
1
4
7
1
.
e
p
s
Size of PE conductor All Schneider Electric devices
Isc > 65 kA 1 bar, 50 x 5 mm Linergy 800
Schneider Electric prefabricated solution
For Schneider Electric devices up to Isc values of 85 kA, see page B-82 .
Protective circuits
D-94
400E41000.indd 94 07/11/2011 15:43:12
Horizontal busbars can be connected to vertical busbars (Linergy or fat bars) in two
ways:
b in a duct (by a direct connection ordered from the catalogue)
b in the rear (with part of the connection to be fabricated by the installer).
D
D
3
8
3
9
4
8
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
3
9
0
6
.
e
p
s
5 mm thick horizontal busbars can be connected to vertical busbars using
connection plate 04634 (y 1000 A) or 04635 (> 1000 A) after drilling holes in the
horizontal bars.
10 mm thick horizontal busbars can be connected to vertical busbars in 2
ways:
b using connection plate 04636 (y 1600 A) or 04637 (> 1600 A) without drilling holes
in the horizontal bars
b or with a screw and socket assembly (04645) designed for assembly on a busbar
that has already been mounted.
This bolted solution requires:
b holes drilled in the bars (16 mm) for diagonal mounting of the sockets and
screws
b conformity with the following mounting rules:
v respect the overlap length (2.5 to 5 times the bar thickness)
v tighten to a torque of 50 Nm
v ft the recommended number of screws, depending on the bar width as explained
below.
Screw + socket
(cat. no. 04645).

Connection plate
(cat. no. 04635).
D
D
3
8
3
9
0
7
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
3
9
0
8
.
e
p
s
In practice, the real contact area is limited to regions in which the pressure is applied
effectively.
In a bolted overlap assembly, these areas are made up of the areas adjacent to the
bolts, and more precisely under the washers.
Salt spray tests have demonstrated these contact areas.
The number of screws thus determines the effective cross-sectional area through
which the current fows, which corresponds to the area under the washer (minus the
screw hole).
This cross-section area must be close to that of the bar.
Controlled temperature rise
Whatever the connection solution used, the quality and reliability of the contact is
guaranteed, in particular with respect to temperature rise, as long as assembly is
carried out according to our recommendations.
Connection of horizontal
to vertical busbars
D-95
BOOK EN.indb 95 19/10/2011 14:43:21
The current transformers can be installed either on the main busbars or on the
circuits upstream or downstream of devices.
Installation must not affect the insulation level or the reliability of the busbars.
P
D
3
9
1
2
7
9
.
e
p
s
Choice of a CT model depends on the type of installation:
b insulated cables
b Prisma Plus vertical busbars
b insulated fexible busbars
b Linergy vertical busbars
b rigid busbars.
When installing a CT, we recommend that you comply with the following mounting
rules:
b install current transformers:
v on an easily dismountable busbars or copper connections
v between 2 connection points, by joints or bolted connection
b place the current transformer so that the identifcation markings remain readable.
For large current transformers, a staggered installation is recommended to prevent
arcing on fxing screws or excessive spacing between phase conductors.
If they are installed on vertical busbars, secure the current transformers in place to
prevent them from slipping downwards (for example using a bolt or a pin)
b when there are several busbars per phase, ft spacers between the busbars in
order to:
v resist the tightening forces when installing the current transformer
v avoid vibrations that lead to current transformer breakdowns.
Dismountable vertical busbars.
P
D
3
9
1
2
8
0
.
e
p
s
P
D
3
9
1
2
8
1
.
e
p
s
CT on vertical busbars. Spacers between the bars.
Installation of the current
transformer
D-96
BOOK EN.indb 96 19/10/2011 14:43:22
Our circuit breakers have trip units with a built-in ammeter
(see Micrologic catalogue).
Their use eliminates the need for installing a CT on the busbars.
The CT casing is a solution for installation of CTs up to 1600 A.
CTs can be installed in the casing (cat. no. 03506).
It is equipped with a frame made up of 2 uprights, adjustable in depth and 2 slotted
cross-members to fx the cables, install CTs or install a busbar support with 75 mm
spacing.
It is secured in the switchgear compartment of a 400 or 600 mm deep cubicle.
The 300 mm duct allows easier mounting of CTs.
To install 2 CTs, downstream from a circuit-breaker for example, it is often easier to
use a 300 mm wide duct (cat. no. 08403 for 400 mm depth or cat. no. 08603 for 600
mm depth).
D
D
3
8
3
9
0
9
.
e
p
s
P
D
3
9
1
2
8
2
.
e
p
s
Sealable CT casing with current transformers on bolted
connections.
CT on circuit-breaker downstream connection busbars.
Installation of the current
transformer
D-97
BOOK EN.indb 97 19/10/2011 14:43:24
P
D
3
9
1
2
8
3
.
e
p
s
Principle of the Prisma Plus solution
Prisma Plus simplifes the installation of source changeover systems.
The source changeover solution is an integral part of the Prisma Plus offering and
is designed for all installation cases: 2 or 3 devices side by side or 2 superimposed
devices.
The page opposite shows a few examples of installation in cubicles:
b 1 normal source/1 replacement source
b 2 normal sources with coupling (priority and non-priority circuits)
b 2 normal sources + 1 replacement source with coupling (priority and non-priority,
circuits).
Note that our confguration software can be used to produce the switchboard front
panel drawings.
For each source changeover confguration, various combinations of normal and
replacement source circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors are possible:
b 1 normal source/1 replacement source:
v NS630b to NS1600 / NS630b to NS1600
v NT / NT
v NT / NW
v NW / NT
v NW / NW
b 2 normal sources with coupling:
v NW / NW / NW
v NT / NT / NT
v NW / NW / NW
b 2 normal sources + 1 replacement source with coupling:
NW / NW / NW / NW or NT.
Tables in the catalogue indicate the possible combinations normal and
replacement devices according to the rating as well as the types of interlocking
available for the different types of devices.
Highly economical vertical confgurations are possible even for the largest devices.
In this case, interlocking may be:
b mechanical by cable + motor mechanism
b via rotary handles (for NS630b/1600 only).
To defne the number of modules required to install superimposed devices, all you
have to do is add up the number of modules required for each device with:
b its connections
b its cover and its partitioning.
For combination possibilities and installation details, refer to the Compact, Interpact
and Masterpact source changeover systems catalogue ABTED201149EN or
ABTED201149FR.
Source changeover system in the same cubicle.
D
D
3
8
1
6
1
7
.
e
p
s
Source changeover system in 2 combined cubicles.
P
D
3
9
1
2
8
4
.
e
p
s
Installation of source
changeover systems
D-98
BOOK EN.indb 98 19/10/2011 14:43:25
D
D
3
8
3
9
1
0
.
e
p
s
1 normal source
1 replacement source
D
D
2
1
0
4
4
0
.
e
p
s
2 normal sources and coupling on busbars
D
D
2
1
0
4
4
1
.
e
p
s
2 normal sources
1 replacement source and coupling on busbars
Installation of source
changeover systems
D-99
BOOK EN.indb 99 19/10/2011 14:43:26
Cubicles must be stored in upright position in a dry and ventilated location, sheltered
from rain, weather, dripping and running water, dust and chemical agents.
Apart from IP55 cubicles, never store enclosures outdoors, even under an awning or
tarp.
The cubicles should if possible be left in their packing until they are installed. In this
way they are protected against all risks that may be encountered on the site
(impacts, splashes, etc.).
Acceptable storage temperatures are -25 C to +55 C (or up to +70 C for short
periods not exceeding 24 hours).
Given their heavy weight, cubicles should be stored on a stable, rigid and fat foor to
avoid any risk of tipping during storage or handling.
Storage recommendations
D-100
BOOK EN.indb 100 19/10/2011 14:43:26
Receiving the switchboard
On receipt of the equipment and before handling it, check that the cases and packing
materials used for transportation have not been damaged and that all items on the
packing list have been effectively delivered.
b Even if the packing appears to be in good condition, do not hesitate to unpack the
equipment in the presence of an authorised transport agent.
b Check the contents and weights of the shipping units. Thoroughly check the
equipment to make sure that no damage or shocks have occurred that could impair
insulation or operation.
b If necessary, check that the information on the switchboard nameplate, located on
the incoming cubicle, complies with the information indicated on the delivery slip.
b In case of damage or missing parts, inform the transport agent by registered mail.
b After this inspection, reft the plastic protective cover.
Prisma Plus switchboards are generally shipped as separate cubicles or in transport
units comprising 2 cubicles side by side. Shipping units may exceptionally comprise
3 cubicles (see precautions given in the "On-site handling" chapter).
Each shipping unit is marked with:
b project number
b weight
b packing unit information (packing unit number and total quantity)
b position of the centre of gravity
b storage and handling instructions.
Standard packing
The cubicles are protected by a plastic cover in a crate.
The following accessories are attached inside the switchboard:
b installation accessories (lifting/fxing cross-members and external fxing lugs)
b preliminary installation accessories: plinth raisers
b horizontal busbar joints (if required)
b additional nuts and bolts and other mounting hardware
b panels to be ftted after on-site connection: canopies, roof panels, gland plates
b a set of drawings
b device user manuals
b a tube of Swiss white varnish.
Large withdrawable or drawout circuit breakers installed at the top of the cubicle
(Masterpact and Compact NS) are generally delivered separately.
Sea packing
The cubicles are protected by a heat-sealed plastic cover containing desiccant bags
and are installed in a ventilated wooden or plywood crate.
As a rule sea crates do not weigh more than 5 tons.
Sorting
In order to sort the different types of packing material, specifc waste recovery bins
are required.
D
D
3
8
3
9
1
1
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
3
9
1
2
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
3
9
1
3
.
e
p
s
Packing information
D-101
BOOK EN.indb 101 19/10/2011 14:43:27
masterpact II
MERLIN GERIN
NX 08 HA10 Ui 1000V Uimp 12kV
Ue 690(V)
50kA/1s
IEC 947-2 50/60Hz EN 60947-2 UTE VDE BS CEI UNE AS NBMA
masterpact II
MERLIN GERIN
Ue 690(V)
50kA/1s
masterpact II
MERLIN GERIN
Ue 690(V)
50kA/1s
masterpact II
MERLIN GERIN
Ue 690(V)
50kA/1s
D
D
3
8
3
9
1
4
.
e
p
s
Final unpacking of the equipment will preferably take place just before the
switchboard is installed, as close as possible to its fnal installation location.
As a general guideline, the weight of an average 3200 A cubicle is around 400 kg.
Cubicles should always be handled in the upright position with care, if possible
by 2 persons. There is a risk of overtipping the cubicle due to the high position of
the centre of gravity.
When moving the cubicles, always turn slowly and smoothly, avoiding all bumps and
jerks. Enclosures moved using a forklift truck must be lifted carefully and held in
position or fastened to the forklift truck using slings during transport.
Handling by the bottom
Wooden beams (or framework stabilizers) are generally attached to the base of the
cubicle framework. This allows the cubicles to be moved using a pallet mover or
forklift truck.
d The forks must be placed symmetrically with respect to the cubicle's axis so as
not to distort the base of the frame.
For cubicles ftted with a plinth, the front and rear base panels must be removed to
allow insertion of the pallet mover forks.
Cubicles must be lifted with care and held in place during transport by strapping
them onto the handling machine, especially for large distances or bumpy terrain.
For a Prisma Plus switchboard with a busbar compartment, lifting points must be
shifted towards the busbars.
D
d
3
8
1
3
3
3
.
e
p
s
Framework stabiliser.
D
D
2
1
0
5
7
3
.
e
p
s
Cubicle with base.
Handling on the site
D-102
BOOK EN.indb 102 19/10/2011 14:43:28
D
d
3
8
1
5
4
1
.
e
p
s
Handling by the top
If cranes or overhead hoists are used, only slings that are suffciently strong
and in good condition should be used.
b The slings must be attached to the 4 cubicle lifting lugs.
b Adjust the length of the slings according to the switchboard dimensions so that the
angle formed does not exceed the angle indicated below depending on the
switchboard weight. When 2 switchgear cubicles are combined, a lifting beam must
be used.
b Never tilt the cubicle during handling.
b Take care to equally distribute the load on the 4 rings.
D
D
3
8
3
9
1
5
.
e
p
s
D
D
2
1
0
5
7
4
.
e
p
s
Position of lifting rings
The lifting rings can be installed and removed without dismantling the roof.
Even with the lifting rings permanently installed, the switchboard retains its original
degree of protection.
For combined cubicles, only install lifting rings on cubicles with switchgear.
D
D
3
8
3
3
7
9
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
3
9
1
6
.
e
p
s
b Lifting several cubicles packed together
In the special case of an assembly with more than 2 cubicles, you must:
b frst of all move the assembly in its original packing as close as possible to where
it is to be installed
b use a lifting beam and slings to support the switchboard from underneath.
Handling on the site
D-103
BOOK EN.indb 103 19/10/2011 14:43:29
The cubicles must be loaded vertically (stacking strongly discouraged).
After loading, check that the equipment is frmly secured in the truck to avoid any risk
of damage during transport.
D
D
3
8
3
9
1
7
.
e
p
s
Enclosures supplied as kits should be transported horizontally if possible.
D
D
3
8
3
9
1
8
.
e
p
s
Transport
D-104
400E41000.indd 104 21/10/2011 11:04:26
Lifting reinforcement kit
b Kit 08722 is recommended for lifting combined cubicles and can be used together
with handling base end-pieces 08714 for severe transport or handling conditions.
b Catalogue number 08722 includes 3 reinforcement brackets for 400 or 600 mm
deep cubicles and the corresponding mounting hardware.
D
D
3
8
3
8
3
8
.
e
p
s
Lifting reinforcement kit for combined cubicles W = 400/600 mm 08722
08722 08722 08722
300 650 400 800 800 800
D
D
3
8
3
8
3
9
.
e
p
s
A lifting reinforcement kit should be installed every 800 mm.
50 mm high base
This type of base is designed to increase the rigidity of cubicle frameworks to avoid
any risk of deformation during transport and handling.
Five different catalogue numbers offer 27 width possibilities (1200 to 3050 mm) for
400 and 600 mm deep cubicles.
b Two catalogue numbers each include 2 end-pieces for handling bases for 400 and
600 mm deep cubicles respectively and the corresponding mounting hardware.
b Three catalogue numbers each include 2 lengths for the sides of handling bases
for 1200 to 3050 mm wide cubicles respectively and the corresponding mounting
hardware.
Handling bases can be used for both side-by-side and back-to-back cubicle
combinations.
In this case, the mounting hardware for one of the sets is used.
L
50
D
D
3
8
3
8
4
5
.
e
p
s
08714 + 08705.
D
D
3
8
3
8
4
9
.
e
p
s
2 cubicle handling base end-pieces D = 400 mm 08714
D = 600 mm 08716
2 cubicle handling base side-lengths W = 1200 to 1900 mm 08705
W = 2000 to 2550 mm 08706
W = 2650 to 3050 mm 08707
D
D
3
8
3
8
4
0
.
e
p
s
Combined cubicles equipped with a handling base can be
moved easily and safely on rollers.
08716
08705
D
D
3
8
0
6
5
2
.
e
p
s
Side-by-side and back-to-back combination of 4 cubicles equipped with a handling base.
Lifting reinforcement kit for
combined cubicles
D-105
BOOK EN.indb 105 19/10/2011 14:43:32
Prisma Plus switchboards come equipped with a special interface that allows them
to be directly connected to Canalis KT trunking.
The electrical connection between the Canalis KT trunking and the Prisma Plus
switchboard is just as easy to carry out as jointing between two busbar trunking
sections.
The Canalis KT interface is totally integrated in the Prisma Plus switchboard volume.
It comprises a Canalis KT joint block and interface/circuit breaker connection
terminals.
Trunking connection via the top
b Dismantle the roof.
b Cut out a passage for the busbar trunking.
b Adjust the guides according to the KT width that will be connected.
b Unscrew the junction block screws.
b Ensure that the busbar trunking length to be connected to the switchboard is
correctly supported and that it is not resting on the interface.
b Lower the element until it is in contact with the interface frame, without bearing on
it.
b Tighten the junction torque nuts. When the head breaks, the torque of 60 Nm has
b been reached.
d In certain cases, it is recommended to only tighten the 2 middle nuts to 60 Nm
and the 2 outer nuts to 10 Nm.
b A red plastic washer that is ejected when the head breaks provides visual
evidence that the joint tightening operation has been carried out correctly.
b For dismantling or maintenance operations, a second head is available on the nut
and can be retightened using a conventional torque wrench. The recommended
tightening torque is then 60 Nm.
b Reassemble the roof.
Sealing kit
b In order to retain the original IP index, use the roof sealing kit ordered with the
busbar trunking. This kit guarantees an IP52 degree of protection at the trunking
passage.
b The kit is installed by cutting out the roof of the Prisma Plus switchboard.
This cut-out, which is the same dimension for all Canalis KT busbar trunking ratings,
is made using the template delivered with the sealing kit.
D
D
3
8
3
9
1
9
.
e
p
s
Connection of busbar trunking
D-106
BOOK EN.indb 106 19/10/2011 14:43:33
To ensure protection of persons, frst connect the switchboard protective conductor
to the earth electrode.
b Tie the cables as close as possible to the connections to avoid any mechanical
stresses on the device terminals. When not using cable glands, also attach the
cables near to the cubicle entry point.
b Cables must never be in contact with or passed between live conductors.
b Sharp edges of the framework must be protected where cables pass to avoid
b damaging the conductors.
b Comply with a minimum radius of curvature of 6 to 8 times the cable outside
b diameter.
b All power connections must be made with class 8.8 mounting hardware and
b elastic contact washers, tightened to the torque indicated in the table below.
b When connecting aluminium cables to copper terminals, use bimetal lugs or
b interfaces.
b Separate the different types of circuits into separate cable bundles (power, control,
b 48 V, 24 V, DC, AC, etc).
Cable bundles
Cable cross-sectional area
(mm )
Max. number of cables per bundle
CSA y 10 8
16 < CSA y 50 4
CSA u 50 Tie individually
Tying the cable bundles
Type of tie Maximum Icw
(kA/rms 1s)
Distance between ties
(mm)
Width: 4.5 mm
Load: 22 kg
10
15
20
200
100
50
Width: 9 mm
Load: 80 kg
20
25
35
45
350
200
100
70
For cable sizes of 50 mm or more, use 9 mm wide fxing ties.
Recommended tightening torque for mechanical and electrical connections with
8.8 class screws.
Diameter of screw Tightening torque (Nm)
(with nut + contact washer)
M3 1,5
M4 3,5
M5 7
M6 13
M8 28
M10 50
M12 75
Connection of power cables
D-107
BOOK EN.indb 107 19/10/2011 14:43:33
D
D
3
8
3
3
8
0
.
e
p
s
Connection via the top
b Remove the roof.
b Drill the holes required to install cable glands or grommets.
b Install the cable glands or grommets. They must comply with the switchboards
degree of protection (IP).
b Reft the roof.
b Run the cables through the glands or grommets.
b Run the cables in the intended compartments and secure them to cable tie-bars
every 400 mm.
b Crimp the lugs and connect.
b When sealing does not call for cable glands or when sealing is achieved by means
of foam, cables can be routed in a rectangular cut-out in the roof.
The removable cross-member simplifes insertion of cables in the cubicle.
Connection via the bottom
Using a 2-part gland plate
b Drilling is not necessary with this type of gland plate.
b The gland plate avoids producing an induced current.
b The cables are protected by a polyurethane foam seal which provides a sealing
function.
Using a 1-part gland plate
b Remove the bottom plate.
b Drill the appropriate holes to assemble the cable glands or grommets (1-part gland
plates should not be drilled within 30 mm of the edges).
b Install the cable glands or grommets. They must comply with the required degree
of protection (IP).
b Reft the bottom plate.
b Run the cables through the glands or grommets.
b Run the cables in the intended compartments and secure them to cable tie-bars
every 400 mm.
b If cable glands are not used, it may be easier to prepare the cable terminations
outside the switchboard (e.g. lug crimping) and then to drop them inside the cubicle
having frst disassembled the bottom removable cross-member.
Covering a Masterpact incomer
For Masterpact NW/NT/NS1600b-3200 / Compact NS630b-1600
b Disassemble the cover plate to access to the device connection terminals.
b Connect the cables, respecting the required electrical clearances.
b Cut out the part of the cover disassembled in order to let the cables pass through
it, while preserving the necessary degree of protection.
D
D
2
1
0
5
8
7
.
e
p
s
D
D
3
8
3
3
7
7
.
e
p
s
D-108
BOOK EN.indb 108 19/10/2011 14:43:34
D-109
D
d
3
8
0
7
9
4
.
e
p
s
Connecting to terminal extension bars
b Check that the circuit and switchgear identifcation indications match.
b When connections are made to terminal extensions made up of several bars for
each phase, position the lugs opposite one another and insert copper spacers
between the bars.
b Comply with the minimum required electrical clearances between phases
of 14 mm (conforming with IEC 61439-1 and 2).
b Mark all nuts and the terminal extension bars with a dot of varnish after tightening
to the defned torque.
b Remove the top cross-member of the cubicle to simplify connection of the cables
to the bars.
b Tie cables of the same phase together.
Connection directly to device terminals
b When connections are made directly to the switchgear terminals, comply with the
tightening torque recommended by the device manufacturer.
b Check that the length of the screws delivered with the switchgear is compatible
with the lug thickness.
b Comply with the safety clearances around the switchgear devices, defned
by the manufacturer to ensure correct operation.
b Reft the interphase barriers and terminal shields if applicable after connection
the power cables.
b For the special case of connection with armoured cable, please consult us.
Removable upper cross-member.
400E41000.indd 109 07/11/2011 15:44:05
Schneider Electric Industries SAS
35, rue Joseph Monier
CS 30323
92506 Rueil Malmaison Cedex
France
RCS Nanterre 954 503 439
Capital social 896 313 776
www.schneider-electric.com
As standards, specifcations and designs change from time to time, please ask for confrmation of
the information given in this publication.
This document has been printed on ecological paper.
Publication: Schneider Electric Industries SAS
Design: Ameg
Photos: Schneider Electric
Printed: Altavia Connexion - made in France
03-2012 DESW016EN
A
R
T
9
6
0
0
0
3

2
0
1
2

-

S
c
h
n
e
i
d
e
r

E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c

-

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
10-31-1247
100E00000_P.indd 2 18/10/2011 13:30:40

Catalog Prisma P 2012 (En)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catalog Prisma P 2012 (En)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catalog Prisma P 2012 (En)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catalogue

You might also like